JP2019115851A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a base member from being rotated with respect to a base when a displacement member is displaced.SOLUTION: When an inertia force caused by start or stop of rotation of a liquid crystal display device 523 is acted on, a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to a direction of slide displacement generated in one pair of slide members 520 and a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to a direction of slide displacement generated in the other pair of slide members 2520 can be made the same direction (linearly symmetric direction). Because rotational inertia is not generated in a base member 400 and a cover member 420 depending on the displacement component, the base member 400 and the cover member 420 can be prevented from being rotated with respect to a back face case 300 when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 45

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with displacement members formed displaceably are known (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-014602, A

  When the displacement member is disposed on the base member and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (not known at the time of filing of the present application), the base member rotates relative to the base when the displacement member is displaced. There was a problem of being

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and provides a game machine capable of suppressing the base member from being rotated relative to the base when the displacement member is displaced. With the goal.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a base, a base member rotatably supported on the base, and a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member. The base member is provided with suppressing means for suppressing the rotation of the base member relative to the base by the inertia force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the displacement member includes one side member, another side member disposed opposite to the one side member, and the one side member and the other side member. And one side and the other side are respectively guided and slide-displaced, and the slide member is guided by the one side guided member guided to the one side member and the other side member. A side guided member, and a rotating member rotatably supported between the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion, wherein the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member The allowable state is different from the allowable state of relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, the pair of slide members includes one-side guided member and the other-side guided member of one of the slide members; One side of the other slide member A guide member and the other side the guide member is disposed in a posture to be opposed to each other.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is greater than the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. When the slide member is displaced in a substantially horizontal direction, the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned above the other side guided member in the substantially vertical direction. The rotational position of the base member relative to the base is set as follows.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the displacement member is displaced, it can be suppressed that the base member is rotated relative to the base.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to suppress the base member from being rotated relative to the base when the rotating member is rotated.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the second aspect, the rotation can be stabilized.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st wheel member in the XXa-XXa line of FIG. 17, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd wheel member in the XXb-XXb line of FIG. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front perspective view of a slide unit in the state where a liquid crystal display was arranged at a proximity position. It is a front view of a slide unit in the state where a liquid crystal display was arranged at a proximity position. It is a front perspective view of a slide unit in the state where a liquid crystal display was arranged at a separation position. It is a front view of a slide unit in the state where a liquid crystal display was arranged at a separation position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a reference figure, (b) is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. (A) is a front view schematically showing the slide mechanism in a state in which the liquid crystal display device is disposed at the separated position, and (b) is a slide mechanism in a state in which the liquid crystal display device is disposed at the close position Is a schematic front view schematically showing. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism in a 2nd embodiment typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a reference figure. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated in figure the sliding mechanism in 3rd Embodiment typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the slide rail and slide member in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism with the liquid crystal surface directed to the front side, and (b) schematically shows the slide mechanism with the decorative surface directed to the front side It is a front schematic diagram illustrated. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of the slide mechanism which shows the transition state at the time of a base member being rotated from a 1st rotation position to a 2nd rotation position. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of the slide mechanism which shows the transition state when a base member is rotated from a 2nd rotation position to a 1st rotation position. (A) is a partially expanded front perspective view of a game board in a fifth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of a game board. It is the elements expanded sectional view of the game board in the LVI-LVI line of FIG.55 (b). FIG. 57 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the gaming board taken along line LVII-LVII in FIG. 56 (b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the channel | path member in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a partial expanded sectional view of the channel | path member in 7th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the channel | path member in the LIXb-LIXb line | wire of Fig.59 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the channel | path member in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen in the 1st control example as a 9th embodiment, and (b) is an actual display screen in the 1st control example. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows control of the display area in a 1st control example, (b) is a figure which shows the presentation in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in the example of 1st control. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in the example of 1st control. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in the example of 1st control. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in the example of 1st control. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the inversion operation | movement of the slide member in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the decoration surface of the slide member in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in the example of 1st control. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display control in a 1st control example. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the jackpot type in the first symbol type counter C2 and the special symbol And (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a jackpot variation pattern table, and (c) is a schematic view It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of RAM of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the over prize table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the over winning table, (c) is a sign over It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the prize table typically, (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the loose over prize table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the ending table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the hitting end table, (c) is a precursor ending table It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically, and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the detachment | ending ending table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the sub liquid crystal drive scenario, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the slide drive scenario, and (c) is a rotational drive It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the scenario typically, (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the inversion drive scenario typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a configuration of a drive data storage area. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the over winning processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp edit process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal drive processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the stop classification command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot-related command processing for display performed by MPU in a display control. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the round number command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the normal winning a prize presentation command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing the over winning prize effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . (A) is a flowchart which shows the back surface image change command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the error command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the sub symbol setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transmission setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing correction | amendment processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example as a 10th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the internal structure of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in the example of a 2nd control. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the decoration surface of the slide member in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution motor setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot related processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game method alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display apparatus of the pachinko machine in the example of 3rd control. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example as 11th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the sub liquid crystal drive scenario in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the mirror effect drive scenario in the third control example FIG. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd example of a control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mirror production setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example as 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game clocking process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. FIG. 159 (a) is a front view of the liquid crystal display device in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 159 (b) is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a liquid crystal display device. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a liquid crystal display device. It is an exploded view of a liquid crystal display. (A) is a top view of an electrically-conductive member, (b) is sectional drawing of the electrically-conductive member in the CLXIIIb-CLXIIIb line | wire of FIG. 163 (a). (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is sectional drawing of the board | substrate member in the CLXIVb-CLXIVb line | wire of FIG. 164 (a). It is a rear view of a liquid crystal display. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display taken along line CLXVIa-CLXVIa in FIG. 165, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display taken along line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. 165, (c) is a view It is an expanded sectional view of a liquid crystal display in range LXVIIIc of 166 (b). Ru. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a liquid crystal display device. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 169 (a) is a top view of the conductive member in the fourteenth embodiment, (b) is a side view of the conductive member in the direction of the arrow CLXIXb of FIG. 169 (a), and FIG. It is a side view of the electrically-conductive member in the arrow CLXIXc direction view of 169. FIG. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a liquid crystal display device. (A) is a top view of the electrically-conductive member in 15th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the electrically-conductive member in the arrow CLXXIb direction view of Fig.171 (a). FIG. 172 (a) is a top view of the conductive member in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the conductive member in the direction of the arrow CLXXIIb of FIG. 172 (a). FIG. 173 (a) is a top view of the conductive member in the seventeenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 173 (a). (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a liquid crystal display device. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a liquid crystal display device. (A) is a top view of the electrically conductive member in 18th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the electrically conductive member in the CLXXVIb-CLXXVIb line | wire of Fig.176 (a). FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the substrate member in the nineteenth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177 (a). (A) is a top view of a electrically conductive member, (b) is sectional drawing of the electrically conductive member in the CLXXVIIIb-CLXXVIIIb line | wire of FIG. 178 (a). (A) And (b) is a schematic cross section of a conductive member. FIG. 180 (a) is a front view of a substrate member in a twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 180 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member taken along line CLXXXb-CLXXXb in FIG. 180 (a). (A) is a top view of a conductive member, (b) is sectional drawing of the conductive member in the CLXXXIb-CLXXXIb line | wire of FIG. 181 (a). (A) And (b) is a schematic cross section of a conductive member.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface on the left side thereof. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61 and 62. The first opening 63, the second opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1) Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by tapping screw etc. from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  The probability change of the second symbol not only increases during a definite change or time, but also the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed, and a longer time than normal It is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized role thing 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during a definite change or during a short time, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric operation per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is opened at a time and once when the electric symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is open or the number of times the electric combination 640a is opened per hit does not occur during a certain change or during a short time, and the second symbol is hit Only the probability may be changed to be up relative to normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the definite change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the open probability and increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized combination 640a per hit, which increases the hit probability during definite change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right of the game board can pass Is configured. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” is easily displayed, and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Launch the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and the winning of the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery and becomes a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second winning hole 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the motor gate is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning in the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided substantially at the center. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  A second variable winning device 82a is disposed on the upper left of the first winning opening 64, and a second specified winning opening 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduction state), and the ball can not win into the second specified winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is opened (expanded) at a specific jackpot (for example, 15R probability variation jackpot), a special gaming state in which the ball easily wins the second specified winning opening 82 Can.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball flowing down the game area, which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, is guided to the ball discharging passage (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 14. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. 7 to 14 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. In FIGS. 5 to 14, the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back of the back case 300 is not shown.

  Here, in FIGS. 7 to 10, the state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotational position is illustrated, and in FIGS. 11 to 14, the state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotational position is illustrated. Ru.

  In this case, in FIGS. 7 and 11, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed in the close position with the display surface 523a facing front, in FIGS. 8 and 12 the posture with the display surface 523a front The state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 9 and 13, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed in the close position with the decorative surface 523b facing front, in FIGS. 10 and 14, the decorative surface 523b is facing front The state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and the slide unit SL is rotatably accommodated in the inner space of the rear case 300.

  The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 to the front, and the respective wall portions 301 and 302 It forms in the box shape which one side (front side) was open | released. In the bottom wall portion 301, an opening 301a is formed at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a. .

  The slide unit SL includes a base member 400 rotatably supported by the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a slide mechanism 500 disposed on the front side of the base member 400. The slide mechanism 500 includes a pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 formed slidably displaceable in directions approaching or separating from each other. Note that the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 has a speed or displacement timing (displacement start or displacement stop) of their displacement (rotation with the rotation shaft 523c as the rotation center and slide displacement accompanying the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510). Are set (controlled) to be identical to each other.

  The base member 400 is formed so as to be rotatable between a first rotational position and a second rotational position different in phase by approximately 90 degrees from the first rotational position. In the first rotation position, the slide displacement direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is the vertical direction (vertical direction) (see FIGS. 7 to 10), and in the second rotation position, the slide displacement direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 Is the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

  The liquid crystal display device 523 is formed as a liquid crystal display for displaying symbols and the like, and is rotatably supported so that its display surface 523a faces the front (see FIGS. 7, 8, 11 and 12). And a posture (see FIGS. 9, 10, 13 and 14) in which the decorative surface 523b on the back side of the display surface 523a is directed to the front.

  When the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 is slide-displaced in the direction to approach each other and disposed at the close position, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 is disposed on the front of the third symbol display device 81, thereby the third symbol When the display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visible (see FIGS. 7, 9, 11, and 13), the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 is slidingly displaced in the direction away from each other and arranged at the separated position, The pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 is retracted vertically or horizontally from the front of the third symbol display device 81, whereby the third symbol display device 81 can be viewed (FIGS. 8, 10, 12, and 14).

  Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit SL will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 43. First, the configuration for rotatably supporting the base member 400 of the slide unit SL with respect to the rear case 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23.

  FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of back case 300 and slide unit SL, and FIG. 16 is an exploded back perspective view of back case 300 and slide unit SL. 17 to 19 are front views of the back case 300 and the base member 400.

  The state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotational position in FIG. 17 and the base member 400 to the second rotational position in FIG. 19 is illustrated, and in FIG. The transition state as it is rotated from one rotational position to a second rotational position or vice versa is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 15-19, the rear case 300 includes a rotational drive mechanism for applying rotational drive force to the base member 400, a first wheel member 321 for rotatably supporting the base member 400, and A second wheel member 322 and covering members 331 to 334 for holding the wheel members 321 and 322 are provided.

  The rotational drive mechanism includes a drive motor 311, a pinion gear 312 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 311, and a leading gear (first transmission gear 313a) engaged with the pinion gear 312 and a trailing gear (first The third transmission gear 313 c) includes a transmission gear train engaged with the gear portion 403 of the base member 400, and is disposed at the upper right of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 in a front view. A second transmission gear 313b is interposed between the first transmission gear 313a and the third transmission gear 313c.

  The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are disk-shaped members rotatably supported by a shaft 303 provided upright from the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the outer peripheral edge of the base member 400 The plurality is disposed at predetermined intervals along the line. In the front view shown in FIG. 17, the first wheel member 321 is at two places below the base member 400, and the second wheel member 322 is at two places above the base member 400 and two places on the left and right, It is arranged respectively. Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the detailed configuration of each of the wheel members 321 and 322 will be described.

  20 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first wheel member 321 taken along line XXa-XXa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second wheel member 322 taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), a brass shaft 303 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300 in a posture in which it protrudes toward the front side, In the bottom wall portion 301, a first concave portion 301 b 1 and a second concave portion 301 b 2 which are circular in a front view and concentric with the shaft 303 are recessed around the circumference 303.

  The first recess 301 b 1 and the second recess 301 b 2 are recesses for receiving and accommodating the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 rotatably supported by the shaft 303, and the inner diameter of the second recess 301 b 2 is , And is set to a size smaller than the outer diameter of the first wheel member 321 and larger than the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322. Thereby, the assembly | attachment mistake of the 1st wheel member 321 to 2nd recessed part 301b2 can be suppressed.

  The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are formed as members having an H-shaped cross section in which circumferentially continuous U-shaped grooves 321a and 322a continuous in the circumferential direction are recessed in the outer peripheral surface, and the grooves 321a and 322a The outer edge (flange portion 402) of the member 400 is inserted. Thus, while restricting the displacement of the base member 300 in the radial direction (the downward direction in FIG. 20A) and in the front-rear direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 20A), the base member 400 is rotatably supported on the back surface base 300. it can.

  The first wheel member 321 is formed as a ball bearing in which a plurality of spheres are disposed between the inner ring portion held by the shaft 303 and the outer ring in which the groove 321a is recessed. Thus, the durability of the first wheel member 321 supporting the load of the base member 400 can be ensured, and the output required of the drive motor 311 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the second wheel member 322, the outside diameter of the wall portion positioned on the front side (left side in FIG. 20B) of the pair of wall portions facing each other across the groove 322a is larger than the inside diameter of the recess 301b2. Be done. That is, in the second wheel member 322, the outer diameter of the front wall portion is larger than that of the rear wall portion. Thereby, the rigidity of the 2nd wheel member 322 is securable, the durability improvement can be aimed at, suppressing the mistake of the attachment direction to the axis | shaft 303 of the 2nd wheel member 322.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the slide mechanism 500 with relatively heavy weight is disposed on the front side of the base member 400, and the upper side of the base member 400 that receives the weight of the slide mechanism 500 is inclined forward. Since the second wheel member 322 is disposed above and to the left and right of the base member 400 (see FIG. 17), the outer diameter of the front wall of the second wheel member 322 is large as described above. The configuration described above is particularly effective for suppressing the forward tilting posture of the base member 400 and improving the durability of the second wheel member 322.

  Referring back to FIG. 15 to FIG. The covering members 331 to 334 are formed in a shape obtained by dividing a rectangular plate-like body having a circular opening at the center into four parts in the top, bottom, left, and right, and is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. . As a result, the covering members 331 to 334 are provided on the front side of the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322, and the wheel members 321 and 322 are restricted from coming off the shaft 303.

  The base member 400 is a member formed in a disk shape having a substantially rectangular opening 401 in a front view formed at the center and formed into a flange shape along the outer edge, and the first wheel member 321 and the second The flange portion 402 is inserted into the grooves 321a and 322a of the wheel member 322, and the end gear of the transmission gear train of the rotational drive mechanism is curved on the front side and curved like a circular arc along the circumferential direction (third transmission And a gear portion 403 with which the gear 313c is engaged.

  Thus, for example, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the positive direction from the state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotational position shown in FIG. 17, the rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear train via the pinion gear 312. The rotation of the last gear (third transmission gear 313c) of the transmission gear train is transmitted to the gear portion 403, and the base member 400 is rotated clockwise in a front view (right rotation direction in FIG. 17). When the drive motor 311 is further rotated in the forward direction, the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotational position shown in FIG. 19 through the state shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotational position shown in FIG. 19, the rotation of the last gear (third transmission gear 313c) of the transmission gear train is By being transmitted to the gear portion 403, the base member 400 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view (left rotation direction in FIG. 19), and is disposed at the first rotation position shown in FIG. Ru.

  In this case, the weight of the base member 400 is supported by the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 being mainly in contact with the groove bottom of the groove 321 a of the first wheel member 321. That is, since it is supported by rolling contact of the circumferential surfaces of the outer circumferential surface of the flange portion 402 and the outer circumferential surface of the groove bottom of the groove 321a, the contact surface is minimized and supported with little friction. Thus, the output of the drive motor 311 required to rotationally drive the base member 400 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the slide mechanism 500 is provided (fixed) on the front side of the base member 400, as described above, the base member 400 has the first rotational position and the second rotational position with respect to the rear case 300. When it is rotated between them, the slide mechanism 500 is rotated along with this rotation, as shown in FIG. 21 to FIG. 21 to 23 are front views of the back case 300 and the slide unit SL, FIG. 21 corresponds to FIG. 17, FIG. 22 corresponds to FIG. 18, and FIG. 23 corresponds to FIG.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the slide mechanism 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 43. FIGS. 24 and 25 are a front perspective view and a front view of the slide unit SL in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged in the proximity position, and FIGS. 26 and 27 show the liquid crystal display device 523 arranged in the separated position. It is a front perspective view and front view of slide unit SL in the state where FIG. 28 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit SL, and FIG. 29 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit SL.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, the slide unit SL includes a base member 400, a cover member 420 disposed on the front side of the base member 400, and a slide rail disposed on the front side of the cover member 420. Main components are: 510, a slide member 520 disposed on the slide rail 510, and a slide drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the slide member 520 for sliding displacement.

  The cover member 420 is a member formed in a disk shape in which an opening 421 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view is formed at the center. The opening 421 of the cover member 420 is formed in substantially the same shape as the opening 401 of the base member 400, and the cover member 420 is disposed on the front side of the base member 400 in a phase (rotational position) where the shapes of the openings 401 and 421 overlap each other. Are placed (fixed).

  The space formed by the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 is also used as a space for rotating the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520. That is, in the state where the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520 is disposed at the close position, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at a position overlapping the openings 401 and 421 in front view, and can be rotated without interfering with the cover member 420.

  Here, the detailed configuration of the slide drive mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35 in addition to FIGS. 28 and 29. 30, 32, and 34 are front views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism, and FIGS. 31, 33, and 35 are rear views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism.

  In FIGS. 30 and 31, the state in which the transmission arm 437 is disposed at the inward projecting position, which is a position for arranging the slide member 520 in the close position, separates the slide member 520 in FIGS. In FIG. 32 and FIG. 32, the transmission arm 437 is rotated from the inward projecting position to the outward reversing position or vice versa in the state in which the transferring arm 437 is disposed at the outward reversing position which is a position for positioning. Transition states at the same time are illustrated respectively. 30 to 35 illustrate the positional relationship with the transfer arm 437, and the connection frame 524 of the slide member 520 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line to facilitate understanding.

  The slide mechanism 500 of the present embodiment is provided with a pair of slide members 520 and a pair of slide drive mechanisms for slidingly driving the slide members 520, respectively. Since they are configured identically, both will be given the same reference numerals and only one will be described and the other description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the slide drive mechanism includes a drive motor 431 disposed on the front side of the cover member 420, a pinion gear 432 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 431, and the pinion gear 432. The transmission gear 433 to be engaged, the rack gear 434a on which the transmission gear 433 is engaged are engraved on the outer peripheral side, and the rack member 434 formed in a curved plate shape and the inner peripheral side of the rack member 434 The transmission gear 435 meshed with the rack gear 434b engraved on the side, the pair of arm drive gears 436 rotated in the opposite direction to each other by the transmission gear 435, and the base end side is fixed to the pair of arm drive gears 436 And a pair of transfer arms 437.

  Therefore, for example, from the state in which the transmission arm 437 is disposed at the inward projecting position (the position where the tip end side is directed to the opening 421 side of the cover member 420) shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the drive motor 431 rotates in the forward direction. When the rotation is transmitted to the rack gear 434 a of the rack member 434 via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

  When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434 b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are respectively rotated to transmit a pair of transmissions. The arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions about their proximal ends.

  When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the forward direction, the pair of transfer arms 437 pass through the states shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, and then the outward reverse position (approximately 180 degrees from the inward reverse position) shown in FIGS. And the tip end of the cover member 420 is arranged to face the opening 421 of the cover member 420).

  On the other hand, from the state in which the transmission arm 437 is disposed at the outward reverse position shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the drive motor 431 is rotated in the reverse direction, and the rotation is via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433 to the rack member 434. The rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420 when it is transmitted to the rack gear 434 a.

  When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434 b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are respectively rotated to transmit a pair of transmissions. The arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions about their proximal ends. When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the reverse direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 are disposed at the inward reverse position shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 through the states shown in FIGS. 32 and 33.

  As described later, the distal end side of the transfer arm 437 is slidably connected to the slide groove 524a in the connection frame 524 of the slide member 520, and the transfer arm 437 is rotated about the proximal end side. The inner surface of the slide groove 524a in the connection frame 524 of the slide member 520 is pushed and pulled by the distal end side of the transmission arm 437, and the slide member 520 is slid and displaced (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

  In this case, in the configuration in which the rotational driving force of the drive motor 431 is converted to the slide displacement of the slide member 520 using a linear rack member extended along the slide direction of the slide member 520, When the slide displacement amount is secured, the linear rack member does not fit within the circular outer shape of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 and interferes with the rear case 300 (the outer wall portion 302). It can not be rotated against.

  When the linear rack member is accommodated within the circular outer shape of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 in order to allow the base member 400 to rotate relative to the rear case 300, the amount of sliding displacement of the slide member 520 becomes short. In addition, the linear rack member is visibly exposed from the player through the opening 421 and the appearance is impaired.

  On the other hand, a structure is also conceivable in which the arm drive gear 436 is directly driven by the pinion gear 432 of the drive motor 431. In this case, the arrangement position of the drive motor 431 overlaps the movement trajectory of the slide displacement of the slide member 520. The slide displacement amount of the member 520 is shortened.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rack member 434 curved in an arc shape is disposed along the circumferential direction on the outer edge side of the cover member 420 (outside the opening 421) to rotate the drive motor 431 as the rack member 434. Of the base member 400 with respect to the rear case 300 while securing the amount of slide displacement of the slide member 520 because the transfer arm 437 is rotated. Thus, it is possible to improve the appearance by avoiding the exposure of the rack member 434 from the opening 421. Further, since the drive motor 431 can be disposed outside (both sides) of the track of the slide displacement of the slide member 520, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 can be secured also from this point.

  Referring back to FIG. 24 to FIG. The slide rail 510 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism interposed between the cover member 420 and the slide member 520, and the slide member 520 is extended relative to the cover member 420 by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510. Slide is displaced. In the present embodiment, the slide rail 510 is in a posture in which two pairs have different expansion and contraction directions (that is, they differ in phase by 180 °), with one pair supporting the both ends of the slide member 520 as one pair. It is arranged oppositely.

  Here, the detailed configuration of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are exploded back perspective views of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520. In FIGS. 36 to 38, the transfer arm 437 is illustrated for ease of understanding.

  In the present embodiment, two sets of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 are disposed, and in these two sets, the opposing distance between the pair of slide rails 510 in one set is the pair of slides in the other set. Since they are configured in substantially the same manner except that they are smaller than the facing distance of the rails 510, the two will be denoted by the same reference numerals and only one will be described, and the other description will be omitted. Note that, by providing a difference in the facing intervals described above, one set of slide rails 510 can be disposed between the other set of slide rails 510.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the slide rail 510 is connected to the proximal rail 511 disposed on the front surface of the cover member 420 and to the front side of the proximal rail 511 such that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible. An intermediate rail 512, and a tip rail 513 connected for relative displacement in the longitudinal direction on the front side of the intermediate rail 512. That is, the proximal rail 511 and the distal rail 513 can be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction via the intermediate rail 512.

  The slide member 520 includes the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522 on which the end rails 512 of the pair of slide rails 510 are disposed on the back side, and the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided A liquid crystal display device 523 rotatably supported between the members 522, a connecting frame 524 connecting the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522, and a liquid crystal display device 523 arranged on the connecting frame 524 And an opposing member 525 disposed opposite to each other.

  The one side guided member 521 is divided into a rail side member 521a on which the end rail 513 of the slide rail 510 is disposed, and a liquid crystal side member 521b rotatably supporting the liquid crystal display device 523. The reference numeral 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b are connected so as to be capable of relative displacement.

  In detail, while the insertion hole 521a1 of a cross-sectional circular is drilled by two places of the rail side member 521a, the column-shaped insertion pin 521b1 each penetrated by these two insertion holes 521a1 is a pair from the liquid crystal side member 521b. It is provided in a projecting manner. The interaxial distance between the insertion holes 521a1 is equal to the interaxial distance between the insertion pins 521b1, and the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 521b1.

  In this case, the axial direction of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1 is orthogonal to the slide direction of the slide rail 510 and parallel to the slide plane of the slide rail 510. Therefore, a predetermined gap is formed over the entire circumference between the insertion hole 521 a 1 and the insertion pin 521 b 1, and both may be displaced relative to each other in any direction (a direction perpendicular to the both) by the gap. it can.

  A washer W having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the insertion pin 521b1, and the insertion pin 521b1 is prevented from coming off from the insertion hole 521a1.

  In this case, the thickness dimension of the plate-like portion in which the insertion hole 521a1 of the rail side member 521a is drilled is set smaller than the protruding dimension of the insertion pin 521b1. Thus, the rail side member 521a can be displaced relative to the liquid crystal side member 521b also in the direction along the axial direction of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to form the liquid crystal side member 521b and the liquid crystal display device 523 in an inclined posture with respect to the rail side member 521a, with the other side guided member 522 side as a fulcrum. For example, with respect to the rail side member 521a, the liquid crystal side member 521b precedes in the direction of slide displacement, and the distance between them increases on the front side in the direction of slide displacement (decreases on the rear side in the direction of slide displacement) Relative displacement in form is acceptable. Thereby, as described later, it is possible to easily suppress the sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 due to the inertial force at the time of rotational driving of the liquid crystal display device 523.

  The liquid crystal display device 523 is a plate-like member having a rectangular shape in a front view, and as described above, is formed as a liquid crystal display, and one side is a display surface 523a capable of displaying a symbol etc. The other side to be is a decorative surface 523b decorated.

  In this case, in the liquid crystal display device 523, cylindrical rotary shafts 523c are provided so as to protrude from both ends in the longitudinal direction, and each rotary shaft 523c is one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member It is rotatably supported by the axial support holes 521b and 522c of 522, respectively. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotatably supported by the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522 via the rotation shaft 523c and the shaft support holes 521b and 522c, and the display surface 523a is rotated by the rotation. Can be formed with the attitude toward the front side (the player side) and the attitude with the decorative surface 523b facing the front side.

  The axial center of the rotation shaft 523 c is disposed at the center in the width direction and at the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. In this case, in the liquid crystal display device 523, since the liquid crystal display is disposed, the display surface 523 a side is heavier than the decoration surface 523 b side. Further, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically positioned at least on the display surface 523a side from the axial center of the rotation shaft 523c due to the components of the liquid crystal display and the asymmetric shape of the decorative surface 523b. Therefore, an inertial force is likely to be generated as the liquid crystal display device 523 starts or stops rotating.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven by a rotation drive mechanism provided on the liquid crystal side member 521 b of the one side guided member 521. The rotational drive mechanism is engaged with a drive motor 531, a pinion gear 532 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 531, a first gear 533 engaged with the pinion gear 532, and the first gear 533. And a second gear 534 fixed to the liquid crystal display device 523. The rotational driving force of the drive motor 531 is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 523 via the gears 532 to 534 to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523. .

  The rotational drive mechanism sets (controls) the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 such that their displacement (rotation) speed and displacement (rotation) timing (rotation start or rotation stop) are identical to each other. Be done.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation axis of the liquid crystal display device 523 is set at the width direction center and the thickness direction center of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 523 and the opposing member 525 is constant even when the liquid crystal display device 523 is in a posture in which either the display surface 523a or the decorative surface 523b is directed to the front.

  A sliding groove 524a linearly extending in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the slide rail 510 is bored in the connecting frame 524, and the distal end side of the transmission arm 437 slides in the sliding groove 524a. It is inserted as much as possible. The connection frame 524 is disposed on the one side guided member 521 (the liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member 522, so the transmission arm 437 is rotated by the slide drive mechanism described above, and the leading end side thereof is a sliding groove. When slid along 524a, the entire slide member 520 is slid.

  The connecting frame 524 connects the one side guided member 521 (the liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member 522, whereby the whole of the liquid crystal side member 521b, the liquid crystal display device 523 and the other side member 522 is completed. Can increase the rigidity. Thus, the facing distance between the liquid crystal side member 521 b and the other side member 522 can be easily maintained constant, and the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated smoothly. Further, as described later, it is possible to easily suppress the sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 due to the inertial force at the time of the rotational drive of the liquid crystal display device 523.

  The opposing member 525 is a plate-like member erected from the front of the connecting frame, and has a predetermined distance (a surface connecting the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b) of the liquid crystal display device 523 (the liquid crystal display device 523). They are arranged opposite to each other at an interval allowing rotation. Further, a plurality of LEDs (rendering means) are disposed on the facing member 525, and are formed so as to be capable of emitting light toward the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the LED and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523 from between the facing member 525 and the liquid crystal display device 523 and the opposite side.

  The structure in which the slide member 520 configured in this way is slidingly displaced by the slide drive mechanism (transmission arm 437) will be described. 39 (a), 40 (a) and 41 (a) are front views of the slide member 520, and FIGS. 39 (b), 40 (b) and 41 (b) are slide members 520. It is a rear view of.

  In FIG. 39, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the close position, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separation position in FIG. The transition states as they are slidingly displaced to the separated position or vice versa are respectively illustrated. Further, FIG. 39 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, FIG. 40 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, and FIG. 41 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS.

  Here, as described above, in the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523, the speed of the displacement (slide displacement accompanying the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) and the timing of the displacement (displacement start or displacement stop) become identical to each other Is set (controlled). Therefore, only one liquid crystal display device 523 will be described, and the description of the other liquid crystal display device 523 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 39, when the pair of transfer arms 437 are arranged in the inward projecting position (see FIGS. 30 and 31), the slide rail 510 is shortened, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is in the proximity position. Will be placed. When the pair of transfer arms 437 are rotated in the opposite direction with respect to the proximal end side from this state, the distal end side of the transfer arm 437 slides along the slide groove 524 a of the connection frame 524 to achieve liquid crystal display. The device 523 is slidingly displaced in the direction in which the slide rail 510 is extended.

  When the pair of transfer arms 437 are further rotated and the pair of transfer arms 437 are disposed at the outward reverse position as shown in FIG. 41 through the state shown in FIG. 40 (see FIGS. 34 and 35) The slide rail 510 is in an extended state, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position.

  On the other hand, when the pair of transfer arms 437 are rotated in the opposite direction to that described above from the state shown in FIG. 41, the tip end of the transfer arm 437 slides along the slide groove 524 a of the connecting frame 524. The liquid crystal display device 523 is slidingly displaced in the direction of shortening the slide rail 510. When the pair of transfer arms 437 are further rotated and the pair of transfer arms 437 are disposed in the inward projecting position as shown in FIG. 39 through the state shown in FIG. 40, the slide rail 510 is shortened. The liquid crystal display device 523 is placed in the close position.

  FIG. 42 (a) is a reference view, and FIG. 42 (b) is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500.

  In the present embodiment, the one side guided member 521 is composed of two parts of the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b, and they are connected so as to be capable of relative displacement. In the structure shown as (hereinafter referred to as "reference structure"), the one side guided member X is formed as an integral part (one part). The other configuration of the reference structure is the same as that of the present embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the slide member 520 is formed so as to be slide-displaceable by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510, and the slide member 520 includes the one guided member 521 and the other guided member 522, and the rotation between them. It is formed of a liquid crystal display device 523 pivotally supported. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated as well as slide displacement, and variations in the rendering operation can be increased. That is, not only the display surface 523a of the liquid crystal display device 523 but also the decoration surface 523b can be viewed by the player.

  However, in this case, in the reference structure shown in FIG. 42A, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated with respect to the one side guided member X and the other side guided member 522, the rotation is started or stopped. The accompanying inertial force becomes parallel to the direction of slide displacement, and the slide member (one-side guided member X, the other-side guided member 522, and the liquid crystal display device 523) on which the inertial force acts acts on the slide rail 510. , It will slide. That is, it is difficult to only rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 while keeping the liquid crystal display device 523 stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 42A).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the one side guided member 521 is formed of the two components of the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b, and the both members 521a and 521b are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. The allowable amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (the right side in FIG. 42B) disposed on the side guided member 521 and the side disposed on the other side guided member 522 (FIG. The tolerance of the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 of FIG.

  Thus, when an inertial force is applied to start or stop the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521 b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 is moved to the other side The liquid crystal display device 523 can have a displacement component in a direction (left direction in FIG. 42 (b)) orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 42 (b)). . Therefore, a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be used as a force (a braking force) to press the slide rail 510 (that is, the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510 can be restricted). The sliding displacement of 520 can be suppressed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 42B).

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (right side in FIG. 42B) disposed on the one side guided member 521 is arranged on the other side guided member 522 One side guided member 521 in a form in which the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (left side in FIG. 42B) The rotary drive means (drive motor 531 and gears 532 to 534) are disposed on the liquid crystal side member 521b (see FIG. 38). That is, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side guided member 522 side.

  Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (a braking force) to press the slide rail 510, the rotational drive mechanism (the drive motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534) The rotational inertia (weight) of can be used to increase the pressing force. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement.

  In the present embodiment, the drive motor 531 of the rotational drive mechanism is disposed with the drive shaft directed to the liquid crystal display 523 side and the main body portion directed to the direction away from the liquid crystal display 523. The barycentric position of the drive motor 531 can be disposed at a position farther from the other side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a locus farther from the other side displaced member 522.

  Thereby, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (a braking force) to press the slide rail 510, the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 can be more easily utilized, The pressing force can be increased. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement.

  FIG. 43 (a) is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 in a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position, and FIG. 43 (b) is a liquid crystal display device 523 in the proximity position. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated in figure the slide mechanism 500 in the arrange | positioned state typically.

  Here, in the reference structure described above (see FIG. 42A), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are slidingly displaced in the direction in which the liquid crystal display devices approach each other and arranged at the proximity position, both abut each other at the proximity position without a gap. Then, the load of the slide drive mechanism (the drive motor 431 and the gears 432 and 433 and the like, see FIG. 31) for slidingly displacing the liquid crystal display devices 523 becomes large, which causes them to be damaged.

  On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allowance is given to the position at which the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped in anticipation of dimensional tolerance, assembly tolerance or control tolerance. Setting a sufficient gap between the two) so that the two do not touch), the gap becomes large (the display of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side from the gap is visually recognized by the player), appearance (rendering effect) Cause aggravation of

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the one side guided member 521 is formed of the two components of the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b, and the two members 521a and 521b are relatively displaced. While being able to connect, the slide members 520 formed in this way are disposed facing each other in an alternate posture. That is, one guided member 521 in one slide member 520 is the other guided member 522 in the other slide member 520, and the other guided member 522 in one slide member 520 is the one side in the other slide member 520. The guided members 521 are disposed to face each other.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are abutted against each other at the close position, the one slide member 520 is slid. By relatively displacing the side guided member 521 (the liquid crystal side member 521b retracts with respect to the rail side member 521a), the other side guided member 522 in the other (the other and the other) slide member 520 can be received. (One and the other liquid crystal display device 523 can be inclined with respect to the direction of the slide displacement, respectively).

  Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display devices 523 abut on each other at a close position, damage to the slide drive mechanism (the drive motor 431 and the gears 432 and 433 etc.) can be suppressed. It can be set to position. As a result, at the close position, the liquid crystal display devices 523 can be brought close to each other in a state where the gap between them is smaller, and the appearance (rendering effect) can be improved accordingly.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the other-side guided member 522 is provided with the detected portion, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion is provided on the cover member 420, and the detected portion Is detected by the detection sensor, and it is detected that the slide member 520 has been slid to a predetermined position. Therefore, even when the attitude of the liquid crystal display device 523 changes, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the detection target member with respect to the cover member 420 (detection sensor). As a result, the position of the slide displacement of the slide member 520 can be detected more accurately.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 47. In the first embodiment, the slide mechanism 500 includes two sets of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 supported by the slide rail 510 (ie, the two sets have substantially the same configuration as each other), Although the case where two sets were mutually opposingly arranged by the attitude | position (namely, 180 degrees of which made the phase differ) which mutually opposed was demonstrated, the slide mechanism 2500 in 2nd Embodiment is the slide member 520 and slide member of a mutually different structure. 2520 is provided, and the slide members 520 and 2520 are disposed to face each other in a facing posture. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 44 and FIG. 45 are schematic front views schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a reference view, and is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment. In FIG. 44, the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position in FIG. 45 in which the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position. In addition, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the close position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, on the front side of the cover member 420, as in the case of the first embodiment, the two sets of slide rails 510 differ in their expansion and contraction directions from one another (ie, 180 in phase) It is arranged oppositely at different postures.

  In this case, in the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, the slide member 520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 in one set (the upper side in FIGS. 44 and 45) as in the first embodiment. The slide member 2520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 of the other set (the lower side in FIGS. 44 and 45).

  With respect to the slide member 520, in the slide member 2520, the arrangement positions of the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 with respect to the liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed. Therefore, one guided member 521 in the slide member 520 of one set is one guided member 521 in the slide member 2520 of the other set, and the other guided member 522 in the slide member 520 of the one set is The other guide member 522 in the other set of slide members 2520 is disposed opposite to each other.

  That is, in the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment, the slide displacement of the slide member 520 of one set and the slide displacement of the other set are the slide displacements of both members 520 and 2520 in plan view shown in FIGS. Is disposed in line-symmetrical posture with respect to a virtual line located at the center in the direction of and perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 46, in the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment, as described above, two pairs having substantially the same configuration face each other (that is, the phases are different by 180 °). Since the one side guided member 521 in the slide member 520 of one set is oppositely arranged in the posture, the other side guided member 522 in the slide member 2520 of the other set and the other side in the slide member 520 of one set The guided member 522 is disposed opposite to the one guided member 521 of the other set of slide members 2520, respectively.

  That is, in the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment, the slide member 520 of one set and the slide member 520 of the other set are at the center in the direction of slide displacement of both members 520 in a plan view shown in FIG. And arranged in a point-symmetrical posture with respect to a virtual point located at the center in the direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement (ie, the rotation center of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the back case 300). Ru.

  Therefore, in the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment, when an inertial force is applied along with the start of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 or the stop of the rotation, the direction is orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement generated in one set of slide members 520. The displacement component in the direction of movement and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 520 are in a staggered orientation (point-symmetrical orientation, and the base member 400 and the cover member 420 The base member 400 and the cover member 420 are rotated relative to the rear case 300 in the direction of arrow R in FIG. That is, it is difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 while stopping the base member 400 and the cover member 420 at predetermined rotational positions with respect to the rear case 300.

  On the other hand, according to the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, one set of slides The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the member 520 and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 2520 have the same direction (axisymmetric orientation Can be

  Therefore, since rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 depending on the displacement component, the base member 400 and the cover member 420 can be prevented from being rotated with respect to the back case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the rear case 300.

  FIG. 47 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500, in which the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotational position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the proximate position.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, in the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position (see FIG. 45), one set of the guided member 521 in the slide member 520 of one set and the other set One side guided member 521 in the slide member 2520 is disposed on the right side in front view.

  In this case, the second rotational position of the base member 400 is a position rotated 90 ° clockwise (clockwise) in a front view from the first rotational position (see FIGS. 17 to 19 and 21 to 23). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, in a state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotational position (ie, in a state where the direction of slide displacement of the slide members 520 and 2520 is horizontal (in the horizontal direction in FIG. 47)) Arranging one guided member 521 in one set of slide members 520 and one guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 2520 on the lower side in the front view (vertically lower side) Can.

  Thereby, in a state where base member 400 is arranged at the second rotational position shown in FIG. 47, when an inertial force is applied when the slide displacement of liquid crystal display device 523 is started or the slide displacement is stopped, the slide displacement is generated. Component in the direction orthogonal to the direction (a displacement component in the direction of pressing the slide members 520 and 2520 against the slide rail 510 (which restricts the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510)) vertically upward (opposite to the gravity direction, 47 upward direction).

  As a result, when sliding the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) in the horizontal direction, the action of gravity is canceled or reduced by the displacement component in the direction described above, and the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity. As a result, the output of the drive motor 431 (see FIGS. 28 and 29) required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, wear of the slide rail 510 due to slide displacement can be suppressed.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the second embodiment, one side guided member 521 is the other side guided member 522 in a state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotational position (a state where the slide members 520 and 2520 are slid in the horizontal direction). Although the case where it arrange | positions on the perpendicular direction lower side rather than was demonstrated, the one side guided member 521 of 3rd Embodiment is arrange | positioned vertically higher than the other side guided member 522. FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  48 and 49 are schematic front views schematically showing the slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment. In FIG. 48, the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position, and the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position. In addition, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the close position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment is formed by rotating the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment by 180 °. That is, contrary to the case of the second embodiment, the slide member 2520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 of one set (the upper side of FIGS. 48 and 49), while the other set (FIGS. 48 and 49). A slide member 520 is disposed on the lower slide rail 510.

  That is, in the third embodiment, when the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position, the one side guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 of one set and the one side cover of the slide member 520 of the other set The guide members 521 are respectively disposed on the left side in a front view.

  As in the case of the second embodiment, the slide mechanism 3500 according to the third embodiment configured as described above also exerts an inertial force associated with the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the slide member 2520 of one set and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 520 have the same direction (line It can be made symmetrical).

  Therefore, since rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 depending on the displacement component, the base member 400 and the cover member 420 can be prevented from being rotated with respect to the back case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the rear case 300.

  FIG. 50 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 3500, in which the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the proximity position.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, in the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position (see FIG. 49), one set of the guided member 521 in the slide member 2520 of one set and the other set One side guided member 521 in the slide member 520 is disposed on the left side in a front view.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, in the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotational position (that is, in the state where the direction of slide displacement of the slide members 520 and 2520 is horizontal (in the horizontal direction in FIG. 50)) The one side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 2520 and the one side guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 520 can be disposed on the upper side (vertical direction upper side) in front view .

  Thereby, in the state where base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 47, when an inertial force is applied when the rotation of liquid crystal display device 523 is started or stopped. The displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction (displacement component that generates a force (a braking force) that presses the slide member 520 against the slide rail 510) can be made vertically downward (gravity direction, lower in FIG. 50). Accordingly, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, the slide member 520 can be prevented from floating and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to suppress damage to the movable portion and the sliding portion due to rattling caused by the floating.

  In this case, the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521 is provided with rotational driving means (the drive motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534) (see FIG. 38). That is, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side guided member 522 side.

  Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (a braking force) to press the slide rail 510, the rotational drive mechanism (the drive motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534) The rotational inertia (weight) of can be used to increase the pressing force. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, floating of the slide member 520 can be easily suppressed, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily suppress breakage of the movable portion and the sliding portion due to rattling caused by the floating.

  Further, the drive motor 531 of the rotational drive mechanism is disposed in such a posture that the drive shaft is directed to the liquid crystal display 523 side and the main body portion is directed in the direction away from the liquid crystal display 523. The position of the center of gravity of can be arranged at a position farther from the other side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a locus farther from the other side displaced member 522.

  Thereby, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (a braking force) to press the slide rail 510, the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 can be more easily utilized, The pressing force can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, floating of the slide member 520 can be easily suppressed, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily suppress breakage of the movable portion and the sliding portion due to rattling caused by the floating.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation shaft 523c of the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the center in the width direction has been described, but the rotation shaft 4523c of the fourth embodiment is eccentrically positioned in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523. Will be placed on In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 4520 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 52 (a) is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 4500 with the display surface 523a directed to the front side, and FIG. 52 (b) shows the decorative surface 523b directed to the front side. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated in figure typically the slide mechanism 4500 in the state of being. 52 (a) and 52 (b), the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position and the liquid crystal display 4523 is disposed at the separated position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, in the slide mechanism 4500 according to the fourth embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, cylindrical rotary shafts 4523c are provided to project from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523. The rotation shaft 4523 c is rotatably supported by the shaft support holes 4521 b 2 and 4522 c of the one side guided member 4521 (liquid crystal side member 4521 b) and the other side guided member 4522.

  That is, the liquid crystal display device 4523 is rotatably supported by the one side guided member 4521 and the other side guided member 4522 via the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c, and the display surface 523a is rotated by the rotation. Can be formed with the attitude toward the front side (the player side) and the attitude with the decorative surface 523b facing the front side.

  In this case, the rotational shaft 4523c and the bearing holes 4521b2 and 4522c are spaced apart from the opposing member 525 along the direction of slide displacement than the formation position in the case of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Set to position. That is, in the first embodiment, the rotation shaft 523 c is disposed at the center in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, whereas the rotation shaft 4523 c of the fourth embodiment is in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523 (FIG. And FIG. 52 (b) are arranged eccentrically on one side.

  In the rotation drive mechanism in the fourth embodiment, the pinion gear 532 and the first gear 533 are different from the rotation drive mechanism in the first embodiment because the formation position of the shaft support hole 4521b is separated from the pinion gear 532 of the drive motor 531. And a third gear 4535 is additionally disposed.

  Here, as described above, in the facing member 525, a plurality of LEDs are disposed on the side surface facing the liquid crystal display device 4523, and the side surfaces of the liquid crystal display device 4523 (the display surface 523a and the decoration surface 523b The light is formed so that light can be emitted toward the connecting surface), and light emitted from the LED is reflected from the side surface of the liquid crystal display 4523 to the liquid crystal display 4523 and the opposing member 525 from the opposing space (gap) It is possible to perform an effect to make a person visually recognize.

  Therefore, when the distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 is narrow, a space for passing light reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 can not be secured, and the light is effectively used by the player. It can not be made visible.

  In this case, the distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (the distance in the vertical direction in FIG. 52A) is the third symbol display via the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 from between the facings. In order to make the player visually recognize the device 81, it is preferable that the device 81 can be secured as much as possible. On the other hand, the opposing spacing of the pair of opposing members 525 (the spacing in the vertical direction in FIG. 52A) should be such that it can be stored between the opposing outer wall portions 302 of the rear case 300 Can not be expanded to receive

  Therefore, if the distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is increased and a space for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 is secured between the opposite electrodes, the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 (LED) face each other. Since the gap (gap) is reduced, it becomes difficult to secure a gap for light emission, reflection or passage of the LED, but the gap between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is narrowed in order to secure the gap. Then, it becomes difficult to secure an interval for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the formation positions of the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c are eccentrically positioned on one side in the slide displacement direction, the rotation position of the liquid crystal display device 4523 The space (gap) between the facing of the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be increased or decreased.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 52A, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 can be reduced by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the display surface 523a faces the front side. . Therefore, the opposing interval of the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the amount of extension of the liquid crystal display device 4523 to the front of the third symbol display device 81) can be reduced accordingly, and as a result, the player can display the third symbol display device A viewable area for viewing 81 can be secured.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52B, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 can be increased by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the decorative surface 523b faces the front side. . Therefore, it is possible to secure a space (gap) through which the light emitted from the LED of the facing member 525 and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 can pass, and as a result, between the facing (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 From this, it is possible to effectively perform an effect to make the player visually recognize.

  Further, in order to increase the distance between the liquid crystal display 4523 and the opposing member 525, the opposing member 525 needs to be disposed at a distance from the liquid crystal display 4523 (that is, the distance between the pair of opposing members 525 is increased). As a result, the slide mechanism 4500 can be miniaturized. That is, while making it possible to accommodate the slide mechanism 4500 between the facing of the outer wall portion 302 of the rear case 300, both the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 and the rendering effect by the light emitted from the LED can be achieved. Can.

  Next, when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotational position to the second rotational position or vice versa, a method of suppressing the driving force required for the rotation will be described.

  53 (a) and 53 (b) are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotational position to the second rotational position.

  When the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, as shown in FIG. 53A, in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are positioned close to each other. Place on In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (upper side, upper side in FIG. 53 (a)) has a posture in which the display surface 523a is directed to the front side, while the other (lower side, lower side in FIG. 53 (a)). The liquid crystal display device 4523 has a posture in which the decorative surface 523 b is directed to the front side.

  Thus, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 can be disposed at a position eccentric to the upper side than the center in the vertical direction, and accordingly, the position of the center of gravity G is positioned above the rotation center of the base member 400 It can be done.

  Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90 ° clockwise in a front view (right direction in FIG. 53 (a)), and the second rotation position shown in FIG. 53 (b) from the first rotation position shown in FIG. 53 (a) In the case of rotation, the movement locus of the center of gravity G (shown by the broken line arrow in FIG. 53B) can be a locus moving downward (in the direction of gravity).

  Therefore, when rotation of the base member 400 from the first rotational position is started, a force in the direction of gravity (downward) acting on the center of gravity G can be made to act as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400. The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, it is possible to suppress the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required for the rotation of the base member 400 from the first rotational position to the second rotational position.

  54 (a) and 54 (b) are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotational position to the first rotational position.

  When the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, as shown in FIG. 54A, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are positioned close to each other in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300. Place on In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (the side moving in the direction of gravity as it is rotated to the first rotational position, the left side in FIG. 54A) takes the display surface 523a to the front side. The liquid crystal display device 4523 on the other side (the side moving to the opposite side of the direction of gravity as it is rotated to the first rotational position, right side in FIG. 54A) has a posture in which the decorative surface 523b faces the front side.

  As a result, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (ie, the position of the center of gravity G) is a position away from the rotation center of the base member 400 and eccentrically moved to the direction of gravity along with the subsequent rotation ( It can arrange | position on FIG. 54 (a) left side.

  Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise in the front view (left direction in FIG. 54A), and the first rotation shown in FIG. 54B from the second rotation position shown in FIG. 54A. When rotating to the position, the movement locus of the center of gravity G (shown by the broken line arrow in FIG. 54B) can be a locus moving downward (in the direction of gravity).

  Therefore, when rotation of the base member 400 from the second rotational position is started, a force in the direction of gravity (downward) acting on the center of gravity G can be made to act as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400. The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, it is possible to suppress the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required to rotate the base member 400 from the second rotational position to the first rotational position.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55 (a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13. 56 is a partial enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line LVI-LVI in FIG. 55 (b), and FIG. 57 is a partial enlarged sectional view of game board 13 taken along line LVII-LVII in FIG. 56 (b) FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the game board 13 is provided with a passage member 5600 which is formed of a resin material and which forms a passage through which the game balls flow down. In the passage member 5600, a rolling plate 5610 is provided extending in the width direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 55 (b)) of the game board 13, and the front side (55 (b) paper front side) of the rolling plate 5610. The front wall 5620 to be disposed, the back wall 5630 disposed on the back side of the rolling plate 5610 (the back side in the drawing of FIG. 55B), and a portion of the back wall 5630 to the back side And an overhanging wall portion 5640 which is formed to be overhanging.

  The rolling plate 5610 is a member whose upper surface is the rolling surface of the gaming ball, and has a first portion formed by being inclined downward from the width direction end of the gaming board 13 and its first portion The second portion is inclined upward from the end on the downward inclination side toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13 to form a W-shaped rolling surface in a front view.

  The upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610 is recessed at the connecting portion between the first portion and the second portion and descends toward the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 55 (b)) A concave portion 5611 to be inclined and a concave portion 5612 to be concave to the rear side (the rear side in the drawing of FIG. 55B) while being concavely provided at the uppermost portion of the second portion are disposed.

  The front wall portion 5620 is erected above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610, and suppresses the game balls from falling from the upper surface of the rolling plate 5610. However, in the front wall portion 5620, a portion corresponding to the concave portion 5611 of the rolling plate 5610 is cut out, and the gaming ball received in the concave portion 5611 can be dropped.

  The overhanging wall portion 5640 is a member for forming a passage for causing the gaming balls rolling on the upper surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to flow out from the lower surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to the game area, and rolling The game ball received in the recess 5612 is rolled into the overhanging wall 5640 by rolling the plate 5610.

  Here, the operation unit 200 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13. Therefore, if the overhanging wall portion 5640 is projected from the back side of the game board 13 as in the present embodiment, the operation unit 200 (slide unit SL) is used to avoid interference with the overhanging wall portion 5640. The movable range of) is limited, and the rendering effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is formed to have a U-shaped cross section (see FIG. 57), and the width dimension between the inner wall surfaces (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 57) The depth dimension (vertical dimension in FIG. 57) from the front of the back wall 5630 to the inner wall surface is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball while the size of the game ball is set to a slightly larger size.

  In this case, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is chamfered (cut) by an imaginary plane parallel to the back wall portion 5630, with the top of the arc-like section in the overhanging direction (right side of FIG. 56, upper side of FIG. In the chamfered portion, an opening 5641 whose width dimension (dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 57) is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball is formed.

  That is, the gaming ball can pass through (flowing down) the passage formed by the overhanging wall portion 5640 in a state in which the gaming ball is partially protruded to the outside from the opening portion 5641, so the entire gaming ball can As compared with the case where the overhanging wall portion 640 is formed in a size surrounding the side, the overhanging dimension L1 to the back side of the overhanging wall portion 5640 can be suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement space of operation unit 200 and the movable range of slide unit SL can be secured by that amount.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the passage member 6600 in the sixth embodiment, corresponding to FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the overhanging wall portion 6640 in the sixth embodiment includes a pair of wall portions erected from the back wall portion 5630, and a wall portion connecting the erected front ends of the pair of wall portions. Is formed in a U-shape in cross section, and an opening 6641 is formed in the wall portion of the overhanging tip side (upper side in FIG. 58) in the U-shape in cross section.

  The opening portion 6641 is formed in a form in which the width dimension (dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 58) decreases as going from the inner wall surface side of the overhanging wall portion 6640 to the outer wall surface side. That is, the inner peripheral surface of the overhanging wall portion 6640 is formed as an inclined surface. This enlarges the possible projection amount which makes a part of game ball project outside from opening 6641, and it becomes possible to control the projection size L2 of the overhanging wall 5640, while the peripheral part (the inclined surface and the opening 6641) (5) can be secured to the maximum to ensure the rigidity of the overhanging wall portion 6640.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the width dimension W of the opening 6641 in the inner wall surface of the overhanging wall portion 6640 is set to a size smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the inner wall surface and the opening of the overhanging wall portion 5640 The angle of the inclined surface (the inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) is set such that the ridge line portion S with the inner peripheral surface of the portion 5641 is in contact with the gaming ball. In this way, while securing a possible projection amount that allows part of the gaming ball to protrude from the opening 6641 to the outside, it is possible to suppress the object from being received on the tip side of the inclined surface (inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) ( That is, the game ball can be received by the ridge line portion S having relatively high rigidity), and breakage of the overhanging wall portion 6640 (periphery of the opening portion 6641) can be suppressed.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the passage member 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 59 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the passage member 7600 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the passage member 7600 in the seventh embodiment includes a front wall 7651, a rear wall 7652 opposite to the front wall 7651, and fronts thereof. A side wall portion 7653 respectively disposed on both sides of the wall portion 7651 and the back wall portion 7652 is formed, and a space having a substantially rectangular cross section surrounded by the respective wall portions 7651 to 6563 forms a passage for flowing the gaming ball down .

  Here, the passage member 7600 projects the front wall 7651 and a part of the rear wall 7652 (a front inner peripheral wall 7651a and a rear outer peripheral wall 7652a) toward the rear wall so as to project them. The curved portion is formed by the portion 7651a and the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. That is, the inner peripheral side of the passage in which the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a is bent is formed, and the outer peripheral side of the path in which the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a is bent is respectively formed.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening 764 is formed in the front inner peripheral wall 7651 a on the inner peripheral side of the bent passage. That is, the opening 7604 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force (right direction in FIG. 59A) acting on the gaming ball when passing through the bent passage. In addition, since the opening part 7654 is formed substantially the same as the opening part 6641 in 6th Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by projecting a part of the gaming ball to the outside from the opening 7654, not only can the projecting dimension L3 of the rear outer peripheral wall 7652a be suppressed, but also damage or wear of the passage member 7600 is suppressed. It is easy to do.

  That is, since the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force (right direction in FIG. 59A) acting on the gaming ball when passing through the bent passage, it is pressed by the centrifugal force The game ball can be received by the back outer peripheral wall 7652a which does not have the opening 7654 formed and the rigidity is relatively high, and it can be suppressed that the game ball is pressed against the front inner peripheral wall 7651a by the centrifugal force. . As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651 whose rigidity is relatively lowered by the formation of the opening portion 7654 and wear at the periphery of the opening portion 7654.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 60, parts that are the same as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the passage member 8600 in the eighth embodiment has a front wall 7651 (front inner peripheral wall 7651a) and a rear wall 7652 (back outer peripheral wall 7652a) as in the seventh embodiment. And a side wall portion 7653 form a curved passage having a substantially rectangular cross section. In the present embodiment, the opening 864 is formed in the back outer peripheral wall 7652a. The opening 8564 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the projecting dimension L4 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a can be suppressed by causing a part of the gaming ball to protrude outside from the opening portion 8654. In this case, in the present embodiment, the movable range of the slide unit SL is set at a position overlapping with the range Rg which is a displacement trajectory of a part of the gaming ball projected from the opening 8564. Thus, the movable range of the slide unit SL can be expanded by effectively utilizing the space (range Rg) formed by reducing the projecting dimension L3 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. As a result, the rendering effect by the slide unit SL can be enhanced.

  In this case, in the passage member 8600, a first switch 8655 and a second switch 8656 for detecting passage of gaming balls are respectively disposed upstream and downstream of the opening portion 8654. Therefore, by monitoring the detection state by the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, at least the gaming ball is not present in the passage of the passage member 8600, and therefore, a part of the gaming ball is projected from the opening 8654 It can be understood that it is not in the state of being done.

  Therefore, based on the detection results of the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, the slide unit SL is limited to the range Rg only while it is determined that at least a part of the gaming ball is not projected from the opening 8654. By controlling so as to be displaced to the overlapping position, the interference between the slide unit SL and the game ball can be avoided.

<First control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 126, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a ninth embodiment. In the first control example, the over winning effect is displayed when the gaming ball over wins the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the player has won an over-winning during the jackpot game, so that the player can easily understand the gaming machine.

  In addition, you may display the information which shows the number of the game balls which carried out the over prize as an over prize production | presentation. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine where the player can easily grasp the number of game balls for which the over-winning is achieved. In addition, the effect may be varied according to the number of game balls for which the over prize has been won. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of game balls for which the over-winning is achieved, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, as the over winning effect, the over winning effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is easily displayed in response to the progress of the round in the big hit game. That is, according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the selection ratio of the over winning effect is configured to be different. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest even if the jackpot game takes a long time.

  In the first control example, a character string indicating right strike (right strike right strike right strike) is configured to be displayed circumferentially. As a result, even when the display screen (the sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to preferably indicate (inform) that the game state in which the right-handed game is to be performed.

  It is also possible to display a message indicating right strike and output a voice indicating a right strike (for example, a voice saying "Please hit right"). As a result, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to preferably indicate (inform) that the game state is to hit the right.

  In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decoration surface 523 b which is the back side of the display surface 523 a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 so that the LED blinks in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523 a. Configured.

  Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversely operated and the display surface 523 a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can not be visually recognized, the state of the blinking display of the sub symbol is grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. Can provide an easy-to-understand game machine for the player.

  In the first control example, a symbol is displayed across the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. It was configured to change the display position of the symbol according to being displaced. Thus, effects can be provided by effectively utilizing the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the player's interest can be improved. In addition, even if the third liquid crystal display device 523 is in a state in which a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 can not be viewed, effects can be suitably displayed.

  In the first control example, when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven (slided) up and down (that is, when the display area becomes vertically long), they are driven horizontally (slide) The display angle and the display coordinates of the image data are corrected in the case where the display area is horizontally long). Thus, effects can be provided by effectively utilizing the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the player's interest can be improved.

  First, with reference to FIG. 62 (a), data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described.

  In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are configured to perform display based on one image data. Specifically, using the image data represented by the coordinates of (0, 0) to (X, Y3), the image data of the region of (0, 0) to (X, Y1) corresponds to that of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The image data of the area from (0, Y1) to (X, Y2) displayed on the upper display surface 523a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image of the area from (0, Y2) to (X, Y3) Data is displayed on the lower display surface 523 a 2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

  FIG. 62 (b) is a schematic view showing the contents of effects at the time when the push effect is started. In the push effect, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slidingly moved to the proximity position, and a button with the character "PUSH" drawn on the lower display surface 523a2 is Is displayed. With the button displayed, pressing the frame button 22 causes the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 to slide up and down, and the display position of the symbol is changed according to the slide movement. An effect is started (see FIG. 63 to FIG. 65).

  Next, the effect display in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, effect display using the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (upper display surface 523a1, lower display surface 523a2) and the third symbol display device 81 provided on the slide member 520 is executed. Specifically, with respect to the third symbol display device 81, the upper display surface 523a1 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is upward (upward in the viewpoint of FIG. 63) and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display 523 is downward. The display area used for effect display is enlarged by sliding it in a downward direction (at the viewpoint in FIG. 63), and a symbol (in FIG. 63, a symbol representing a "fish") is enlarged using the enlarged display area. An effect display is performed that causes the number of symbols to increase.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to display various aspects of symbols in the display area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a diagram showing a display area in a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 completely covers the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), in this state, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slidingly moved so that the upper display surface 523a1 lowers the lower half of the symbol. Display control is performed so that the display surface 523a2 is displayed.

  Even in such a case, the display data displayed on each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 diverts the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide display data for the sub liquid crystal display device, and the data amount can be reduced.

  In this control example, although the configuration in which the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered by the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is used, other configurations may be used. For example, the display is performed on the third symbol display device Even if the display area in which information on the game to be played (for example, the display of the number of held memories or the display of abnormality) is displayed, it can be viewed even if the sub liquid crystal display device 523 moves to any position. Good.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 starts slide movement from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63B shows a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is started from the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is started, the upper display surface 523a1 slides in the upper direction (up in the viewpoint of FIG. 63 (b)), The display surface 523a2 slides in a downward direction (downward direction in FIG. 63B). On the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 which are slide-moved, the same display items (upper half and lower half of the symbol) as shown in FIG. 63 (a) are displayed. This can be realized by moving the display position of the display object in accordance with the movement amount of each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2).

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is exposed between the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2. In the third symbol display device 81, the display of a symbol corresponding to the upper half of the display object displayed on the lower display surface 523a2, the lower half of the display object displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the third symbol display A symbol displayed on the display surface of the device 81 is displayed, and from the front side (visible side), the lower display surface 523a2 (the symbol in the lower figure), the upper display surface 523a1 (the upper symbol), the third symbol display device 81 Are displayed in the order of the display surface (middle symbol).

  In the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), since most of three symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol) are displayed in an overlapping state, it is clear which symbol is displayed to the player. It is a difficult condition to make In this state, since each symbol is superimposed so that the symbol (middle symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is most difficult to see, what symbol appears last to the player The effect can be executed while expecting the game, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored early in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64A and 64B, a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further progresses from the state of FIG. 63B will be described. FIG. 64 (a) shows a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), and FIG. 64 (b) shows a state from FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 advanced further.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), as the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 progresses, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are separated, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 By gradually exposing the surface, the entire display area is gradually enlarged. Also in this state, on the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 which are slide-moved, the same display objects (upper and lower halves of the symbol) as in FIG. 63A are displayed.

  Then, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, each symbol is displayed such that the overlap of the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol gradually decreases. With such a configuration, display of display data corresponding to a specific display (displayed from the state of FIG. 63 (a)) for display of the upper display 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2 It is only necessary to execute control for moving the position in accordance with the slide movement of each display surface, so that the load of display control can be reduced.

  In addition, the effect display for gradually reducing the overlapping of the symbols is simply fixed by simply moving the display surface (the upper display 523a1, the lower display surface 523a2, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) to execute. There is an effect that the sense of discomfort given to the player can be suppressed more than the case of executing on the display surface.

  In this case, the timing at which each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) slides is made different, or the speed at which the slide moves is changed, and the display surface of each display surface is changed. It is good to execute display control. This has the effect that the rendering effect can be further enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b), a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further progresses from the state of FIG. 64 (b) will be described. FIG. 65 (a) shows a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 65 (b) shows the state from FIG. 65 (a). It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 advanced further.

  By sliding the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to the position shown in FIG. 65 (a), a part of the aspect indicating the numeral attached to the middle symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. start. Further, when the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 progresses and the state of FIG. 65 (b) is reached, the upper symbol, the middle symbol and the lower symbol are displayed completely (each display surface is separated maximally) It will slide to the position). In this state, it is possible for the player to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the display effect of this time by the player visually recognizing the aspect indicating the number attached to the middle symbol.

  In this control example, when a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol, the effects shown in FIG. 63 to FIG. 65 are executed. You may use it other than that. For example, after displaying in the third symbol that the special symbol has won the jackpot, it is used for a technology (so-called, probability change promotion effect) that uses an effect display to indicate whether the current jackpot is usually a big hit or a definite change big hit. It is good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, display contents in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated will be described. FIG. 66 (a) is a view showing an aspect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 abut in the vertical direction, and FIG. 66 (b) is a diagram showing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in the left and right direction. It is a figure which shows the aspect in the case of contact | abutting in a direction.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 66A to the state shown in FIG. 66B, the display position of the display data of the display object displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is By correcting the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display device 523 according to the rotation angle, it is possible to display the same display mode as that before the rotation. Also in this case, the display data displayed on each display surface is the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so there is no need to separately provide display data and the amount of data can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to

  Next, the inverting operation of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, as described above, the slide member 520 is configured to be reversible, and the display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) described above is provided on one surface side, and the other surface side is provided. Is provided with a decorative surface (upper decorative surface 523b1, lower decorative surface 523b2).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67 to FIG. 68, an effect mode in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed at a position covering the front side of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 67 (a) shows a state in which the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed from the front side, and FIG. 67 (b) shows that the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is the back surface. It is the figure which showed the state which started facing the side (state which the decoration surface started facing the front side). The sub liquid crystal display device 523 hides most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side, and the main effect is switched to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 instead of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. Under the lower display surface 523a2, a decorative symbol Z is displayed to indicate that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. On the decorative surface 523b2 on the back side of the lower display surface 523a2, with the decorative symbol Z on the front side The sub LED 290 is disposed at the coincident position. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a state in which the upper liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 face the front side. The upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are combined (parallelly connected (arranged in line)) by flipping to form an apple pattern so that the character "CHANCE" is formed. It is configured. In addition, the lower surface of the apple is decorated with corrugations, and four LEDs are arranged at the tip. Among them, the lowermost LED disposed on the lower decorative surface 523b2 is configured by the sub LED 290. FIG. 68 (a) shows a state in which the sub LED 290 is turned off, and FIG. 68 (b) shows a state in which the sub LED is turned on.

  With this configuration, even if the sub liquid crystal display device 520 is reversed and the display surface can not be viewed, the player can be notified that the special symbol is changing, and the player is confused. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a description will be given of the right-handed notification mode which is a suggestion mode of the launch position of the gaming ball during the jackpot game. FIG. 69A shows a right-handed notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the upper display surface 523a1 during the jackpot game. The characters "right-handed" are displayed in a curved shape of three circles (ring shape), and during the jackpot game, these characters are respectively rotated to the right and displayed. In this control example, in the variable winning device 65, the game ball flowing down the right side (right flow path) of the third symbol display device 81 flows down the left side (left flow path) of the third symbol display device 81 The game ball is disposed at a position where it is easier to win than the ball (lower right side of the game area). In this way, the player normally operates the steering wheel so as to have a left-handed launch intensity for playing the game by causing the game ball to pass through the left channel and winning at the first starting opening 64 during normal times. The ball is fired, but during the jackpot game, the game is played by operating the handle so as to have a firing strength at which the gaming ball passes through the right channel.

  Here, by displaying the right-handed notification mode, it is reported that the steering wheel is operated with the firing intensity at which the game ball passes the right-side channel, and the right-handed channel is turned by the right-handed character turning right. The position (direction) of and the turning direction of the handle are notified at the same time.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (b), when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides in the big hit game and moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 to hide the third symbol display device 81. The right-handed notification mode is displayed on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1. Further, FIG. 69C is a view showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated in the right direction. In this case, it is displayed at the lower right of the upper display surface 523a1 (no change to the actual display position in FIG. 69 (b)). Also in this case, the right-handed operation can be correctly notified without changing the direction of the right-handed character display and the rotation display direction of the characters.

  As described above, in the present control example, the right-handed character display is rotated and displayed in a ring shape, so that even if the displayed surface is rotated, notification is made about the correct position without changing the display mode. Can. Therefore, the load of display control processing can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data can be reduced as compared with the case where various types of right-handed notification modes are prepared.

  In the present control example, the right-handed display mode is displayed as characters, but it is also possible to rotate a symbol of an arrow configured in a ring shape or a symbol imitating a game ball. Furthermore, a symbol imitating a handle for varying the launch intensity of the gaming ball may be rotated and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, a modification of the right-handed notification mode in the present control example will be described. FIG. 147 is a view showing a modification of the right-handed notification mode. In this modification, it is changed in the point by which the arrow pattern curved in the right direction is added by 3 ring shape on the back side of the character display of right-handed character display.

  FIG. 147 (a) is a diagram showing a display area of the right-handed notification mode. The right-handed notification mode is displayed in a ring-shaped display area. This display area is divided into three areas at intervals of 120 degrees from the center, and is composed of a first area α, a second area β, and a third area γ. In the first area α, an arrow symbol curved to the right is an area displayed by turning right, and in the second area β and the third area γ, the characters “right-handed” follow the ring shape. And is displayed curved. The second area β and the third area γ are set in a layer above the arrow pattern that is rotationally displayed, and the arrow patterns that are rotationally displayed are displayed in the second area β and the third area γ. It is configured not to be. Also, three arrow symbols are set, and when one arrow symbol moves to the back of the second area β, the next arrow symbol moves to the first area α and is displayed. There is. The position of the layer in each area is configured to be changeable, and is set variably according to the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

  FIG. 147 (a) shows a display mode when the right-handed notification mode is displayed on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1, and the layer of right-handed character display in the layer of the first area α is below the arrow pattern. It is set. Therefore, in the first area α, an arrow symbol is displayed, and a right-handed character is not displayed. FIG. 147 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees rightward. In this case, the layer of the character display of the third area β is set below the layer of the arrow pattern, and the layer of the character display of the first area α is set to the layer above the arrow pattern.

  By configuring in this manner, an arrow symbol pointing to the right side is always displayed in the upper direction of the gaming machine 10, and it is possible to notify the player of the correct right channel position. In this modification, the position at which the arrow is displayed is changed by changing the setting of the layer, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation coordinates of the right-handed notification mode are variably set (the right-handed notification mode is It may be configured to be variable by rotating in accordance with the amount of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523.

  Next, details for setting the effects described in FIG. 63 to FIG. 65 will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slidingly moved, an effect of correcting the display position of the symbol in accordance with the amount of slidingly moved is performed.

  Specifically, based on the amount by which the upper display surface 523a1 is slid in response to the upper display surface 523a1 being varied upward from FIG. 70 (a) to FIG. 70 (b), the symbol 2 The display coordinates of (upper symbol) are corrected upward.

  Further, in response to the lower display surface 523a2 being changed downward, the display coordinates of the symbol 3 (the lower design) are corrected downward based on the amount of sliding movement of the lower display surface 523a2.

  As described above, by changing the display coordinates of each symbol according to the amount of sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the symbols expand as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides. An effect can be displayed.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Control Example
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 44) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, to the first special symbol execution area 203a and the second winning opening 640 corresponding to the winning on the first winning opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) The second special symbol execution area 203b corresponding to the prize winning is provided respectively, and in each of these areas, according to the timing of entering the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b, the first hit Respective values of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. In addition, in the RAM 203, a common drawing execution area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reservation areas (retention first to fourth areas) is provided. In each of these areas, the sphere is either left or right. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing when it passes through the normal start port (through gate) 67 of the second.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol 1 holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table When it matches with the value of the jackpot random number set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first hit random number table is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol, and high probability (special symbol special probability of being a big hit from low probability) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. The first random number table 202a for high probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a for low probability of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is any of "0 to 9" It is determined whether there is any, and if it is any of “0 to 9”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "9", and if it is "9", it is determined that it is a big hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit classification counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol 1 hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that makes the big win of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that causes the special symbol to go out, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that makes a big win for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The displayed mode is that of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, when there is a low probability of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, there is one random number that will be a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number “0” is for low probability Is stored in the first random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1, so the probability of becoming a big symbol for a special symbol is "1/400".

  On the other hand, at the time of the high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 10, so the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/40".

  Note that the duplicate value is a random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table for low probability time, and a random number value that is a big win that is stored in the first random number table for high probability time. You may set the random number value which becomes each big hit so that it may not become. If there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random number value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally win a jackpot. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), by changing the random number value to be the jackpot, the jackpot of the special symbol Because it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of “0 to 29” is “jackpot A”. Also, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of "30 to 99" is "jackpot B". In the present control example, two types of jackpots are used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Moreover, you may be comprised so that a different big hit classification may be selected even if it is the value of the same 1st contact classification counter C2 with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this manner, for example, when the jackpot with the second special symbol is performed, by setting the jackpot type in which the number of rounds is executed is larger, the player with the hit with the second special symbol is made more to the player. It can be expected. Therefore, the hit in the high probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the convenience of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can strongly feel that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengaging displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach is generated, the final stop symbol stops at other than the reach symbol. Two stop (rendering) patterns are selected, for example, a range of 90 to 99, and a "completely out of range" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the special symbol 1 holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the area 203a. It is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the second winning opening 64.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into high probability for special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and according to the table, a range of random number values set for each type of stoppage of deviation Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time to the first winning opening 64, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 for low probability Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A so-called short time deviation, a long time deviation, and a rough display mode such as normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 93) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 72A) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, various kinds of "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time use)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach" various types are defined as a deviation pattern for disengaging As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot A, various "normal reach" and various "super reach" are defined. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type). Although not shown, the variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the audio lamp control device 113, and further detailed variation corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol per random symbol table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the ordinary symbol When it agrees with the value of the random number which is set by the per random number table, it is determined that the symbol is normal. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit of normal symbol from the low probability (of normal symbol) It is divided into two types, one for the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers for making a big hit included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (c), at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240 while the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 24. Therefore, the probability that the symbol will normally hit is “1/10”.

  If the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is obtained. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) As the symbol of "o" is lighted and displayed, the electric role piece 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the motorized prize 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is "0.2 seconds × 1 time The release time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that normally hit the symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be hit is 200. Therefore, the probability that the symbol is normally hit is "1 / 1.2".

  When the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is obtained. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) As the symbol of "o" is lighted and displayed, the electric role object 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened "one second x 2 times". As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the normal symbol's low probability, and further, it accompanies the second winning opening 640 Since the release period of the motorized accessory 640 a becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit or not from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the motorized prize 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is only "one second × twice". Although it is open, the open time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  Second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown).

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control apparatus 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 72A is a view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. There is.

  Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (a). FIG. 73 (a) schematically shows the contents of the first random number table 202a. As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73 (a)) is a table in which the value of the random number serving as the jackpot of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  In this first hit random number table 202a, a big hit judgment value (big hit judgment value at the time of low probability) and a special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol for judging whether or not the big hit of the special symbol at the low probability of the special symbol. A jackpot determination value (jacket judgment value at high probability) for determining whether or not the jackpot is determined is provided, and the number of judgment values (random numbers) to be each jackpot is different. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol by changing the number of judgment values (random numbers) to be the jackpot.

  Next, contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73 (b) schematically shows the content of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 73 (b)) is set so that jackpot A and jackpot B can be selected. Specifically, the value "0 to 49" of the first collision type counter C2 is set as the judgment value of the jackpot A, and "50 to 99" is set as the judgment value of the jackpot B.

  Here, as described above, the "big hit A" is configured to allow the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 (ie, the lottery of whether or not to be in the definite change state) In the "big hit B", it is impossible (or difficult) to pass through the probability variation switch 65a5 (ie, the lottery of whether or not to be a probability variation state is not executed).

  Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (c). FIG. 73C schematically shows the contents of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 73 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 73 (c), when the low probability of the normal symbol (in the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28 In the case of, it is determined to be a hit of an ordinary symbol. In addition, as above-mentioned, when it is judged that it is a hit of a normal symbol, the symbol of "○" lights up as a stop symbol (second symbol) after the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device (not shown) is finished. While being displayed, the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74A) is a data table used to determine the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern, and the display pattern is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 74 (b)) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 74 (c)); At least a deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 74 (d)) is defined. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the fluctuation pattern table etc. in time saving game state etc. are set besides this.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 74 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

  Specifically, “0 to 50” is the variation pattern of various types of normal reach (30 seconds), and “51 to 179” is the variety of special reach (90 seconds) for the variation patterns of various types of super reach (60 seconds). For the fluctuation pattern of), "180 to 198" are respectively set as the determination values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern for which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired is set as a big hit It is selected from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 74C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the (normal) deviation pattern table 202d2 for disconnection. The off (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202 d 2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non reach) or out of reach (common in reach) from the stop type selection table not shown is a stop type It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", outreach is set.

  Here, if the variation pattern type is completely out of the range, a relatively short variation (7 seconds) of variation time and a long variation (10 seconds) of variation time are set. “0 to 98” is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  In addition, for outreach, “0 to 149” for various outreach normal reach (30 seconds), “150 to 197” for outfall super reach (60 seconds), outlier special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out in the normal gaming state, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the type of stop and acquires it from the (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2 for out-of-classification Based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the out-of-range (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2.

  FIG. 74C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the out-of-order (probable variation) change pattern selection table 202d3. The disconnection (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol to be disconnected when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d3 is different from the above-described deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2 in the value of the set fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete removal is determined If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the outreach is determined.

  As described above, when the game is in the probability variation gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation at the time of the definite change becomes long and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, the game is postponed during the probability change gaming state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player feels bored.

  Referring back to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. FIG. 72 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, residual ball flag 203n, residual ball It has at least a timer 203p, a probability variation effective flag 203q, a probability variation effective timer 203r, an ejection number counter 203s, a time counter 25t, an indication flag 203u, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, the first winning opening 64 The values of the first random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 acquired based on the winning are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data includes four holding areas (the first holding area). Among the vacant areas of the area to the reserved fourth area), the areas with the smallest area number (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas (special figure 2 holding first area to fourth area) in the same manner as the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. It is a storage area for the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) corresponds to the second winning opening 640 (for the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a described above). The second special symbol) is different only in that it is changed, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth Among the vacant areas of the area (area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserve areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 suspension ball storage area 203a. The shift process is performed to pack the data in the area 1 into a small reserved area of area number 1. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of the first winning opening 64 (start winning). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases to 1 at maximum value 1 each time It is added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 85).

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is a variation display (third symbol) of the second special symbol (second symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the second winning opening 640 (start winning). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 suspension ball number counter 203 e is set to zero, and every time the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and the number of suspension balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 to 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 85).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) or the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the first special symbol) The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the holding ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 85 and S405 and S411 in FIG. 87). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is changed. is there.

  The voice lamp control device 113 controls the main control device by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of pending balls of the variable display which is suspended at 110. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the number of balls stored in the actual variable display has deviated, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the holding ball number symbol (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding ball number notified by the display holding ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the number of holding balls of the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball at the normal starting opening 67 (waiting number ) Is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 every time the ball passes the normal starting opening 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 89).

  When the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of suspension display of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S705 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, when the ball passes the normal starting opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 90) : No).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether the current gaming state is a probability change gaming state (probability change gaming state). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability change gaming state, and when it is off, it indicates that the low probability gaming state (including the time saving gaming state). In this control example, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when a probability variation setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S1303 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. In the initialized state, it is set to be off, and when a normal power-off occurs, the state immediately before the power-off is backed up.

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined depending on whether or not the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1512 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, it is set to off based on the probability change flag 203g being set to on. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up at the time of power-off, and is set to a state immediately before power-off at the time of recovery (at power-on). Also, in the initialized state, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability change switch 65a5 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that it has passed, the probability change setting flag It may be configured to formally turn on 203h and return. In this case, it can be determined whether the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i described later has a value larger than 0 or not. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the gaming shop side by determining the injustice where only the probability change setting flag 203h is rewritten to ON and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation pass counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65a5 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds with jackpot A in this control example). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the gaming balls that have won the first variable winning hole 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation pass counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s described later. When passing through the probability variation switch 65a5, the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated (see S1511 in FIG. 98). In addition, after the process of determining whether the number of gaming balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the process is reset to “0”, which is an initial value (see S1611 in FIG. 99). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203 j is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65 a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, one is added and updated one by one based on detection that the gaming ball has passed the detection switch 65a1 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable winning device 65 (see S1503 in FIG. 98). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings on the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged items (total value of the number-of-discharges counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) is one. After it is determined whether or not it is determined, the initial value "0" is reset. The value of the winning number counter 203 j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting a time during which the flow path solenoid (probable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the channel solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds at the jackpot A, and the channel solenoid 65k is turned ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13 rounds for jackpot B It is set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data of 13 rounds for the big hit A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the big hit B (see S1202 in FIG. 95) . On the other hand, in the process of S1509 of the winning process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, one is decremented and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to be off. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is initialized to 0 when it is initialized. As described above, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow channel solenoid 65k, it is possible to control winning of the probability change switch 65a5 according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203 m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present control example, a sound of “seeing liquid crystal”) for attracting the player's attention. In the present control example, a notification counter 203m corresponding to one second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (the variable winning device 65 has 10 balls or 30 seconds have elapsed). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by one in the process of S1402 of the notification process (see FIG. 97) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203 m becoming 0, a notification command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is set. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, the above-described processing for outputting the voice is executed.

  By configuring in this manner, a voice of "seeing the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the thirteenth round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Watch 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl's character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to urge the player to view the third symbol display device 81. The letters of "notice" which is the notification are displayed. In the 13th round, since the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, if the player pays attention to the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Therefore, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow passage solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65 in order to keep the expectation that the probability variation gaming state is given until the end of the big hit game. Informing effects that make it difficult to see are performed. However, when the 12th round is over, there is a possibility that the player may look at the switching member 65h during interval display, so it is informed that the third symbol display device 81 should be watched by voice during the interval period. Informing effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be drawn to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In this control example, the notification is made to show the third symbol display device 81 to divert the player's attention from the switching member 65h. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By notifying the device 65 to hold the player's hand, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, not only the third symbol display device 81 but also the notification of seeing the decoration lamp 34 etc. to the player may be configured to divert the player's attention. Furthermore, the player may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during the 12 rounds and giving a notification prompting the user to read by a mobile phone. In the present control example, the effect of diverting attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h is finished. As a result, it is possible to suppress a defect in which it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is performed by the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203 n is a flag indicating that the open / close door 65 f 1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203 n is set to ON, it indicates that the open / close door 65 f 1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203 n to ON, a remaining ball timer 203 p described later is incremented by one and updated (see S 1605 in FIG. 99). The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time after the open / close door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Is a counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203p is a time required for the game balls to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the preset one round is finished and the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether has elapsed. In this control example, the time required for the game balls discharged in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p in advance. It is set as. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) of the remaining ball timer 203p, it is determined whether the number of winning on the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharge thereof ( S1607 of FIG. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that effect. Therefore, it can be early notified that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is left in the variable winning device 65 illegally, and an impact or the like is given at the start timing of 13 rounds, and the game ball is reached to the switching member 65h earlier than actually, In addition, it is possible to suppress the fraud which causes the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65a5.

  It should be noted that if the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65a5. The configuration may not be set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability change gaming state is provided illegally.

  When the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5 after the passage solenoid 65k is turned off, the probability variation effective flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is validated. When the probability variation effective flag 203 q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that has finally won a prize to the specific winning opening 65 a to pass the probability variation switch 65 a 5 based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65 k is on. Indicates that the time has not passed. That is, it indicates that it is a period during which the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65a5.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203q described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by this probability variation effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine a period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65a5. In this control example, the time required for the game ball having entered the specified winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 is one second. The upper limit value of the probability variation effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and thereafter, even if it passes the probability variation switch 65a5, it is determined to be incorrect and it is not determined to be passage.

  In this way, the switching member 65h is made to vary illegally, and the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, or the game ball is pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65a5, and the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraudulent detection that the magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The number-of-discharges counter 203 s is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65 e 4 (not shown) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1611 in FIG. 99).

  The time saving counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times of fluctuation of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. At this time, the counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the big hit game. That is, in this control example, when it is not set to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game, it shifts to 100 time saving gaming states.

  In the flag flag 203u, winning information that is a big hit when transitioning to a probability variation gaming state is acquired, and winning information that is already on hold (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b In the information), it is a flag indicating that winning information becoming a big hit A (that is, there is a possibility of transition to the probability variation gaming state) is stored. In the predictive processing (refer to FIG. 88), this sign flag 203u is a fluctuation based on the winning information when winning information is obtained which becomes a big hit when shifting to the probability variation gaming state (S507 in FIG. 88: Yes) When it is determined that there is a possibility that the game is in the probability variation gaming state (ie, there is winning information that becomes a big hit A by then) when S is started (S508 in FIG. 88: Yes), it is set to on Ru. Then, a winning information information command indicating that the indication flag 203 u is turned on is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S 511 in FIG. 88). Then, in the ending process (see FIG. 96) executed at the end of the jackpot game, when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (ie, when transitioning to the probability change gaming state) (see S1304 in FIG. 96), Set to off. Although illustration is omitted, in the ending process (FIG. 96), when it is determined that the jackpot game has ended based on the winning information where the predictive flag 203u is turned on (that is, the jackpot game of the jackpot A is executed The predictive flag 203 u is set to OFF also when the transition to the probability change gaming state is not made.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 91) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, a frame button 22, and other units 228 (sliding motor 311, rotating motor 431, reversing motor 531). , The sub LED 290, the clock generator (CLK) 900, etc. are connected.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The slide motor 311 is a motor for sliding the display surface 523a, which is the upper display surface 523a1 which is the sub liquid crystal display device 523, in parallel to the game machine to move the display surface 523a. The rotation motor 431 is a motor for rotating the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in parallel with the gaming machine 10, and is constituted by a stepping motor. The reversing motor 531 is configured of a stepping motor which is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 about an axis parallel to the gaming machine 10. The reversing motor 531 is provided with a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and a motor for rotating (reversing) the lower display surface 523a2. The upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface are provided. 523a2 can be independently rotated. The reversing motor 531 is a motor for independently rotating the upper display surface 521a1 and the lower display surface 531a2 so that the display area faces the front and the display area faces the back. It is.

  The sub LED 290 is disposed on the decorative surface 523b1 formed on the back side of the upper display surface 523a1, and the decorative symbol Z (displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the upper display surface 523a1 is reversed) It is configured to change to a symbol for informing the player that the special symbol is in change and to blink the fact that the special symbol is in change to notify the player.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

  The clock generation device 900 is a device that outputs a clock signal that changes every 100 ms period to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The clock generation device 900 is a device for supplying a synchronization signal for controlling the blinking of the sub LED 290 and the decorative pattern Z at the same timing by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and moved to a position overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the sub LED 290 is blinked to 0 in synchronization with the decorative symbol Z being displayed. It is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is in motion and to suppress confusion of the player by displaying the character display.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, an over pay table 222b, an ending table 222c, a sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222d, and various other things necessary for game control. Data and programs are stored.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, fluctuation patterns of types (out, reach out, various types of reach, etc.) of each fluctuation pattern are respectively set to counter values for fluctuation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various types of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The over prize table 222 b is a table for selecting an over prize effect to be executed when the game ball over-wins the specific prize port 65 a of the variable prize device 65.

  Here, the details of the over pay table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the over pay table 222b. The over prize table 222b is a table used to select an over prize effect in the jackpot game, and as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the over prize table 222b includes a hit over prize table 222b1 and an indication over prize table 222b2 and a loose over winning table 222b3 are provided.

  The hit over winning table 222b1 is a table used when there is winning information that will be a big hit among the held winning information. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the winning over prize table 222b1, effect contents to be selected as the over winning effect are defined corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f, and the definition different depending on the number of rounds It has become.

  Specifically, in the case where the number of rounds is 1 to 10, if the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 149”, the effect content of the over winning effect is “absent” (that is, not executed), “ If it is 150 to 198 ", it will be a" bubble ", and if it is" 199 ", it will be a" fish school ".

  "Fish school" is selected as the effect content of the over winning effect because it is only when using the over winning prize table 222b1 (that is, when there is winning information that will be a big hit among the pending winning information) By displaying the effect of “fish group” as the over-winning effect, it can be suggested (notified) that there is winning information that is a big hit among the winning information held for the player.

  On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15 R, if the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 99”, the effect content of the over winning effect is “absent” (that is, not executed), “100 to 189” If it is, it will become "a bubble", and if it is "190-199", it will become a "fish school." In this manner, the jackpot game is configured by being configured to be more likely to display the over-winning effect indicating that the expectation for holding the jackpot winning information to be held is high in response to the progress in the round in the jackpot game. Even if it becomes a long time, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the prediction over winning table 222b2, there is winning information that will be a big hit if it shifts to the probability variation gaming state among the pending winning information, the probability variation gaming state by the time the variation based on the held winning information is started It is a table used when there is a possibility of transition to (ie, when it is not determined that the jackpot will be made thereafter, but is likely to be the jackpot).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149" when the number of rounds is 1 to 10, the effect content of the over winning effect is "No (Ie, not executed), and if it is "150 to 199", it becomes "foam".

  On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15 R, if the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 99”, the effect content of the over winning effect is “absent” (that is, not executed), “100 to 199” If it is, it will be a "bubble".

  The out-of-over winning table 222b3 is a table used when there is no winning information to be a big hit among the pending winning information.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), when the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 179" when the number of rounds is 1 to 10, the effect content of the over winning effect is "No (Ie, not executed), and if it is "180 to 199", it becomes "foam".

  On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15 R, if the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 159”, the effect content of the over winning effect is “absent” (that is, not executed), “160 to 199” If it is, it will be a "bubble".

  As described above, the out-of-over winning table 222b3 is configured such that “bubble” is less likely to be selected as over-winning effect than the predictive over winning table 222b2. As a result, when "bubble" is displayed as the over-winning effect, it is possible to make the player expect to be a big hit after that, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In this control example, one of the three types of "nothing", "bubble", or "fish school" is selected as the over-winning effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to select from four types, or may be selected from two types. Further, the effect content may be configured so as not to be selected as “absent” (that is, not executed), and the over winning effect may be displayed each time the over winning is performed. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to understand that the over-winning has been achieved.

  Furthermore, information indicating the number of game balls for which an over-winning is performed may be displayed as the over-winning effect. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine where the player can easily grasp the number of game balls for which the over-winning is achieved.

  In addition, the effect may be varied according to the number of game balls for which the over prize has been won. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of game balls for which the over-winning is achieved, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, the details of the ending table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ending table 222c. The ending table 222c is a table used to select the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game, and as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the ending table 222c includes a hitting ending table 222c1 and a prediction ending table 222c2. , And a release end table 222c3.

  The hit ending table 222c1 is a table used when there is winning information to be a big hit among the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the hit ending table 222c1 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the contents of the effect selected as the ending effect.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the value of the effect counter 223 g is “0 to 19”, “absent” (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect, In the case of "20 to 59", "foam" is selected, in the case of "60 to 99", "special foam" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 199", "fish school" is selected.

  In the prediction ending table 222 c 2, among the held prize information is a prize information that will be a big hit if it shifts to the probability change gaming state, and until the fluctuation based on the held prize information is started to the probability change gaming state It is a table used when there is a possibility of migration.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (c), the indication ending table 222c2 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect contents to be selected as the ending effect, and "bubble" as the over prize effect during the big hit game Is defined differently depending on the number of times (value of the bubble number counter 223j) is selected.

  Specifically, when the value of the foam frequency counter 223 j is “0 to 4”, if the value of the effect counter 223 g is “0 to 149”, the effect content of the ending effect is “absent” (ie, not executed) Is selected, and if "150 to 179", "foam" is selected, and if "180 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

  In addition, when the value of the foam frequency counter 223 j is “5 to 15”, if the value of the effect counter 223 g is “0 to 99”, the effect content of the ending effect is “absent” (that is, not executed). If "100 to 159", "foam" is selected, and if "160 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

  If the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 49" when the value of the bubble number counter 223j is "16 or more", the effect content of the ending effect is "absent" (that is, not executed), and " If it is 50 to 99 "," foam "is selected, and if it is" 100 to 199 "," special foam "is selected.

  As described above, when a large number of "foam" effects are displayed as the over-winning effect, an ending effect of "foam" or "special bubble" is easily selected, which indicates that there is a high possibility of becoming a big hit thereafter. It is configured as follows. As a result, despite the fact that many bubbles are selected (displayed) in the over-winning effect, the effect (for example, “absent”) with a low degree of expectation is selected in the ending effect, and the game of the player It is possible to prevent (suppress) the decline in motivation.

  Further, when the ending effect is selected using the sign ending table 222c2, the possibility of becoming a big hit after that is high. Therefore, when a lot of effects of "bubble" are displayed as over winning effect, it is easy to be selected an effect that indicates that there is a high possibility of becoming a big hit after that, that is, the reliability of the displayed effect is high It will be. As a result, as the number of over-winning game balls increases, it is possible to provide a benefit that the reliability of the ending effect is improved, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The deviation ending table 222c3 is a table used when there is no winning information which will be a big hit if it shifts to the probability variation gaming state in the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 77 (d), the value of the effect counter 223f and effect contents to be selected as the ending effect are defined in the deviation ending table 222c2.

  Specifically, if the value of the effect counter 223 g is “0 to 159”, “no” (ie, not executed) is selected for the effect content of the ending effect, and if it is “160 to 189”, “foam” Is selected, and if "190 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

  In this control example, only the sign ending table 222c2 is configured to change the definition of the value of the effect counter 223f and the contents of the effect according to the value of the bubble number counter 223j, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the same may be applied to the hitting end table 222c1 and the out-ending table 222c3.

  Next, the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222 d will be described with reference to FIG. The sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222 d is for driving various motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) for changing the upper display surface 523 a 1 and lower display surface 523 a 2 of the sub liquid crystal device 523. Information is stored.

  Specifically, a slide drive scenario 222d1 for driving a slide motor 431 for sliding the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 and a rotational movement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in the circumferential direction A rotation drive scenario 222 d 2 for driving the rotation motor 311 to be driven and a reverse drive scenario 222 d 3 for driving the reversing motor 531 for reversing the upper display surface 523 a 1 and the lower display surface 523 a 2 are provided.

  First, the contents of the slide drive scenario 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). The slide drive scenario 222 d 1 has a setting value (operating speed (pps), set to the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time since the fluctuation display is started. The number of operation steps and the operation direction are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), an operation for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the separated position to the adjacent position in response to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m (forward path Information related to the operation of Specifically, 50 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. The setting contents are output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431. The 100 steps mean the number of steps from the separated position to the close position.

  Here, with the operating speed of 50 pps, 50 pulses (steps) are output to the motor driver per second, so the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 perform 100 steps of operation (move from the separation position to the proximity position) It takes 100/50 seconds (two seconds) to do.

  Information related to an operation (operation on the return path) for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is stored corresponding to the value "5001" of the driving scenario counter 223m. There is. Specifically, 50 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. The setting contents are output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431.

  Here, since the drive scenario counter 223m is a counter that is incremented by 1 every 1 ms, the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is "5001" when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are close to each other. Five seconds after the slide displacement is started to the separated position (that is, three seconds after the slide displacement of two seconds is completed).

  Then, in response to the value "7001" of the driving scenario counter 223m, information of "END" indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored. The value of the driving scenario counter 223 m becomes “7001” two seconds after the operation for sliding the upper display surface 523 a 1 and the lower display surface 523 a 2 from the proximity position to the separation position is started (that is, When the slide displacement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 is completed from the close position to the separated position). By reading out the “END” data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Thus, in the slide drive scenario 222d1, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 slide from the separation position to the proximity position in two seconds, and then are maintained at the separation position for three seconds, and then again 2 It slides from the close position to the separated position in seconds.

  Next, the contents of the rotational drive scenario 222d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (c). Similarly, in the rotational drive scenario 222 d 2, a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time since the fluctuation display is started. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are at the first rotation position (upper display corresponding to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m. The upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 become left and right at the second rotation position (a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the first rotation position) from the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2) Information related to an operation (operation on the forward path) for rotating in the circumferential direction to the position) is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is defined as the operation speed, 360 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Third symbol display device 81 and sub liquid crystal display device 523 corresponding to the value “8001” of drive scenario counter 223 m and an operation for circumferentially rotating from the second rotation position to the first rotation position (return operation Information related to) is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is defined as the operation speed, 360 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Then, information of “END” indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the value “12001” of the driving scenario counter 223 m.

  Thus, in the rotational drive scenario 222 d 2, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotate from the first rotation position to the second rotation position over 3 seconds, and then the second rotation position for 5 seconds And then rotate from the second rotational position to the first position in three seconds again.

  Next, the contents of the reverse drive scenario 222 d 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (d). Similarly, in the reverse drive scenario 222 d 3, a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time since the start of the fluctuation display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the normal position (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are on the front side, corresponding to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m. The information related to the operation (operation on the forward path) for inverting from the position where x) to the inverted position (the position where the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are on the front side) is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is defined as the operation speed, 180 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Information related to an operation (operation on the return path) for the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to invert again from the inversion position to the normal position is stored corresponding to the value “5001” of the driving scenario counter 223 m. Specifically, 90 pps is defined as the operation speed, 180 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Then, in response to the value "8001" of the driving scenario counter 223m, information of "END" indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored.

  Thus, in the reverse drive scenario 222 d 3, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 reverses from the normal position to the reverse position over 2 seconds, and then is maintained at the reverse position for 3 seconds, and then resumes normal from the reverse position over 2 seconds again. Invert to position.

  In this control example, in each drive scenario, the operation for one motor is defined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after driving the slide motor 431, a drive scenario may be defined in which the reversing motor 531 is driven. As a result, after the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slidingly displaced to the close position, the reverse operation can be performed. As a result, since the variation for driving (displacement) the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is increased, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Referring back to FIG. 75, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, stop Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, round number counter 223g, sub prize number counter 223h, fish school flag 223i, bubble number counter 223j, clock counter 223k, drive scenario counter 223m, drive scenario storage area 223n, other memory area 223z, Is at least provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a enables the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery result of the holding ball or the like before the start of the change.

  Similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) ), Which is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable effect pending in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the ball to first winning opening 64, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and is suspended. When the number of balls has been subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1907 in FIG. 102). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is used for displaying the number-of-holding-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223 b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display several symbols in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110, so Detailed explanation is omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2302 in FIG. 106). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2309 in FIG. 106). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223 f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198 used for advance notice effects and various lottery. Although illustration is omitted, the main processing (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated by one each time it is executed.

  The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of times a round in the jackpot game has been executed. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when the round number command is received from the main control unit 110 (see S2004 in FIG. 103), and is initialized to 0 when the ending command is received (see S2013 in FIG. 103). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when selecting the over winning effect in the over winning process (see FIG. 104). By varying the selection ratio of the over prize effect according to the value of the round number counter 223g, it is possible to select (display) the over prize effect at a different ratio for each round.

  The sub winning number counter 223h is a counter for determining the number of winnings to the specific winning opening 65a in the round of the big hit game. The sub winning number counter 223h is updated according to the winning number command received from the main control unit 110 (see S2007 in FIG. 103), and it is normal winning or over winning according to the value of the sub winning number counter 223 h. Is determined (see S2008 in FIG. 103). And although illustration is omitted, it is initialized to 0 when a new round number command is received.

  The fish school flag 223i is a flag for determining whether an effect of “fish school” is selected (displayed) in the over winning prize presentation. The fish school flag 223i is set on (see S2109 in FIG. 104) when the over-winning effect of “fish group” is selected in the over prize process (see FIG. 104), and is set off in the ending setting process (see FIG. 104). See S2210 in FIG. 105). In the ending setting process (see FIG. 105), when the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201 in FIG. 105: Yes), the continuous ending effect is selected as the ending effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect which suggests that the probability variation gaming state is given is repeatedly performed (displayed) and the player feels a sense of discomfort. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent a so-called falling edge in which the effect of "bubble" is displayed in the subsequent ending effect even though the effect of "fish school" is displayed as the over winning effect.

  The number-of-bubbles counter 223 j is a counter for determining the number of times the effect of “bubble” is selected as the over-winning effect. The number-of-bubbles counter 223 j is incremented by one (see S 2111 in FIG. 104) when the over-winning effect of “bubble” is selected in the over winning process (see FIG. 104), and is initialized to 0 in the ending setting process. (See S2211 in FIG. 105). The value of the bubble frequency counter 223 j is used when selecting an ending effect in the ending setting process (see FIG. 105).

  The clock counter 223k is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535, which is counted according to a clock change input from the clock generation device 900. The clock of the clock generation device 900 is also input to the display control device 114, and the effect can be synchronized with the display control device 114 by performing the effect based on the value of the clock counter 223k.

  Specifically, when it is determined in the lamp editing process (see FIG. 107) that the clock signal input from the clock generation device 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The effect timing is determined based on the value of the clock counter 223k. For example, when the value of the clock counter 223k becomes 1000, the lighting of the sub LED 290 and the display of the sub symbol are started, and when it becomes 1002, the sub LED 290 is extinguished and the sub symbol is not displayed. It is determined.

  The clock of the clock generation device 900 changes at a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock with a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223 k is incremented by one every 100 ms. Therefore, when it is desired to start the effect such as lighting of the LED after 2 seconds, it may be decided to start the effect from a value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when 1 is added when the value is 65535.

  The clock of the clock generator 900 is not limited to one that changes at a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock whose frequency is 5 Hz). For example, it may be changed in one cycle every 50 ms (that is, a clock with a frequency of 10 Hz) or may be changed every cycle in one 500 ms (that is, a clock with a 1 Hz frequency). When the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 is high (ie, the changing interval is short), the update interval of the clock counter 223k may be short. Thus, even when the clock frequency of the clock generation device 900 is increased, the clock counter 223k can be updated without losing the change.

  The driving scenario counter 223 m is a counter for determining the timing at which control of various driving motors is performed. The driving scenario counter 223m is set to 0 when the fluctuation pattern in which the driving scenario is set is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305 in FIG. 106: Yes). Then, in the sub liquid crystal drive processing (FIG. 108) executed every 1 ms, when a drive scenario is set in a drive scenario storage area 223n described later, one is added. Information for driving the motor set in the drive scenario storage area 223n is acquired according to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m, and various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are obtained. ) Is controlled.

  The driving scenario storage area 223 n is an area for storing the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222 d stored in the ROM 222 described above. In the drive scenario storage area 223m, when the fluctuation pattern in which the drive scenario is set is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305 in FIG. 106: Yes), the corresponding drive scenario 222d is stored. Ru. Based on the information of the drive scenario stored in the drive scenario storage area 223m, drive control of various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) is performed.

  The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 102) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 etc., and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 ( It is to control the fluctuation effect) and the notice effect.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 etc., and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 ( It is to control the fluctuation effect) and the notice effect.

  FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 and the clock generation device 900 are connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234 and the image controller 237 are bus lines on the output side of the input port 238 Connected via 240. The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 and a sub liquid crystal display device (LCD) 523 are connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing part of a boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is a NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game is started to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. When the entry of the ball is detected, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the fluctuation effect, is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

  Referring back to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear surface images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the rear surface A corresponding to the "town stage", the rear surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", the rear surface C corresponding to the "island stage") are all the third symbol display devices The image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed at 81, and is displayed by the image controller 237 so that the back image is horizontally scrolled from left to right on the third symbol display device 81. Drawing is done. Thereby, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection.

  The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 despite the fact that the fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the effect is not immediately started.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character with a rear symbol, a flannel, a helmet, etc. as a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a display clock counter 233m, a lighting clock storage area 233n, a drive data storage area 233p, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 223z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, jackpot related Display data tables corresponding to display related to commands, round effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short term of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short term of the normal symbol. The longer the short term of this normal symbol, the more chances of the ball passing through the normal entrance 67, so the chance to draw a normal symbol increases, and the chance to hit a normal symbol also increases. . Therefore, the chance to enter the second winning opening 640 becomes easier because the chance to open the electric winning combination becomes a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy to be drawn lottery of special symbols. Therefore, the longer the short term of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit can be given to the player, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game. it can. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, since the second winning opening 640 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters the ball, the electric winning combination of the normal symbol is opened and the ball is the second winning opening It becomes easy to get to 640 and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, it is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls or a state in which the number of balls is not reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get the jackpot of the special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the special symbol being held will be a big hit of the special symbol in the ending effect, the player can select the special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol being held. Since it can be recognized that the player wins the jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the jackpot of the special symbol will surely be made. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to a display related to a game information related command, a display related to a jackpot related command, a round effect and a demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In this control example, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 82 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 82).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 82, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 123 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111B). If the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111 (b)) and the simplified display setting process are performed so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. (See S2912 in FIG. 111 (b)). On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are performed.

  Further, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 123 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) in which the contents of the drawing instruction are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later (see FIG. 83) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process of one frame (FIG. 111 (b In step S2903), pointer update processing (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. As shown in FIG. 83, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 111 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 111B) is performed, the process is performed (see S5002 of FIG. 126).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The display clock counter 233 m is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535, which is counted according to a clock change input from the clock generation device 900. The clock of the clock generation device 900 is also input to the audio lamp control device 113, and effects are performed based on the value of the display clock counter 223m, thereby easily synchronizing the effect with the audio lamp control device 113. It can be done.

  Specifically, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111), when it is determined that the clock signal input from the clock generation device 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The clock of the clock generator 900 changes at a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223 k is incremented by one every 100 ms. Therefore, when it is desired to start the effect such as lighting of the LED after 2 seconds, it may be decided to start the effect from a value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when 1 is added when the value is 65535.

  Although the details will be described later, the output of the clock of the clock generation device 900 is started after the start-up process (see S2601 to S2606 of FIG. 109) of the display control device 114 is completed. Thus, after the start-up process of the display control device 114 which requires more time for processing than the audio lamp control device 113 is completed (that is, the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 is completed) And the output of the clock is started, so that the values of the clock counter (the clock counter 223k and the display clock counter 233m) can be accurately synchronized.

  The drive data storage area 233 p is an area for storing drive data for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 523 set by the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 80, the drive data storage area 233p has areas of a slide amount storage area 233p1, a rotation amount storage area 233p2, and a reverse amount storage area 233p3.

  The drive data storage area 233p is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 when the drive of various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) is set in the voice lamp control device 113. Drive data is set based on the reception of the drive data command (see S3017 in FIG. 112).

  Then, in the drawing correction process (see FIG. 125), the display coordinates, the display angle, and the like of the respective images constituting one sprite are corrected according to the drive data stored in the drive data storage area 233p. Thus, even when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid or rotated, suitable effects can be displayed.

  The demonstration display flag 233 y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that demonstration is in progress, and if it is off, it means that demonstration is not in progress. The demonstration display flag 233 y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S 4222 in FIG. 119), When another display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). This demonstration display flag 233y makes it possible to easily determine whether a demonstration effect is currently being performed.

  The finalized display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the finalized display effect is being executed. Here, the finalized display effect refers to an effect of stopping and displaying (finalized display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the finalized display flag 233z is on, it means that a static display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the static display effect is not on. The finalized display flag 233z is set to ON when the finalized display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), When another display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). It is possible to easily determine whether or not the current display effect is being performed by the finalized display flag 233z.

<About Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 84 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum (in this control example, When each reaches 299, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, the start winning process is executed in association with the winning (start winning) on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device is executed (S106), and the through associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed in the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a jackpot of special symbols, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbols (including during the jackpot game of the special symbols) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command (special drawing 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 93) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted values The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S270) A holding ball number command (special figure 1 holding ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Thereafter, the process of S213 is performed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B elapsed? It is determined whether or not it is (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is set (S215) . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the lottery of the special symbol line is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It will be. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 It is determined whether the jackpot A, the small jackpot, or the jackpot A.

  In addition, in this control example, when becoming big hit A, blue LED is lighted in 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B. Also, in the case of a small hit, the red LED is lit, and in the case of a small hit, the red LED and the green LED are lit. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display under execution is started in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (current lottery result) It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol (S216). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S216: Yes), based on the big hit type, set the open scenario of the specific winning opening (S217), then set the start of big hit A (such as 16 rounds The jackpot setting is executed (S218).

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). If it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "big hit of a special symbol" or "out of a special symbol" is made (judgement or rejection) and This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

  When the probability change flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the big hit of the special symbol based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability time The first lottery result of whether or not is obtained from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73 (c)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random numbers set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73 (c)). As described above, ten random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In addition, in this control example, although the determination value determined to be a big hit was made the same in the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, it is good also as not only it but a different random number value. By configuring in this manner, the random number value determined to be out of place in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the jackpot bias.

  Moreover, in this control example, the number of jackpot random number values is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but not limited to that, it is determined to be a jackpot for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random numbers may be set differently. In this way, by configuring, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol of the higher jackpot probability, the player Can be expected to have a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the hour and hour middle counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol, the first acquired in the process of S301. Based on the value of the per-random number counter C1 and the first per-random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 73 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. One of "9" is set as a random number value which becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per the first and the random number value which becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes), A jackpot display mode indicating the jackpot A is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A). Further, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type, the big hit type is set as the stop type. Next, a fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74 (a)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at the time of the jackpot (S307).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined detachment. Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of out-of-pocket is determined based on the current number of holding balls (S309). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Although not shown, variation pattern commands for notifying the determined variation patterns to the audio lamp control device 113 are generated. When this process is over, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and determines whether or not the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 has a winning (start winning), and the start winning is performed. Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing of the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 87, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a ball holding ball number command (special figure 1 ball holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 93) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as that of the processing of S401 to S406 is also performed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. The process is different from the other in that the process of holding the second special symbol is executed with respect to the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), after the process of S412, the prefetch process is executed (S413). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the prefetching process (S413) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (S413).

  In this pre-reading process (FIG. 88, S413), it is first determined whether there is a new winning on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), the process proceeds to S502.

  In the process of S502, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a definite change (S502). If the gaming state is a definite change (S502: Yes), the first hit random number table 202a has a high probability The lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if the gaming state is not definite (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the low probability of the first random number table 202a (S504). Move.

  In the process of S505, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S503 or S504 is a big hit (S505). If it is determined in the process of S505 that the lottery result is a jackpot (S505: Yes), a jackpot is indicated, a winning information command including the jackpot type is set (S506), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S505 that the lottery result is out of order (S505: No), then if the gaming state at the start of the change is a probability change gaming state, whether the lottery result will be a big hit or not It discriminates (S507).

  In the process of S507, even if the gaming state at the start of the change is the probability variation gaming state, if the lottery result is out (S507: No), a winning information command indicating the out is set (S508), the book End the process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S507, if the gaming state at the start of the change is a probability change gaming state, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S507: Yes), then it shifts to the positive change state at the start of the change. It is determined whether or not there is a possibility (S508). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning prize information during the change or the pending prize information has a jackpot information which is a jackpot to shift to a definite change state.

  In the process of S508, if there is no possibility of transition to the definite change state at the start of the change (ie, there is no winning information on the jackpot to change to the definite change gaming state) (S508: No), a prize showing an omission An information command is set (S509), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S508, if there is a possibility that it has shifted to the definite change state at the start of the change (that is, there is winning information on the jackpot to shift to the definite change gaming state) (S508: Yes), high probability The lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value for the low probability and the low probability (S520). Then, the indication flag 203u is set to ON (S511), which indicates that the indication flag 203u is ON, and a winning information command including each lottery result acquired in the processing of S520 is set (S512). Finish.

  Here, in this control example, it is not possible to determine whether or not the probability variation gaming state is provided until the gaming ball passes the probability variation switch 65a5 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the present control example, by executing the processing of S507 to S512, if there is winning information that will be a big hit that can pass through the probability variation switch 65a5, the lottery results for high probability and low probability will be It can be acquired and notified to the audio lamp control device 113. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can display an appropriate effect either in the case where the probability variation gaming state is given or in the case where the probability variation gaming state is not given.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device or the motorized role associated with the second winning opening 640 It is a process for controlling the opening time of a thing etc.

  In this normal symbol variation processing (FIG. 89, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening / closing control of the motorized role piece 640a attached to the first winning opening 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device. The middle part is included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not inside the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608).

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol (S 608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S 609). As a jackpot of special symbols, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbols (including during the jackpot game of the special symbols) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the second symbol random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second symbol per random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 73 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the second random number table 202c for probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 73 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol of "o" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is judged whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time state (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time state (S614: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. , And the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 640a is set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to the process of S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the motorized jack 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is 0 The setting is made for 2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the processing shifts to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S 618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time shortening state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S 622). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S 622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S 622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S 623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the process of S 618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device Is set as When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display on the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit-displayed) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (this time lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 89, S106) is the ordinary symbol It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized role object 640 a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the process of S625, the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is performed. The control is started, and the open / close control of the motorized part is continued until the open time and the open number set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 90, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holding times of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S703).

  Whether the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 92, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (one second in this control example) is performed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. Note that, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 93, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 93), first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 84) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 84), and if there is winning detection information, it corresponds to the winning ball number to the payout control device 111. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) and the start winning process (see FIG. 87) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 94) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 (S1005). In the motorized part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set in the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the opening / closing control of the motorized part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In addition, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device 37A, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86) ends. In the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86), the variation symbol being executed in 37B is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B stop display (lighting display).

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol change processing (see FIG. 89), the variation executed in the second symbol display device The display is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 89). ).

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1009: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 91 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the specific winning opening ( Large opening port) A process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 94, S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 85) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol in the process of S1103 (S1103: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1103 that the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). When it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (S1105). FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 95, S1105), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the opening scenario set (S1201). The opening operation of the flow passage solenoid (probability solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1201. Thereafter, this process ends. In the process of S1202, the operation of the flow passage solenoid 65k for each round and the operation of the open / close door 65f1 are set.

  Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1204), a round number command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1205), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is then determined whether it is the operation timing of the positive solenoid 65k (S1106). If it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probability changing solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the probability changing solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1107), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1106 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108). The ending timing of the ending effect is the starting timing of the ending effect when 15 rounds are finished and the open / close door 65f1 is closed and the waiting time (3 seconds in this control example) which is the ball discharging time has elapsed. It is determined as If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the probability changing solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1109), and the ending process is executed (S1110). Thereafter, this process ends. Although illustration is omitted, in the present control example, when one gaming ball passes the probability changing switch 65a5, the probability changing solenoid 65k is set to be off. However, in consideration of the case where the game ball does not pass through the probability changing switch 65a5 and the big hit game is ended, the probability changing solenoid 65k is set to be off just in the process of S1009.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 96, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 96, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the audio lamp control device 113 (S1301). It is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S1302). When it is determined in the process of S1302 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1302: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to be on (S1303), and this processing is ended. Although illustration is omitted, the probability change setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probability change flag 203g being set to on.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1302 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the present control example, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on at the end of the jackpot game, and if the probability change setting flag 203h is on, the probability change flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the gaming ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 and set the probability change. Thus, the player can be expected to shift to the probability variation gaming state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the game ball can pass during the big hit game to the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change game state is awarded after the big hit game, so whether the game ball passes to the probability change switch 65a5 also during the big hit game You can play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1401). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1401: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1402). The determination of the end timing of the 12th round is made in the 12th round when it is detected that 10 balls have been won or it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the twelfth round (S1402: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1402 that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1402: No), this process ends. Here, the counter for 2 seconds is set in S1403, so that the notification counter 203m becomes 0 within 3 seconds of the interval time which is the flash time after the 12 rounds are finished, and the sound of seeing the liquid crystal is It is output. Therefore, the channel solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but since the player can draw attention to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified, It can be suppressed that the jackpot type is identified to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting the probability change gaming state to be provided until the end of the jackpot game.

  In this control example, by providing the notification counter 203m, effects are drawn to draw attention to the liquid crystal across the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the present invention is not limited thereto. From the 12th round It may be performed continuously.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1401: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is decremented by one and updated (S1404). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m after update is 0 (S1405). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405: Yes), a notification command is set (S1406). Thereafter, this process ends. In response to the notification command, the audio lamp control device 113 performs setting of an audio output of "seeing liquid crystal".

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 97, S1111) is executed, a winning process is performed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 98, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1501). The round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is out of the round effective period (S1501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether it has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a is passed (S1502: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated, and the winning number command indicating the value of the updated winning number counter 203j is It sets (S1503). Thereafter, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not passed (S1502: No), the processing of S1504 is executed.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1506). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1507). Thereafter, the processing of S1508 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203 n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being blown after the open / close door 65 f 1 is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1504 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1505). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1505: Yes), the processing of S1506 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1505: No), the processing of S1508 is executed.

  In the process of S1508, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S1508). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1508: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by one and updated (S1509). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65a5 (S1510). If it is determined that the gaming ball has passed the probability variation passing switch 65e3 (S1510: Yes), the value of the probability variation passing counter 203i is updated by adding one (S1511). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on (S1512). Thereafter, the process of S1513 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1510 that the gaming ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65a5 (S1510: No), the process of S1513 is executed. In the process of S1513, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1513). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1514). The probability variation effective flag 203 q is set to on (S 1515). Thereafter, this process ends. Here, when the game ball remaining in the special channel 65e2 passes the probability variation switch 65a5 even after the switching member 65h is switched by setting the probability variation effective flag 203q to ON, the probability variation game Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1508 that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1508: No), it is determined whether the probability variation effective flag 203q is on (S1516). If the probability variation valid flag 203 q is off (S 1516: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203 q is on (S 1516: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation valid timer 203 r to update (S 1517). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation effective timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1518). If it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203 r is the upper limit value (S 1518: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203 q is set to OFF (S 1519). The probability variation effective timer 203r is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1520), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1518 that the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1518: No), the process of S1510 is executed.

  Thereby, if the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed the probability variation switch 65a5, so the probability variation gaming state can be set in consideration of the time of the ball swelling. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state being given by causing the probability variation switch 65a5 to pass the gaming ball illegally.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1113). Thereafter, this process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), processing is performed to monitor whether the probability changing switch 65a5 has been illegally passed.

  In the abnormality processing (FIG. 99, S1113), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1601). When it is out of the round effective period (S1601: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is within the round effective period (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1602). If it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602: Yes), the value of the ball exclusion counter 203s is incremented by one and updated (S1603). Thereafter, the process of S1604 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602: No), the processing of S1604 is executed.

  In the process of S1604, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203 n is off (S1604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by 1 and updated since it is in the period of the balling time (S1605). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether the upper limit (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1606). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper limit value is determined (S1606: Yes), the number of discharged items (total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the number of winning numbers (value of the number-of-winnings counter 203j) It is determined (S1607).

  If it is determined that they match (S1607: Yes), the processing of S1609 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match (S1607: No), an error command is set (S1608). Thereafter, the processing of S1609 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the injustice in which the game ball is made to remain illegally in the variable winning device 65 and the probability changing switch 65a5 passes the game ball even if it is the big hit B.

  In the process of S1609, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1609), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1610). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are respectively reset to initial values (S1611), and then this process is ended.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 108, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 100, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is performed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1815 is performed (see FIG. 101) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S 1702). As described later with reference to FIG. 101, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1814 in FIG. 101), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing in S1815. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1815 is in progress can be determined according to the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1702: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1815 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. And from) it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is corrupted (S1703: Yes), and the process moves to S1704. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1817 after an instantaneous power failure occurs, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1702: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure and during the execution of the power-off process of S1817, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1704, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1706). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1708, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1817 is performed (see S1816 in FIG. 101). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1817 is executed, the process of S1708 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1817 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1709), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). The permission is set (S1711), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1708 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1704 through S1706 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), S1709, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1710, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). Then (S1711), it shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1709 is that, when the process of S1708 is reached via the processes of S1704 to S1706, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1704, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current S1801 process has been executed (S1801), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1813 without performing the process of S1802 to S1811. In the process of S1801, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (rendering) in S1802 to S1811. There is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S 1813 and the command determination process of S 1812 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1812 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the process of S1813 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set in the processes of S1803 to S1813 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1802 ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1804). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1805 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing monitors the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. Moreover, monitoring of the input whether the touch operation was performed with respect to the 3rd symbol display device 81 is also performed.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, the lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33, the lighting pattern of the sub LED 290, and the like are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Details of the lamp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1809, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1809 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S1810, the sub liquid crystal driving process is performed to drive the sub liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal) 523 (slide driving, rotational driving, and the like) (S1811). The details of the sub liquid crystal driving process (S1811) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the sub liquid crystal drive processing (S1811), command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1812). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to the process of S1813. In the process of S1813, the variable display setting process is executed (S1813). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variation display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1814). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1816), and the power-off process is executed (S1817). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1818), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1815) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1815: No), the process returns to S1801, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1815: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the command determination processing (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1812). This command determination process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the ball holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 102, S1812), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control apparatus 110 It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1901). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1903), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 106) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1907). And when the ball holding number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received ball holding number command is the special drawing 1 holding ball number command or the special drawing 2 holding ball number command. , The value contained in the command, ie, the value of special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of main controller 110 (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol), special symbol 2 of main controller 110 The value of the holding ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). Further, in the processing of S1908, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1908 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 holding ball number command or the special figure 2 holding ball number command, when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), or, the lottery of the special symbol line Since it is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when it is detected, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1908 every time a start winning is detected or each time a lottery of a special symbol is performed. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 Even if it deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when detecting start winnings or drawing special symbols. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e. In addition, when the processing of S1908 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is It is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1907, when the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1907: No), it is then determined whether a notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1909). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1909: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in the present control example, "look at liquid crystal") is selected, and a display command for notification is set. (S1910).

  Next, when it is determined in the process of S1909 that the notification command has not been received (S1909: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot related command has been received (S1911). If it is determined in the process of S1911 that the jackpot-related command has been received (S1911: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S1912), and the process shifts to the process of S1913. The details of the jackpot related processing (S1912) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1911 that a jackpot-related command has not been received, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1913.

  In the process of S1913, it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and a process according to the received command is executed (S1913), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed control device 114 The command is set to be sent to the

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot related processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related process (S1912). The jackpot related process (S1912) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 1812) that a jackpot related command has been received.

  In the jackpot related process, it is determined first whether an opening command has been received (S2001). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set (S2002), and this processing is ended. The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect that suggests the start of the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S2003). When it is determined in the process of S2003 that the round number command has been received (S2003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S2004). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223g (S2005), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2003 that the round number command has not been received (S2003: No), it is determined whether a winning number command has been received (S2006). If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is updated based on the received command, and the process proceeds to S2008.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether the value of the sub winning number counter 223h updated in the process of S2007 is greater than 10 (S2008). In the process of S2008, when the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is greater than 10 (S2008: Yes), more gaming balls than the predetermined number of winnings (10) in one round entered the specified winning opening 65a ( So-called over winning)). In this case, the over winning process is executed (S2009), and the process is ended. The details of the over winning process (S2009) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2008 that the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is 10 or less (S2008: No), a normal effect command is set to execute a normal winning effect, and the main effect command is set. End the process.

  If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2011).

  If it is determined in the process of S2011 that the ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), the ending setting process is executed (S2012), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S2013), and this process is ended. Do. The details of the ending setting process (S2012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S2011 that no ending command has been received (S2011: No), it is determined whether a V-passing command has been received (S2014).

  In the process of S2014, when it is determined that the V passage command has been received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 to execute an effect that suggests that the probability change gaming state is provided, A display V effect command is set (S2015), and this processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the over winning process (S2009) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing this over winning process (S2009). The over winning process (S2009) is a process performed in the above-described jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103) to execute an effect based on the over winning on the specific winning hole 65a.

  In the over winning process, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is obtained (S2101). Then, it is determined whether or not there is winning information to be hit in the winning information storage area 223a (S2103). If it is determined that there is winning information to be hit (S2103: Yes), the over winning effect is selected from the winning over prize table 222b1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the processing of S2101 (S2103) , And moves on to the process of S2107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information to be hit in the process of S2103 (S2103: No), it is then determined whether there is winning information including information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON. (S2104). If it is determined in the process of S2104 that there is winning information including information in which the indication flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: Yes), the indication over prize table 222b2 is over based on the value of the effect counter 223f. A winning effect is selected (S2105), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2107.

  If it is determined in the process of S2104 that there is no winning information including information in which the indication flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: No), the over-off winning table 222b3 is over based on the value of the effect counter 223f. A winning effect is selected (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107.

  In the process of S2107, a display over winning command indicating the over winning effect selected in the process of S2103, S2105 or S2106 is set (S2107), and the process proceeds to S2108.

  In the process of S2108, it is determined whether or not the selected over winning effect is "a fish school" (S2108). If it is determined that the selected over winning effect is "fish school" (S2108: Yes), the fish school flag 223i is set to ON (S2109), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2108 that the selected over-winning effect is not "fish school" (S2108: No), then it is determined whether or not the selected over-winning effect is "foam". (S2110). If it is determined that the selected over winning effect is "bubble" (S2110), the number-of-bubbles counter 223j is incremented by 1 (S2111), and the process is ended. In the process of S2111, the number of times “bubble” is selected in the over winning is stored, and when selecting the ending effect, the selection ratio of the ending effect is changed according to the number of times “foam” is selected (FIG. See 104).

  If it is determined in the process of S2110 that the selected over winning effect is not a "bubble" (S2110: No), this process is ended as it is.

  As described above, the over-winning effect displayed at the time of the over-winning is different depending on whether the winning information storage area 223a has information to be a big hit (that is, whether or not it is a big win thereafter). Is configured as. As a result, since the player performs the game in anticipation of the display of the over winning effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, an ending setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this ending setting process (S2012). The ending setting process (S2012) is a process executed in the above-described jackpot related process (see FIG. 103), and is a process for executing an effect at the end of the jackpot.

  In the ending setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201). If it is determined in the process of S2201 that the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), then, in the over prize game, an effect that suggests that a probability change gaming state is to be given is already executed (displayed) Since this is the case, the continuous ending effect is selected (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect which suggests that the probability variation gaming state is given is repeatedly performed (displayed) and the player feels a sense of discomfort.

  If it is determined in the process of S2201 that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), then the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S2203). Then, it is determined whether or not winning information to be hit is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204).

  In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the winning information to be hit is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: Yes), an ending effect is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f from the hitting end table 222c1. (S2205), the process proceeds to S2209.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2204, when it is determined that the winning information to be hit is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: No), next, winning information including information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON. It is determined whether or not there is (S2206).

  If it is determined in the process of S2206 that there is winning information including information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: Yes), an effect is selected from the sign ending table 222c2 and the process moves to the process of S2209. Do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2206 that there is no winning information including information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: No), an effect is selected from the out-ending table 222c3 and the process of S2209 Transition to

  In the process of S2209, an effect command indicating the effect selected in the process of S2202, S2205, S2207 or S2208 is set (S2209), the fish school flag 223i is set off (S2210), and the value of the bubble number counter 223j is set. It sets to 0 (S2211), and ends this processing.

  As described above, the ending effect displayed at the end of the jackpot is different depending on whether the winning information storage area 223a includes the information for the jackpot (that is, whether or not the jackpot is subsequently the jackpot). Is configured as. As a result, since the player pays attention to the ending effect to execute the game, the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the variable display setting process (S1813) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1813). This variation display setting process (S 1813) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation presentation, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S2301: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S2306. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2302), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2303).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2304). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  When the process of S2304 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is a setting of a driving scenario in the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S2303 (S2305). If it is determined in the process of S2305 that there is a setting of the driving scenario (S2305: Yes), the corresponding driving scenario is stored from the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222d to the driving scenario storage area 223n (S2306). The counter 223m is set to 0 (S2307), and the process proceeds to the process of S2308.

  In the process of S2308, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2308). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S2308: No), since the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2308: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2309), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2310). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2311), and the process shifts to the processing of S2312. In the process of S2312, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S2312). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a lamp editing process (S1808) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this lamp editing process (S1808). This lamp editing process (S1808) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the same timing as the sub-symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114 Execute settings such as lighting of the sub LED whose lighting is controlled by.

  In the lamp editing process (FIG. 107, S1808), first, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generation device 900 has changed (S2401). If it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2401: No), the processing from S2402 to S2406 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S2407.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2401 that the clock signal has changed (S2401: Yes), the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S2402), and it is determined whether it is the fluctuation start timing (S2403). .

  If it is determined in the process of S 2403 that it is not the fluctuation start timing (S 2403: No), the process of S 2404 to S 2406 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S 2407.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S 2403 that it is the fluctuation start timing (S 2403: Yes), the value of the clock counter to be lit is determined based on the selected fluctuation time (S 2404). Then, the counter command indicating the value of the clock counter determined in the process of S2404 is set (S2405), the lighting data of the sub LED is set based on the determined value of the clock counter (S2406), and the process proceeds to S2407. Do.

  In the process of S2407, a process for lighting other lamps is performed, and the process ends.

  Although details will be described later, the sound lamp control device 113 and the sub display device 114 execute lighting of the sub LED and display of the sub symbol based on the value of the counter updated based on the same clock signal. I am trying to do it. Thereby, control can be performed to light the sub LED at the same timing as the sub symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the sub liquid crystal drive processing (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the sub liquid crystal driving process (S1811). The sub liquid crystal drive processing (S 1811) is processing executed in the main processing (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and drives the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (slide drive, It is processing for causing rotation drive etc.).

  In the sub liquid crystal drive processing (FIG. 108, S1811), first, it is determined whether or not a drive scenario is stored in the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2501). If it is determined in the process of S2501 that the drive scenario is not stored, it is not the timing for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, the process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2501 that the drive scenario is stored (S2501: Yes), the drive scenario counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S2502).

  Then, in the drive scenario stored in the drive scenario storage area, it is determined whether there is motor drive data corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m after addition (S2503). If it is determined in the process of S2503 that there is motor drive data (S2503: Yes), various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are driven based on the motor drive data. In order to cause the motor drive data to be set, the motor drive data is set based on the information of the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2504), the drive data command is set (S2505), and this processing is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S2503 that there is no motor drive data (S2503), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506). Specifically, if the information of the driving scenario storage area corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is "END", it is determined that it is the end timing of the driving scenario.

  If it is determined in the process of S2506 that it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506: Yes), the information of the drive scenario storage area 223n is cleared (S2507), and this process is finished.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2506 that it is not the end timing of the drive scenario, the present process is ended as it is.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device in First Control Example
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 126. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in this control example. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2601), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2702). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2701.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2702, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2703). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after performing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S2601 in FIG. 109) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) (S2705), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2601) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 110, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2701 is a boot program that executes the boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2702. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2703 to S2705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2701. After repeating the process of S2702 and the process of S2702 multiple times, the processes of S2703 to S2705 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in this control example, a case was described in which a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2703 to S2705 without performing the processes of S2701 and S2702. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2603). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2603, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2604). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2604, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S2605). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 123A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S4602 in FIG. 123A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111 (b)), it is simplified so that the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are power-on images, are drawn. The command determination process (see S2908 in FIG. 111B) and the simple display setting process (see S2909 in FIG. 111B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first winning opening 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is from the main control unit 110 by the voice lamp control device If it is via 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power variation image (not shown) is displayed immediately during the variation presentation period to perform a simple variation presentation Can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2605, the interrupt permission is set (S2606), and the start of clock output is set to the clock generation device 900 (S2607). Thus, the clock output is started after the display control device 114 has risen. Since the audio lamp control device 113 starts up earlier than the display control device 114, the clock output is started after both of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have risen. Can be accurately synchronized.

  After that, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2606, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111 (a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 111 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2801), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 111 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interruption process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2901: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2902) is performed, and then a display setting process (S2903) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S2902), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2903), the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2902) or the like. Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 93.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2904). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2903) or the simple display setting processing (S2909) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2905). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

  Next, in order to correct the drawing content, the drawing correction process is executed (S2906). Details of the drawing correction process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2907). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2904), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2905) The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2908). As a counter updated by the process of S2908, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance) The stop type table corresponding to the eye and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generation device 900 has changed (S2909). If it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2909: Yes), the display clock counter is incremented by one (S2910), and the V interrupt processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2909: No), the V interrupt processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2911) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2912) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2902) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 112, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3001), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S3001: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2903) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S3002). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S3003).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3004), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3004: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S3005), the process returns to the process of S3001.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S3005) will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 113 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It sets to buffer 233 d (S3101).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S3101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in this control example, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3101 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S3101 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3103). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3103. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3104), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3105). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3106), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3105, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3101. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3 102. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3104, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3004 that there is no display variation pattern command (S3004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display suspension type command among the unprocessed commands (S3006), If there is a display variation type command (S3006: Yes), the stop type command processing is executed (S3007), and the process returns to S3001.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (b). FIG. 113 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S3201), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S3202).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S3203), and ends this type-of-stop command processing and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S3202 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2904), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S3202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3203, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this control example, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3201, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S3202.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present control example, in fact, if it is "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3006 that there is no display type command for suspension (S3006: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3008), the jackpot If there is a related command, display jackpot related command processing is executed (S3009), and the process returns to the processing of S3001.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117, the above-mentioned display jackpot related command process (S3009) which is one process of the command determination process (S2902, see FIG. 112) executed by MPU 231 of display control device 114. Details will be described. First, FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the display jackpot related command processing for display.

  In this display jackpot related command processing, as shown in FIG. 114, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S3301), and if there is a display opening command (S3301) S3301: Yes) Execute opening command processing (S3302), and shift to the processing of S3303.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S3302) will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 115 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 3401). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3403). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3404). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3405), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S3301 that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3303), and display is performed. If there is a command for the number of rounds (S3303: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233 d is set (S 3501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3505), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S3303 that there is no display round number command (S3303: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3305), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S3305: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process proceeds to S3307.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S3306) will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (a). FIG. 116 (a) is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S3601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3605), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

  Here, the description returns to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3305 that there is no display ending command (S3305: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display normal winning presentation command among the unprocessed commands (S3307), If there is a normal winning presentation effect display command (S3307: Yes), the normal winning presentation effect command processing is executed (S3308), and the process proceeds to S3309.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 116 (b), the details of the normal winning effect effect command process (S3308) will be described. FIG. 116 (b) is a flowchart showing normal winning effect command processing. This normal winning a prize production command processing is something which executes the processing which corresponds to the usual winning a prize production command for display which is received from sound lamp control control equipment 113.

  In the normal winning effect command processing, first, the normal winning display data table corresponding to the display mode of the normal winning effect indicated by the display normal winning effect command is determined, and the determined normal winning display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. From the display data table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3702).

  Next, based on the normal winning display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3701, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3705), the normal winning command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3307 that there is no display normal winning presentation command (S3307: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display over prize presentation command among the unprocessed commands (S3309) If there is a display over prize effect command (S3309: Yes), a normal over effect command process is executed (S3310), and the process proceeds to S3311.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 117 (a), the details of the over winning prize effect command process (S3310) will be described. FIG. 117 (a) is a flow chart showing the over winning prize effect command processing. The over winning prize effect command process is a process corresponding to the over winning prize effect command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the over prize effect command process, first, the over prize effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the over prize effect indicated by the over prize effect command for display is determined, and the determined over prize effect display data table is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802).

  Next, based on the over winning prize effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3805), the over winning prize effect command processing ends, and the processing returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3309 that there is no over prize for display effect command (S3309: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a V effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3311) If there is a display V effect command (S3311: Yes), V effect command processing is executed (S3312), and the display jackpot related command processing is ended.

  Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S3312) will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117 (b) is a flowchart showing V-effect command processing. The V effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display V effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of V effect indicated by the V effect command for display is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. , And the display data table buffer 233d (S3901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e (S 3902).

  Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3805), the V-effect command processing ends, and the processing returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to the description of FIG. In the process of S3311, when it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S3311: No), the display jackpot related command process is ended as it is.

  Referring back to FIG. 112, the description will be continued. In the process of S3008, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S3008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3010), the back image change command If there is (S3010: Yes), the back image change command processing is executed (S3011), and the process returns to S3001.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S3009) will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (a). FIG. 118 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4603) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set to on (S4001) . Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S4002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S4001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4002. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S4002 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3010 that there is no rear image change command (S3010: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S3010). For example (S3010: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3011), and the process returns to S3001.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S3011) will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). FIG. 118 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S4101). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4101, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4102, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in S4102, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3012 that there is no error command (S3012: No), then it is determined whether there is a counter command among the unprocessed commands (S3014).

  If it is determined in the process of S3014 that there is a counter command (S3014: Yes), the lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the received command (S3015), and the process returns to the process of S3001. The display control device 114 is notified of the timing of lighting the sub LED 290 in the audio lamp control device 113 by the counter command. The lighting clock storage area 223 n is updated based on the notified timing at which the sub LED 290 is lit. Based on the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 223n and the display clock counter 223m, a sub symbol is set in a sub symbol setting process (see FIG. 122) described later. Thus, based on the display clock counter 223m, which is a counter synchronized with the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed such that the sub symbol is displayed at the same timing as the sub LED 290 is lit in the audio lamp control device 113. Since it can do, lighting of sub LED 290 and display of a sub pattern can be synchronized and produced.

  In the process of S3014, when it is determined that there is no counter command (S3014: No), next, it is determined whether there is a drive data command (S3016), and if there is a drive data command (S3016: Yes) The drive data storage area 223p is updated based on the command (S3017), and the process proceeds to S3001.

  Since the display content (for example, the display angle etc.) can be changed according to the information driven by the sub liquid crystal display device 523 updated by the process of S3017, a suitable effect can be performed.

  If it is determined in the process of S3016 that there is no drive data command (S3016: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3018), and the process returns to the process of S3001.

  In the process of S3001 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes ), The processing of S3002 to S3013, S3019 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3001 to S3013, S3019 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in S3001 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this process is performed. The command determination process ends.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2911) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary to display the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 113 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 113 (b)) which are processes corresponding to each command are executed. With regard to the command of, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 113A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3101. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3102, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2903) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 112, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S4201: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S4202 to S4204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S4202), S4203 to S4204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S4203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S4204).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 120, the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S4301).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Determine various parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4204), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S4203 (S4203: No), the process proceeds to S4205.

  At S4205, pointer update processing is executed (S4205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 4401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S4401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information Is determined (S4402). As a result, if it is the End information (S4402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S4403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S4405), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4406), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S4402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S4206 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and the display coordinate position for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as zoom ratio and rotation angle.

  Next, in order to set the display of the sub symbol, the sub symbol setting process is executed (S4207). Here, the details of the sub symbol setting process (S4207) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The sub symbol setting process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 or the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to display the sub symbol in synchronization with the sub LED 290 whose lighting control is performed in the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the sub symbol setting process (S4207), first, it is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation period (S4501). In the process of S4501, when it is determined that it is not a fluctuation period (S4501: No), since it is not the timing to display the sub symbol displayed corresponding to the fluctuation, the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a fluctuation period (S4501), it is then determined whether the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502). Specifically, it is determined whether the information corresponding to the value of the display clock counter 233m among the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 233n is lighting information.

  If it is determined in the process of S4502 that the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502: Yes), the drawing contents acquired in the process of S4206 in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) Among them, the information on the sub symbol is set to light (changed), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the value of the display clock counter 233m is not the value of the lighting timing (S4502: No), the drawing content acquired in the process of S4206 in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) Among the above, the information on the sub symbol is set to be turned off (changed), and this processing is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. When the process of S4207 is completed, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4208), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S4209). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4209: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4209: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to stop the variable display and stop the display, so it is confirmed whether the finalized display flag 233z is on or not. (S4210).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is off (S4210: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed on the display data table buffer 233d. (S4311), and then write null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4212). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4213), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4214). Then, after setting the decision display flag 233z indicating that the decision display effect is being performed in the on state (S4215), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing (S4216).

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4216 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2904), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S4216, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4210, if the finalized display flag 233z is not on but off (S4210: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4217). Then, if the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S4217: Yes), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data It is set in the table buffer 233 d (S 4218), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 4219). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4220). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4221), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that demonstration is being performed in the on state is set to on (S4222), this processing is ended, and the processing is returned to the V interrupt processing. .

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S4217, if the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4217: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is performed as it is End and return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2912) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 111B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simplified display setting process, the power-on-time fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect due to the power-on time fluctuation image ends A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display (not shown) in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2905) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 123 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: YES), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S4602) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S4601, that is, if it is off (S4601: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123 (b), the resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 123 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4701: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4702). In the process of S4702, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S4702 (S4702: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to S4703. Also, as a result of the process of S4701, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to S4703.

  In the process of S4703, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4703: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing of S4703, if all resident target image data has been transferred (S4703: Yes), the simplified image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing is ended. Accordingly, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2908 in FIG. 111B) and the simple display setting process (see S2909 in FIG. 111B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 93) are performed, drawing of an image in normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) (see S4601: No in FIG. 123A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, a normal image transfer setting process (S4603) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4205) of the display setting process (S2903) executed earlier is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802), and if it is transfer data information (S4802: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S4802 (S4802: No), the processes of S4803 and S4804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of the image data is completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4806).

  In the process of S4806, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S4806 (S4806: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4806: Yes), the process proceeds to S4807. Also, as a result of the process of S4805, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4807.

  In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4807: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4807: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S4809). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S4809: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S4810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4811). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4813.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S4813, when the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S4813, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The determination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4813 (S4813: Yes), the character ROM 234 does not need to transfer the image data to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4814). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4814, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233 j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and the sub of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, when the change of the back image is performed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing the normal-use image transfer process, the back image The image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the above can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, details of the above-mentioned drawing correction process (S2906) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this drawing correction process. The drawing correction process (S2906) is a process for correcting an effect to be displayed in response to driving of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

  In the drawing correction process, first, it is determined whether the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven (S4901). If it is determined in the process of S4901 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not driven (S4901: No), there is no need to correct the drawing content, so this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven (S4901: Yes), the process proceeds to S4902 in order to perform correction according to the drive state.

  In the process of S4902, it is determined whether the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slide-driven (S4902). If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slidingly driven (S4902: Yes), the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected according to the amount of movement being slid. (S4903), the processing proceeds to S4904. In the process of S4903, the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected to execute an effect such that the display positions of the symbols 1 to 3 are integrally changed in response to the driving of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (display) The player's interest can be improved.

  If it is determined that the slide drive is not performed in the process of S4902 (S4902: No), the process of S4903 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4904.

  In the process of S4904, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904). If it is determined in the process of S4904 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904: Yes), the display coordinates (and the display angles of all the images are displayed according to the amount of rotation being rotationally driven. ) Is corrected (S4905), and this processing ends.

  Since the display coordinates (and the display angle) of the image can be corrected according to the amount of rotation of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the processing of S4905, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, a suitable effect is displayed can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2907) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2904) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2905) (S4301). That is, in the processing of S4301, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2904), for each sprite, the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2905), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4302, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S4303). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 k is performed by inverting the value, that is, by setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 111B) is performed, it is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the first control example, the over winning effect is displayed when the gaming ball over wins the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the player has won an over-winning during the jackpot game, so that the player can easily understand the gaming machine.

  In addition, you may display the information which shows the number of the game balls which carried out the over prize as an over prize production | presentation. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine where the player can easily grasp the number of game balls for which the over-winning is achieved. In addition, the effect may be varied according to the number of game balls for which the over prize has been won. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of game balls for which the over-winning is achieved, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, as the over winning effect, the over winning effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is easily displayed in response to the progress of the round in the big hit game. That is, according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the selection ratio of the over winning effect is configured to be different. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest even if the jackpot game takes a long time.

  In the first control example, a character string indicating right strike (right strike right strike right strike) is configured to be displayed circumferentially. As a result, even when the display screen (the sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to preferably indicate (inform) that the game state in which the right-handed game is to be performed.

  It is also possible to display a message indicating right strike and output a voice indicating a right strike (for example, a voice saying "Please hit right"). As a result, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to preferably indicate (inform) that the game state is to hit the right.

  In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decoration surface 523 b which is the back side of the display surface 523 a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 so that the LED blinks in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523 a. Configured.

  Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversely operated and the display surface 523 a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can not be visually recognized, the state of the blinking display of the sub symbol is grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. Can provide an easy-to-understand game machine for the player.

  In the first control example, a symbol is displayed across the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. It was configured to change the display position of the symbol according to being displaced. Thus, effects can be provided by effectively utilizing the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the player's interest can be improved. In addition, even if the third liquid crystal display device 523 is in a state in which a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 can not be viewed, effects can be suitably displayed.

  In the first control example, when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven (slided) up and down (that is, when the display area becomes vertically long), they are driven horizontally (slide) The display angle and the display coordinates of the image data are corrected in the case where the display area is horizontally long). Thus, effects can be provided by effectively utilizing the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the player's interest can be improved.

<On the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 137, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a tenth embodiment. In the first control example described above, the gaming machine has been described that displays an effect when the gaming ball is over-winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the game balls that are over-winning during the big hit game are stored in the area where the player can visually recognize, and according to the number of stored game balls, the ending effect of the big hit game It was configured to make the presentation contents variable. This makes it possible to pay attention to the number of gaming balls that are over-winning during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the first control example described above, the display screen (the sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device) is displayed by arranging character strings (right strike right strike right strike) suggesting a right strike in a circumferential shape. The gaming machine has been described that can suitably suggest that the gaming state in which a right-handed game is played even when 81) is rotated.

  On the other hand, in this control example, direction notification LEDs 295a to j for suggesting the gaming state (the direction in which the game ball is fired) are arranged circumferentially on the decoration surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The game state is indicated by the lighting pattern (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j arranged in a shape. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversely displayed, it is possible to suggest (inform) the gaming state by the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Furthermore, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is possible to suggest (notify) the gaming state without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j arranged in a circumferential shape.

  In this second control example, the game ball that has overwined the variable winning device 65 is changed so as to be stored in the area where the player can visually recognize, and the inside of the variable winning device 65 is over in the first control example. A distribution state 65c for distributing whether or not to store the winning game ball and a distribution motor 65c2 for driving the distribution member, and a gaming state on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 The difference is in that the direction notification LEDs 295a to j for suggesting (the direction in which the game ball is to be fired) are arranged circumferentially. In addition, the content of RAM 223 in audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the processing executed by MPU 201 of main control device 110, and the processing executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control processing 113 are partially modified. It differs in the point which The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 127 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 127, the present control example is different in that the inside of the variable winning device 65 in the first control example described above is changed, and the other points are the same.

  Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, the variable winning device 65 in the present control example, similarly to the first control example, opens and closes the opening and closing door 65f1 a predetermined number of times (for example, It is repeatedly executed 15 times (round). In each round, the open / close door 65f1 is opened until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds has elapsed or a predetermined number (10) balls are won).

  In each round, up to a predetermined number of winning game balls are discharged through the normal winning flow channel 65e1 in the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, gaming balls that have won a predetermined number (so-called, over winning gaming balls) are configured to flow over the over winning flow path 65e2 in the variable winning device 65.

  On the left side of the open / close door 65f1, an effect section is formed to execute effects with the game ball after winning the variable winning device 65. The details of this effect section will be described with reference to FIG. 128, but the game balls (hereinafter referred to as over winning) that have won more than 10 in each round game are distributed members 65c (see FIG. 128). The effect of whether to be guided to the storage channel 65e4 or not is executed. In this control example, when four or more balls are stored in the storage flow path 65 e 4 in each round, it is configured to indicate that a holding ball which is a hit is stored in the holding ball. As shown in FIG. 127, since the sorting member 65c and the storage channel 65e4 are disposed at positions where they can be viewed by the player, winning balls are paid out more than usual by winning over in the jackpot game. In addition to feeling of expectation, it is possible to enjoy the effect of whether or not the over-winning gaming ball is guided to the storage channel 65e4. Thus, the player's interest can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, details of the variable winning device 65 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 128 (a) is a rear view of the variable winning device 65 immediately after the start of each round. The specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 has a vertically long opening formed at a height allowing one ball to pass through the game ball, and the game ball entering the opening is to the back side of the game board 13 And a guiding path is formed. A guiding hole for guiding the gaming ball to the guiding path for causing the gaming ball to flow downstream is formed inside the specific winning hole 65a, and the guiding hole and the over winning flow path 65e3 described below or the normal winning combination It is formed in communication with the flow path 65e1. A detection switch 65a1 is attached to the guiding hole, and the gaming ball having entered the specified winning hole 65a is detected.

  A prize channel switching member 65b is disposed between the regular prize channel 65e1 and the over prize channel 65e3 so that the game balls can be divided into the regular prize channel 65e1 and the over prize channel 65e3. It is done. The winning channel switching member 65b is rotated upward by the over winning solenoid (not shown) so that the tip is directed horizontally (refer to FIG. 128 (b)) and is pivoted downward so that the tip is directed downward. It is configured to be rotatable in the state (see FIG. 128 (a)). When the over prize solenoid is turned on, the prize channel switching member 65b pivots upward (see FIG. 128 (b)), and when the over prize solenoid is turned off, the prize channel switching member 65b is downwardly moved. It is configured to rotate (see FIG. 128 (a)).

  The normal winning flow channel 65e1 is a flow channel for causing the gaming ball to flow vertically downward in a state where the winning flow channel switching member 65b is turned downward (see FIG. 128 (a)), and for discharging the gaming ball It is configured to communicate with the discharge flow path 65e2. In the discharge flow path 65e2, a discharge switch 65a3 for detecting a game ball flowing down is disposed. This regular winning channel 65e1 is a channel through which gaming balls for 10 balls in each round flow down, and the gaming ball which has flowed down is a channel through which the probability change switch 65a5 is disposed through the discharge channel 65e2. After being induced to be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. The gaming ball after being detected by the detection switch 65a1 is treated as an out ball in the same manner as the gaming ball after entering the out port. By being treated as an out ball, it is also possible to store gaming balls and use them for effects.

  In the over winning channel 65e3, in a state in which the winning channel switching member 65b is rotated upward and is in communication with the over winning channel 65e3 (see FIG. 128 (b)), the gaming channel is allowed to flow leftward It is. The over prize winning channel 65e3 is a channel through which an over winning gaming ball winning over 10 balls in each round flows down. At the end of the over winning passage 65e3, an over winning detection switch 65a2 (photo sensor) is arranged to detect the passage of the over winning gaming ball. On the downstream side of the over prize winning channel 65e3, a sorting member 65c for sorting the over winning gaming balls into a storage channel 65e4 and a discharging channel 65e2 is disposed.

  The distributing member 65c is formed of a disk-shaped outer shape, and has a thickness (15 mm) slightly larger than one game ball. At the center of the distributing member 65c, a shaft portion formed to protrude to the back side is formed, and it is configured to be rotatable to the left and right by a stepping motor. In the distributing member 65c, a concave portion in which the game ball can enter one ball is formed as a storage area 65c1. In the storage area 65c1, an opening is formed on the side surface of the distribution member 65c, and a game ball flowing down from the over prize winning channel 65e3 is configured to be able to enter the ball. The storage area 65c1 is configured such that when the game ball enters the ball, the entire game ball is contained within the storage area 65c1 and is configured so that rotation does not occur even when the sorting member 65c rotates. It is done. The sorting member 65c is always at the storage area 65c1 in the direction of 45 degrees in the upper right, which is a position where it can receive gaming balls flowing down from the over prize flow channel 65e3 in the leader area 65c1 (see FIG. 128A). It is stopped in the state where the opening is facing, and it rotates in either left or right direction with the gaming ball stored in the storage area 65c1 two seconds after the game ball is detected by the over prize detection switch 65a2 It is configured. The direction to be rotated is determined based on the result of determination of acceptance balls stored in the storage ball. Although the details will be described later, when a big hit ball is stored, a lottery is executed with a probability of 1/2 each time an over-winning game ball is generated, and it is determined that the lottery is won. The dividing member 65c pivots in the left direction, and the gaming ball stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the storage flow path 65e4. The upper limit is 6 balls, and when 6 balls are stored in the storage area 65i, the distributing member 65c rotates in the right direction with the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1. The game ball stored in the discharge flow path 65e2 is made to flow down. If the lottery with the probability of 1/2 described above occurs, the distributing member 65c rotates in the right direction, and the gaming balls in the storage area 65c1 are guided to the discharge flow path 65e2 (sorting) Be done.

  In the case where the big hold ball is not stored in the hold ball in the hold (when the big hold ball is stored when passing the probability change switch 65a5 (including before passing the probability change switch 65a5) The sorting member 65c is pivoted to the left and right in the same manner as in the case where the big hit ball is stored, and it is divided by a probability of 1/3. When the ball that passes the switch 65a5 is stored as a big hit storage ball, the over winning ball is guided to the storage area 65i up to a maximum of 4 balls, and for the game balls further than that, the sorting member 65c is right The game ball stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the discharge flow path 65e2 by rotating in the direction.

  As described above, the storage flow path 65 e 4 is formed with a storage area 65 i capable of storing up to six over winning prize balls at the end portion. The storage area 65i is formed at a height capable of storing game balls in two tiers, and is formed with a depth (15 mm) slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls. The bottom surface of the storage area 65i is gently inclined to the right, and a storage switching member 65g for discharging game balls in the storage area 65i is attached to the downstream end. A shaft portion 65g1 formed on one end side of the storage switching member 65g is rotatably fixed to the upper wall of the storage area 65i, and is rotated upward by a solenoid (not shown) (FIG. 128 (b And the state in which the tip end portion is directed downward downward and which is pivoted downward. In this control example, at the start of the big hit game, it is turned downward, and based on the ending start timing that is the end timing of the big hit game, it is turned upward (rotated in the upper right direction) and the storage area The game balls in 65i are configured to be discharged to the storage discharge flow path 65e6. A storage discharge switch 65a4 (such as a photo sensor) capable of detecting gaming balls discharged from the storage area 65i is disposed in the upstream portion (entrance portion) of the storage discharge flow path 65e6. In addition, the gaming ball discharged from the storage area 65i is configured not to be guided by the probability changing switch 65a5.

  Although not shown, a switching member 65h and a positive change switch 65a5, which are changed by the positive variable solenoid 65k, are provided on the downstream side of the discharge flow passage 65e2. When the probability changing solenoid 65k is on, the flowing game ball can pass the probability changing switch 65a5, and when the probability changing solenoid 65k is off, the flowed game ball can not pass (or is difficult) the probability changing switch 65a5. It is configured to be

  As described above, in the variable winning device 65 in the present control example, the winning passage switching member 65b is such that the game ball passes through the normal winning passage 65e1 until reaching the ten entering balls determined in each round. Is controlled. Therefore, it is possible to divide the flow path between the over-winning gaming ball and the gaming ball before over-winning, and to accurately detect the over-winning gaming ball.

  In this control example, the game board 13 is hollowed out in front of the effect section (the distributing member 65c and the storage channel 65e4, the storage area 65i), and is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine 10 There is.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the over winning occurs in each round, the distributing member 65c is rotated, and an effect of whether the gaming ball is guided to the storage area 65i is executed. Therefore, it can be informed that the over winning has been made. The player can visually recognize that the game ball has entered the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c, confirms the over winning, and enjoys the effect of rotating the distribution member 65c in either left or right direction. it can. It is also possible to predict the success or failure judgment result of the holding balls stored in the hold by the number of gaming balls guided to the storage area 65i during the big hit game. In this control example, when the holding ball which is a big hit is stored in the holding ball, the gaming ball is guided to the storage area 65i with high probability, so the distribution area 65i is used by the distributing member 65c. The judgment result in the holding ball can be predicted also by the frequency of being distributed to Therefore, the game ball is distributed to the storage area 65i, so that the holding ball which is the big hit is stored in the holding ball, and the big hit is continuously executed in a short time even after the big hit game. You can have expectations for Furthermore, in the present control example, the maximum number of gaming balls guided to the storage area 65i is variably set according to the judgment result stored in the hold, so the success / failure judgment result can be early also from the guided number Can be predicted. Furthermore, when five or more balls are stored in the storage area 65i, it can be recognized that the holding ball that will be a big hit is stored in the holding, and the determination result is notified to the player at an early stage to make it interesting. It can be improved.

  In this control example, it is configured to notify that a holding ball that is a big hit with five or more balls is stored, but the number etc. may be set appropriately. In addition, it may be set appropriately in the lottery probability whether or not to distribute to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c. Furthermore, the lottery probability of distribution may be changed according to the history of the occurrence ratio of over winning (in the previous jackpot game). Furthermore, the maximum number may be changed based on the determination result in the holding ball guided to the storage area 65i according to the occurrence ratio of over winning (in the previous jackpot game). In this case, at the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, the third symbol display device 81 provides character or voice guidance such as "If three game balls are stored in the storage area 65i, they will be put on hold!" Thus, the player can easily play the game. Furthermore, although the distributing member 65c is configured to distribute the game balls by turning, the invention is not limited thereto, and it may be configured to distribute in a seesaw shape. In addition, all over winning balls are guided to the storage area 65i, and the number of over winning balls stored is used to report the determination result within the holding ball, or used for promoting effects during a big hit game from normal symbols to definite symbols You may In this case, an effect such as configuring so as to give a promotion chance as many as the number of over winning balls during the jackpot game can be considered.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the second control example, the distribution motor 65c2 is provided, the direction notification LED 295 is provided, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example described above. The other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The distribution motor 65 c 2 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is drive-controlled based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Specifically, when the jackpot game is started, the drive of the distribution motor 65c2 is started, and the distribution member 65c is rotationally driven. As described above, the distributing motor 65c2 is alternately driven counterclockwise and clockwise at regular intervals (2-second intervals), and the storage area 65c1 of the distributing member 65c has flowed down the over pay channel 65e3. A position rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees (a position where the gaming ball in storage area 65c1 flows down to storage channel 65e4) around a position where it can receive gaming balls, and a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise (a position ( The game balls in the storage area 65c1 are alternately moved to the out flow path 65e5) (see FIG. 128).

  The direction notification LED 295 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp output device 113, and lighting control is performed based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The direction notification LED 295 is disposed on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and a total of 10 pieces of five pieces 295f to 295j are provided on the upper decorative surface 523b1 and five pieces 295a to 295e on the lower decorative surface 523b2. (See FIG. 132). As described above, when the gaming state is the gaming state in which the right hitting is performed, it is suggested that the lighting order of the direction notification LED 295 is controlled to turn clockwise (clockwise) and the right hitting is performed. (Notified) If the gaming state is a game state in which the player strikes left, it is controlled to be turned on / off so that the lighting order of the direction LED 295 is left-handed (counterclockwise), suggesting that the player strikes left (Notified).

  Next, contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (a). FIG. 130 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. The RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 in the second control example is different from the RAM 203 of the first control example in that a stored number counter 203 v and a stored upper limit number 203 w are added. The other points are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The stored number counter 203v is a counter for counting the number of game balls distributed to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c among the game balls for which the over prize is won. The value of the stored number counter 203v is incremented by one each time the distribution motor is set as the distribution flow path 65e4 in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133) (see FIG. 133). 5111). Then, in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133), when the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow channel 65e4, it is determined whether the game ball is to be distributed to the storage area exceeding the storage upper limit number. Referenced to. Although not shown, the value of the stored number counter 203v is initialized to 0 at the end of the jackpot game.

  The storage upper limit number 203 w is a value for determining the upper limit of the number of gaming balls distributed to the storage area 65 i by the distributing member 65 c among the gaming balls over winning. The value of the storage upper limit number 203 w is set according to the pending winning information (that is, according to the degree of expectation to be a big hit thereafter) in the sorting motor setting process (see FIG. 134) (FIG. See S5103, S5105, and S5106). Then, when the value of the stored number counter 203v is smaller than the stored upper limit number 203w, it is permitted that the distribution destination is determined to be the stored flow channel 65e4. Although illustration is omitted, the value of the storage upper limit number 203 w is initialized to 0 at the end of the big hit game.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (b). FIG. 130 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, a specific winning opening state 223p and a stored number counter 223r are added to the RAM 223 in the first control example. The other configuration is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state, the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, indicating that the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a, and the specific When the winning opening state 223p is closed, the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and the gaming ball can not enter the specific winning opening 65a (or is difficult) Indicates In the specific winning a prize opening state 223p, an open state is set when a round number command indicating the start of a round in a big hit game (that is, opening of the specific winning a prize opening 65a) is received from the main control device 110 (see S2031 in FIG. 136) When the closing command based on the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning hole 65a is received, the closed state is set (see S2034 in FIG. 136). The specified winning combination port state 223p is referred to when the winning number command is received from the main control unit 110 (see S2032 in FIG. 136), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, or , It is determined whether it is a command based on over winning.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect which is an integrated effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described. FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect executed in this control example.

  First, referring to FIG. 131 (a), the liquid crystal driving interlocking effect when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven up and down will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the liquid crystal drive interlocking production, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are controlled according to the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 being driven up and down. 3 The display content displayed on the symbol display device 81 is changed.

  Specifically, in a state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area obtained by combining the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 The image of the star is displayed on the part.

  Thereafter, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven upward, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven downward, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized at the central portion. According to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is copied and moved in four directions, that is, upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left. The image of the star moved and displayed in the upper right and upper left is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1 that has become visible, and is moved and displayed in the lower right and lower left The image of the star is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have become visible.

  Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is driven further upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is driven further downward, the image of the star displayed by being moved to the upper right and the upper left is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, Images of the stars moved and displayed in the lower right and lower left are displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

  As described above, in the liquid crystal drive interlocking production, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 being driven up and down. As a whole, an effect is displayed in which the star image is moved in four directions: upper right, lower right, lower left, upper left. Thereby, in addition to the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 being driven up and down, since effects corresponding to the drive can be displayed, it is possible to improve the player's interest .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131 (b), the liquid crystal drive interlocking production in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right will be described. .

  According to the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven to the left and right, and the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven vertically. The effect is performed by correcting the rotation angle and the position of the image data using the same image data. As a result, the volume of image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect can be reduced.

  Specifically, in a state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area obtained by combining the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 The image of the star is displayed on the part.

  The star image displayed at the center is displayed rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise), as opposed to the case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. Thus, even in the state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise), the same effect can be displayed using the same image data.

  Thereafter, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven in the left direction, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven in the right direction, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized at the central portion. According to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is copied and moved in four directions, that is, upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left. The image of the star moved and displayed in the upper left and lower left is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1 that has become visible, and is moved and displayed in the upper right and lower right The image of the star is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have become visible.

  The image of the star displayed by being moved in the four directions, upper right, lower right, lower left, upper left, is counterclockwise compared to the case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven vertically. Counterclockwise) is rotated 90 degrees and displayed. In addition, the display position is corrected and displayed. Specifically, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven to the left and right as opposed to the case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down, the display area is vertically elongated. The display area changes to a horizontally long display area. Therefore, the symbol position of each star is corrected so that the amount of movement in the vertical direction is small and the amount of movement in the lateral direction is large. Thus, even in the state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise), the same effect can be displayed using the same image data.

  Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is driven further upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the rotation angle and the display position of each star image are corrected and moved to the upper left and lower left The image of the displayed star is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the image of the star displayed by being moved to the upper right and lower right is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

  As described above, in this control example, the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 described above are driven up and down. In the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect in the case of using the same image data, the rotation angle and the display position of the image data are corrected to execute the effect. As a result, the volume of image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect can be reduced.

  In this control example, although the display position of the image data is corrected, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven vertically (that is, when the display area is vertically long), the image data is compressed (reduced) to be vertically long and displayed. When the display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven to the left and right (that is, when the display area is horizontally long), the image data may be naturally compressed (reduced) to be horizontally long.

  If one or both of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 can not be driven due to a failure or the like and the display area can not be expanded, the display position of the image data is corrected according to the display area. Alternatively, the image data may be compressed (reduced). As a result, even if one or both of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 can not be driven and the display area can not be expanded, effects can be suitably displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, gaming method suggestion effects executed (notified) by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described. FIG. 132 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of effects of the game method suggestion effect.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (a), the decoration surface 523 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example is decorated to imitate an apple, and the upper decoration surface 523b1 is decorated on the left half thereof The lower right half of the lower decorative surface 523b2 is decorated. Therefore, by rendering the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 to be adjacent to each other, an integrated presentation can be performed.

  Direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are circumferentially arranged on the round portion of the apple in the decoration on the decoration surface 523. Specifically, the direction notification LEDs 295a are disposed at the uppermost position of the right half, and the direction notification LEDs 295 are arranged clockwise (in the order of the direction notification LEDs 295b, 295c,... 295j) from that position. The direction notification LED 295 j is disposed at the topmost position of the left half.

  The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are controlled to be lit by setting a right-handed notification command or a left-handed command according to the current gaming state in the gaming method notification process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later.

  When the right-handed notification command indicating that the current gaming state is the right-handed gaming state is set, first, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on / off, and then the direction notification LED 295b is turned on / off, Each direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off in the clockwise order as described above. As a result, since the direction notification LEDs 295 arranged in the circumferential shape are turned on / off clockwise (clockwise), it is suggested to the player that the gaming state in which the current strikes right is Can be notified.

  On the other hand, when the left hitting notification command indicating that the current gaming state is the gaming state in which the left hitting is performed is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on / off, and then the direction notification LED 295j is turned on / off , And so on, each direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off. As a result, since the direction notification LEDs 295 arranged in the circumferential shape are turned on / off in a counterclockwise direction (counterclockwise), it is suggested that the player is currently in a gaming state in which a left strike is performed. It can be (notified).

  FIG. 132 (b) is a schematic view showing a case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven 90 degrees clockwise with respect to FIG. 132 (a). Also in this case, when the right-handed notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off clockwise from the direction notification LED 295a. In addition, when the left-handed notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off counterclockwise (counterclockwise) from the direction notification LED 295a.

  As described above, in this control example, regardless of the state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, the same control process is performed to indicate that the gaming state is to perform a right strike (or a left strike). It can be suggested (informed). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the control process from becoming complicated.

<About Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the second control example will be described. The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the process of the jackpot control process (S1004) is partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004) in the present control example. The jackpot control process (S1004) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU of the main control device 110.

  In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101).

  When it is determined in the process of S1101 that the big hit start timing is reached (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), the storage solenoid 65g1 is set to ON (S1131), and this process ends. Do.

  In addition, by setting the storage solenoid 65g1 to ON by the process of S1131, it becomes possible to store the gaming ball entered in the storage area 65i. The storage area 65i is an area where over winning game balls are flowed down, and the contents of the ending effect are different according to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the big hit game. . The gaming ball stored in the storage area 65i flows down to the storage discharge flow channel 65e6 by setting the storage solenoid 65g1 to off at the end of the big hit (before the start of the ending effect).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the start timing of the jackpot is not reached (S1101: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1103). If it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress in the process of S1103 (S1103: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1103: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104).

  If it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the over prize solenoid 65b1 is set to OFF (S1132), and the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1134), This process ends.

  By setting the over winning prize solenoid 65b1 to OFF by the process of S1132, the gaming ball entering the specified winning prize opening 65a and passing through the detection switch 65a1 is allowed to flow down to the normal winning flow path 65e1. Although details will be described later, when a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of game balls pass the detection switch 65a1 in the same round, the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to ON, and enters the specific winning opening 65a. The gaming ball that has passed through the drop detection switch 65a1 can not flow down to the normal winning flow path 65e1, and flows down to the over winning flow path 65e2.

  If it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is then determined whether it is the timing of the closing operation (S1133). If it is determined in the process of S1133 that it is the timing of closing operation (S1133: Yes), the over winning prize solenoid 65b1 is set to ON (S1134), the opening solenoid is set to OFF (S1135), and the closing command is set. Then (S1136), the process ends.

  By setting the over winning prize solenoid 65b1 to ON by the process of S1134, the gaming ball entering the specified winning prize opening 65a and passing through the detection switch 65a1 becomes a state where it can not flow down to the regular winning flow path 65e1, and it is over It becomes possible to flow down to the winning channel 65e2. The gaming balls having flowed down to the over winning flow path 65e2 flow down to the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c and are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 or the out flow path 65e5.

  By setting the open solenoid to OFF by the process of S1135, the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

  By the process of S1136, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning hole 65a is closed. In the voice lamp control device 113, the notification of the closing command makes it possible to determine that the ball count command notified thereafter is the ball count command based on the over winning.

  If it is determined in the process of S1133 that it is not the timing of the closing operation (S1133: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the probability changing solenoid 65k (S1106). If it is determined in the process of S1106 that it is the operation timing of the positive variation solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the positive variation solenoid 65k is set to ON, and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1133 that it is not the operation timing of the positive solenoid 65k (S1106: No), then it is determined whether it is the storage discharge timing (S1137), it is determined that it is the storage discharge timing If it has been (S1137: Yes), the storage solenoid is set to OFF (S1138), and this process is ended.

  In the process of S1137, it is determined that it is the storage / discharge timing if it is a timing previously determined as a big hit game (5 seconds before the start timing of the ending effect in this control example). As a result, the number of gaming balls stored in the storage area 65i can be counted by the storage discharge switch 65a4 before the start of the ending effect, and the ending effect can be displayed according to the count result.

  The storage discharge timing is not limited to the above. For example, discharge may be performed every round, or counting may be performed at the timing when the ending command is received.

  If it is determined in the process of S1137 that the storage discharge timing is not reached (S1137: No), it is then determined whether the gaming ball has passed the storage discharge switch 65a4 (S1139), and the storage discharge switch 65a4 is When it is determined that the has passed (S1139: Yes), the storage and discharge command is set (S1140), and this processing ends.

  Since the storage and discharge command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S1140, the number of gaming balls stored in the big hit game can be counted in the voice lamp control device 113, and according to the count result The ending effect can be displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1139 that the game ball has not passed through the storage switch 65a4 (1139: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

  If it is determined in the process of S1108 that it is the start timing of ending effect (S1108: Yes), the processes of S1109 and S1110 are executed as in the first control example, and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1108 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S1108: No), the distribution motor setting process is executed (S1141), other processes (informing process (S1111), winning process) (S1112), the abnormality process (S1113) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, the details of the distribution motor setting process (S1141) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 134. The distribution motor setting process (S1141) determines whether to drive the distribution motor 65c2 so as to distribute the gaming ball having passed the over winning switch 65a2 to either the storage channel 65e4 or the out channel 65e5, It is a process for setting.

  In the sorting motor setting process (S1141), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101).

  If it is determined in the process of S5101 that the game ball has not passed the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101: No), there is no need to drive the sorting motor to distribute the game ball, so this process is directly performed. finish. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the distribution motor may naturally be driven at all times.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the game ball has passed the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is winning information that will be a big hit in the pending winning information. (S5102).

  If it is determined in the process of S5102 that there is winning information that will be a big hit in the pending winning information (S5102: Yes), then it is a case where it is determined that it will be a big hit, so the storage upper limit number 203w Is set to 4, and the process proceeds to the process of S5107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5102 that there is no winning information to be a big hit in the held winning information (S5102: No), then it is determined whether the predictive flag 203u is on (S5103) ).

  If it is determined in the process of S5103 that the predictive flag 203u is on (S5103), although it is not determined that the jackpot will be made thereafter, it is a case where the probability of becoming the jackpot is high. Is set to 3, and the process proceeds to the process of S5107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the predictive flag 203u is on (S5103: No), if all the held winning prize information is out (that is, the probability of becoming a big hit thereafter is low) Since the storage upper limit number 203 w is set to 2, the process shifts to the process of S 5107.

  In the process of S5107, it is determined which one of the storage flow path 65e4 and the out flow path 65e5 the game ball having passed the over winning switch 65a2 is to be distributed to (S5107). This distribution is determined based on a table and a counter (not shown).

  Specifically, if there is winning information that will be a big hit in the pending winning information, using a table for the big hit, if the value of the counter is "0-2", the distribution destination storage flow The path 65e4 is determined, and in the case of "3 to 5", the distribution destination is determined to the out flow path 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow channel 65e4 with a probability of 1/2, and the distribution destination is determined to the out flow channel 65e5 with a probability of 1/2. On the other hand, when there is no winning information which will be a big hit in the pending winning information, a table for removal is used, and when the value of the counter is “0 to 1”, the sorting destination is stored in storage channel 65e4. In the case of "2 to 5", the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow channel 65e4 with a probability of 1/3, and the distribution destination is determined to be an out flow channel 65e5 with a probability of 2/3.

  Thus, when there is a big hit in the pending winning information, the sorting destination is easily determined to be the storage channel 65e4, and when there is no big hit in the pending winning information, the sorting destination is determined to the out flow channel 65e5. It is configured to be easy. The distribution ratio is not limited to this, and may be changed as appropriate.

  When the process of S5107 is completed, it is determined whether or not the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 in the process of S5107 (S5108).

  If it is determined in the process of S5108 that the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 (S5108: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w. (S5109).

  When it is determined in the process of S5109 that the value of the stored number counter 203v is smaller than the stored upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes), the drive of the distribution motor 65e2 is set with the distribution destination as the storage flow channel 65e4 ( S5111), the stored number counter 203v is incremented by 1 (S5112), and the process ends.

  The distributing motor 65c2 is driven and controlled by the process of S5111, whereby the distributing member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distributing member 65c communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2 The position (direction) in which the storage channel 65e4 is in communication with the storage channel 65e4 is changed. As a result, the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1 flow down the over pay flow path 65e2, and are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4, and flowed down to the storage area 65i via the storage flow path 65e4. Become. Thereafter, the distributing member 65c is rotated clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distributing member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) in communication with the over prize winning channel 65e2.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5 (S5108: No), and if the value of the stored number counter 203v is determined to be the stored upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes) The drive of the distribution motor 65c2 is set with the distribution destination as the out flow path 65e5 (S5112), and the present process is ended.

  By the drive control of the distributing motor 65c2 by the process of S5112, the distributing member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distributing member 65c communicates with the over prize winning channel 65e2. From the above state to the position (orientation) in the state of communicating with the out flow path 65e4. As a result, the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1 flow down the over winning channel 65e2, and are distributed to the out channel 65e4. Thereafter, the distributing member 65c is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distributing member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) in communication with the over winning passage 65e2.

  As described above, in the sorting motor setting process (S1141), the upper limit number of gaming balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 is based on the held winning prize information (that is, according to the degree of expectation to be a big hit thereafter). It was configured differently. As a result, when many game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of the jackpot is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 to the player is Since attention can be made, the player's interest can be improved.

  Further, since the effect unit 65α is configured to be visible, it is possible to visually recognize the sorting operation by the sorting motor 65c. Thus, attention can be paid to the sorting operation by the sorting motor 65c, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the storage area 65i where the game ball distributed to the storage flow channel 65e4 is stored is provided visibly in the effect unit 65α, the number of game balls distributed to the storage flow channel 65e4 during the big hit game is determined It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be easily grasped and that is easy for the player to understand.

Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Second Control Example
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the main processing 2 (see FIG. 135) is changed to execute the gaming method notification process (see FIG. 138), and the jackpot related process (see FIG. 103). It is different in that the jackpot related process 2 (see FIG. 136) is executed instead and the ending process 2 (see FIG. 137) is executed instead of the ending process (see FIG. 105), and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the main process 2, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed as in the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

  When the process of S1811 is finished, the game method notification process is executed (S1831), and the process proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above. Details of the game method notification process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 136, details of the jackpot related process 2 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described. As described above, in this control example, the main control device 110 is a closing command indicating that the specific winning opening 65a has been closed during the jackpot game, and a storage discharging command indicating that the gaming ball has passed the storage discharging switch 65a4. More sent. In contrast to the jackpot related processing in the first control example (see FIG. 103), the jackpot related processing 2 (S1912) in this control example is different in that it is changed to perform processing when these commands are received, The points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the jackpot related process 2 (S1912), first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S2001). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set (S2002), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S2003).

  If it is determined in the process of S2003 that the round number command has been received (S2001: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S2004), and the round for display is based on the value of the round number counter 223g. The number command is set (S2005). Then, the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is set to the open state (S2031), and this processing ends.

  By the process of S2031, based on the fact that the round number command indicating the start of the round has been received from the main control device 110, the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is set to the open state. As a result, it is possible to determine that the number-of-winnings command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state is a normal winning (that is, not an over winning).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2003 that the round number command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether a winning number command has been received (S2006).

  If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), then it is determined whether the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2032). If it is determined in the process of S2032 that the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2032: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on the over winning, so the over winning processing is executed. (S2009), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2032, when it is determined that the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is in the open state (S2032: No), since the received number-of-winnings command is a command based on the normal winning, the normal winning command is After setting (S2010), the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether a closing command has been received (S2033). If it is determined in the process of S2033 that the closing command has been received (S2033: Yes), the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is set to the closing state (S2034), and the present process is ended.

  Thus, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closing state when the closing command is received from the main control device 110. Therefore, after receiving the closing command from main controller 110 until receiving a new round number command (that is, after the specified winning opening 65a finishes the specified number (10) of winnings, the next specified winning Until the opening of the opening 65a), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state. Thus, it is possible to determine that the winning number command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state is the winning number command based on the over winning.

  When the closed state is set based on the passage of the predetermined period (30 seconds), it may not be determined that the over prize has been won. In this case, the elapsed time after the start of the round may be measured, and it may be determined whether or not the closing command has been received at the elapse of a predetermined period.

  If it is determined in the process of S2033 that the closing command has not been received (S2033: No), it is then determined whether the storage / discharge command has been received (S2035). In the process of S2035, when it is determined that the stored discharge command has been received (S2035: Yes), the stored discharge counter 233r is incremented by 1 (S2036), and the present process is ended.

  The stored discharge command is transmitted from the main control device 110 by the number of gaming balls stored in the storage area 65i in the big hit game, so when all stored discharge commands have been received, the value of the stored discharge counter 233r is stored This is the number of gaming balls stored in the area 65i. Based on the value of the stored discharge counter 223r, the display content of the ending effect is determined. That is, the ending effect according to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i can be displayed. Thereby, in the jackpot game, since it is possible to make the storage area 65i pay attention to the number of game balls stored, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  If it is determined in the process of S2035 that the storage / discharge command has not been received (S2035: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S2011). If it is determined in the process of S2011 that the ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), ending setting process 2 is executed (S2012), the round number counter is set to 0 (S2013), and this process is performed. finish.

  In the process of S2012, the display content of the ending effect is determined according to the value of the stored discharge counter 223r. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the processing of S2011 (S2011: No), the processing of S2014 to S2015 is performed in the same manner as the jackpot related processing of the first control example described above (see FIG. 103). Execute to end this processing.

  Next, the details of the ending setting process 2 (S2012) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The ending setting process 2 (S2012) is different from the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example in that the ending effect is selected according to the value of the stored / discharge counter 223r, and the other is different. The points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In ending effect processing 2 (S2012), first, it is judged whether or not the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201), and if it is judged that the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), the ending effect is The continuous effect is selected as (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209.

  If it is determined in the process of S2201 that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), it is determined whether the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is larger than 4 (S2231). In the process of S2231, when it is determined that the value of the storage discharge counter 223r is 4 or less (that is, when the number of gaming balls stored in the storage area 65i is 4 or less during the big hit game) (S2231: No The normal ending effect is selected as the ending effect), and the process shifts to the processing of S2209.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2231 that the value of the stored discharge counter is greater than 4 (ie, if there are more than 4 balls stored in the storage area 65i during the big hit game) (S2231: Yes And the same as the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, the processes of S2203 to S2208 are executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2209.

  In the process of S2209, an ending effect command for display indicating an ending effect selected by the process of S2203, S2205, S2207, S2208 or S2232 is set (S2209). Then, as in the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, the processes of S2210 and S2211 are executed, and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the value of the stored discharge counter 223r is 2 or more, the ending effect is suggested to indicate the expectation degree that there is winning information that becomes a big hit in the hold, but stored discharge When the value of the counter 223r is 1 or less, the normal ending effect is selected. As a result, the player plays a game in the expectation that the value of the storage discharge counter will be 2 or more (that is, two or more game balls enter the storage area 65i) in the big hit game, so the player's interest Can be improved.

  Although the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is 2 or more, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be 3 or more. Naturally, such a restriction may not be provided.

  Furthermore, only when the value of the stored discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that correctly suggests whether or not there is winning information to be a big hit in the hold) is displayed You may do it.

  Further, it is also possible to change the table for selecting the ending effect according to the value of the stored discharge counter 223r.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 138, the details of the gaming method notification process (S1831) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 135) will be described. In the gaming method notification process (S1831), the current gaming state is a gaming state (so-called, left-handed gaming state) in which the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down the left side of the third symbol display device 81; This is a process for indicating (displaying) which of the gaming state (so-called right-handed gaming state) in which the game ball shoots so that the game ball flows downward on the right side of the device 81.

  In the gaming method notification process (S1831), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time saving gaming state or a probability variation gaming state (S5201). If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the gaming state is the short time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state (S5201: Yes), it is a gaming state in which the right hitting is performed, so a display right hitting suggestion command is set (S5202) ).

  The right display suggestion command for display set by the processing of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the right detection suggestion command for display, whereby the third symbol display device 81 or sub is displayed. An image indicating a right strike is displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 523. As a result, it can be suggested to the player that the gaming state is the gaming state in which the player strikes the right, so it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

  When the process of S5202 ends, a right-turn suggestion LED lighting command is set (S5203), and the process ends. The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decoration surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 repeat lighting and extinguishing one by one in order of 295a to 295j by the right hitting suggestion LED command set in the process of S5203. Be Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the lighting of the LEDs is performed clockwise (rightward), and the right to the player is obtained. It can be suggested (notified) that it is a game state in which a hit is made. Thereby, even during the effect that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the reverse state, it can be suggested (notified) that it is a game state in which a right-handed game is performed by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b. .

  In addition, the indication (notification) that the game state in which the player strikes the right is changed that the lighting of the LED is performed clockwise (clockwise) even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates. Since it does not exist, suggestion (notification) can be performed by the same control.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5201 that the gaming state is not a short time or a definite variation gaming state (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through gate 67.

  If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the ball has passed through gate 67 (S5201: Yes), the ball is distributed to the right of third symbol display device 81 even though the gaming state is the left-handed gaming state. Since the game ball passes through the through gate 67 provided (that is, when the right-handed game is being performed), the process of S5205 is performed to indicate that it is the left-handed game state. Transition to

  In the process of S5205, a display left strike suggestion command is set (S5205). The left display suggestion command for display set by the process of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the left strike indication command for display, whereby the third symbol display device 81 or sub is displayed. The characters "Please return to the left!" Are displayed on one of the liquid crystal display devices 523. As a result, it can be suggested to the player that the gaming state is the gaming state in which the player strikes the right, so it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

  When the process of S5205 is finished, a left hitting suggestion LED command is set (S5206), and the process ends. The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decoration surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are repeatedly lit and extinguished one by one sequentially from 295j to a by the left hitting suggestion LED command set in the process of S5205. Be Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, lighting of the LEDs is performed counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the player is notified to the player. It can be suggested (notified) that it is a gaming state in which a left strike is performed. Thereby, even during the effect that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the reverse state, it can be suggested (notified) that it is a game state in which the left hitting is performed by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decoration surface 523b. .

  In addition, the indication (informing) that it is a gaming state in which the player strikes the left is that the lighting of the LED is performed counterclockwise (counterclockwise) even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates. Since it does not change, suggestion (notification) can be performed by the same control.

  As described above, in the second control example, the distribution ratio for distributing the game ball that has won an over-winning during the big hit to the storage channel 65 e 4 is based on the held winning information (that is, the big win is subsequently made) Depending on the degree of expectation), configured differently. As a result, when many game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of the jackpot is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 to the player is Since attention can be made, the player's interest can be improved.

  In the second control example, the effect portion 65α in which the distributing member 65c for distributing the gaming ball that has won the over-winning during the big hit is arranged to be visible. Thus, the player can visually recognize the sorting operation by the sorting motor 65c, and can pay attention to the sorting operation by the sorting motor 65c, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the second control example, in the effect unit 65α, a storage area 65i in which the game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 are stored is provided so as to be visible. This makes it possible to easily grasp the number of gaming balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 during the jackpot game, and to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the second control example, gaming balls that are over-winning during a big hit game are stored in an area where the player can visually recognize, and according to the number of stored gaming balls (the value of the storage discharge counter 223r) It was configured to change the contents of the ending effect of the game. This makes it possible to pay attention to the number of gaming balls that are over-winning during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, only when the value of the storage discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that correctly suggests whether or not there is winning information to be a big hit in the hold) is displayed You may do it.

  In the second control example, direction notification LEDs 295a to j for suggesting the game state (the direction in which the game ball is fired) are circumferentially arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and circumferentially arranged. A game state is indicated by the lighting pattern (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversely displayed, it is possible to suggest (inform) the gaming state by the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Furthermore, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is possible to suggest (notify) the gaming state without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j arranged in a circumferential shape.

<On the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 145, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as an eleventh embodiment.

  In the first control example described above, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed to use the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 that are the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The game machine that performs the effect was described.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are inverted, the upper display surface 523a1 facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the lower display It is configured to be able to execute a mirror effect in which the display content with the surface 523a2 can be viewed from the front side of the gaming machine via the mirror 298. As a result, the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) which is the surface on the back side can be used simultaneously for rendering, so that variations of the rendering can be increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, in the third control example, the mirror 298 disposed to execute mirror effects is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror), and when viewed from the bright side, light is reflected to become a mirror (mirror) However, when viewed from the dark side, light is transmitted like a window. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 is brightened, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror. On the other hand, by turning on the mirror back side LED 297, the back side of the mirror 298 becomes bright and the mirror 298 becomes a mere window (glass).

  In this control example, the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on after preparation of the display of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) on the back side in the mirror effect is completed in the mirror effect (after the display content is inverted), The mirror 298 was configured to function as a mirror. As a result, since the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before preparation for display is not seen by the player, a suitable effect can be provided.

  Here, an effect aspect of the mirror effect in the present control example will be described. FIG. 139 is a schematic view schematically showing a mirror effect in this control example. FIG. 139 (a) schematically shows a state in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slidingly moved to the close position as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the mirror effect in this control example, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid in the left-right direction to be changed to the proximity position At the position, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are reversely operated, and the upper decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  A left mirror 298a is disposed on the left rear side of the sub liquid crystal display 523 and a right mirror 298b is disposed on the right rear side. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are arranged to be inclined rearward (back side) toward the center of the pachinko machine 10, and when the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are viewed from the top side It is arranged in the shape of (see FIG. 139 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 disposed on the center side with respect to each mirror 298 through the right mirror 298 a and the left mirror 298 from the front side.

  A right mirror front LED 296a is disposed on the front side of the right mirror 298a, and a left mirror front LED 296b is disposed on the front side of the left mirror 298b. In addition, a left mirror rear LED 297a is disposed on the rear side of the left mirror 298a, and a right mirror rear LED 297b is disposed on the rear side of the right mirror 298b. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are respectively configured by magic mirrors, and when the left mirror front side LED 296a is lit, the left mirror 298a becomes a mirror and the display mode of the upper display surface 523a or the upper decorative surface 523b1 A decoration aspect can be displayed. When the left mirror rear surface LED 297a is lit, the magic mirror is seen through and the rear side is visible (not a mirror but a transparent member) and does not form a mirror surface, so the rear side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not reflected by the left mirror 298a Is configured. The right mirror 298 b is similarly configured.

  With such a configuration, the state on the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be switched between the state in which the player can visually recognize the state and the state in which the player can not visually recognize the state. Can.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  In the third control example, the mirror front surface LED 296 and the mirror back surface LED 297 are connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device, compared with the first control example described above; The difference is that the contents and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a mirror effect driving scenario 222 d 4 is added to the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222 d. It is. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The contents of the mirror effect driving scenario 222d4 will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (b). The mirror effect driving scenario 222 d 4 is a scenario for inverting the upper display surface 523 a 1 and the lower display surface 523 a 2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 after sliding movement.

  The mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 has a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time since the variable display is started. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), the slide motor 431 is defined as the operation target corresponding to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m, 50 pps is defined as the operation speed, and the number of operation steps Is defined as 100, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction.

  The reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, 100 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 as the operation step number, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction corresponding to the value "2001" of the driving scenario counter 223m. ing.

  The reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, 100 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 as the operation step number, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction corresponding to the value “8001” of the driving scenario counter 223 m. ing.

  The reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, 50 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 as the operation step number, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction corresponding to the value "10001" of the driving scenario counter 223m. ing.

  Then, information of “END” indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the value “12001” of the driving scenario counter 223 m.

  As described above, in the mirror effect driving scenario 222 d 4, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slidingly displaced from the separated position to the close position in 2 seconds, and at the close position, the reflection position from the normal position (display surface (523 a 1 facing back side) , 523a2) to a position where it becomes visible from the front side through the mirror 298) for 2 seconds, and then maintained at the reflection position for 4 seconds, and then again from the reflection position to the normal position for 2 seconds. It flips over and is slide-displaced over 2 seconds from the proximity position to the separation position.

  Next, contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a mirror effect flag 223s is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Mirror effect in progress flag 223s is a flag for determining whether or not mirror effect is being executed, and indicates that mirror effect is being executed if it is on, and mirror effect is being executed if it is off Indicates no The mirror effect flag 223s is turned on when the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is set as a drive scenario (that is, when a mirror effect is set as an effect pattern) in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 145). It is set. When the mirror effect flag 223s is on, control of turning on / off the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror back LED 297 is performed in the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 144), and the display contents are reversed for the display control device 114. The notification of the command to make it In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, when the fluctuation display which performed mirror production is complete | finished, it sets to OFF.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the present control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the main processing 3 (see FIG. 143) is changed to execute the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 143), and the variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) Is different in that the variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) is executed instead of the above, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, main processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the main process 3, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed as in the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

  After the process of S1811, the mirror effect setting process is executed (S1851), and the process proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above.

  Here, the details of the mirror effect setting process (S1851) executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. The mirror effect setting process (S1851) is a command for controlling turning on / off of the mirror front surface LED 296 and the mirror back surface LED 297 when mirror effect is being executed, and for inverting the display content of the display control device 114. It is a process for giving notice.

  In the mirror effect setting process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not the mirror effect flag 223s is on. If it is determined in the process of S1851 that the mirror effect-in-progress flag 223s is off (S5301: No), the mirror effect is not being executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the mirror effect flag 223s is on (S5301: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302). If it is determined in the process of S5302 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302: Yes), the mirror front surface LED 296 is set to OFF so that the mirror 298 does not function as a mirror (S5303) ), The mirror back surface LED 297 is set to ON (S5304), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S5302 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is not 1 (S5302: No), it is then determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305).

  If it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305: Yes), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slide to the proximity position And the timing at which the reversing operation is completed at the proximity position. In this case, in order to make the display surface (523a1, 523a2) facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 visible from the front side through the mirror 298 by being reversely operated, the processing of S5306 is performed. Transition.

  In the process of S5306, a display reverse correction start command is set (S5306), the mirror front surface LED 296 is set to ON (S5307), the mirror back surface LED 297 is set to OFF (S5308), and this processing ends. As a result, the display content of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) is reversed symmetrically (that is, the display content becomes normal when viewed through a mirror), and the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright. Will function as a mirror.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is not 4000 (S5305: No), it is then determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309).

  If it is determined in the process of S5309 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309: Yes), it is a timing at which the display surface facing the back side is reversed to the front side in the mirror effect .

  In this case, the mirror front surface LED 296 is set to OFF (S5310), the mirror back surface LED 297 is set to ON (S5311), a display reverse correction end command is set (S5312), and this processing ends.

  By the processing from S5310 to S5312, the display content of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 which is controlled by the display control device 114 is set to the normal state, and the mirror 298 is set not to function as a mirror. Be done.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5309 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is not 8000 (S5309: No), it is then determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313).

  If it is determined in the process of S5313 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313: Yes), it is the end timing of the mirror effect, so the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF (S5314). The rear LED 297 is set to off (S5315), and the process ends.

  By the processes of S5313 and S5314, when the mirror effect is not performed, the mirror front surface LED 296 and the mirror rear surface LED 297 can be turned off, so power consumption can be reduced.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 3 (S1813) will be described with reference to FIG. Similar to the first control example, the variable display setting process 3 (S1813) executes the processes of S2301 to S2307. When the process of S2307 is finished, it is determined whether the drive scenario stored in the process of S2306 is a drive scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351).

  If it is determined in the process of S2351 that the drive scenario is a drive scenario corresponding to a mirror effect (S2351: Yes), a variation pattern including a mirror effect is set, so the flag 223s during mirror effect Is set to ON, and the process shifts to the processing of S2308.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2351 that the drive scenario is a drive scenario not corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2308.

  From S2308 onwards, the processing of S2308 to S2312 is executed as in the first control example described above, and this processing ends.

  Thus, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 It is configured to be able to execute a mirror effect in which the display content with the surface 523a2 can be viewed from the front side of the gaming machine via the mirror 298. As a result, the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) which is the surface on the back side can be used simultaneously for rendering, so that variations of the rendering can be increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the third control example, the mirror 298 disposed to perform mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror). This is because light is reflected to become a mirror (a mirror) when viewed from the bright side, but light is transmitted as a window when viewed from the dark side. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 is brightened, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror. On the other hand, by turning on the mirror back side LED 297, the back side of the mirror 298 becomes bright and the mirror 298 becomes a mere window (glass). Thus, by controlling the lighting of the LED, it is possible to change whether the mirror 298 functions as a mirror or as a window.

  In addition, when making it function as a window, it can be set as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and an effect by providing a pattern, a design, etc. on the back side of the mirror 298 so that visual recognition is possible. In addition, by arranging the LED for effect on the back side and changing the lighting pattern of the LED, it is possible to change a pattern or a design that can be visually recognized when the mirror 298 functions as a window. As a result, the variation of the effect can be increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the third control example, the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on after the display of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) on the back side is reversed in the mirror effect (after the display content is reversed). , Mirror 298 was configured to function as a mirror. As a result, since the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before preparation for display is not seen by the player, a suitable effect can be provided.

  Note that the expectation of becoming a big hit may be indicated (notified) depending on whether or not the mirror 298 functions as a mirror in the mirror effect. Thereby, in the mirror effect, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid from the separated position to the close position, and after the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are inverted at the close position, the upper display is performed. It can be made to pay attention to whether or not the display content of the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 is displayed via the mirror 298, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Modification of Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, a modified example of the mirror effect described in FIG. 139 will be described. In this control example, when performing mirror effect to make the player visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the left rear surface mirror member 299 a is placed between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The right rear mirror member 299b is moved to project (reflect) on the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 even if the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is completely inverted to a position facing in parallel with the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 of the sub liquid crystal display mode in a state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is completely flat.

<On Modification of First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 148 to 150, a modification of the effect display in the above-described first control example will be described. FIGS. 148 to 150 are different from the effect display shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 in the first control example, in the order in which the respective symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol) overlap. After being displayed with the third symbol that the symbol has won the big hit, it is used for the technology (so-called, positive variation promotion effect) that reports whether this big hit is usually a big hit or a definite change big hit using the effect display is there.

  In this case, when the probability change promotion effect starts, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid so as to completely cover the third symbol display device 81 (upper display surface 523a1 and The lower display surface 523a2 is made to slide so as to abut, and the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 displays that “probability change promotion effect” is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), a symbol for promoting effect is enlarged and displayed. Unlike the third symbol displayed corresponding to the normal game (special symbol variation game), the symbol for promotion effect displayed in this case is a character symbol in which a portion indicating a number is deleted. If the character symbol displayed in this state is in the same mode (character) as the "probable symbol" (a specific number, for example, a symbol with "3" or "7") used in the normal game , It becomes the production indication which shows that it wins to the definite change jackpot by "the definite change promotion effect".

  On the other hand, if the character symbol displayed in this state is in the same mode (character) as a symbol other than the “probable symbol” used in the normal game, the “probable variable promotion without notification of winning in a certain variable jackpot” The production will continue.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 148 (b) to 150 (b), the display area is gradually enlarged by sliding the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display area up to the state shown in FIG. 150 (b). When enlarged, a mode is shown in which a number is shown on a part of the character symbols (for example, the character symbol displayed at the center) among the character symbols displayed three in the vertical direction.

  If the number given in this case is the number (for example, "3", "7") attached to the "probable symbol" used in the normal game, it is won by the "probable variation promotion effect" It becomes the effect display which shows that. That is, the same character pattern as the third symbol used in the normal game is used as the character symbol used for this "probable variation promotion effect", and a plurality of numbers (at least the "probable symbol") is attached to the character symbol Are configured so as to indicate a number and a number given in addition to the "possibly odd symbol".

  According to the above-mentioned "probable variation promotion effect", the timing at which the character symbol is displayed to the player (see FIG. 148 (a)) and the timing at which the character symbol indicates a number are attached (FIG. 150 (b It becomes possible to notify that it has won the probability variation jackpot at the two timings of)). Therefore, during the period from the start to the end of the "probability change promotion effect", the player is watching the effect while expecting to be promoted to a probability change jackpot, so that the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "probable variation promotion effect", an aspect indicating a number is attached to each of the three character symbols displayed in the vertical direction, and the number attached to each character symbol is a predetermined rule (a number If it is an odd number, or if a number is displayed according to a predetermined rule (e.g., "341"), it may be notified that the jackpot has been won. Thereby, it is possible to more effectively use the enlargement of the display area for the effect.

  In addition, the timing at which the aspect indicating the number is attached to the three displayed character symbols in the vertical direction is shifted, or the aspect of the character symbols displayed three in the vertical direction is switched in the middle of the "probability change promotion effect" You may do so.

<On the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a twelfth embodiment. In the fourth control example, after transmitting the opening command indicating the start of the big hit game as the command indicating the timing in the big hit game with respect to the first control example described above, only the close command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a. Are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time since the closing command is received. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 can be reduced, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  First, with reference to FIG. 151, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. The RAM 223 in this control example is different from the first control example in that a specific winning opening state 223p, a large hit middle flag 223t, and a clock counter 223u are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state, the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, indicating that the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a, and the specific When the winning opening state 223p is closed, the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and the gaming ball can not enter the specific winning opening 65a (or is difficult) Indicates When it is determined that it is the round start timing in the special winning opening state 223p (see FIG. 156), the open state is set (see S5306 in FIG. 156), and the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a. When the closing command based on the closing of is received, the closed state is set (see S2074 in FIG. 136). The specified winning combination port state 223p is referred to when the winning number command is received from the main control unit 110 (see S2072 in FIG. 156), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, or , It is determined whether it is a command based on over winning.

  The jackpot flag 223t is a flag for determining whether a jackpot game is being executed, and indicates that a jackpot game is being executed if it is on, and a jackpot game is being executed if it is off Indicates no The jackpot flag 223t is set to ON when the opening command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S2071). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the big hit game is being executed in the big hit timekeeping process (see FIG. 156) (see S5301 in FIG. 156), and it is determined that it is the ending start timing of the big hit game. , And off (see S5310 in FIG. 156).

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. FIG. In this control example, a big hit operation setting process 4 (S1105) in which a part of the process is changed is executed instead of the big hit operation setting process (see FIG. 95) with respect to the first control example described above, and ending The process is different in that ending process 4 (S1110) is performed in which a part of the process is changed instead of the process (see FIG. 96), and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) is different from the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 95) in the first control example in that the round number command is not set, and the other points are the same. Description is omitted.

  Although the details will be described later, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the start of the round by measuring the elapsed time after receiving the closing command indicating the end of the round. As a result, the number-of-rounds command indicating the start of the round in the jackpot game from the main control device 110 can be made unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Next, the details of the ending process 4 (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. The ending process 4 (S1110) is different from the ending process (FIG. 96) in the first control example in that the ending command is not set, and the other points are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Although the details will be described later, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the start of the ending by counting the elapsed time from the reception of the closing command indicating the end of the round and the number of rounds executed. There is. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need for an ending command from the main control device 110 to indicate the start of ending in the jackpot game, and to reduce the processing load.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 154 to FIG. In this control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, jackpot related processing 4 (S1912) in which a part of the processing is changed instead of jackpot related processing (see FIG. 103) is executed, and jackpot processing It differs in that (see FIG. 156) is newly executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, main processing 4 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the main process 4, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed as in the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

  After the process of S1811, the jackpot timekeeping process is executed (S1831), and the process proceeds to the process of S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above. Details of the jackpot timekeeping process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, details of the jackpot related process 4 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described. In the jackpot related processing 4 (S1912), when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received with respect to the first control example, the jackpot flag 223t is set to ON, and the specific prize during the jackpot game Based on the reception of a closing command indicating that the mouth 65a has been closed, the time elapsed since the reception of the closing command is measured, and the number of rounds commands and the ending command are received The difference is that the process is deleted, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the jackpot related process 4 (S1912), it is first determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2001), and if it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set. Then, the jackpot flag is set to ON (S2071), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a winning number command has been received (S2006). If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), it is then determined whether the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2072).

  If it is determined in the process of S2072 that the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2072: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on the over winning, so the over winning processing is executed. (S2009), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2072 that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state (S2072: No), the received number-of-winnings command is a command based on the normal winning, so the normal winning command is After setting (S2010), the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether a closing command has been received (S2073).

  If it is determined in the process of S2073 that the closing command has been received (S2073: Yes), the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is set to the closing state (S2074), and the clock counter 223u is set to 0 (S2075). ), End this processing.

  By the process of S2075, the clock counter 223u is initialized to 0 each time the specific winning hole 65a is closed. In this way, it is possible to measure the elapsed time since the specific winning hole 65a is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2073 that the closing command has not been received (S2073: No), the processes of S2014 to S2015 are executed as in the first control example, and the present process is ended.

  Next, the details of the jackpot timekeeping process (S1831) executed in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154) of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The jackpot time counting process (S1831) is a process that is executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154), and is a process that performs clocking to determine the round start timing and the ending timing in the jackpot game.

  In the jackpot time counting process (S1831), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 223t is on (S5301). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 223t is off (S5301: No), it is not in the jackpot game, and there is no need to count time, so this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5301 that the big hit medium flag 223t is on (S5301: Yes), the value of the clock counter 223u is added 1 (S5302), and the value of the clock counter 223u is added. Based on it, it is determined whether it is the round start timing (S5303).

  Specifically, if the value of the clock counter 223u is 4000, this is a case where four seconds have elapsed since the end of the round, so it is determined that it is the round start timing.

  If it is determined in the process of S5303 that it is the round start timing (S5303: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S5304), and a round number command for display is set (S5305). The mouth state 223p is set to the open state (S5306), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5303 that it is not the round start timing (S5303: No), it is then determined whether it is the ending start timing (S5307).

  Specifically, when the value of the round number counter 223g is 16 and the value of the clock counter 223u is smaller than 400, the value of the clock counter 223u is set to 0 by receiving the closing command in the final round. It is determined that it is the case, and it is determined that it is the ending start timing.

  If the ending effect is to be started a predetermined period after the specific winning opening 65a is closed in the final round, it may be waited until the time counter 223u reaches the predetermined period.

  If it is determined in the process of S5307 that it is the ending start timing (S5307), the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) similar to the first control example is executed (S5308), and the round number counter is set to 0. (S5309), the jackpot flag 223t is set to off (S5310), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, after transmitting the opening command indicating the start of the big hit game as a command indicating the timing in the big hit game, only the closing command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is mainly The control unit 110 is configured to transmit to the audio lamp control unit 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time since the closing command is received. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 can be reduced, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Modification 2 in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 to 158, modifications of the open / close display effect in the first control example will be described.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid up and down. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Thus, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third liquid crystal display device 81 on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed Be done. In the lower right portion of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative symbol Z is displayed in a blinking manner. It shows that the middle symbol which becomes a reach display mode is changing.

  FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case where the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start to slide up and down. The reach symbol is moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbol is moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A fish school effect (effect for displaying a fluctuating group of fish) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the slide amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes large, a school of fish moves to the side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and is displayed. Thus, the display of the school of fish is configured such that the area in which the middle symbol is displayed is a small school of fish, and the group of many fish moves and is displayed in the region in which the middle symbol is not displayed. There is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display fluctuating groups of fish swarms aligned with the slide direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and by effectively utilizing the display area expanded by sliding movement, the school of fish moves Area can be broadened.

  FIG. 158 is a view showing a display mode in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid to the left and right (sliding to the outside in the left and right direction). FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Thus, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third liquid crystal display device 81 on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed Be done. In the lower right portion of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative symbol Z is displayed in a blinking manner. It shows that the middle symbol which becomes a reach display mode is changing.

  FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start sliding outward. The reach symbol is moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbol is moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A fish school effect (effect for displaying a fluctuating group of fish) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the slide amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes large, a school of fish moves to the side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and is displayed. Thus, the display of the school of fish is configured such that the area in which the middle symbol is displayed is a small school of fish, and the group of many fish moves and is displayed in the region in which the middle symbol is not displayed. There is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display fluctuating groups of fish swarms aligned with the slide direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and by effectively utilizing the display area expanded by sliding movement, the school of fish moves Area can be broadened.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated in the state shown in FIG. 157 to FIG. 158, the rotational coordinates and display coordinates of the display data of the same fish school effect are corrected and set, thereby displaying It is configured to be. Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately store the fish school data when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, and the data amount can be suppressed.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 168. In the first embodiment, the detailed description of the liquid crystal display device 523 is omitted, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the internal configuration of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described in detail. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the entire configuration of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 161. Fig. 159 (a) is a front view of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the thirteenth embodiment, and Fig. 159 (b) is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523. 160 is an exploded perspective front view of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523.

  As shown in FIGS. 159 to 161, the liquid crystal display device 523 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and a front case 541 disposed on the front side (player side), and a back side of the front case 541. Liquid crystal device 543 disposed between the front case 541 and the back case 542 facing each other, a substrate member 545 disposed on the back side of the liquid crystal device 543, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member It is mainly provided with the interposition member 544 interposed between the facings 545.

  The front case 541 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the rear surface side, and a front opening 541a is formed on the bottom surface of the front case 541 in a rectangular shape so as to penetrate in the thickness direction. The front case 541 is formed so that the liquid crystal device 543 can be disposed on the inner side from the side of the back opening 541 b that opens on one side. Thereby, the liquid crystal device 543 can be made visible to the player through the front opening 541a.

  The front case 541 is formed with two recessed portions 541 c, which are provided on the inner side of the left and right side surfaces. Further, a through hole 541 d penetrating in the longitudinal direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 159A) of the front case 541 is formed in the concave end portion of the concave portion 541 c.

  Furthermore, in the recess 541c formed on the one end side in the longitudinal direction of the front case 541 (left side in FIG. 159 (a)), the recess provided on the front opening 541a side from the back opening 541b side 541c1 is formed. The recessed portion 541c1 is a recess for engaging an engaging portion 544b of the interposed member 544 described later.

  The liquid crystal device 543 has a liquid crystal display 543a for displaying symbols and the like on the front (a surface that can be viewed by the player through the front opening 541a). Further, the liquid crystal device 543 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and the width direction dimension thereof is set substantially the same as the width direction dimension inside the back opening 541 b, and the longitudinal direction dimensions thereof are left and right of the front case 541. It is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension between the facing portions of the concave portions 541c.

  Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is disposed inside the front case 541, the upper, lower, left, and right side surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 are in contact with the inner wall of the front case 541. As a result, the liquid crystal device 543 can be hardly displaced relative to the front case 541.

  In the liquid crystal device 543, the back surface (the opposite surface of the liquid crystal display 543a) is covered with a back surface portion 543c formed of a plate member of a metal material. The back surface portion 543 c is a shield member for blocking electrical noise (reducing the influence of the electrical noise on the liquid crystal device 543), and is formed by a substrate member 54 described later and a conductive member 546 (connection means). It is electrically connected. Accordingly, static electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 (the back surface portion 543c) can be released to the substrate member 545 through the conductive member 546.

  The liquid crystal device 543 has its thickness dimension (dimension in the depth direction in FIG. 159A) set smaller than the distance dimension from the rear opening 541 b side of the inner portion of the front case 541 to the front opening 541 a side. . Thus, the liquid crystal device 543 can be accommodated inside the front case 541. Further, the front case 541 is provided with a standing portion 541e standing on the inner side surface on one side in the short direction (the lower side in FIG. 159 (a)).

  The standing portion 541 e is formed so as to partially protrude from a substantially central position of the front case 541 in the longitudinal direction. The distance between the inner surface of the front case 541 on the side of the rear opening 541 b and the side of the standing portion 541 e is set to be substantially the same as the thickness of the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is disposed inside the front case 541, the side surface of the standing portion 541e is in contact with the liquid crystal device 543.

  That is, the standing portion 541e is engaged with the lower end portion of the liquid crystal device 543. Thus, in the state where the liquid crystal device 543 is disposed inside the front case 541, the liquid crystal device 543 is prevented from being displaced in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 gets out of the rear case 542) with respect to the front case 541. It can be easy.

  The shape of the liquid crystal display 543a in a front view is formed to be substantially the same as the shape of the opening 541a of the front case 541, and the size thereof is set to be substantially the same as the opening 541a. Thus, the player can visually recognize the entire area of the liquid crystal display 543a through the opening 541a of the front case 541.

  The liquid crystal device 543 has fastening holes 543 b circularly bored at both end portions in the longitudinal direction. The fastening hole 543b is a hole to which the tip of a screw inserted into the through hole 541d of the front case 541 is fastened, and the axis of the fastening hole 543b is in line with the axis of the through hole 541d when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled. It is formed in the shape of a circle. Accordingly, the liquid crystal device 543 can be fixed to the front case 541 by fastening a screw to the fastening hole 543 b through the through hole 541 d in a state where the liquid crystal device 543 is disposed inside the front case 541.

  Further, as described above, since the through hole 541 d is formed at the concave end of the recess 541 c, the head of the screw can be accommodated inside the recess 541 c in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled. In addition, on the front opening side 541a side of the front case 541, a wall that covers the space of the recess 541c is formed. On the other hand, on the back opening side 541a side of the recess 541c, the back case 542 is attached at a position facing the recess 541c. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the fastening portion between the front case 541 and the liquid crystal device 543.

  The interposing member 544 is formed in a plate shape having a rectangular shape in a front view, and is projected in the longitudinal direction from a plurality of openings 544a opened in the plate thickness direction (the liquid crystal device 543 side to the substrate member 545 side) And a through hole 544c which is formed through the other end in the longitudinal direction in the plate thickness direction.

  The opening 544a is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the inner wall thereof is formed along the thickness direction. In the present embodiment, four positions are formed in the interposed member 544. Further, a plurality of openings 544a are formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 159A) than the middle position in the longitudinal direction, and the openings 544a are formed at different positions in the longitudinal direction.

  Since the pair of third portions 546b5 are disposed at different positions in the opening direction of the endless belt (cloth member 546b), the deformability of the cloth member 546b in the opening direction of the endless belt can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the four openings 544a are formed on one side (the lower side in FIG. 159A) of the center position of the interposing member 544 in the lateral direction. The interposing member 544 is formed in an outer shape slightly smaller than the front view shape of the front case 541, and is disposed on the back of the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, the four openings 544a are located on one side (the lower side in FIG. 159A) of the liquid crystal display 523 (front case 541) in the lateral direction than the central position in the lateral direction.

  As described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed so as to face the rear case 300 in a pair (see FIG. 7). Therefore, the opening 544a is biased to the opposite side in a state where the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 is directed to the player side (the state shown in FIGS. 7 and 11).

  The engaging portion 544 b is formed to project in the longitudinal direction from the end face of one end side (left side in FIG. 159A) of the interposing member 544 in the longitudinal direction, and the projecting tip end face is the short side of the interposing member 544 It is bent in both directions (FIG. 159 (a) vertical direction). That is, the engaging portion 544b is formed in a T-shape in a front view.

  The tip of the engaging portion 544 b is disposed inside the recess 541 c via the recess 541 c 1. Therefore, it is possible to position one end side (engaging portion 544b side) of the interposing member 544 in the longitudinal direction with respect to the front case 541 in the lateral direction.

  The through hole 544c is formed to penetrate in a circular shape in the thickness direction. The inner diameter of the through hole 544c is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the protrusion 541f formed by projecting in a cylindrical shape on the back surface of the other end of the front case 541 (right side in FIG. 159A) or from the outer diameter of the protrusion 541f Is also set a little larger. The through holes 544c and the protrusions 541f are formed coaxially in a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled.

  Therefore, when the interposing member 544 is mounted on the back surface of the liquid crystal device 543, the protrusion 541f can be inserted into the through hole 544c. As a result, the other end side (through hole 554 c side) of the interposing member 544 in the longitudinal direction can be positioned with respect to the front case 541.

  The interposed member 544 is positioned on both sides in the longitudinal direction with respect to the front case 541 by the through hole 544c and the engagement portion 544b as described above. As a result, movement (displacement) of the interposed member 544 with respect to the front case 541 can be suppressed.

  The substrate member 545 is formed in a plate shape having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and is formed smaller than the front view shape of the rear case 542. The substrate member 545 is formed by providing a plurality of LEDs for emitting light toward the back case 542 on the back side on the back case 542 side. Thereby, the back case 542 described later can be made to emit light.

  Further, the substrate member 545 includes a first region 545a in which a plurality of protrusions 545a1 (see FIG. 164) protruding toward the front case 541 are formed. The detailed description of the first area 545a will be described later.

  The substrate member 545 is formed with a plurality of through holes that are circularly opened in the thickness direction, and the through holes fit into a plurality of projections that project from the interposed member 544 in a columnar shape. It can be positioned relative to 544.

  The rear case 542 is formed to have a front view shape substantially the same as the front view shape of the front case 541 and a size substantially the same as the outer shape of the front case 541. Further, the rear case 542 is formed in a box shape opened on the front case 541 side. Therefore, by combining the front case 541 and the rear case 542, the liquid crystal device 543, the interposing member 544, and the substrate member 545 can be disposed between (inside) the facing of the front case 541 and the rear case 542.

  Next, the conductive member 546 will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162 is an exploded view of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG. FIG. 163 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 546, and FIG. 163 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 546 taken along line CLXIIIb-CLXIIIb of FIG. 163 (a). In FIG. 162, the state of being disassembled in the portion between the liquid crystal device 543 and the interposed member 544 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, in the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled, the conductive member 546 inserts the front portion (upper portion in FIG. 163 (a)) on the front case 541 side into the opening 544a. . In addition, the conductive member 546 has a front portion in contact with the back surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and a back surface portion (the lower portion in FIG. 163B) in contact with the first region 545a of the substrate member 545. .

  The conductive member 546 is formed in a rectangular solid long in one direction (left and right direction in FIG. 163A) before being assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523 (between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545). Note that the conductive member 546 is parallel to the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 165) of the opening 544a of the interposed member 544 in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 163A). It is arranged inside.

  In addition, the conductive member 546 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular outer shape in a front view before being assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, and the dimension in the longitudinal direction is the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the opening 544a of the interposed member 554. It is formed larger than that, and the dimension in the latitudinal direction is smaller than the distance dimension in the transversal direction of the opening 544a.

  In the state where the conductive member 546 is assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 546 is narrowed inward in the longitudinal direction at an intermediate portion between the contact surface with the back surface portion 543c and the contact surface with the first region 545a. A neck portion 546c is provided.

  The conductive member 546 mainly includes an elastic member 546a formed of an elastic material, and cloth members 546b disposed on four surfaces other than the two opposing surfaces of the elastic member 546a.

  The elastic member 546a is formed of a nonconductive sponge-like material. Further, in a state in which the cloth member 546b is not provided, the elastic member 546a is a rectangular solid that is long in one direction (that is, a state in which the narrow portion 546c of the conductive member 546 is not formed). In the present embodiment, the elastic member 546a is formed of a synthetic sponge which is foam-formed from a synthetic resin of polyurethane.

  The cloth member 546b is formed of an endless band-like cloth-like body (conductive cloth in the present embodiment) in which a fibrous body formed of a conductive metal material is woven. In addition, since the cloth member 546b is made of a fiber body of a metal material, it is easily deformed, and the back surface of the state in which the conductive member 546 is assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523 in a state of being wound around four sides of the elastic member 546a. By forming creases at both longitudinal end portions (left and right in FIG. 163A) of an intermediate portion between the contact surface with 543c and the contact surface with the first region 545a, the narrow portion 546c of the conductive member 546 is formed. It can be formed.

  Further, since the cloth member 546b is formed in an endless belt shape and the elastic member 546a is internally fitted to the cloth member 546b, the assembly of the conductive member 546 is simplified and the cost of parts is reduced. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the cloth member 546b can be formed of a conductive cloth, its flexibility can be secured, so that the durability when the cloth member 546b is repeatedly deformed due to the relative displacement of the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 It can improve.

  Although the case where the cloth member 546b is formed of a conductive cloth has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the cloth member 546b may be formed of a conductive non-woven fabric. As the conductive cloth or the conductive non-woven fabric, for example, a yarn in which a yarn in which one or both of copper and nickel are coated on the outer surface of polyester fiber is woven or unwoven to form a cloth (sheet) is exemplified. . Examples of the weave include plain weave, twill weave and the like.

  The cloth member 546b includes a first portion 546b3 that is in contact with one surface side (back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543, and a second portion 546b4 that is in contact with the ground portion 545d (protrusion 545a1) of the substrate member 545. The first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 have a pair of third portions 546b5 connecting the width dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 (the contact surface with the rear portion 543c of the first portion 546b3 Width dimension of the third portion 546b5 (with respect to the longitudinal dimension (dimension L11 (see FIG. 163 (a))) of the contact surface of the second portion 546b4 and the first region 545a) The opposing dimension (the dimension L12 (see FIG. 163 (b))) of the three portions 546b is set to a small dimension at least in part.

  Therefore, the cloth member 546b can be easily deformed in the endless belt-like opening direction by using the third portion 546b5. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 is displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposing direction and toward the endless belt-like opening of the fabric member 546b, the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b of the fabric member 546b The portion 546b4 can be prevented from sliding relative to the one surface side of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

  Further, as described above, by forming a crease in the cloth member 546b, the elastic member 546a can be elastically deformed to form the constricted portion 546c in the conductive member 546. Therefore, the elastic member 546a is held in an elastically deformed state it can. Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the elastic member 546a can be increased in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other (vertical direction in FIG. 163A). As a result, the elastic member 546a can be easily held between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545.

  Further, the cloth member 546b is bonded to the contact surface with the elastic member 546a, and both ends thereof are bonded. As described above, since the elastic member 546a is formed of a sponge body, the bonding area of the cloth member 546b is reduced by the amount of air bubbles when the sponge body is formed. Therefore, the cloth member 546b is easily peeled off from the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a. When the cloth member 546b is peeled from the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a, it becomes difficult to maintain the contact state between the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 546, and static electricity accumulated in the liquid crystal device 523 described later There was a risk that it would be difficult to escape to 545a1).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the cloth member 546b is bonded at both ends, the area of the bonding surface of the cloth member 546b can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cloth member 546b from peeling off the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a.

  Also, with the cloth member 546b, the bonding surfaces at both ends thereof are disposed in one narrow portion 546c of the conductive member 546 (that is, the bonding surfaces of the ends of the cloth member 546b to one of the pair of third portions 546b5) Is formed). Thus, the contact area between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be secured.

  That is, when the end portions of the cloth member 546b are adhered to each other, a step is formed by overlapping the end portions, so that the adhesion surfaces of both ends contact surfaces of the conductive member 546 with the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545. When the contact portion is formed, the contact area between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 is reduced by the difference in level.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cloth member 546b is formed in an endless band shape by connecting one end and the other end of the band shape, and the connection portion connecting the one end and the other end of the band is one surface side of the liquid crystal device 543. (Rear surface portion 543c) or the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 so as not to be in contact, the connection portion becomes a step, and one surface side of the liquid crystal device 543 or the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 It can suppress that the contact | abutting state with becomes unstable. That is, the contact area can be secured, and the sliding of the cloth member 546b with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 can be suppressed, and the electric charge can be easily removed.

  Further, in a state where the conductive member 546 is not assembled to the liquid crystal display device 52, the distance dimension between opposing outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of left and right narrow portions 546c (a dimension L13 between opposing outer peripheral portions of the third portions 546b5) (See FIG. 163 (a)) is larger than the longitudinal dimension of the opening 544a of the insertion member 544.

  Accordingly, when the conductive member 546 is inserted into the opening 544a of the interposing member 544, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546 can be elastically deformed, so that the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily assembled.

  That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 includes a plate-like interposed member 544 interposed between the one surface side (back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and having an opening 544a formed therein. Since the longitudinal size of the opening 544a of the insertion member 544 is smaller than the longitudinal size of the conductive member 546 in the unloaded state, the opening 544a of the insertion member 544 has both longitudinal sides thereof. Two sides can be held.

  Therefore, the assembly work can be performed while holding the conductive member 546 in the interposed member 544, and the positioning with respect to the conductive member 546 can be performed along with the disposition of the interposed member 544. The improvement of the work efficiency of

  In the state where the conductive member 546 is assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, the constricted portion 546c is smaller than the dimension in the longitudinal direction of the opening 544a, and two sides of the conductive member 546 in the longitudinal direction are not held by the aperture 544a. In addition, the conductive member 546 is interposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and is only inserted into the inner circumferential surface of the opening 544a, and is not fixed by a screw or the like. When assembling, it is difficult to hold the conductive member 546. Therefore, it was necessary to carefully assemble the liquid crystal display device 523.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the conductive member 546 can be held by holding the two surfaces at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the conductive member 546 in the openings 544a, the assembly of the liquid crystal display device 523 is simplified. Can be done. In addition, although the details will be described later, when the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 523 and the substrate member 545, the conductive member 546 is compressed so that the elastic member 546a is deformed inward by the amount of bubbles formed. Thus, the state of being held by the opening 544a can be eliminated.

  Further, as described above, the four openings 544a face the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 in a state where the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 is directed to the player side (state shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 11). It is arranged biased to the Accordingly, the conductive member 546 disposed inside the opening 544a is also biased toward the opposing side of the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 in a state where the liquid crystal display 543a is directed to the player side.

  Here, with the liquid crystal display 543a directed to the player side, when making the opposing liquid crystal display device 523 collide (merge) at the center of the back case 300 (see FIG. 7), the two liquid crystal displays 543a In order to make it easy for the player to visually recognize as one display surface, it is necessary to bring the liquid crystal display devices 523 close to each other.

  In addition, since the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 has an edge where the liquid crystal can not be displayed at the outer edge, the player can view the two liquid crystal displays 543a as one display surface. It is necessary to arrange the two liquid crystal devices 523 without a gap.

  Therefore, in order to move the two liquid crystal display devices 523 closer to each other, the two liquid crystal display devices 523 easily collide. Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543 disposed inside the liquid crystal display device 523 and the substrate member 545 are easily shaken. Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 inside the liquid crystal display device 523 may collide with other members.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in a state where the opening 544a faces the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 546 is disposed to be biased to the opposite side. It is possible to easily suppress the shaking inside the liquid crystal device 523 which occurs when the liquid crystal display device 523 collides.

  That is, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, the kinetic energy on the collision side is high. Therefore, the collision side of the liquid crystal device 543, the interposed member 544 and the substrate member 545 disposed inside the liquid crystal display device 523 It is easy to shake. Therefore, when the substrate member 543, the interposing member 544 and the substrate member 545 swing, the substrate member 545 collides with another member (for example, the interposing member 544) to short the wiring, or the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal device 543a. Etc. may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, the liquid crystal device 543 disposed in the liquid crystal display device 523, the interposed member 544 and the substrate member 545 are electrically conductive on the swinging side. Since the member 546 is disposed, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, the elastic force of the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546 can easily suppress the movement of the liquid crystal device 543, the interposed member 544, and the substrate member 545. . As a result, damage to the liquid crystal device 543, the interposed member 544 and the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164, the first region 545a of the substrate member 545 will be described in detail. Fig. 164 (a) is a front view of the substrate member 545, and Fig. 164 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along line CLXIVb-CLXIVb of Fig. 164 (a). In FIG. 164, the first region 545a is illustrated by a broken line. Also, in FIG. 164 (a), the wire 545g is illustrated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the substrate member 545 is formed of a plate member 545c formed of a non-conductive resin material in a plate-like body and a conductive metal material disposed on one side of the plate member 545c. And a covering member 545e which is disposed so as to cover one surface side of the ground portion 545d and the plate member 545c, and is mainly formed of a nonconductive resin material. .

  The plate member 545c is a plate member that forms a skeleton of the substrate member 545, and is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view of the substrate member 545.

  The ground portion 545 d is a conductor that conducts electricity to the control component placed on the substrate member 545. The ground portion 545 d in the present embodiment is formed over the entire area of the first region 545 a. Further, the substrate member 545 is formed between the covering member 545 e and the plate member 545 c and is provided with a wire 545 g connected to each ground portion 545.

  The wire 545g is formed of a metal material and connected to a connector 545f disposed on the substrate member 545. The wire 545g is connected (conductive) to the ground (not shown) of the pachinko machine 10 via the connector 545f. Thus, the electricity input to the ground portion 545 d can escape to the ground of the pachinko machine 10 through the wiring 545 g.

  The covering member 545 e is disposed to cover the entire surface of the ground portion 545 d and the plate member 545 c. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the discharge of electricity that conducts the ground portion 545d and the wiring 545g to another member (such as a chip disposed on the base member 545).

  In addition, the covering member 545e is not formed around the protrusion 545a1 disposed on the substrate member 545, and is in a state of being separated from the protrusion 545a1 by a predetermined distance. In this case, a projection 545a1, which will be described later, protrudes from the covering member 545e. Thereby, the contact (connection) between the conductive member 546 and the ground portion 545d can be secured (see FIG. 164 (b)).

  The plate member 545c, the ground portion 545d, and the covering member 545e described above are illustrated only in FIG. 164 (b), and illustration in other drawings is omitted.

  The first region 545a mainly includes a plurality of protrusions 545a1 protruding toward the liquid crystal device 543 and a plurality of through holes 545a2 penetrating in a circular shape in the thickness direction of the substrate member 545 (the left and right direction in FIG. 164B). It is formed and provided.

  The plurality of through holes 545 a 2 are formed in the first region 545 a in a plurality in the longitudinal direction and the short direction of the substrate member 545. In the present embodiment, five pieces are formed in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 and four pieces are arranged in the lateral direction of the substrate member 545.

  In the through holes 545a2, protrusions 545a2 described later in the longitudinal direction and the short direction of the substrate member 545 are internally fitted at every other place. Therefore, in the present embodiment, three through holes 545 a 2 in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 and two through holes 545 a 2 in the latitudinal direction are formed in a state of penetrating in the plate thickness direction (a state where the projections 545 a 1 are not fitted). .

  The protrusion 545a1 is formed of solder soldered to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545. That is, the arrangement of the projections 545a1 in the through holes 545a2 is performed by soldering to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

  Therefore, the projections 545 a 1 can be formed in the process of soldering the electronic component to the substrate member 545. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a process for forming the protrusion 545a1, and the process can be used in common. Therefore, the number of processes can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Further, by forming the projections 545a1 by solder soldered to the ground portion 545d, the contact area between the cloth member 546b and the ground portion 545d can be secured by that amount, and the substrate is charged when the liquid crystal device 543 is charged. The charge can be easily removed via the ground portion 545 d of the member 545.

  The protrusion 545a1 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 545a2. Further, the projection 545a1 is disposed in a state of being internally fitted inside the through hole 545a2, and the outer diameter of the tip on the liquid crystal device 543 side is formed by expanding in the radial direction, and the state of projecting from the through hole 545a2 It is assumed.

  Thus, the protrusion 545a1 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 can be connected (abutted), so that the electricity conducted to the protrusion 545a1 is through the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 and the wiring 545g. It can be released to the earth of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the projection 545a1, the radially expanded distal end abuts on the liquid crystal device 543 side of the ground portion 545d, and the outer peripheral surface of the base end portion contacts the inner edge portion of the through hole 545a penetrating to the ground portion 545d. Since they are in contact with each other, the contact area between the protrusion 545a1 and the ground portion 545d can be secured. As a result, static electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be easily released to the substrate member 545.

  In addition, the cloth member 546b can be made to conform to the shape of the protrusion 545a1, and the cloth member 546b slides with respect to one surface side (back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 Can be suppressed.

  That is, since the protrusion 545a1 is in a state in which the tip end protrudes from the substrate member 545, the protrusion 545a1 can be disposed in a state of being bited into the side surface of the conductive member 546. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the conductive member 546 to be misaligned in the direction (shearing direction) parallel to the front surface (left side surface in FIG. 164 (b)) of the substrate member 545. As a result, static electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be easily released to the substrate member 545.

  The protrusions 545a1 are spaced apart from one another at a plurality of through holes 545a2 formed in a row. That is, the protrusions 545a1 are disposed in a staggered manner with respect to the through holes 545a2.

  Therefore, the plurality of protrusions 545a1 can be used to prevent the cloth member 546b from sliding relative to the substrate member 545, and the liquid crystal device 543 can easily remove the charge, and the through holes 545a2 are used. Thus, the heat generated between the projection and the cloth member 546b can be efficiently dissipated.

  That is, since the conductive member 546 has static electricity flowing to the cloth member 546b, heat is easily stored by the electricity, and there is a possibility that the substrate member 545 may be broken by the heat, it is easy to discharge the heat through the through hole 545a2 Since the conductive member 546 is cooled, the substrate member 545 can be suppressed from being broken.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166, the arrangement of the conductive members 546 will be described. FIG. 165 is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG. 166 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 taken along line CLXVIa-CLXVIa of FIG. 165, and FIG. 166 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 taken along line CLXVIb-CLXVIb of FIG. FIG. 166 (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the range LXVIIIc of FIG. 166 (b).

  Note that FIG. 165 shows a state in which the back case 542 and the substrate member 545 of the liquid crystal display device 523 are removed, and in FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 (c), the back case 542 and the substrate member 545 are attached. The situation is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the conductive member 546 is in a state in which the front side (the first portion 546b3 side described later (FIG. 166 (b) upper side) is in contact with the back portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543) The back side (the second portion 546b4 side described later (FIG. 166 (b) lower side) is in contact with the first region 545a (see FIG. 164 (a)) of the substrate member 545, and the elastic member 546a is a liquid crystal The device 543 and the substrate member 545 are disposed in a compressed state in the opposing direction.

  That is, when the conductive member 546 is not provided in the liquid crystal display device 523, the distance L4 in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 (see FIG. 163A) is the liquid crystal device 543. The distance dimension L5 between the substrate member 545 and the substrate member 545 is set larger. Therefore, in the state where the substrate member 545 is assembled to the liquid crystal device 543, the conductive member 546 can be compressed in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545.

  Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the conductive member 546 in the opposing direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 166) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be enhanced. The conductive member 546 can be brought into contact with the conductive member 546, and the contact can be easily maintained.

  In addition, since the constricted portion 546c is formed in the conductive member 546 and the elastic member 546a is formed of a compressible material, the conductive member 546 is compressed in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 (small ), The compression force can be applied to the fold portion of the cloth member 546b of the constricted portion 546c, and the constricted portion 546c can be folded inside the conductive member 546.

  As a result, as described above, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled (when the conductive member 546 is interposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545), two ends of the conductive member 546 in the longitudinal direction The state of being held between the surface and the opening 544a of the interposing member 544 can be eliminated.

  More specifically, in the configuration in which the conductive member 546 is held between the opening 544a of the interposed member 544 smaller than the size of the conductive member 546 in the unloaded state, the shear deformation of the elastic member 546a is inhibited. When the substrate member 545 or the substrate member 545 is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposite direction, the cloth member 546b may slide relative to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state where the elastic member 546a is formed of the compressible elastic member 546a and the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the opening of the interposed member 544 Since a gap is formed between the inner edge of 544a and the outer surface of the conductive member 546 other than the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cloth member 546b, the conductive member 546 (elastic member 546a) is at the inner edge of the opening 544a. Restraint can be suppressed. That is, at the time of the assembly operation, the conductive member 546 is held by the interposed member 544 (the opening 544a) to improve the workability of the assembly operation, while the assembly state (conductive member between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545). In the state where 546 is held), the elastic deformation of the elastic member 546a can be facilitated, and the cloth member 546b can be prevented from sliding relative to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545.

  The first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cloth member 546b are in contact with the back surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d (protrusions 545a1) of the substrate member 545, so the contact area can be secured. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is charged, the charge can be easily removed via the ground portion 545 d of the substrate member 545.

  In addition, the outer surface of both ends in the longitudinal direction (the third portion 546b5 side of the cloth member 546b) of the elastic member 546a on the side held by the opening 544a of the interposing member 544 is inwardly tapered (concave) Since the portion 546c is provided, when the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the outer surface of the elastic member 546a of the interposed member 544 starts from the inwardly narrowed portion 546c. It can be easily deformed in a direction away from the inner edge of the opening 544a (inward of the elastic member 546a). As a result, a gap can be reliably formed between the inner edge of the opening 544a of the interposing member 544 and the outer surface of the conductive member 546.

  Further, the conductive member 546 is formed into an endless belt shape by connecting a cloth member 546b with one end and the other end of the belt shape, and an elastic member 546a is internally fitted to the cloth member 546b. Is formed on the outer surface (the third portion 546b5 side of the cloth member 546b) of the elastic member 546a that is recessed toward the inner side of the elastic member 546a. In the space which is formed, it is possible to accommodate a connection portion in which one end and the other end of the strip are connected. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the connecting portion connecting the strip-like one end and the other end to abut on the inner edge of the opening 544a of the interposing member 544. As a result, the deformability of the conductive member 546 can be secured.

  That is, on the bonding surface of the end portions of the cloth member 546b, the bonding portion of the cloth member 546 is less likely to be plastically deformed due to the bonding of the bonding material. In this embodiment, since the bonding position is a position different from the position of the fold of the cloth member 546b, when the conductive member 546b is compressed in the direction in which the liquid phase device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other, the cloth member The position of the fold of 546b can be folded in.

  Further, since the bonded portion is less likely to be plastically deformed, plastic deformation of the cloth member 546b can be suppressed by increasing the elastic recovery force of the elastic member 546a in the process of compressing the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546. As a result, the constricted portion 546c can be easily folded inside the conductive member 546.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 166 (c), the projection 545a1 is disposed in a state of protruding from the substrate member 545 (covering member 545e), so that the conductive member 546 abuts on the opening edge of the through hole 545a2. It can be suppressed. That is, since the conductive member 546 can be lifted by the projection 545a1 to form a space between the substrate member 545 (the through hole 545a2) and the conductive member 546, blocking of the through hole 545a2 by the conductive member 546 can be suppressed.

  Thus, the outside air is made to flow from the through hole 545a into the space between the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 546, or the air in the space between the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 546 is made to flow out through the through hole ka 545a. be able to. That is, it is possible to easily cool the conductive member 546 and the substrate member 545 by securing (increasing) the circulation path of air. As a result, damage to the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 167, the case where the facing distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 changes will be described. FIGS. 167 (a) to 167 (c) are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG.

  167 (a) to 167 (c) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166 (b). Also, in FIG. 167 (a) and FIG. 167 (c), the state in which the facing distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is changed is illustrated, with FIG. 167 (b) as the normal state (reference position).

  Here, as described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed so as to be capable of displacement (rotation about the rotation shaft 523c as a rotation center and slide displacement accompanying expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) (FIGS. 7 to 14). reference). Therefore, there is a possibility that the positional relationship of each component inside the liquid crystal display 523 may change due to the inertial force of the displacement. In this case, when the distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 changes, the contact state of the conductive member 546 interposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be released. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 167, since the conductive member 546 is formed of the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a, the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal are deformed by elastic deformation of the elastic member 546a. The contact state between the device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be easily maintained.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 167 (a), when the distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is close and the distance dimension L6 is smaller than the distance dimension L5, the distance dimension L6 is adjusted. The elastic member 546a is compressed in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 167 (a) of FIG. 167) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 to maintain the contact between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. it can.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167 (c), the distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is separated and is larger than the distance dimension L5 and smaller than the dimension L4 of the conductive member 546 (see FIG. 163). In the case of L7, since the elastic member 546a is disposed in a compressed state between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is a liquid crystal device in accordance with the distance dimension L7. By elastically deforming in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 167C) of the substrate member 545 and the substrate member 545, the contact state between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be maintained.

  That is, between the facing of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the conductive member 546 which can be elastically deformed in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 167 (b)) is disposed. When the distance between the facings changes, the contact state between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be easily maintained.

  Next, the case where the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 change in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (a) to 168 (c) are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG.

  168 (a) to 168 (c) correspond to the cross sectional view of FIG. 166 (a). Also, in FIG. 168 (a), the liquid crystal device 543 is on one side (the right side in FIG. 168 (a)) of the liquid crystal display 523 with respect to the substrate member 545 in FIG. 168 (a). The changed state is illustrated in FIG. 168 (c) in which the liquid crystal device 543 is changed to the other side (left side in FIG. 168 (c)) of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545.

  In FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (c), the imaginary line KJ1 is at the center position of the first region 545a in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545, and the first portion 546b3 of the cloth member 546b (see FIG. 163 (a)). An imaginary line KJ2 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the image.

  Here, conventionally, an electric device (liquid crystal device 543), a substrate (substrate member 545) having a ground portion (ground portion 545d) disposed opposite to one surface of the electric device and connected to ground, and the substrate There is known a gaming machine provided with connection means (electrically conductive member 546 in the present embodiment) for electrically connecting an electric device to the ground portion of the above. Specifically, the electric device is formed as a liquid crystal display device in which a shield member (back surface portion 543c) made of a metal plate is provided on the back surface of the liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal display 543a). Also, in the conventional product, the connection means is formed as a bow-shaped leaf spring, and the base end is in contact (electrically connected) with the ground portion of the substrate and the bow-shaped convex surface is in contact with the shield member (electrically Connected). The connection means is fixed to the substrate at the base end, and the convex convex surface is pressed against the shield member, and the contact is kept by the elastic deformation of the leaf spring. Thus, static electricity generated in the shield member can be released to the ground through the ground portion of the substrate. Therefore, for example, even if the shield member is charged by static electricity generated by rolling of the game ball or displacement of the liquid crystal display device, the charge is removed through the ground portion of the substrate, color unevenness of the liquid crystal display, dot missing, etc. Occurrence of problems of

  However, in the above-described conventional technology, the shield is caused by the displacement of the electric device or the vibration of the electric device due to the displacement of another effect member or the input of an external force accompanying the rolling or collision of the game ball. When the member and the substrate are displaced relative to each other in the direction orthogonal to the opposite direction, the arcuate convex surface of the connection means is slid relative to the shield member, causing wear of the connection means or the contact object of the connection means. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the one surface (rear surface portion 543c) side of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 or When the substrate member 545 is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposing direction, shear deformation occurs along with the relative displacement (a direction orthogonal to the opposing direction in the first portion 546b3 side and the second portion 546b4 side of the fabric member 546b) Since the conductive member 546 is formed so as to be able to be deformed (longitudinal direction of the conductive member 546), the back surface 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 are formed 545a1) can be maintained in contact with each other. That is, by shear deformation of the conductive member 546, the first portion 546b3 or the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 546 can be prevented from sliding (displacement) with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545. As a result, wear of the conductive member 546 or the contact target (the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545) of the conductive member 546 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the back surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d (protrusion 545a1) of the substrate member 545, the conductive member 546 is held between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 during assembly. It is sufficient to hold the conductive member 546 in place, eliminating the need for work such as fastening. As a result, the workability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 168, when the liquid crystal device 543 changes in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 168 (b)) of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546 By elastically deforming, it is possible to suppress displacement of the contact surface.

  Explaining in detail, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), the liquid crystal device 543 changes to the one side (the right side in FIG. 168 (a)) of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545. When the imaginary line KJ2 changes to one side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523), the bending angle of the fold formed in the third portion 546b5 is made shallow (obtuse) while the first portion 546b3 side is The elastic member 546a is displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction.

  In this case, as described above, the conductive member 546 elastically recovers the elastic member 546a in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 by the first portion 546b3 of the cloth member 546b being folded inside the conductive member 546. Since it is easily formed, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the contact surfaces of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cloth member 546b and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. As a result, wear of the conductive member 546 or the contact target (the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545) of the conductive member 546 can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of rotating the liquid crystal display device 523 90 degrees around the axis of the base member 400. In this case, when the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is changed from being parallel to the horizontal direction to be parallel to the direction of gravity, the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 disposed inside the liquid crystal display device 523 The holding direction of the liquid crystal device 543 changes, and the holding portion of the interposed member 544 and the substrate member 545 with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 is a protrusion 541 f and a through hole 544 c of one longitudinal direction (upper side in the gravity direction) portion of the front case 541. Since it is only (see FIG. 161), the interposed member 544 and the substrate member 545 tend to be displaced in the direction of gravity with respect to the liquid crystal device 543.

  Therefore, the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 with the conductive member 546 are easily displaced. Therefore, when the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 are displaced, the contact object may be worn.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 546 is disposed in a direction in which the endless belt-like opening direction is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Thus, the deformability of the conductive member 546 in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be enhanced.

  Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees around the axis of the base member 400, and the longitudinal direction is positioned parallel to the gravity direction from the state where the longitudinal direction is positioned parallel to the horizontal direction (see FIG. 7) It is possible to suppress positional deviation of the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 when being displaced in the state (see FIG. 11). As a result, when the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 are displaced, the contact object can be prevented from being worn out.

  Here, both ends in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 according to the present embodiment are supported, and the slide unit SL is configured to be slidably displaceable in the lateral direction (see FIGS. 7 to 14). In this case, driving means (driving motor 431) for enabling slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is connected to the liquid crystal display device 523 at one end side in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is slidingly displaced, static electricity generated by the drive of the drive motor 431 is easily transmitted from one side of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the longitudinal direction.

  On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device 523 in the present embodiment, the opening 544a of the interposing member 544 is formed (disposed) so as to be biased toward one end side in the longitudinal direction of the interposing member 544. Accordingly, the conductive member 546 disposed in the opening 544 a is disposed in a state of being biased toward one end side of the liquid crystal display device 523.

  Therefore, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is slidingly displaced in the short direction, the static electricity transmitted from the drive means (drive motor 431) to the liquid crystal device 543 is transmitted to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 543. The conductive member 546 transmits the ground portion 545 d of the substrate member 545 to the ground portion 545 d. Therefore, static electricity due to slide displacement can be prevented from being accumulated in the liquid crystal device 543. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of defects such as color unevenness and missing dots in the liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal device 523.

  When the liquid crystal device 543 changes in the left direction (left direction in FIG. 168C) with respect to the substrate member 545 shown in FIG. 168C, the liquid crystal device 543 shown in FIG. This is only the opposite of the case where the member 545 is changed in the right direction (right direction in FIG. 168 (c)), and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, a conductive member 14546 according to a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170. In the thirteenth embodiment, the cloth member 546b is formed to have a constant width around the elastic member 546a. However, in the fourteenth embodiment, the cloth member 14546b is formed to have different widths. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  169 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 14546 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 169 (b) is a side view of the conductive member 14546 in the direction of the arrow CLXIXb in FIG. 169 (a); FIG. 169 (c) is a side view of the conductive member 14546 in the direction of the arrow CLXIXc of FIG. 170 (a) to 170 (c) are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG.

  170 (a) to 170 (c) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166 (a). Also, in FIG. 170 (a) to FIG. 170 (c), with the position shown in FIG. 170 (b) as the normal (reference) position, in FIG. In the state of FIG. 170 (c), the liquid crystal device 543 is the other side of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545 in FIG. 170 (c). The state changed to the upper side 170 (c) is illustrated respectively. Furthermore, in FIG. 170, the notches 14546b1 and 14546b2 are illustrated by dashed lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the cloth member 14546b of the conductive member 14546 in the fourteenth embodiment has the short side of the liquid crystal display 523 in the third portion 14546b5 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 169 (a)). A notch 14546b1 is cut out from the end face of the other side (right side in FIG. 169) toward one side (left side in FIG. 169) of the liquid crystal display 523 and one end side in the longitudinal direction From the end face of one side (the right side in FIG. 169) of the liquid crystal display device 523 to the third portion 14546b5 of the right side 169 (a), the other side in the lateral direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (FIG. The notch 14546b2 is cut out toward the left side).

  The notch 14546b1 is formed substantially at the middle position between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 169A), and the opening direction width of the cloth member 14546b is equal to that of the conductive member 14546 The width dimension of the cloth member 14546b in the opening direction is set to about one third. In addition, the cutout dimension in the opposing direction (left and right direction in FIG. 169 (b)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cutout portion 14546b1 is the opposing direction dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 It is set larger than half of.

  The notch portion 14546b2 is formed substantially at the middle position between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 169A), and the opening direction width of the cloth member 14546b is the conductive member It is set to about one third of the width dimension in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b of 14546. Further, the cutout dimension in the opposing direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 169 (c)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cutout portion 14546b2 is the opposing direction dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546. It is set larger than half of.

  That is, the notch portion 14546b1 and the notch portion 14546b2 are formed at substantially the same position in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, and at least a part of each overlaps the longitudinal direction of the conductive member 14546 It will be in the state. This makes it easy to shear the side surfaces of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b.

  Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 14546 elastically deforms, whereby the conductive member 14546, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 It is possible to suppress positional deviation of the contact surface with the

  Specifically, when the cloth member 14546b is formed in an endless shape by arranging the cloth member 14546b for the four faces other than the two opposing faces of the elastic member 546a, the elastic deformation of the elastic member 546a in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b occurs. Because the cloth member 14546b is obstructed, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 displace each other in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b, the contact surface between the conductive member 14546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is misaligned. I was afraid to do it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170 (a) or FIG. 170 (b), the notch 14546b1 and the notch 14546b2 are formed in the third portion 14546b5, whereby the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b The rigidity of the Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a (conductive member 14546) is located at the middle portion between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4. It can be deformed.

  Therefore, positional deviation of the contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 14546 can be suppressed. As a result, abrasion of the contact surface between the substrate member 545 or the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 14546 can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, the engaging portion 544 b is formed at one end in the longitudinal direction of the interposed member 545, and is inserted into the recessed portion 541 c 1 formed in the front case 541. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 523 is configured to be rotatable by 90 degrees around the axis of the base member 400. When the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is parallel to the direction of gravity, the other end of the longitudinal direction is located on the upper side in the direction of gravity, and one end in the longitudinal direction is located on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Therefore, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the interposing member 544 is only engaged with the engaging portion 544 b, and accordingly, the interposing member 544 and the interposing member 544 are engaged with the rotational displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523. The substrate member 545 is easily displaced in the lateral direction with respect to the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 may be displaced, and the contact object may be worn away.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by forming the notches 14546b1 and the notches 14546b2 in the conductive member 546, the conductive member 546 can be easily sheared in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. That is, shear deformation can be facilitated in the short direction of the interposing member 544. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the lateral direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 546 can be sheared and deformed. As a result, the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 may be displaced, and wear of the contact target can be suppressed.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the conductive member 546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped has been described. However, in the fifteenth embodiment, the through hole 15546d is formed to penetrate in the longitudinal direction in the conductive member 15546. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  171 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 15546 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 171 (b) is a side view of the conductive member 15546 in the direction of the arrow CCLXIXb in FIG. 171 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 171, the conductive member 15546 according to the fifteenth embodiment is formed into a rectangular parallelepiped one end of which is formed with a through hole 15546d penetrating in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 171A). The through hole 15546d is formed to penetrate the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a.

  The through hole 15546d is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a side view parallel or orthogonal to the first portion 546b3 (upper surface in FIG. 171A) of the conductive member 15546. Further, the through hole 15546d is formed at the center of the elastic member 546a in top view.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the distance dimension in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the through hole 15546d is half the distance dimension in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 15546. The distance dimension in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 of the through hole 15546d is set to half the distance dimension in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 of the conductive member 15546.

  When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the substrate member 545 by the through holes 15546 d, the elastic member 546 a of the conductive member 15 546 is elastically deformed and the conductive member 15546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 Positional displacement of the contact surface can be suppressed.

  Specifically, by forming the through holes 15546d in the conductive member 15546, the rigidity of the conductive member 15546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b can be reduced. Therefore, the conductive member 15546 can be easily sheared in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4.

  Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in one of the opposing directions of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is sheared to deform the conductive member 15546 and the liquid crystal device. It is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the contact surfaces between the substrate 545 and the substrate member 545. As a result, contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 with the conductive member 15546 can be rubbed to prevent damage to the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, or the conductive member 15546.

  In addition, the first recess 15546d1 recessed in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b is provided at both ends of the opening direction of the cloth member 546b on both upper and lower inner surfaces of the through hole 15546d in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5. Are formed over the Also, the conductive member 15546 includes a second recess 15546d2 that is recessed at a position facing the first recess 15546d1. That is, the first concave portion 15546d1 and the second concave portion 15546d2 are formed at positions facing each other, and are recessed in the opposing direction.

  When the conductive member 15546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the first concave portion 15546d1 and the second concave portion 15546d2 crush the inner side of the concaved portion by the elastic member 546a being compressed and held. It is assumed that the

  Here, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in one of the opposing directions of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 with respect to the substrate member 545, the upper and lower side surfaces of the conductive member 15546 (elastic member 546a) stretch. To transform. Therefore, with the deformation, the conductive member 15546 is drawn to the side of the liquid crystal device 543 facing the substrate member 545. Therefore, the area in which the conductive member 15546 abuts on the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the first recess 15546d1 and the second recess 15546d2 are formed, when the end face of the conductive member 15546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b extends and is deformed, the first recess 15546d1 and the first recess 15546d1 are formed. The recessed surface of the second recess 15546 d 2 can be expanded. Thus, the conductive member 15546 can be prevented from being drawn to the opposing gap side of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. As a result, reduction in the contact area between the conductive member 15546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the conductive member 15546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped has been described. However, in the sixteenth embodiment, the concave portion 16546e is provided in the conductive member 16546. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  172 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 16546 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 172 (b) is a side view of the conductive member 16546 in the direction of the arrow CLXXIIb of FIG. 172 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 172, the conductive member 16546 of the sixteenth embodiment is provided with a recessed portion 16546e which is recessed on the end face in the opening direction (left and right in FIG. 172 (b)) of the cloth member 546b. That is, the recessed portion 16546e is formed by partially cutting the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a.

  The recessed portion 16546e is recessed on the upper surface side (left surface side in FIG. 172 (b)) and the lower surface side (right surface side in FIG. 172 (c)) of the conductive member 16546, and in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5. It is formed over the entire area. Further, the recessed portion 16546e is formed at the center of the opposing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 172A) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the distance dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the recessed portion 16546e in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 172A) corresponds to the first portion 546b3 and the second portion of the conductive member 16546. The recess depth dimension (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 172) of one recessed portion 16546e is set to half the distance dimension in the opposing direction of the 546b4 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 16546 (FIG. b) It is set to one third of the distance dimension in the left and right direction).

  When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b with respect to the substrate member 545 by the recessed portion 16546e, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 16546 elastically deforms, thereby the conductive member 16546 and the liquid crystal device 543. And it can suppress that a contact surface with the substrate member 545 shifts in position.

  Describing in detail, by forming the recessed portion 16546e in the conductive member 16546, the rigidity in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 16546 can be reduced. Therefore, the conductive member 15546 can be easily sheared from the middle position in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4.

  Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced relative to the substrate member 545 to one of the openings of the cloth member 546b, the elastic member 546a is deformed to abut the conductive member 16546 with the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. It is possible to suppress displacement of the surface. As a result, it is possible to suppress breakage of the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, or the conductive member 546 due to rubbing of the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 with the conductive member 16546.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the third concave portion 16546e1 concaved in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 is provided at the end of the opening direction of the cloth member 546b on the side surface facing the two concave portions 16546e. The third portion 546b5 is formed over the entire area in the opposite direction of the third portion 546b5.

  In the third recess 16546e1, when the conductive member 16546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is compressed and held so that the concaved inner side is crushed. Ru.

  Here, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in one of the opening directions of the cloth member 546b, the opening direction of the cloth member 546b of the elastic member 546a located between the facing portions of the recessed portions 16546e. The end face stretches and deforms. Therefore, the conductive member 16546 is drawn between the facing of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 with the deformation. Therefore. The area where the conductive member 16546 abuts on the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the third concave portion 16546e1 is formed, the end face in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b of the elastic member 546a located between the opposing portions of the concave portion 16546e extends and deforms. The recessed surface of the three recessed portion 16546e1 is expanded. Thus, the conductive member 16546 can be prevented from being drawn to the side between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. As a result, reduction in the contact area between the conductive member 16546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

  A seventeenth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175. Although the case where the conductive member 546 is formed in a cube has been described in the thirteenth embodiment, in the seventeenth embodiment, the conductive member 17546 is formed in a different shape. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the conductive member 17546 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 (a) is a top view of a conductive member 17546 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 173 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 17546 taken along line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb of FIG. 173 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 173, the conductive member 17546 is formed such that the first portion 17546b3 is curved in an arc shape in top view, and the second portion 546b4 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion A narrow portion 546c is formed at an intermediate position in the opposing direction of the portion 546b4 and inclined toward the central side in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5.

  The conductive member 17546 is formed of an elastic member 17546a formed of an elastic material inside and a cloth member 546b disposed around the elastic member 17546a.

  The elastic member 17546a is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped portion 17546a1 formed in a rectangular shape having a rectangular shape in the top view and a circular arc portion 17546a2 projecting in a semicircular arc shape from one side of the rectangular portion 17546a1.

  The arc portion 17546a2 has a length in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 173 (a) of FIG. 173) of the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of 3 in the opposing direction of the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the elastic member 17546a. The size is set to about one-half, and a constricted portion 546c is formed in the arc portion 17546a2. As a result, the elastic member 17546a can be easily elastically deformed in the opposing direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 173A) from the necked portion 546c. The conductive member 17546 is formed in a fixed shape in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175, a state in which the elastic member 17546a is disposed in the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described.

  FIG. 174A and FIG. 174B are schematic cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG. 175 (a) to 175 (c) are schematic cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG.

  Note that FIG. 174 (a) corresponds to FIG. 166 (a) and FIG. 174 (b) corresponds to FIG. 166 (b), and FIGS. 175 (a) to 175 (c) correspond to FIG. 174 (b). It corresponds to the cross section of (Fig. 166 (b)). Also, in FIG. 175 (a) to FIG. 175 (c), with FIG. 175 (b) as the normal (reference) position, in FIG. 175 (a), the liquid crystal device 543 is longer than the substrate member 545. In FIG. 175 (b), the liquid crystal device 543 is one end side of the liquid crystal display 523 with respect to the substrate member 545 in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 175 (c)). The state of displacement to the right) is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 174, when the conductive member 17546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the side surface on the side of the rectangular parallelepiped portion 17546a1 is in contact with the substrate member 545 and In a state in which a part of the side surface on the 17546a2 side is elastically deformed, the liquid crystal device 543 is in contact (see FIG. 174B).

  In FIGS. 174 and 175, the contact region of the liquid crystal device 532 which contacts the conductive member 17546 in the normal state (the state shown in FIG. 174 (b)) is illustrated as a first contact region 17543d1 and The contact area of the cloth member 546b in contact with the first contact area 17543d1 is illustrated as a first deformation area NR1.

  In the state where the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to the other end side (left side in FIG. 175A) of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the conductive member 17546 is different from the first contact region 17543d1. The contact region of the liquid crystal device 532 in contact with the liquid crystal device 532 is illustrated as a second contact region 17543d2, and the contact region of the cloth member 546b in contact with the second contact region 17543d2 is illustrated as a second deformation region NR2.

  Furthermore, in a state where the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 to one end side (right side in FIG. 175) of the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 17546 and the first contact region 17543d1 are different from each other. The contact area of the liquid crystal device 532 in contact is illustrated as a third contact area 17543d3, and the contact area of the cloth member 546b in contact with the third contact area 17543d3 is illustrated as a third deformation area NR3.

  Also, in FIG. 175 (a) to FIG. 175 (c), an imaginary line KJ1 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line at the central position in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 in the first region 545a of the substrate member 545.

  As shown in FIG. 174, in the seventeenth embodiment, in a state where the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are disposed at the reference position, the first deformation area NR1 of the conductive member 17546 is deformed to 1 contact region 17543d1 is abutted. On the other hand, the conductive member 17546 on the rectangular portion 17546a1 side is disposed in a state of being in contact with the first region 545a of the substrate member 545 as in the thirteenth embodiment.

  Accordingly, since the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be connected by the conductive member 17546, the electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be released to the ground portion 545 d of the substrate member 545.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 175A to 175C, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, elasticity is produced centering on the constricted portion 546c. By elastically deforming the member 17546a, each contact area can be brought into contact with each deformation area. Accordingly, rubbing between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 17546 can be prevented. As a result, the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 17546 can be prevented from being rubbed and damaged.

  Explaining in detail, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the left direction with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is elastically deformed so that the elastic member 546a is on the left side. It is biased. As a result, the left elastic member 546 a is pushed to the liquid crystal device 543 side and abuts on the liquid crystal device 543.

  Thus, in the seventeenth embodiment, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to the other end side (left side in FIG. 175A) of the liquid crystal device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the second displacement region NR2 By bringing the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 into contact with each other, the liquid crystal device 543 can be maintained in contact with the substrate member 545 by bringing the liquid crystal device 543 into contact with the substrate.

  In other words, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced relative to the substrate member 545 to the other end side (left side in FIG. 175) of the liquid crystal device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the liquid crystal device By allowing the second displacement region NR2 corresponding to the second contact region 17543d2 of 543 to abut, rubbing of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 with the conductive member 17546 can be prevented. As a result, the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 17546 can be prevented from being rubbed and damaged.

  Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other, and the liquid crystal device 543 is opposite to the substrate member 545 in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 523 (left and right direction in FIG. 175). When displaced in the direction, the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 and the contact surface of the conductive member 17546 can be separated.

  Thus, static electricity can be prevented from being conducted from the liquid crystal device 543 to the conductive member 17546 at the same position. Here, since the static electricity is conducted at the location where the resistance is small, the static electricity is repeatedly conducted at the location where the resistance is small if the contact surfaces are at the same position. Therefore, there is a possibility that the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 may be partially degraded at a portion where static electricity is likely to be conducted.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 are separated by separating the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 from the contact surface of the conductive member 17546. The contact position of the 17546 can be changed. Therefore, reduction in the electrical resistance can be suppressed at the same position. Therefore, since the portion where static electricity is likely to be conducted can be changed, it is possible to suppress partial degradation of liquid crystal device 543 and conductive member 17546 at the portion where static electricity is likely to be conducted. As a result, the conductivity of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 can be maintained.

  The state in which the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the right direction with respect to the substrate member 545 shown in FIG. 175 (c) is opposite to the state in which the liquid crystal device 543 described above is displaced in the left direction with respect to the substrate member 545. Since the contact surface between the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 is only changed to the third contact region 17543d3 and the third deformation region, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  An eighteenth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where a part of the conductive member 17546 is formed in an arc shape has been described, but in the eighteenth embodiment, the conductive member 18546 is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  FIG. 176 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 18546 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 176 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 18546 taken along line CLXXVIb-CLXXVIb in FIG. 176 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 176, the conductive member 18546 in the eighteenth embodiment is formed in a circular column shape in top view. That is, the elastic member 18546a is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the cloth member 546b is wound (wound) around the outer peripheral surface thereof. In this case, the diameter of the conductive member 18546 is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 163A) of the conductive member 546 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  Thus, in a state where the conductive member 18546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a disposed on the inner side of the conductive member 18546 is slightly opposed to the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. It is arranged in a compressed state. In other words, the conductive member 18546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 in a state of being elastically deformed into an elliptical shape in top view.

  The cloth member 546b is bonded to the outer peripheral surface of the elastic member 18546a. Further, the conductive member 18546 is disposed in the opening 544a of the interposing member 544 in a posture in which the opening direction of the cloth member 546b is directed to the short direction of the liquid crystal device 543, similarly to the conductive member 546 in the thirteenth embodiment. .

  When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the conductive member 18546 is rotationally displaced about its center. Thus, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the contact state between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be maintained.

  That is, in the eighteenth embodiment, by rotating the conductive member 18546, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 from being conducted at the same position as in the seventeenth embodiment. That is, by the rotation of the conductive member 18546b, the contact position with the liquid crystal device 543 and the contact position with the substrate member 545 can be changed to suppress partial deterioration of the contact surface. As a result, the conductivity of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 18546 can be maintained.

  In addition, since the conductive member 18546 is rotationally displaced when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced (displaced) with respect to the substrate member 545, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be prevented from rubbing against the conductive member 18546. As a result, the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 18546 can be prevented from being rubbed and damaged.

  A nineteenth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. In the thirteenth embodiment, although the case where the protrusions 545a1 of the first region 545a are arranged in a zigzag manner has been described, in the first region 19545a of the nineteenth embodiment, the protrusions 19545a1 are arranged at the outer edge of the first region 19545a. Ru.

  FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the substrate member 545 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 178 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 19546, and FIG. 178 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 19546 taken along line CLXXVIIIb-CLXXVIIIb of FIG. 178 (a). FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the conductive member 19546. FIG.

  Note that FIG. 179 (a) corresponds to FIG. 166 (a) and FIG. 179 (b) corresponds to FIG. 166 (b). Further, in FIG. 177 (a), the first area 19545a and the second area 19545b are illustrated by broken lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 177 to 179, in the first region 19545a of the substrate member 545 in the nineteenth embodiment, the projections 545a1 are disposed only in the through holes 545a2 located along the outer edge of the first region 19545a. In other words, the protrusion 545a1 is disposed along the outer edge of the first region 19545a.

  In addition, the conductive member 19546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and an elastic member 19546a formed of an elastic material, and a cloth member 546b disposed on four surfaces excluding two opposing surfaces of the elastic member 19546a in one direction It is formed and provided.

  The elastic member 19546a is formed of a sponge-like member, and in a state in which the cloth member 546b is not provided, is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped. Further, the elastic member 19546a is formed to have a recessed portion 19546a3 which is formed by cutting out on four sides around the side surface on the side of the substrate member 545 (the lower side in FIG. 178A). In other words, the elastic member 19546a is provided with a non-recessed portion 19546a4 which is not formed in the center of the side surface on the substrate member 545 side.

  That is, the other side of the elastic member 19546a is a recessed portion 19546a3 (first region) facing the region where the protrusion 545a1 of the substrate member 545 is provided, and a region where the protrusion of the substrate member 545 is not formed. The non-recessed portion 19546a4 (second region) faces the non-recessed portion 19546a4 (second region), and the non-recessed portion 19546a4 (second region) is projected to one side (the substrate member 545 side) than the recessed portion 19546a3 (first region) Because the conductive member 546 is held between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, and the elastic member 546a is compressed, the surface pressure in the non-recessed portion 19546a4 (second region) can be increased. it can. As a result, since the non-recessed portion 19546a4 (second region) can hardly get over the protrusion 545a1, the cloth member 546b can be suppressed from sliding relative to the substrate member 545 by that amount. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the concave portion 19546a3 (first region) can be lowered, it is possible to suppress that the elastic member 546a is less likely to be sheared.

  The non-recessed portion 19546a4 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape is inscribed in each protrusion 545a1 arranged around the first region 19545a (a region formed by a tangent line in contact with the inner peripheral side of each protrusion 545a1) It is formed to be small, and in this embodiment, it is set to a size equal to that of the second region 19545b (that is, a size in which the outer edge is positioned between the protrusion 545a1 and the through hole 545a2). In addition, a recessed dimension L8 (see FIG. 178A) of the recessed portion 19546a3 along the opposing direction of the first portion 19546b3 and the second portion 19546b4 is a projecting dimension L9 of the protrusion 545a1 from the substrate member 545 (FIG. 177). It is set larger than (b) (see L8> L9).

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 179, when the conductive member 19546 is disposed in the liquid crystal display device 523, the cloth member 546b (second portion 19546b3) disposed in the non-recessed portion 19546a4 is in contact with the second region 19545b. It can be arranged in the The cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 are disposed in the concave portion 19546a3 by being compressed when the elastic member 546a is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. The entire area of the cloth member 546b (the second portion 19546b3) can be in contact with the protrusions 545a1.

  In this case, as described above, since the recessed dimension L8 is set larger than the protruding dimension L9, the compression rate of the non-recessed portion 19546a4 can be made larger than that of the recessed portion 19546a3.

  Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the protrusions 545a1 are arranged in a staggered manner with respect to the first region 545a, the entire surface of the cloth member 546b (the second portion 546b3) is substantially uniformly supported by the plurality of protrusions 545a1. As a result, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 545a may be reduced. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing plane, there is a possibility that the contact surface of the cloth member 546b and the first region 545a may be misaligned.

  On the other hand, in the nineteenth embodiment, the compression ratio of the non-recessed portion 19546a4 is made larger than that of the recessed portion 19546a3, and the projections 545a1 surround the periphery of the non-recessed portion 19546a4. It is possible to prevent positional deviation unless the missing portion 19546a4 portion gets over the protrusion 545a1. That is, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 19545a can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing plane, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the contact surface of the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545.

  A twentieth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protrusions 545a1 of the first region 545a are arranged in a zigzag manner has been described. However, in the first region 20545a of the twentieth embodiment, the protrusions 545a1 are linear to the first region 20545a. Arranged side by side.

  FIG. 180 (a) is a front view of a substrate member 545 in the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 180 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along line CLXXXb-CLXXXb of FIG. 180 (a). 181 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 20546, and FIG. 181 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 20546 taken along line CLXXXIb-CLXXXIb of FIG. 181 (a). 182 (a) and 182 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the conductive member 20546, and FIG. 182 (c) is an enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the conductive member 20546 in the range CLXXXIIc of FIG. 182 (b).

  FIG. 182 (a) corresponds to FIG. 166 (a), and FIG. 182 (b) corresponds to FIG. 166 (b). Also, in FIG. 180 (a), the first region 20545a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 180 to 182, in the first region 20545a of the substrate member 545 in the twentieth embodiment, the protrusion 545a1 is substantially in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 180A) of the substrate member 545 in the first region 20545a. In the position, they are arranged in a straight line in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 180A) of the substrate member 545.

  In addition, the conductive member 20546 is formed in a cubic shape, and an elastic member 20546a formed of an elastic material, and a cloth member 546b disposed on four surfaces excluding two opposing surfaces in one direction of the elastic member 20546a. It is formed and provided.

  The elastic member 20546a is formed of a sponge-like member, and in a state in which the cloth member 546b is not disposed, is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped. In addition, the elastic member 20546a is substantially at the center of the side surface on the substrate member 545 side (the lower side in FIG. 181A) (the approximate center position in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 (the lateral direction in FIG. 181A)). And the concave portion 20546a3 which is cut out along the opening direction of the cloth member 546b (the left and right direction in FIG. 181 (b)). As a result, in the elastic member 20546a, non-recessed portions 20546a4 are formed in two places on the end surface (side surface) on the substrate member 545 side with the recessed portion 20546a3 interposed therebetween.

  In other words, the end surface of the elastic member 20546a on the second portion 546b4 side has a recessed portion 20546a3 (first region) facing the region where the protrusion 545a1 of the substrate member 545 is protruded, and the protrusion of the substrate member 545 A non-recessed portion 20546a4 (second region) facing the non-formed region is provided, and the non-recessed portion 20546a4 (second region) protrudes from the recessed portion 20546a3 (first region).

  Therefore, in the state where the conductive member 20546 is held between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the elastic member 546a is compressed, the surface pressure in the non-recessed portion 20546a4 (second region) can be increased. As a result, the cloth member 546b (second portion 20546b4) disposed in the non-recessed portion 20546a4 can be made difficult to get over the protrusion 545a1 by using the protrusion 545a1 received in the recessed portion 20546a3 (first region). Accordingly, the cloth member 546b can be prevented from sliding relative to the substrate member 545. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the recessed portion 20546a3 (first region) can be reduced, it is possible to suppress that the elastic member 546a is less likely to be sheared.

  The non-recessed portion 20546a4 has an outer shape substantially equal to that of the second region 20545b in which the projection 545a1 of the first region 20545a is not formed. The concave dimension L10 of the concave portion 20546a3 (the depth dimension in the direction along the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, see FIG. 181 (a)) is a protrusion of the projection 545a1 from the substrate member 545 It is set larger than the dimension L9 (see FIG. 180 (b)) (L10> L9). In addition, the width dimension (the dimension in the direction along the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5, the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 181A) of the concave portion 20546a3 is the maximum diameter of the protrusion 545a1 (the dimension in the lateral direction In the present embodiment, the width dimension of the recessed portion 20546a3 is set to approximately twice the maximum diameter of the protrusion 545a1.

  As shown in FIG. 182, when the conductive member 20546 is disposed in the liquid crystal display device 523, the cloth member 546b disposed on the side surface of the non-recessed portion 20546a4 is disposed in contact with the inside of the second region 20545b. Be done. The cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 are compressed when the elastic member 20546a is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, so that the entire region of the cloth member 546b is the first region. It is in a state of being in contact with 20545a.

  In this case, as described above, since the recessed dimension L10 is set larger than the protruding dimension L9, the compression rate of the non-recessed portion 20546a4 can be made larger than that of the recessed portion 20546a3.

  In the twentieth embodiment, the compression rate of the non-recessed portion 20546a4 is made larger than that of the recessed portion 20546a3, and the projection 545a1 is disposed between the pair of non-recessed portions 20546a4, so the non-recessed portion 20546a4 The position can not be shifted unless the portion gets over the protrusion 545a1. That is, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 19545a can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing plane, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the contact surface of the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced or combined with part or all of one or more other embodiments to constitute a gaming machine.

  In the above embodiments, the slide member 520, 2520, 4520 is slide-displaced by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A pair of rod-like members (one side member and the other side) Members are disposed, and the one side guided member 521 (rail side member 521a) and the other side guided member 522 are slid along the pair of rod-like members, whereby the slide members 520, 2520, 4520 are arranged. It may be slide-displaced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration in which the relative displacement between the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b in the one side guided member 521 is possible is described as being formed from the insertion pin 521b1 and the insertion hole 521a1. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring or the like) is interposed between the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b. With the elastic deformation of the elastic body, relative displacement may be possible.

  In each of the above embodiments, the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 has been described as being eccentrically located at least on the display surface 523a side from the axial center of the rotating shaft 523c. For example, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 may be coincident with the axial center of the rotation shaft 523c.

  In addition, the position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axial center of the rotation axis 523 c (longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display 523) may be located at the longitudinal center of the liquid crystal display 523. It may be located eccentrically on one side or the other side of the direction. In this case, it is preferable that the position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotation shaft 523c be eccentric to the side closer to the drive motor 531 of the rotation drive mechanism. This is because the deviation of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be used as in the case of the weight of the drive motor 531.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, 4520 are disposed so as to be slidably displaceable with respect to the cover member 420 via the slide rail 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A member (displacement member) of another displacement form may be disposed.

  For example, a pair of rotary bodies rotatably supported by the cover member 420 at the rotation axis in the same direction as the rotation direction of the base member 400 with respect to the rear case 300 may be provided. In this case, the pair of rotating bodies are disposed point-symmetrically with the rotation axis of the base member 400 with respect to the rear case 300 as a point of symmetry, and the rotational directions of the two are opposite. Thereby, it is possible to cancel the inertial force accompanying the start of the rotation of the pair of rotating bodies or the stop of the rotation, and it is possible to suppress the base member 400 and the cover member 420 from rotating with respect to the back case 300. That is, while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the rear case 300, only the rotation of the pair of rotating bodies can be facilitated.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the rotation drive mechanism (the drive motor 531, the pinion gear 532, the first gear 533, and the second gear 534) is disposed on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and such a rotational drive mechanism may be disposed on the other side guided member 521.

  In this case, in a state where base member 400 is arranged at the second rotational position, in the case where an inertial force accompanying the start of the slide displacement of liquid crystal display device 523 or the stop of the slide displacement acts, the liquid crystal display device 523 It is possible to suppress that the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement becomes too large due to the rotational inertia of. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) is slid in the horizontal direction while the liquid crystal display device 523 can be prevented from being slid and displaced by the inertia force. In this case, the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the output of the drive motor 431 required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, wear of the slide rail 510 due to slide displacement can be suppressed.

  In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the passage members 5600 to 8600 are formed as the passage of the game ball flowing down the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. As well. For example, it may be a spherical member used for rendering outside the game area.

  In the eighth embodiment, the slide unit SL as the displacement member is displaced while overlapping the back surface of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a with the range Rg, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A portion may be displaced to a position where it is inserted into the passage member 8600 from the opening 8564 of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a. In this case, the displacement region of the slide unit SL can be expanded to the maximum, and the rendering effect by the displacement can be further enhanced. That is, it is possible to displace the displacement member further to the front side, and by bringing the displacement member closer to the player, it is possible to give a powerful force.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the slide unit SL is displaced while overlapping the back surface of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a in the range Rg, the portion overlapping the back surface of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a of the slide unit SL in the range Rg can be independently displaced. As the variable structure, when interference with the game ball is predicted, the interference with the game ball may be suppressed by displacing only the portion of the variable structure. As a result, when interference with the gaming ball is predicted, it is not necessary to displace the entire slide unit SL, and it is possible to promptly take measures to suppress the interference with the gaming ball.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the elastic members 546a and 17546a are formed of polyurethane. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the elastic member 546a may be formed of a rubber molded product or a coil spring.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the elastic members 546a and 17546a are formed in a sponge shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a foamed rubber (cellular rubber) obtained by kneading a foaming agent into a rubber raw material and vulcanizing and forming it. In this case, the form of the bubble may be a closed cell or an open cell.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the elastic members 546a and 17546a are formed of a non-conductive material, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the elastic members 546a and 17546a may be formed of a conductive material. Good.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the cloth member 546b is wound around the elastic members 546a and 17546a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the cloth member 546b may be disposed on three quarters of the entire circumference of the elastic members 546a and 17546a from the side surface of the elastic members 546a and 17546a on the substrate member 545 side to the side surface on the liquid crystal device 543 side.

  In this case, the elastic members 546a and 17546a can be easily elastically deformed by opening one side surface. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced relative to the substrate member 545, the contact positions of the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are maintained. It can be easy. As a result, the conductive member 546 can be prevented from rubbing against the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, and the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can not be It is possible to suppress the contact surface from being displaced and the contact object from being worn out.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the cloth member 546b is adhered to the outer surfaces of the elastic members 546a and 17546a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the cloth member 546b may be unbonded to the outer surface of the elastic members 546a and 17546a.

  In this case, since the cloth member 546b can be made less susceptible to the tensile force from the elastic member 546a, the elastic member 546a can be easily deformed. As a result, positional deviation of the contact surfaces of the conductive member 16546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, although the case where the protrusion 545a1 is formed only on the substrate member 545 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the protrusion 545a1 may be used as the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546 of the liquid crystal device 543. , 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, and 20546 may be formed on the contact surface (back surface portion 543c). Thus, the contact surface between the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 can be hardly displaced.

  In this case, it is preferable that the projection 545a1 of the liquid crystal device 543 and the projection 545a1 of the substrate member 545 do not overlap in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other. That is, it is preferable that the projection 545a1 on the liquid crystal device 543 side be positioned so as to overlap the through hole 545a2 of the substrate member 545 with the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other. Thereby, when the liquid crystal display device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, the elastic deformation force of the conductive member 546 in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is increased. it can. As a result, the contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 can be hardly displaced.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the first regions 545a, 19545a, and 20545a of the substrate member 545 are formed on one end side with respect to the central position in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 has been described. A control chip may be provided on one end side of the substrate member 545 for controlling the display of the liquid crystal device 543 or for controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the substrate member 545.

  According to this, since the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, and 20546 are disposed around the control chip, the static electricity accumulated in the liquid crystal device is prevented from conducting to the control chip. It is easy to do. As a result, the control chip attached to the substrate member 545 can be easily protected.

  In this case, the control chip is preferably disposed in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. As described above, the conductive member 546 is configured to be easily deformed in the direction orthogonal to the opening direction of the cloth member 546b by elastically deforming the elastic member 546a. Therefore, for example, when the control chip is disposed in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 of the conductive member 546, the cloth member 546b on the third portion 546b5 side when the conductive member 546 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display 532. However, with the deformation of the elastic member 546a, there is a risk of deformation and approaching the control chip. Accordingly, the third portion 546b5 (the cloth member 546b) abuts on the control chip, and there is a possibility that the wiring for conducting the control chip may be shorted.

  On the other hand, by arranging the control chip in the opening direction of the cloth member 545, it is possible to suppress the cloth member 546b from approaching the control chip when the conductive member 546 is elastically deformed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress shorting of the wiring that conducts the control chip.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the covering member 545e is disposed on one surface of the ground portion 545d of the first region 545a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the covering member 545e may not be formed on one surface of the ground portion 545d, and the protrusion 545a1 may not be formed.

  In this case, since the contact area between the second portion 546b4 of the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 18546, 19546, and 20546 and the ground portion 545d can be secured, the liquid crystal device 543 is charged. The electric charge can be easily removed via the ground portion 545 d of the substrate member 545.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the case where the rigidity is lowered by forming the notch portion in the cloth member 14546b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rigidity may be reduced by forming a part of the cloth member 14546b thin. In this case, conductivity can be secured.

  Although the case where one through hole 15546d is formed in the conductive member 15546 has been described in the fifteenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of through holes 15546d may be formed in the conductive member 15546. Thereby, the deformability of the conductive member 15546 can be enhanced. In this case, the plurality of through holes 15546d may be formed in different sizes.

  Although the case where one recessed portion 16546e is formed on one side surface of the conductive member 16546 is described in the sixteenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of recessed portions 16546e may be juxtaposed in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4. Thereby, the deformability of the conductive member 16546 can be enhanced. In this case, the recess width and the recess distance of the plurality of recesses 16546e may be set to different dimensions.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice and three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<About the concept of the invention taking the slide member 520 in which the rail side member 521a of the one side guided member 521 and the liquid crystal side member 521b are connected so as to be capable of relative displacement as an example>
A game machine comprising: one side member; another side member disposed opposite to the one side member; and a slide member guided and slidably displaced by the one side member and the other side member. The slide member is provided between a guided member guided by the one side member, a guided member guided by the other side, and a guided portion and a guided portion. And a rotatable member rotatably supported on the one side member, wherein a state of allowance of relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is permitted of relative movement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being different from the state.

  Here, one side member, the other side member disposed opposite to the one side member, and the slide member guided and slid on the one side member and the other side member respectively are provided. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  The applicant of the present application has a sliding member guided by one side member, one side guided member guided by the other side member, and one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. An arrangement has been devised which is formed from a rotatable member rotatably supported therebetween (unknown at the time of filing of the present application). According to this configuration, variations in the rendering operation can be increased by the rotation member being able to rotate as well as slide displacement. Further, by the rotation of the rotation member, for example, not only the front side of the rotation member but also the back side can be visually recognized by the player.

  However, in such a configuration, when the rotation member is rotated, there is a problem in that the slide member is slidingly displaced with respect to the one side member and the other side member by the inertia force accompanying the start of the rotation or the stop of the rotation. . That is, it is difficult to rotate only the rotation member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the allowable state of the relative displacement of the one side guided member to the one side member is different from the allowable state of the relative displacement of the other side guided member to the other side member. When an inertia force accompanying the start of rotation or the stop of rotation is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be a force (a braking force) that presses the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, and the slide member is the one side member and the other side member It is possible to suppress the slide displacement with respect to That is, only the rotation member can be easily rotated while the slide member is stopped at the predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In addition, as a structure which forms relative displacement of the one side guidance member or the other side guidance member to one side member or the other side member, for example, a gap is formed between both, and relative displacement A mode in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the two, and a mode in which relative displacement is possible along with elastic deformation of the elastic body. Or the form etc. where these were combined are illustrated.

  Also, as a form in which the allowable state differs, for example, when the relative displacement allowance differs, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form unit relative displacement) differs, or these are combined. And the like.

  The gaming machine A1 includes rotational driving means for rotationally driving the rotational member, and the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. A game machine A2 characterized in that the rotation drive means is disposed on the one side guided member, which is more easily accepted.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily permitted than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side member. Since the rotational drive means is disposed on the one side guided member in such a form that relative displacement is easily permitted, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be In the case of a pressing force (braking force), the pressing force can be increased by using the rotational inertia of the rotary drive means. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotation member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In addition, as a form in which relative displacement is easily permitted, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form unit relative displacement is decreased, or when these are combined, etc. It is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A2, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the rotational driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, so On the other hand, when the one side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotational drive means can be displaced at a locus farther from the other side displaced member. Thereby, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (a braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means can be more easily utilized Can increase the pressing force. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotation member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, when the slide members are disposed in a pair facing each other along the direction of the slide displacement and are slide-displaced in the direction in which the two slide in proximity to each other, one of the slide members The side guided member is disposed opposite to the other guided member of the other slide member, and the other guided member of the one slide member is disposed opposite to the one guided member of the other slide member. A game machine A4 to feature.

  Here, a pair of slide members are disposed to face each other along the direction of slide displacement, and when slide displacement is performed in the direction in which they approach each other, the two are closely spaced at the center position without clearance. When it abuts, the load of the drive means (motor) for slidingly displacing these slide members becomes large, and damage to the drive means and the transmission mechanism (gear etc.) of the driving force is caused.

  On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allowance is given to the position at which both are stopped in anticipation of dimensional tolerance, assembly tolerance or control tolerance (set a sufficient gap between both at the center position) Then, the back side is visually recognized by the player from the gap, which causes the deterioration of the appearance (rendering effect).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of slide members are disposed facing each other in the alternate direction, so they are slide-displaced in the direction in which they approach each other When the slide members are in contact with each other in the position, the one side guided member of one and the other slide members is retracted to receive the other side guided member of the other (the other and one side) slide members. (A pair of slide members can be in a posture inclined with respect to the direction of slide displacement based on the difference in relative displacement allowance described above). That is, even if the pair of slide members abut on each other at the central position, damage to the drive means and the transmission mechanism of the drive force can be suppressed, so that the positions for stopping the both can be set closer to each other. As a result, at the center position, the pair of slide members can be made to approach each other in a state in which the gap between them is smaller, and the appearance (rendering effect) can be improved.

  In any one of game machines A2 to A4, a base member on which the one side member and the other side member are disposed, a sensor device disposed on the base member, and a detected member detected by the sensor device A game machine A5, comprising: the detected member is disposed on the other-side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member is more difficult than the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member. Since the to-be-detected member is provided, even when the posture of the slide member changes, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the to-be-detected member with respect to the base member (sensor device). As a result, the position of the slide member relative to the base member (one side member and the other side member) can be detected more accurately, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A4.

<About the concept of the invention in which the slide mechanism 2500 in which the one side guided members 521 are arranged opposite to each other is an example>
A game machine comprising a base, a base member rotatably supported by the base, and a displacement member disposed displaceably by the base member, the inertial force associated with the displacement of the displacement member A game machine B1 comprising: a restraining means for restraining rotation of the base member relative to the base.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a member formed displaceably (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  In this case, such a configuration (displacement member) is disposed on the base member, for example, and the structure in which the base member is rotatably supported by the base (not known at the time of filing of the present application) There is a problem that the base member is rotated relative to the base by the inertia force accompanying the stop of the wheel. That is, it is difficult to displace the displacement member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the suppression member is provided to suppress the rotation of the base member relative to the base by the inertia force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member, the rotation of the displacement member is started or stopped. It is possible to suppress the base member from being rotated relative to the base when the inertia force accompanying the force acts on the base member. That is, while the base member is stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide the sliding member.

  In addition, the aspect of a displacement is not specifically limited, A rotational displacement, a rocking displacement, a slide displacement, the displacement of the aspect which combined these, etc. are illustrated. The trajectory of the slide displacement may be any of a straight line, a curve, and a trajectory combining these. Also, the direction of displacement may be indeterminate. For example, the displacement member may be elastically supported by the base member via the elastic body, and the displacement member may be displaced by elastic deformation of the elastic body.

  In the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is slid and displaced while the one side member, the other side member disposed opposite to the one side member, and the one side and the other side are respectively guided by the one side member and the other side member. And a slide member, the slide member being guided by the one side member, the other guided member guided by the other side member, the one side guided portion, And a rotating member rotatably supported between the other side guided portions, wherein the allowable state of relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is the other side covering member with respect to the other side member. Unlike the allowable state of relative displacement of the guide members, the pair of slide members includes one guided member and the other guided member of one of the slide members, and one guided member and the other of the other slide member. Side guided member Gaming machine B2, characterized in that disposed in a posture respectively opposed.

  Here, one side member, the other side member disposed opposite to the one side member, and the slide member guided and slid on the one side member and the other side member respectively are provided. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  The applicant of the present application has a sliding member guided by one side member, one side guided member guided by the other side member, and one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. A rotational member rotatably supported between the two, and the allowable state of relative displacement of the one side guided member to the one side member is different from the allowable state of the relative displacement of the other side guided member to the other side member Configuration (not known at the time of filing the present application). According to this configuration, when the inertia force accompanying the start of the rotation of the rotation member or the stop of the rotation is applied to the slide member, the slide member has a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be a force (a braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, and as a result, the slide member is the one side member It is possible to suppress sliding displacement with respect to the other side member. That is, only the rotation member can be easily rotated while the slide member is stopped at the predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In this case, the applicant has devised a configuration in which the above-described one side member and the other side member are disposed on the base member and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (not known at the time of the present application application). According to this configuration, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation member can be changed according to the rotation position of the base member, so variations in the rendering operation can be increased accordingly .

  However, in such a configuration, when the slide members having the same configuration are disposed face to face, when the inertia force accompanying the start of the rotation of the rotation member or the stop of the rotation is applied to the slide member, one slide The displacement component orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement in the member and the displacement component orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement in the other slide member are in alternate directions (point-symmetrical orientation that gives rotational inertia to the base member) Therefore, there is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base. That is, it was difficult to rotate the rotating member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the pair of slide members includes one guided member and the other guided member of one slide member, and the other slide member. Since the one side guided member and the other side guided member are disposed in the postures facing each other, when the inertia force accompanying the start of the rotation of the rotation member or the stop of the rotation is applied to the slide member, The displacement component orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement in the slide member and the displacement component orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement on the other slide member can be made the same direction (axisymmetric orientation), and the base member is a base It can be suppressed to be rotated. That is, while the base member is stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide the sliding member.

  In addition, as a structure which forms relative displacement of the one side guidance member or the other side guidance member to one side member or the other side member, for example, a gap is formed between both, and relative displacement A mode in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the two, and a mode in which relative displacement is possible along with elastic deformation of the elastic body. Or the form etc. where these were combined are illustrated.

  Also, as a form in which the allowable state differs, for example, when the relative displacement allowance differs, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form unit relative displacement) differs, or these are combined. And the like.

  In the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily permitted than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side member. When the slide member displaces in the direction, the base member rotates with respect to the base such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned above the other side guided member in the substantially vertical direction. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that the position is set.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side. When sliding the slide member in the substantially horizontal direction, the base member relative to the base is configured such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned above the other side guided member in the substantially vertical direction. Since the rotational position is set, a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement (in the case of one side of the slide member) when an inertia force accompanying the start of the rotation of the rotation member or the stop of the rotation is applied to the slide member The displacement component causing the force (the braking force) to be pressed against the member or the other member can be set to the lower side in the vertical direction (gravity direction). Thereby, when rotating a rotation member, it can suppress that a slide member floats up and can stabilize the rotation.

  In addition, as a form in which relative displacement is easily permitted, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form unit relative displacement is decreased, or when these are combined, etc. It is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily permitted than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side member. When the slide member displaces in the direction, the base member relative to the base is configured such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned below the other side guided member in the substantially vertical direction. A game machine B4 characterized in that a rotational position is set.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily permitted than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side. When sliding the slide member in the substantially horizontal direction, the base member relative to the base such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned below the other side guided member in the substantially vertical direction. The rotational position of the slide member is set, so that when an inertia force accompanying the start of the slide displacement of the slide member or the stop of the slide displacement is applied to the slide member, a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement (slide member The displacement component that applies a force (a braking force) to press one side member or the other side member can be made vertically upward (opposite to the direction of gravity). As a result, when sliding the slide member, the resistance due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. In addition, wear of the sliding portion due to slide displacement can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a form in which relative displacement is easily permitted, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form unit relative displacement is decreased, or when these are combined, etc. It is illustrated.

  A game machine B5, comprising: a rotational drive means for rotationally driving the rotational member, the rotational drive means being disposed on the one side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3, the rotational drive means is disposed on the one side guided member in a manner in which relative displacement is easily permitted compared to the other side guided member. When the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of displacement is a force (a braking force) that presses the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, the pressing force is made large using the rotational inertia of the rotation drive means can do. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is easy to suppress the slide member from rising, and the rotation can be stabilized.

  A game machine B6 comprising: a rotational drive means for rotationally driving the rotational member, wherein the rotational drive means is disposed on the other side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be made vertically upward (opposite to the direction of gravity). Since the rotational drive means is disposed on the other side guided member in a form in which relative displacement is not allowed compared to the guide member, in the direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement due to the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means It is possible to suppress that the displacement component of V becomes too large. As a result, when rotating the rotating member, it is possible to suppress the sliding displacement of the sliding member, and when sliding the sliding member, it is possible to suppress the driving force required for the sliding displacement, and It is possible to suppress the wear of the sliding part due to the displacement.

  In the gaming machine B5, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the rotational driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, so On the other hand, when the one side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotational drive means can be displaced at a locus farther from the other side displaced member. Thereby, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (a braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means can be more easily utilized Can increase the pressing force. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is easy to suppress the slide member from rising, and the rotation can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the other side guided member opposite to the other side member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the other side guided member opposite to the other side member, so one side member and the other side When the one side guided member and the other side guided member are relatively displaced with respect to the member, the rotational drive means can be positioned at a portion where the relative displacement amount is smaller. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement becomes too large due to the rotation inertia of the rotation driving means. As a result, when rotating the rotating member, it is possible to suppress the sliding displacement of the sliding member, and when sliding the sliding member, it is possible to suppress the driving force required for the sliding displacement, and It is possible to suppress the wear of the sliding part due to the displacement.

<Regarding the concept of the invention taking the slide member 4520 in which the position of the rotation shaft 4523c is eccentric as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a slide member slidably formed between a first position and a second position, the game machine is disposed opposite to the slide member disposed at the first position from the side opposite to the second position And an effect means for effecting between the opposing member and the slide member, wherein the slide member is rotatably formed by a rotation shaft located eccentrically along the direction of the slide displacement. A game machine C1 characterized by

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a slide member formed to be slideable between a first position and a second position (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  The applicant has an opposing member disposed opposite to the slide member disposed at the first position from the opposite side to the second position, and an effect means for effecting between the opposing member and the opposed slide member. A game machine has been devised (not known at the time of filing of the present application). However, in the configuration described above, if the distance between the facing of the slide member and the opposing member arranged at the first position is narrow, the effect by the effect means can not be sufficiently provided (for example, the movable member for effect) Space can not be secured, or an area for visualizing a member for presentation can not be secured). On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member projects to the second position side, whereby the slide member is positioned on the trajectory of slide displacement. This leads to a reduction in the visible region of the member (e.g., liquid crystal display device). When the opposing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member is increased, resulting in an increase in the size of the entire apparatus.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the slide member is rotatably formed by the rotary shaft positioned eccentrically along the direction of the slide displacement, and accordingly, depending on the rotational position, the slide member is opposed to the opposing member Interval can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to the rotational position where the opposing distance to the opposing member increases, the effect by the rendering means can be sufficiently provided, while the sliding member to the rotational position where the opposing distance to the opposing member decreases. By rotating, the amount of extension of the slide member to the second position side can be reduced, and a visible region of another member can be secured accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to shift the opposing member to the opposite side to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member can be reduced, and the overall size of the apparatus can be reduced.

  As the effect means, for example, a member formed displaceably is displaced using the space between the opposing member and the sliding member, the opposing member is the space between the opposing member and the sliding member. What is used to be displaced, that which makes the display or decoration on the back side visible from between the opposing members and slide members, that which irradiates light between the opposing members and the slide members, a combination of these is exemplified. Ru.

  In the game machine C1, a game machine C2 characterized in that the effect means includes an irradiation means for emitting light toward the space between the opposing member and the slide member.

  Here, for example, in a configuration in which the opposing member irradiates light toward the space between the sliding member and the sliding member, the effect of causing the player to visually recognize the light reflected by the sliding member from between the sliding member and the opposing member It can be carried out.

  In this case, in the configuration described above, when the gap between the slide member and the opposing member disposed at the first position is narrow, the light reflected by the slide member can not be sufficiently viewed by the player. On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member projects to the second position side, whereby the slide member is positioned on the trajectory of slide displacement. This leads to a reduction in the visible region of the member (e.g., liquid crystal display device). When the opposing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member is increased, resulting in an increase in the size of the entire apparatus.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the slide member is rotatably formed by the rotation shaft positioned eccentrically along the direction of slide displacement, so Accordingly, the distance between the facing member and the facing member can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to a rotational position where the distance between the slide member and the opposing member is increased, the light emitted from the irradiating means can be sufficiently viewed by the player while the slide member is opposed to the opposing member By rotating the slide member to a rotational position at which the distance is reduced, the amount of extension of the slide member to the second position side can be reduced, and a visible region of another member can be secured accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to shift the opposing member to the opposite side to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member can be reduced, and the overall size of the apparatus can be reduced.

  In addition, as an arrangement position of an irradiation means, the aspect arrange | positioned by the opposing member so that irradiation to a slide member is possible, the aspect arrange | positioned by a slide member so that irradiation to an opposing member is possible, between the opposing of a slide member and opposing member The aspect by which it is arrange | positioned by the back side between the opposings so that irradiation is possible, the aspect which combined these are illustrated.

  A gaming machine C3 comprising a base and a base member rotatably supported by the base, and the slide member disposed on the base member in the game machine C1 or C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the position of the center of gravity can be changed by rotating the slide member. That is, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted to a position suitable for the rotation of the base member relative to the base while maintaining the slide member in the first position or the second position. As a result, for example, the rotation of the base member can be stabilized. Alternatively, the driving force required for the rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C3, a pair of the slide members are disposed to face each other along the direction of the slide displacement.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine C3, the slide members are disposed such that the pair is facing each other along the direction of the slide displacement, that is, the pair of slide members may be symmetrically disposed. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be brought close to the center of rotation of the base member relative to the base. Thereby, even if the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the rotation of the slide member is small, the change in the position of the center of gravity can be made effective.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is rotation in a direction to lower the position of the center of gravity, the position of the center of gravity is set to the base by rotation of the slide member. A game machine C5 characterized in that it is kept away from the rotation center of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member relative to the base is rotation in a direction to lower the position of the center of gravity, the slide member rotates. Since the position of the center of gravity is moved away from the center of rotation of the base member relative to the base, the base member can be easily rotated relative to the base by the change in the position of the center of gravity. Thereby, the driving force required for the rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is rotation in a direction to raise the position of the center of gravity, the position of the center of gravity is rotated by the rotation of the slide member. A game machine C6 characterized by being brought close to the rotation center of the base member relative to the base.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member relative to the base is rotation in a direction to raise the position of the center of gravity, Since the position of the center of gravity approaches the center of rotation of the base member relative to the base by rotation, the base member can be easily rotated relative to the base by the change in the position of the center of gravity. Thereby, the driving force required for the rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the overhanging wall portion 5640 in which the opening portion 5641 is formed as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a passage member formed as a passage for surrounding a spherical object and passing the object, the passage member has an opening formed in the side surface thereof, and the object is a part of the object. The game machine D1 is formed so as to be able to pass in a state where it protrudes from the opening to the outside.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a passage member formed as a passage for surrounding a spherical object and passing the object (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192836). According to the passage member, for example, after the game ball passing through the game area is made to flow from one end side and is allowed to pass on the back side of the game area, the other end side can discharge the ball to the game area. However, when configured in this manner, there is a problem that the movable range of the effect member disposed displaceably on the back side of the game area is limited by the amount by which the passage member projects.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the passage member is provided with an opening formed in the side surface thereof, and the object is formed to be able to pass in a state where a part thereof protrudes from the opening to the outside Therefore, the protrusion of the passage member can be suppressed as compared with the case of the configuration in which the whole of the object is surrounded on the inner peripheral side. Therefore, the arrangement | positioning space of another member and the movable range of another member can be ensured that much.

  In addition, the cross-sectional shape of a channel | path member is arbitrary, for example, cross-sectional circular, cross-sectional elliptical, cross-sectional polygon, or the shape etc. which combined these, etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine D1, a game machine D2 characterized in that a pair of the openings are disposed opposite to each other in the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine D1, a pair of openings are disposed opposite to each other in the passage member, so narrowing an opposing distance between side surfaces where the pair of openings are formed. Therefore, the arrangement space of other members and the movable range of other members can be efficiently secured.

  In the game machine D1 or D2, an inclined surface is formed on the inner surface side of the periphery of the opening in the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the passage member is formed with an inclined surface on the inner surface side of the peripheral edge of the opening. Of the passage member by expanding the possible projection amount of the passage member from the opening to the outside, and suppressing the extension of the passage member while securing the thickness dimension of the passage member at the peripheral portion of the opening to improve the rigidity of the passage member be able to.

  In the gaming machine D3, the passage member is characterized in that the distance between the base ends of the inclined surfaces in the direction orthogonal to the passing direction of the object is set to a size smaller than at least the diameter of the object. A gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the passage member has a dimension in which the distance between the base ends of the inclined surfaces in the direction orthogonal to the passing direction of the object is at least smaller than the diameter of the object Since it is set to be, when making an object project the part outside from an opening, it can control that an object is received only with the tip (inner circumference side end) of a slope. That is, since the ball can receive the ball at the portion where the inclined surface is not formed, breakage of the passage member (periphery of the opening) can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a rectangular shape in cross section from wall portions of four surfaces, and the opening is formed in at least one of the wall portions of four surfaces. A game machine D5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a rectangular shape in cross section from the four walls, and at least one of the four walls Since the opening is formed, the section coefficient of the passage member can be secured, and the rigidity can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a circular cross-section having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and the circular segment is a segment connecting two points on the curve. The gaming machine D6 characterized in that the opening is formed by cutting.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a circular cross-section having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object Since the opening is formed by cutting the two points in a straight line, the extension of the passage member can be minimized. As a result, the arrangement space of the other member and the movable range of the other member can be efficiently secured.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D6, the passage member is curved or bent through the passage of the object, and the opening is a direction of centrifugal force acting on the object by bending or bending the passage. It is formed in the side of the said passage member which becomes opposite to, and the game machine D7 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a passage in which the formation position of the opening is opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the object by bending or bending of the passage path. Since the opening is formed on the side opposite to the side on which the object is pressed by the centrifugal force, wear or breakage of the periphery of the opening can be suppressed.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is provided with a displacement member formed displaceably, the displacement member being in a range including at least a displacement trajectory of a part of the object projected from the opening of the passage member. A game machine D8 characterized in that it is displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is provided with a displacement member formed displaceably, the displacement member is a displacement trajectory of a part of the object projected from the opening of the passage member The displacement region of the displacement member can be expanded by effectively utilizing the region in which the protrusion of the passage member is reduced because the displacement member is formed to be displaceable to at least a range. Thereby, the rendering effect by the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

  The displacement member may be formed so as to be displaceable from the opening of the passage member to a position where it is inserted into the passage member. In this case, the displacement region of the displacement member can be expanded to the maximum, and the rendering effect by the displacement of the displacement member can be further enhanced. For example, it is possible to displace the displacement member further forward, and by bringing the displacement member closer to the player, it is possible to exert a powerful force.

  The gaming machine D8 includes detection means for detecting the presence or absence of an object in a region where at least the opening of the passage member is formed, and the displacement member is provided when the object is detected by the detection means. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that displacement to at least a range including the displacement trajectory is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8, when the object is detected by the detecting means in the area where at least the opening of the passage member is formed, the displacement member has at least a displacement locus (a passage member It is restricted that the displacement member is displaced to a range including at least a displacement trajectory of a part of the object projected from the opening of the opening, so that interference of the displacement member with the object can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine D9, the detection means includes a first switch and a second switch which are respectively disposed upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member and detect passage of the object at their respective arrangement positions. A game machine D10 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D9, the detecting means is disposed upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member and detects passage of the object at each of the disposition positions. Since the first switch and the second switch are provided, it is possible to reliably detect the presence or absence of an object in a region where at least the opening of the passage member is formed. Therefore, interference of the displacement member with the object can be more reliably avoided.

<Feature E group> (effects with game balls that won an over prize)
Based on the ball entry means that can enter the game ball and the variable member that can be changed into one state that regulates the ball entry of the game ball to the ball entry means and the second state where the restriction is released and the specific condition When the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game that changes the variable member from the first state to the second state and the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game, the ball entering the ball entering means A variable for changing the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the counting means for counting the number of game balls played and the count value by the counting means becoming a predetermined upper limit value Determine the effect to be executed by the effect executing means and the effect executing means to execute the effect based on the game ball entering the ball entering means before being changed to the second state by the means and the variable means Performed The effect determination unit includes a determining unit, a is the gaming machine and wherein the when special conditions are satisfied, in which is configured to be able to determine the particular representation embodiment E1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that shifts to a hit state when a specific lottery result is obtained by a lottery performed based on starting ball entry. In such a gaming machine, the large opening provided on the board is set in the open state when the game machine is in the hit state. Since winning balls are awarded to the player by winning the gaming ball to the large opening, it becomes advantageous for the player by being in a hit state. The large opening is set to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter when the predetermined number of game balls are winning after being set in the open state. In addition, in such a conventional game machine, a special effect (over winning effect) is executed when the game balls of the specified number or more are detected in the open state of 1 with respect to the large opening. In some cases, the interest of the player is improved.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, even if the over-winning effect is executed, it merely causes the player to recognize that the player has obtained a slightly larger number of prize balls than usual, and the player's interest is sufficiently There was a case that could not be improved.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, it is possible to change the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the 1 state in which the ball entering means regulates the ball entering the game ball, and the second state in which the regulation is released. Bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state based on the establishment of the variable member and the specific condition, and the bonus game is performed by the bonus game executing means And the variable member is selected based on the count means for counting the number of gaming balls entering the ball entering means and the count value by the counting means becoming a predetermined upper limit value. A variable means for changing from the second state to the first state, and an effect for executing an effect based on the game ball entering the ball entering means until the variable state is changed to the second state Execution means and its effects Anda effect determination means for determining an effect to be performed by the row unit, the effect determination unit, when special conditions are satisfied, and is configured to be able to determine the special effect mode.

  As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, based on establishment of acquisition conditions, acquisition means for acquiring information and storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means are stored in the storage means based on establishment of the determination conditions The special condition includes the determination means for determining information and the specific condition satisfaction means for establishing the specific condition when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the special condition is stored in the storage means by the determination means. It is set as at least one condition that the information determined to be a specific determination result is stored as at least one condition.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on establishment of acquisition conditions, acquisition means for acquiring information, storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, and information stored in the storage means based on establishment of determination conditions The apparatus comprises: determining means for determining information; and specific condition fulfilling means for establishing the specific condition when the determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result, wherein the special condition is determined in the storage means. It is set as at least one condition that the information that is determined to be a specific determination result by means is stored.

  As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the information as the specific determination result is stored in the storage means by executing the special effect mode. Therefore, since it is possible to play the game in anticipation of the effect of the special effect mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game while the bonus game is being performed.

  In the gaming machine E2, the special condition is established at a predetermined probability when the information determined to be a specific determination result by the determination means is stored in the storage means. Machine E3.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2, the special condition has a predetermined probability when the storage means stores the information determined to be the specific determination result by the determination means. Since the special effect mode is not executed in the bonus game, there is a possibility that information which is a specific determination result is stored in the storage means. Therefore, even when the special effect mode is not executed, the player can be made to play the game in anticipation of storing the information as the specific determination result, so that the player can not play the game. It has the effect of being able to maintain motivation.

  A game machine E4 according to any one of the game machines E1 to E3, wherein the effect execution means executes an effect using the game ball after being counted by the counting means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means executes effects using the gaming balls after being counted by the counting means. The number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case of providing a configuration for executing effects separately from the gaming balls.

  In the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode includes an aspect of guiding the gaming ball after being counted by the counting means to a specific area configured to be visible to the player.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode is a mode in which the gaming ball after being counted by the counting means is guided to a specific area configured to be visible to the player. Can be played by paying attention to a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  A game machine E6 having voice output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means in any of the game machines E1 to E5.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the gaming machine E6 has voice output means for outputting a predetermined voice as one of the effects to be executed by the effect executing means. Can be realized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  A game machine E7 having display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means in any of the game machines E1 to E6.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the gaming machine E7 has display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means. Because there is, it is possible to realize visual rendition. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  An end effect executing means for executing an end effect indicating the end of the benefit game performed by the bonus game executing means in any one of the game machines E1 to E7 and an aspect of the end effect executed by the end effect executing means A game machine E8 characterized by having an end effect mode determining means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, an end effect execution means for executing an end effect indicating the end of the benefit game performed by the bonus game execution means, and an end effect mode for determining the end effect mode to be executed by the end effect execution means By having means, it is possible to easily make the player understand the end of the bonus game.

<Feature F group> (Form a special feature by reversing the sub liquid crystal)
A first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the effect executing means for executing the effect based on the discrimination information and the effect performed by the effect executing means, and the effect on the back side of the first display area The display mode is displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, and the first display means having the first specific notification portion for notifying the player of the specific notification mode as one of the Second display means having a second display area, and a second specific notification unit for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area, the first display area, and the second display area At least in the first state in which the player can visually recognize the player and in the second state in which the player can visually recognize the first specific notification unit and the second identification notification unit. 1 display means and the second display means Gaming machine F1 characterized by having a displacement means capable of displacing the.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine including a display device such as an LGH display, a movable movable member and the like in its configuration, and capable of executing various rendering operations by display effects and movable effects. Among the conventional game machines, there is one which adopts a technology for securing the visibility of display effect even when, for example, the movable member moves to the front side of the display device during execution of the display effect. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-134091).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, it has not been assumed that the direction of the display device itself is variable. For this reason, when the display device itself is operated variably, there has been a case where an appropriate rendering operation using the display rendering can not be realized. That is, there is a risk that it will be difficult to increase the degree of freedom of presentation.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, a first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the effect executing means for executing the effect based on the discrimination information and the effect to be executed by the effect executing means And a first display means having a first specific notification unit for notifying the player of a specific notification mode as one of the effects on the back side of the first display area, and the effect execution means A second display area having a second display area in which a display mode is displayed and a second specification notification unit for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area as one of the effects Means, a first state in which the player can make the player visually recognize the first display area and the second display area, and the player specifying the first specification notification unit and the second specification notification unit, respectively. In the second state that can be made visible Also has a displacement means capable of displacing said second display means and said first display means.

  Thereby, a plurality of effects in different modes can be realized using the first display means and the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the freedom of presentation can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the specific notification mode is formed by combining the notification modes respectively notified by the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit. Feature game machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the identification mode notified by the first identification notification portion and the second identification notification portion is combined. Since the notification mode of is formed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F2, the specific notification mode is configured by a specific symbol, and a part of the specific symbol is displayed on the first specific notification unit, and the second specific notification unit is displayed. Among the specific symbols, the remaining symbols not displayed in the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. A game machine F3 characterized in that the specific symbol is formed by combining them.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the specific notification mode is configured by a specific symbol, and a part of the specific symbol is displayed on the first specific notification unit, and the second specific notification unit is displayed on the first specific notification unit. Among the specific symbols, the remaining symbols not displayed in the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. The particular pattern is formed by combining them.

  As a result, the specific symbol can be dynamically displayed using the first specification notification unit and the second specification notification unit, so that the specific symbol can be displayed more clearly.

  One of the gaming machines F1 to F3 has a third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, and the effect execution means is in the third display area of the third display means In the first state, the first display area and the second display area are adjacently juxtaposed to the third display area or at least a part of them overlap in the first state. A game machine F4 characterized in that the game machine is disposed at a position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first display means and the second display means have third display means different from each other, and the effect executing means is predetermined as one of the effects in a third display area of the third display means. A display mode is displayed, and in the first state, the first display area and the second display area are arranged in a position adjacent to or in parallel with the third display area or at least partially overlapping with the third display area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a more flexible presentation.

  The bonus game executing means is provided with a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means in any of the game machines F1 to F4. A game machine F5 characterized in that the specific notification mode is easy to execute when the effect of (1) is executed.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exerted. That is, there is provided a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, and the effect executing means executes the specific effect. In addition, it is easy to execute the specific notification mode.

  Thereby, it is possible to play the game in anticipation of the specific notification mode being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  An effect determining means for determining an effect mode to be executed by the effect executing means on the basis of the determination means for performing the determination and the determination result of the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition in any of the game machines F1 to F5 And a game machine F6 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are exerted. That is, it has determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and effect determination means for determining an effect mode to be executed by the effect execution means based on the determination result of the determination means.

  As a result, various effects can be realized according to the determination result of the determination means.

<Feature G group> (Displayed by moving the main liquid crystal symbol while moving the sub liquid crystal)
First display means capable of displaying a symbol, second display means different from the first display means, and at least the second display means at a position where the display area of the second display means overlaps the display area of the first display means A predetermined symbol is displayed at the overlapping position on the display control means for performing display control of the first movable means capable of moving the first display means and the second display means, and the second display means In the state, when being moved on the display area of the first display means by the first movable means, the first after being moved with respect to the display area of the first display means exposed by being moved. And a display mode setting means for setting the display control means to a movable display mode capable of forming one pattern in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the display means. Gaming machine 1.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine including a plurality of display devices such as an LGH display. In such a conventional game machine, the degree of freedom of display effect is enhanced by using the main display device for displaying the main effects related to the game and the sub display device for displaying the auxiliary effects, thereby improving the player's interest (E.g., JP-A-2014-117576).

  However, such conventional game machines still have room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom of display effects.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, the first display means capable of displaying symbols, the second display means different from the first display means, and the display area of the second display means are the display areas of the first display means A first movable means capable of moving at least the second display means at a position overlapping with the second display means, a display control means for displaying and controlling the first display means and the second display means, and the second display means The display of the first display means exposed by being moved when the first movable means is moved over the display area of the first display means while the predetermined symbol is displayed at the overlapping position. A display mode setting in which the movable display mode capable of forming one pattern in combination with the predetermined pattern displayed on the first display means after being moved is set in the display control means with respect to the area Have a means .

  As a result, it is possible to realize the display effect with a higher degree of freedom by using the first display means and the second display means.

  In the gaming machine G1, a third display means different from the first display means and the second display means and a display area of the third display means overlap the first display area, and one end of each of the second display means and the second display means The second movable means capable of moving at least the third display means to the same position; and the display control means includes the second display means and the third display means. In the case of being moved to the same position, it is characterized by displaying a specific display mode in which one symbol is displayed across the display area with each other at the boundary based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition. Gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, and the display area of the third display means overlap the first display area, and one end of each of the second display means is the same. And second movable means capable of moving at least the third display means at a position to be a position, wherein the display control means is configured to have each of the second display means and the third display means In the case of being moved to the same position, a specific display mode is displayed in which one symbol is displayed across the display area with the one end bordering on the basis of the satisfaction of the predetermined condition.

  As a result, since one symbol can be displayed using the second display means and the third display means, it is possible to realize display with a higher degree of freedom.

  In the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting unit is configured to display the second display unit and the third display unit in a state in which the specific display mode is displayed by the second display unit and the third display unit by the display control unit. When at least one of the display means and the display means are moved in the direction away from each other, the specific display mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting means is displaying the specific display mode by the display control means by the second display means and the third display means In the state, in the case where at least one of the second display means and the third display means is moved in the direction of separating, since the specific movable display mode is set, the second display means and the second display means According to the arrangement of the three display means, there is an effect that it is possible to display appropriate display contents for each.

  In one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, in the specific movable display mode, the symbol of the 1 displayed as the specific display mode is the first display means, the second display means, the first display means, and the first display means A gaming machine G4 characterized in that it is set to be displayed by the third display means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, in the specific movable display mode, the symbol of the 1 displayed as the specific display mode is the first display means and the first display means Since the second display means, the first display means and the third display means are set to be displayed respectively, it is possible to use the first display means, the second display means and the third display means more freely. There is an effect that high display content can be realized.

<Feature H group> (Right-handed notification on a rotating display device)
An acquiring means for acquiring information based on the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball and the ball entering means, and an acquiring means for acquiring information, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquiring means Discrimination executing means for executing discrimination of the information stored in the storage means based on establishment of discrimination conditions, and display means for displaying identification information based on discrimination results by the discrimination means and display means thereof In the gaming machine having a variable ball entry means capable of entering the game ball when the identification information based on the discrimination result is displayed, the firing intensity of the game ball based on the operation of the player And a first flow path through which the game ball launched at a first launch intensity can be flowed down by the launch means capable of launching at a variable amount and different from the first launch intensity. Game launched at the second launch intensity Suggest that the game ball is to be launched into the second flow path after the flow down, and the second flow path in which the variable ball entry means is disposed and the identification information based on the specific determination result are displayed. A gaming machine H1 comprising: suggestion means for causing the indication means to indicate a suggestion mode.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine including a display device such as an LGH display, a movable movable member and the like in its configuration, and capable of executing various rendering operations by display effects and movable effects. Among such conventional game machines, there are machines that can display a suggestion display image that suggests a direction in which a game ball is hit on a display device. In this conventional game machine, for example, a technique for securing the visibility of the suggestion display image is adopted even when the movable member is moved to the front side of the display device, for example, while the suggestion display image is being displayed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-134091).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, it has not been assumed that the orientation of the display device is variable. For this reason, when the direction of the display device is changed, there is a possibility that the direction in which the game ball is hit can not be notified appropriately.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, an entering means capable of entering a game ball, an obtaining means for obtaining information based on the entering of the game ball in the entering means, and an obtaining means thereof And storage means for storing the information acquired in the storage means, and discrimination execution means for performing discrimination of the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of discrimination conditions, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means A display means for displaying identification information, and a variable ball entering means capable of entering a game ball when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means And firing means capable of varying the firing strength of the gaming ball based on the operation of the player, and the gaming ball fired at the first firing strength by the firing means flowing down Possible first flow path and said first firing strength A game ball launched with a second launch intensity different from that of the second, and after the second flow path in which the variable ball entry means is disposed and the identification information based on the specific determination result, And suggesting means for displaying on the display means a suggestion mode suggesting that the game ball should be fired to the second flow path.

  Thus, the game ball can be fired at the second firing intensity to the player who has confirmed the suggestion mode, so even a game beginner can easily insert the game ball into the variable ball entry means You can make it a ball. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine in which the gaming method is easier to understand can be realized.

  In the gaming machine H1, in the state where the display area of the display means is directed to the front side, the indication mode has pivot means capable of pivoting the display means based on the establishment of the pivot condition. A game machine H2 having at least a part of an annular shape and including a direction indication mode indicating the direction of the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, there is provided a pivoting means capable of pivoting the display means based on satisfaction of the pivoting condition in a state where the display area of the display means is facing the front side, and the indication mode is a ring The direction suggestion mode which has at least one part of a shape and shows the direction of the said 2nd channel is included.

  As a result, even if the display means is rotated, the direction indication mode having at least a part of the ring shape has the effect of being able to accurately indicate the direction of the second flow path.

  In the gaming machine H2, the direction indication mode is characterized in that the gaming ball is turned in the direction of flying to the second flow path and is dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the direction indication aspect is displayed dynamically as the gaming ball flies in the direction of flying to the second flow path. On the other hand, the direction in which the game ball is fired can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  A game machine H4 characterized in that character information indicating that the game ball is to be shot to the second flow path in the game machine H2 or H3 is displayed as a part of the direction suggestion mode.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H2 or H3, the character information indicating that the gaming ball is to be fired to the second flow path is displayed as a part of the direction suggestion mode, This has the effect of enabling the player who has visually recognized the mode to more clearly understand the direction in which the game ball is fired.

  The gaming machine H5 according to any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, wherein the direction indication mode is displayed by a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggestion mode is displayed with a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path, so the symbol for the player This has the effect of making it possible to intuitively understand the direction in which the game ball is fired from the impression of.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, there is provided a reversing means for reversing so that the back side of the display means is located on the player side, and a decoration part indicating the direction of the second flow path on the back side of the display means A game machine H6 characterized in that is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display means has reversing means for reversing so that the back side of the display means is located on the player side, and on the back side of the display means, a decorative portion indicating the direction of the second flow path is arranged. Even when the display means is reversed by the reversing means, it is possible to make the player correctly understand the direction in which the game ball is fired.

  In the gaming machine H6, the decorative portion has light emitting means disposed in order toward the second flow path, and the light emitting means is controlled to light in order toward the second flow path. A gaming machine H7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H6, the decorative portion has light emitting means arranged in order toward the direction of the second flow path, and the light emitting means includes the second flow Since lighting control is sequentially performed in the direction of the path, it is possible for the player to more easily understand the direction in which the game ball is fired.

<Feature I group> (Sub liquid crystal is used as main liquid crystal)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, display means for displaying discrimination information based on discrimination results by the discrimination means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the discrimination information on the display means When the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the effect executing means for causing the display means to display the effect mode accompanying the identification information is specified based on the determination result and the display means In the gaming machine provided with a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to a player when identification information is displayed based on the judgment result, in the gaming machine provided, the display means is a main display means, and its first display means The sub-table includes at least a first position parallel to the display area, and a sub-display capable of moving at least to a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display. Moving means capable of moving the means to the first position and the second position, and when the sub display means is moved to the first position, the identification information is displayed on the main display means Switching to the first state in which at least a part of the effect mode is displayed on the sub display means, the sub display means is moved to the second position, and the specific condition is satisfied. And a switching unit capable of switching and setting the second state in which the identification information is displayed on the sub display unit, and a game machine I1.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine including a plurality of display devices such as an LGH display. In such a conventional game machine, the degree of freedom of display effect is enhanced by using the main display device for displaying the main effects related to the game and the sub display device for displaying the auxiliary effects, thereby improving the player's interest I am trying to In addition, among such conventional game machines, there is one which can move the sub display device to the front side of the main display device and execute complex display effects between the main display device and the sub display device (for example, JP-A-2015-029606).

  However, such conventional game machines still have room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom of display effects.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine I1, on the basis of the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means for performing the determination, the display means on which the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is displayed, and the display means In the case where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information and the dynamic display means, the display means is displayed based on the determination result in a presentation mode associated with the identification information. It has an effect execution means to be executed, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when identification information is displayed based on the specific determination result on the display means, and the display The sub-display is movable at least to the main display means, a first position parallel to the display area of the main display means, and a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display means A movable means constituted by at least steps, capable of moving the sub display means to the first position and the second position, and the sub display means being moved to the first position Is switched to a first state in which the identification information is displayed on the main display means and at least a part of the effect mode is displayed on the sub display means, and the sub display means is movable to the second position And switching means capable of switching and setting the second state in which the identification information is displayed on the sub display means when the specific condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, since the first state and the second state can be appropriately switched according to the position of the sub display means, there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

  In the gaming machine I1, the sub display means comprises at least a first display means disposed at one end of the main display means and a second display means disposed at the other end of the main display means. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the first display means and the second display means are located at positions facing the main display means in one position.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the sub display means is at least constituted by a first display means disposed at one end side of the main display means and a second display means disposed at the other end side of the main display means. At the position, the first display means and the second display means are at positions facing the main display means therebetween.

  This has the effect of being able to further increase the degree of freedom of the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means at the first position.

  In the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means make one end side contact with each other to cover the display area of the main display means so as to make it difficult to visually recognize. A gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, in the second position, the first display means and the second display means bring one end into contact with each other, thereby displaying the main display means Since the area is covered so as to be difficult to visually recognize, a compact display using only the sub display means can be realized at the second position. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate display area can be set according to the display content.

  A game machine I4 characterized by having a rotation means for rotating the first display means and the second display means around the main display means in the game machine I2 or I3.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I2 or I3, since the pivoting means for pivoting the first display means and the second display means around the main display means is provided, There is an effect that it is possible to realize a more flexible display effect using the display means.

  In the gaming machine I4, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means, whereby the first display means and the second display means move in the vertical direction of the main display means. A game machine I5, characterized in that it is variably positioned between the upper and lower positions where it is located and the left and right positions where the first display means and the second display means are located in the left-right direction of the main display means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, the pivoting means pivots the first display means and the second display means in the vertical direction of the main display means. The first display means and the second display means are variably arranged at upper and lower positions, and the left and right positions at which the first display means and the second display means are located in the left and right direction of the main display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a more flexible display effect using the sub display means.

  In the gaming machine I5, when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the upper and lower positions to the second position and then moved to the upper and lower positions, the sub display means and the main display means The first fusion display mode displayed in a fused manner, and the sub when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left and right position to the second position and then moved to the left and right position A game machine I6 characterized by comprising fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting a second fusion display mode displayed by fusing the display means and the main display means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5, when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position and then moved to the vertical position And the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left and right positions to the second position. Since it has fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting the second fusion display mode to be displayed by fusing the sub display means and the main display means later when moving to the left and right positions, There is an effect that an appropriate display effect can be realized depending on whether there is any or the left and right position.

<Feature J group> (display mode of the sub liquid crystal to be inverted is displayed by a mirror)
A discriminator performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions and a display means on which a presentation mode is displayed based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means and a presentation mode based on the specific discrimination result displayed on the display means In the gaming machine, there is provided a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the display means comprises at least a first display means and a second display means, and the first display means and the first display means The rotating means capable of rotating the display means to the front position where the display area faces the front side and the second position where the display area faces the back side are rotated to the back position. And the second display means is displayed when the first display means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side and the second display means are rotated to the back position. Said performance Gaming machine J1, wherein those having a second projection means for projecting a manner on the front side.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine including a projection device such as a mirror in its configuration. In such a conventional game machine, when a predetermined entertainment effect is selected, the projection device can be made visible, and by causing the projection device to project the player's face or the like, an impact entertainment effect can be realized. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2005-329159).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since the projection device is merely set in a state in which it can be viewed by the player, objects to be projected onto the projection device are limited. Therefore, there have been cases in which the player's interest can not be sufficiently improved using the projection device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the determination means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the effect mode based on the determination result by the determination means, and the display means And an awarding means for awarding an advantage to the player when the effect mode based on the judgment result is displayed. The display means includes a first display means and a second display means. And rotating means capable of rotating the first display means and the second display means respectively to a front position where the display area faces the front side and a second position where the display area faces the back side First projection means for projecting the effect aspect displayed on the first display means to the front side when the first display means is rotated to the back position; and the second display means for the back position The place that was turned to To have a second projection means for projecting on the front side of the representation embodiment to be displayed on the second display means.

  As a result, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, the player can be made to visually recognize the effect modes respectively displayed. That is, since it is possible to realize a novel rendering operation in which the first display unit and the second display unit can be rotated while the effect mode is visible, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game effective.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first projection means and the second projection means have mirror surface portions capable of projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. A game machine J2 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the first projection means and the second projection means project the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. Because it has a mirror surface that can be played back, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, the player can clearly see through the mirror surface the effect mode displayed on each of them. Has the effect of

  The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means to a V-shaped position on the front side of the gaming machine as the back surface position. Gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J2, the first display means and the second display means are V-shaped on the front side of the gaming machine as the back surface position. Since it is rotated to the position, the appearance on the front surface position can be largely different from the front surface position by being the back surface position. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of the game machines J1 to J3, the first projection means and the second projection means are each configured to rotate the first display means and the second display means when the first display means and the second display means are respectively rotated to the back position. A game machine J4 characterized by having a projection surface capable of facing the display area of the display means or the display area of the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first display means and the second projection means are the first display means and the second display means, respectively. Since the display area of the first display means or the projection plane which can face the display area of the second display means when rotated to the rear position, the display area of the first display means, and the second display Since the effect mode displayed in the display area of the means can be directly projected, there is an effect that the first projection means and the second projection means can be made compact.

  It is disposed at a position facing the first display area of the first display means rotated to the back position in the gaming machine J1, and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the first projection means It is disposed at a position facing the second display area of the first display unit rotated to the first diffraction unit and the back surface position, and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the second display unit to the second projection unit. And second diffracting means for causing the game machine J5 to function.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first diffraction means disposed at a position facing the display area of the first display means rotated to the back surface position and diffracting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the first projection means And second diffraction means disposed at a position facing the second display area of the display means rotated to the back surface position, and diffracting the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the second projection means And.

  Thereby, the arrangement of the first projection means and the second projection means can be freely determined within the range that can be diffracted by the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means, respectively. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the first projection means and the second projection means can be enhanced.

  A game machine J6 characterized in that the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means in the game machine J5 are half mirrors.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J5, since the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means are configured by half mirrors, the display area of the first display means, and the second Whether or not to diffract the effect mode displayed on the display area of the display means can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the freedom of presentation can be enhanced.

  When at least one of the first display means and the second display means is rotated to the back position in the gaming machine J5 or J6, respectively, the first A game machine J7 comprising: movable means for moving to a position facing the display means or the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5 or J6, at least one of the first display means and the second display means is the first display means and the second display means, respectively. Since it has the movable means moved to the position facing the first display means or the second display means when it is rotated to the back surface position, the effect aspect displayed on the first display means and the second display means Can be diffracted more accurately.

<Feature K group> (over prize using closing command)
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the slave control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, the open state where the game ball can enter and the entry of the game ball are restricted The main control means has a variable ball entry means that can be changed to the restricted state, and the main control means performs the discrimination based on the discrimination condition and the effect based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Based on the effect information determining means for determining the effect information and the determination result by the determining means being a specific determination result, the variable ball entering means is varied from the restricted state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The ball entering signal is output based on the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game, the formation signal output means for outputting the formation signal based on the formation of the predetermined condition, and the game ball entering the variable ball entering means Do The slave control means is provided with the benefit information determining means for providing the player with an advantageous benefit based on the game ball entering the ball signal output means and the variable ball entering means. Based on the determined effect information, an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode, and an effect executing means for executing the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means, and a predetermined condition after receiving the establishment signal. A game machine K1 comprising: specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect when the ball entry signal is received in a period until it is established.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that shifts to a hit state when a specific lottery result is obtained by a lottery performed based on starting ball entry. In such a gaming machine, the large opening provided on the board is set in the open state when the game machine is in the hit state. Since winning balls are awarded to the player by winning the gaming ball to the large opening, it becomes advantageous for the player by being in a hit state. The large opening is set to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter when the predetermined number of game balls are winning after being set in the open state. In addition, in such a conventional game machine, a special effect (over winning effect) is executed when the game balls of the specified number or more are detected in the open state of 1 with respect to the large opening. In some cases, the interest of the player is improved (for example, JP-A-2015-112239).

  In such conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to count the number of gaming balls that have won in the large opening in order to determine whether or not to execute the over winning effect, but depending on the type of gaming machine, the large opening It was common for the number of ball entry before closing the mouth to be different. Therefore, since it is necessary to re-set the condition of whether or not to execute the over winning effect depending on the model, there is a case that the program adopted for one model can not be diverted to another game machine as it is. The That is, there is a problem that the workload of the developer is increased.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine K1, the main control means for executing control of the game, the slave control means for executing control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the opening where the game ball can enter A variable ball entry means that is variable between a state and a restricted state in which the ball entry of the game ball is restricted, and the main control means performs a discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination means Based on the effect information determination means for determining the effect information for executing the effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the variable entering means based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that varies from a restricted state to the open state until the predetermined condition is satisfied, a formation signal output means for outputting a formation signal based on the formation of the predetermined condition, and the variable entering means Game ball Based on entering a ball, entering ball signal output means for outputting an entering signal, and benefit granting means for giving an advantage advantageous to a player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means And the slave control means is a production mode determination means for determining a production mode based on the production information determined by the production information determination means, and the production determined by the production mode determination means It has an effect execution means for executing an aspect, and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect when the ball entry signal is received in a period until a predetermined condition is satisfied after receiving the establishment signal.

  Thus, the slave control means can determine whether to execute the specific effect depending on whether or not the establishment signal is simply received from the main control means. Therefore, the slave control means directly determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. There is no need to determine. Therefore, since it is possible to easily divert the control program set in the secondary control means, it is possible to reduce the workload of the developer.

  The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the predetermined condition in the gaming machine K1 is satisfied when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means or a predetermined predetermined period elapses. .

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means or a predetermined predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, after the predetermined number of gaming balls have entered the variable ball entry means for the player by performing the specific effect, or after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable ball entry is further performed. It can be recognized that the game ball has entered the means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to please the player who has confirmed the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, when the slave control unit receives the formation signal output by the formation signal output unit based on the passage of a predetermined period, which is predetermined as the predetermined condition, the specific effect A game machine K3 characterized in that it comprises an avoidance means for avoiding being executed.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the slave control means is output by the establishment signal output means based on the passage of a predetermined period which is predetermined as the predetermined condition. Since the avoidance means is provided for avoiding the execution of the specific effect when the formation signal is received, the number of game balls exceeding the predetermined number is determined for the player by the execution of the specific effect. Can inform that it has entered the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further delight the player who has confirmed the specific effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the main control unit acquires the information determined by the determination unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the determination condition holds the information acquired by the acquisition unit. Prior determination means for determining the information stored in the storage means before storage conditions for storing at least the storage means and the determination condition are satisfied, and an a priori signal indicating prior information based on a result of prior determination by the preliminary determination means Prior signal output means for outputting the secondary control means to the secondary control means, and the secondary control means has prior information storage means for storing the prior information indicated by the prior signal; A gaming machine K4 indicating the contents of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the main control means stores at least an acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means based on establishment of the acquisition condition, and stores the information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination condition is established. A storage means, a prior discrimination means for discriminating the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination condition is established, and a preliminary signal indicating preliminary information based on a preliminary discrimination result by the preliminary discrimination means; A preliminary signal output unit for outputting to the control unit, the secondary control unit includes a preliminary information storage unit for storing the preliminary information indicated by the preliminary signal, and the specific effect mode is It shows the content of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.

  Thereby, in order to confirm the contents of the prior information, the game ball is positively entered to the player while executing the bonus game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means after the establishment of the predetermined condition. It can be launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Liquid Crystal Display Device 523 as an Example>
A game machine comprising: an electric device; a substrate having a ground portion disposed opposite to the one surface of the electric device and grounded; and connecting means for electrically connecting the electric device to the ground portion of the substrate. In the above, the connection means is sandwiched between the one surface of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, and the electric device or the substrate is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposite direction. A gaming machine L1 characterized in that it is formed so as to be shear-deformable with displacement.

  Here, an electric device, a substrate having a ground portion disposed opposite to the one surface of the electric device and connected to ground, and a connection means for electrically connecting the electric device to the ground portion of the substrate A gaming machine is known (for example, JP-A-2007-236463). Specifically, the electric device is formed as a liquid crystal display device in which a shield member made of a metal plate is provided on the back surface of the liquid crystal panel. Also, the connection means is formed as an arched leaf spring, and the base end is in contact (electrically connected) with the ground portion of the substrate and the arched convex surface is in contact (electrically connected) with the shield member. Ru. The connection means is fixed to the substrate at the base end, and the convex convex surface is pressed against the shield member, and the contact is kept by the elastic deformation of the leaf spring. Thus, static electricity generated in the shield member can be released to the ground through the ground portion of the substrate. Therefore, for example, even if the shield member is charged by static electricity generated by rolling of the game ball or displacement of the liquid crystal display device, the charge is removed through the ground portion of the substrate, color unevenness of the liquid crystal display, dot missing, etc. Occurrence of problems of

  However, in the above-described conventional technology, the shield is caused by the displacement of the electric device or the vibration of the electric device due to the displacement of another effect member or the input of an external force accompanying the rolling or collision of the game ball. When the member and the substrate are displaced relative to each other in the direction orthogonal to the opposite direction, the arcuate convex surface of the connection means is slid relative to the shield member, causing wear of the connection means or the contact object of the connection means. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the connection means is sandwiched between the one surface of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, and the relative displacement of the electric device or the substrate is perpendicular to the opposite direction. In this case, since it is formed so as to be capable of shear deformation in accordance with the relative displacement, it is possible to maintain the state in which one side and the other side of the connection means are in contact with one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate. . That is, by shear deformation of the connection means, one side or the other side of the connection means can be prevented from sliding relative to the electric device or the substrate. As a result, it is possible to suppress wear of the connection means or the contact object (electrical device or substrate) of the connection means.

  In addition, since the connection means is sandwiched between the one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, it is sufficient to hold the connection means between the electric device and the substrate at the time of assembly. Can be unnecessary. As a result, the workability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine L1, the connection means is an elastic member having one side facing the one side of the electric device and the other side facing the ground portion of the substrate and made of an elastic material, one side of the elastic member and A game machine L2 comprising: a conductive member which is provided on the other side and which is at least covered and is in contact with the one surface of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate and is made of a conductive material.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, an elastic member having one side facing the one side of the electric device and the other side facing the ground portion of the substrate and made of an elastic material Since at least one cover is provided on one side and the other side and a conductive member is in contact with the one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate and is formed of a conductive material, the electric device or the substrate is orthogonal to the opposite direction In the case of relative displacement in the direction of movement, the elastic member is sheared in accordance with the relative displacement, so that the conductive member is in contact with one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate. It can be maintained. That is, by the shear deformation of the elastic member, the sliding of the conductive member held between the one side and the other side of the elastic member and the electric device or the substrate can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wear of the connection means (conductive member) or the contact target (electrical device or substrate) of the connection means.

  In the gaming machine L2, in the connection means, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape, the elastic member is internally fitted to the conductive member, and the outer peripheral surface of the conductive member is one surface side of the electric device and the substrate A gaming machine L3 characterized in that the gaming machine L3 is in contact with the ground portion of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, since the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape and the elastic member is internally fitted to the conductive member, the assembly of the connection means is simplified. Component cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the outer peripheral surface of the conductive member is in contact with one surface of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, the contact area can be secured. Therefore, when the electrical device is charged, the charge can be easily removed via the ground portion of the substrate.

  In the gaming machine L3, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting one end and the other end of a strip, and a connection portion connecting the one end and the other end of the strip is one surface side of the electric device or the substrate A gaming machine L4 characterized in that the gaming machine L4 is disposed at a position not to be in contact with the ground portion of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting one end and the other end of the belt shape, and a connection portion connecting the one end and the other end of the belt is Since it is disposed at one side of the electric device or at a position not to be in contact with the ground portion of the substrate, the connection portion becomes a step, and the contact state with one surface of the electric device or the ground portion of the substrate is not It can suppress becoming stable. That is, the contact area can be secured, and accordingly, the conductive member can be prevented from sliding relative to the electric device or the substrate, and the electric charge can be easily removed.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the conductive member includes a first portion that is in contact with one side of the electric device, a second portion that is in contact with the ground portion of the substrate, and the first and second portions. A pair of third portions connecting the portions, wherein the width dimension of the third portion is at least partially set to be smaller than the width dimension of the first portion and the second portion With gaming machine L5.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3 or L4, the conductive member includes a first portion that is in contact with one side of the electric device and a second portion that is in contact with the ground portion of the substrate. A pair of third portions connecting the first portion and the second portion, wherein the width dimension of the third portion is at least partially smaller than the width dimension of the first portion and the second portion Since it is set, the conductive member can be easily deformed in the endless belt-like opening direction by using the third portion. Therefore, when the electric device or the substrate is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposite direction and in the direction of the endless belt-like opening of the conductive member, the first portion and the second portion of the conductive member It is possible to suppress sliding on the one surface side and the ground portion of the substrate.

  In the gaming machine L5, the pair of third portions are disposed at different positions in the endless belt-like opening direction.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine L5, the pair of third portions are disposed at different positions in the endless belt-like opening direction, so deformation of the conductive member in the endless belt-like opening direction Can be enhanced.

  A game machine L7 according to any one of game machines L2 to L6, wherein the conductive member is formed of a conductive cloth or a conductive non-woven fabric.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines L2 to L6, since the conductive member is formed of the conductive cloth or the conductive non-woven fabric, its flexibility can be secured. Therefore, when the elastic member is sheared in accordance with relative displacement of the electric device or the substrate in the direction orthogonal to the opposing direction, the conductive member can easily follow the shear deformation of the elastic member. As a result, the conductive member can be prevented from sliding relative to the one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate.

  In addition, since the conductive member is formed of the conductive cloth or the conductive non-woven fabric, its flexibility can be secured, so that the durability can be improved when the conductive member is repeatedly deformed according to the relative displacement of the electric device or the substrate. Can be

  In addition, as the conductive cloth or the conductive non-woven fabric, for example, a yarn in which a yarn in which one or both of copper and nickel are coated on the outer surface of polyester fiber is woven or unwoven to form a cloth (sheet) is illustrated. Be done. Examples of the weave include plain weave, twill weave and the like.

  In the gaming machine L7, one or a plurality of protrusions are provided in a protruding manner on one surface side of the electric device or on a ground portion of the substrate.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L7, one or more protrusions are provided on the one surface side of the electric device or the ground portion of the substrate so that the conductive member conforms to the shape of the protrusions Therefore, the conductive member can be prevented from sliding relative to the one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate.

  In the gaming machine L8, the projection is formed of solder soldered to a ground portion of the substrate.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L8, since the projections are formed by the solder soldered to the ground portion of the substrate, the projections are formed in the step of soldering the electronic component to the substrate Can. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a process for forming the protrusion, and the process can be used in common, so the number of processes can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, the projections are formed by the solder soldered to the ground portion, so that the contact area between the conductive member and the ground portion can be secured, and when the electric device is charged, the ground portion of the substrate is interposed. Charge can be removed easily.

  In the gaming machine L9, the substrate includes a plurality of through holes, and a plurality of the projections are provided, and the through holes and the projections are disposed in a zigzag shape.

  According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L9, the substrate has a plurality of through holes, and a plurality of projections are provided, and the through holes and the projections are disposed in a staggered manner. The plurality of projections can be used to prevent the conductive member from sliding relative to the substrate, and the electric device can easily remove the charged charge, and the through holes can be used to form the projections and the conductive member. The heat generated between can be dissipated efficiently.

  In the gaming machine L9, the other side of the elastic member is a first area facing the area where the projection of the substrate protrudes and a second area facing the area where the projection of the substrate is not formed A game machine L11 characterized in that the second area is projected more than the first area.

  According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L9, the other side of the elastic member does not form the first area facing the area where the projection of the substrate is provided and the projection of the substrate In the state where the connection means is held between the electric device and the substrate and the elastic member is compressed, since the second area is provided with the second area facing the area, and the second area is protruded more than the first area. The surface pressure in the second region can be increased. As a result, since the conductive member held between the second region and the substrate can hardly get over the projection, it is possible to suppress the conductive member from sliding relative to the substrate. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the first region can be lowered, it is possible to suppress that the elastic member is less likely to be sheared and deformed.

  In any one of the gaming machines L2 to L11, the gaming machine includes a plate-like interposed member interposed between one surface of the electric device and the substrate and having an opening formed therein, A game machine L12 characterized in that the size of the opening is smaller than the size of the connection means in a no-load state.

  According to the gaming machine L12, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines L2 to L11, a plate-like interposed member interposed between one surface of the electric device and the substrate and having an opening formed. And the size of the opening of the interposed member is smaller than the size of the connecting means in the unloaded state, so that the opening of the interposed member can hold the connecting means. Therefore, the assembly work can be performed while holding the connection means in the interposed member, and the connection means can be positioned along with the disposition of the interposed member. It can improve.

  In the gaming machine L12, in a state in which the elastic member is formed of a compressible elastic member and the connection means is held between the electric device and the substrate, the connection is made with the inner edge of the opening of the interposed member. A gaming machine L13 characterized in that a gap is formed between the outer surface of the means.

  Here, in the configuration in which the size of the opening of the interposed member is smaller than the size of the connecting means in the non-loaded state, and the connecting means is held by the opening of the interposed member, the shear deformation of the elastic member is hindered. Therefore, when the electric device or the substrate is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposite direction, the conductive member may slide relative to the electric device or the substrate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L12, the elastic member is formed of a compressible elastic member, and in the state where the connection means is held between the electric device and the substrate, Since a gap is formed between the inner edge of the opening of the forming member and the outer surface of the connecting means, it is possible to suppress the connection means (elastic member) from being restrained by the inner edge of the opening. That is, at the time of assembly work, the connecting member is held by the interposed member (opening) to improve the workability of the assembly work, and the assembled state (the state in which the connection device is held between the electric device and the substrate) In the above, the elastic deformation of the elastic member can be facilitated, and the conductive member can be prevented from sliding relative to the electric device or the substrate.

  As the compressible elastic material, a porous elastic body is preferable. For example, a synthetic sponge formed by foaming a synthetic resin such as polyurethane, a foamed rubber obtained by kneading and foaming a foaming agent into a rubber material (cellular rubber Etc. are illustrated. In this case, the form of the bubble may be a closed cell or an open cell.

  In the gaming machine L13, a gaming machine L14 characterized in that the outer surface of the elastic member held by the opening of the interposed member is recessed inward.

  According to the gaming machine L14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L13, the outer surface of the elastic member on the side held by the opening of the interposed member is recessed inward, so that the electric device and the substrate When the connection means is held between, it is easy to deform the outer surface of the elastic member away from the inner edge of the opening of the interposed member (inward of the elastic member) starting from the inward recessed portion it can. As a result, a gap can be reliably formed between the inner edge of the opening of the interposed member and the outer surface of the connecting means.

  In the gaming machine L14, the connecting member is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting one end and the other end of the belt-shaped conductive member, and the elastic member is internally fitted to the conductive member. A game machine L15 characterized in that a connecting portion connected to the other end is disposed on the outer surface side which is recessed toward the inside of the elastic member.

  According to the gaming machine L15, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L14, the connecting member is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting one end and the other end of the belt shape, and the elastic member is inserted in the conductive member. Since the connection part which is fitted and which connects one end and the other end of the strip is disposed on the outer surface side which is recessed toward the inside of the elastic member, it is formed by the recess facing toward the inside In the space, it is possible to accommodate a connection portion in which one end and the other end of the strip are connected. Therefore, the connection part which connected the strip | belt-shaped one end and the other end can be made hard to be contact | abutted by the inner edge of the opening part of an interposed member. As a result, the deformability of the connection means can be secured.

  Game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J6, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15 In any one of the above, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J6, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15 In any one of the above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J6, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15 In any one of the above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 64 first prize mouth (entering means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
300 back case (base)
400 Base member 510 Slide rail (one side member, other side member)
520, 2520, 3520, 4520 Slide member 521, 4521 One side guided member 522, 4522 Other side guided member 523, 4523 Liquid crystal display device (rotary member)
523c rotating shaft 525 opposing member 531 driving motor (rotational driving means)
543 Liquid Crystal Device (Electric Equipment)
544 Intervention member 544a Opening (opening)
545 Substrate member (substrate)
545a1 Protrusions 545a2 Through holes
545 d Ground portions 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 Conductive members (connection means)
546a elastic member 19546a1, 20546a1 concave portion (second region)
19546a2, 20546a2 non-recessed portion (first region)
546b, 17546a Cloth member (conductive member)
546b3 first part 546b4 second part 546b5 third parts 5600, 6600, 7600, 8600 passage members 564 1, 641, 7544, 8554 openings 5640, 6640 overhang wall portion (passage member)
SL slide unit (displacement member)
8655 1st switch (detection means)
8656 Second switch (detection means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with displacement members formed displaceably are known (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-014602, A

When displacement of member is displaced, the base member has a problem of being rotated with respect to the base.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and provides a game machine capable of suppressing the base member from being rotated relative to the base when the displacement member is displaced. With the goal.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a base, a base member rotatably supported on the base, one side guide means and the other side guide disposed on the base member. means the example Bei and one side sliding means and the other side sliding means respectively on one side the guide means and the other side guide means is slidably displaceably guided, the one-side slide means, on the one side guide means A first guided means to be guided, a second guided means guided to the one side guiding means, and a pivotably supported between the first guided means and the second guided means The other side slide means includes a third guided means guided by the other side guide means, a fourth guided means guided by the other side guide means, and the third side slide means. Rotatably between the guided means and the fourth guided means The other side rotating means supported, wherein the relative displacement of the first guided means with respect to the one side guiding means is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the second guided means with respect to the one side guiding means The relative displacement of the fourth guided means with respect to the other side guiding means is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the third guided means with respect to the other side guiding means, The other-side guiding means is formed so as to be able to guide the one-side sliding means and the other-side sliding means in the direction approaching each other, and on the side where the first guided means is disposed, the fourth guided means is disposed, the second on the side which the guide means is provided, the third guided means Ru is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the displacement member is displaced, it can be suppressed that the base member is rotated relative to the base.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st wheel member in the XXa-XXa line of FIG. 17, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd wheel member in the XXb-XXb line of FIG. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front perspective view of a slide unit in the state where a liquid crystal display was arranged at a proximity position. It is a front view of a slide unit in the state where a liquid crystal display was arranged at a proximity position. It is a front perspective view of a slide unit in the state where a liquid crystal display was arranged at a separation position. It is a front view of a slide unit in the state where a liquid crystal display was arranged at a separation position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a reference figure, (b) is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. (A) is a front view schematically showing the slide mechanism in a state in which the liquid crystal display device is disposed at the separated position, and (b) is a slide mechanism in a state in which the liquid crystal display device is disposed at the close position Is a schematic front view schematically showing. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism in a 2nd embodiment typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a reference figure. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated in figure the sliding mechanism in 3rd Embodiment typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the slide rail and slide member in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism with the liquid crystal surface directed to the front side, and (b) schematically shows the slide mechanism with the decorative surface directed to the front side It is a front schematic diagram illustrated. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of the slide mechanism which shows the transition state at the time of a base member being rotated from a 1st rotation position to a 2nd rotation position. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of the slide mechanism which shows the transition state when a base member is rotated from a 2nd rotation position to a 1st rotation position. (A) is a partially expanded front perspective view of a game board in a fifth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of a game board. It is the elements expanded sectional view of the game board in the LVI-LVI line of FIG.55 (b). FIG. 57 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the gaming board taken along line LVII-LVII in FIG. 56 (b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the channel | path member in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a partial expanded sectional view of the channel | path member in 7th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the channel | path member in the LIXb-LIXb line | wire of Fig.59 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the channel | path member in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen in the 1st control example as a 9th embodiment, and (b) is an actual display screen in the 1st control example. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows control of the display area in a 1st control example, (b) is a figure which shows the presentation in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in the example of 1st control. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in the example of 1st control. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in the example of 1st control. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in the example of 1st control. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the inversion operation | movement of the slide member in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the decoration surface of the slide member in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in the example of 1st control. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display control in a 1st control example. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the jackpot type in the first symbol type counter C2 and the special symbol And (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a jackpot variation pattern table, and (c) is a schematic view It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of RAM of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the over prize table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the over winning table, (c) is a sign over It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the prize table typically, (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the loose over prize table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the ending table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the hitting end table, (c) is a precursor ending table It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically, and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the detachment | ending ending table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the sub liquid crystal drive scenario, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the slide drive scenario, and (c) is a rotational drive It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the scenario typically, (d) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the inversion drive scenario typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a configuration of a drive data storage area. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the over winning processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp edit process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal drive processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the stop classification command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot-related command processing for display performed by MPU in a display control. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the round number command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the normal winning a prize presentation command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing the over winning prize effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . (A) is a flowchart which shows the back surface image change command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the error command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the sub symbol setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transmission setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing correction | amendment processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example as a 10th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the internal structure of the 1st variable winning prize apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in the example of a 2nd control. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the decoration surface of the slide member in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution motor setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot related processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game method alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display apparatus of the pachinko machine in the example of 3rd control. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example as 11th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the sub liquid crystal drive scenario in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the mirror effect drive scenario in the third control example FIG. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd example of a control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mirror production setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of the 1st control example. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example as 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game clocking process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. FIG. 159 (a) is a front view of the liquid crystal display device in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 159 (b) is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a liquid crystal display device. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a liquid crystal display device. It is an exploded view of a liquid crystal display. (A) is a top view of an electrically-conductive member, (b) is sectional drawing of the electrically-conductive member in the CLXIIIb-CLXIIIb line | wire of FIG. 163 (a). (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is sectional drawing of the board | substrate member in the CLXIVb-CLXIVb line | wire of FIG. 164 (a). It is a rear view of a liquid crystal display. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display taken along line CLXVIa-CLXVIa in FIG. 165, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display taken along line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. 165, (c) is a view It is an expanded sectional view of a liquid crystal display in range LXVIIIc of 166 (b). Ru. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a liquid crystal display device. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 169 (a) is a top view of the conductive member in the fourteenth embodiment, (b) is a side view of the conductive member in the direction of the arrow CLXIXb of FIG. 169 (a), and FIG. It is a side view of the electrically-conductive member in the arrow CLXIXc direction view of 169. FIG. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a liquid crystal display device. (A) is a top view of the electrically-conductive member in 15th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the electrically-conductive member in the arrow CLXXIb direction view of Fig.171 (a). FIG. 172 (a) is a top view of the conductive member in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the conductive member in the direction of the arrow CLXXIIb of FIG. 172 (a). FIG. 173 (a) is a top view of the conductive member in the seventeenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member taken along line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 173 (a). (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a liquid crystal display device. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a liquid crystal display device. (A) is a top view of the electrically conductive member in 18th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the electrically conductive member in the CLXXVIb-CLXXVIb line | wire of Fig.176 (a). FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the substrate member in the nineteenth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177 (a). (A) is a top view of a electrically conductive member, (b) is sectional drawing of the electrically conductive member in the CLXXVIIIb-CLXXVIIIb line | wire of FIG. 178 (a). (A) And (b) is a schematic cross section of a conductive member. FIG. 180 (a) is a front view of a substrate member in a twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 180 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member taken along line CLXXXb-CLXXXb in FIG. 180 (a). (A) is a top view of a conductive member, (b) is sectional drawing of the conductive member in the CLXXXIb-CLXXXIb line | wire of FIG. 181 (a). (A) And (b) is a schematic cross section of a conductive member.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface on the left side thereof. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61 and 62. The first opening 63, the second opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1) Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by tapping screw etc. from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  The probability change of the second symbol not only increases during a definite change or time, but also the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed, and a longer time than normal It is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized role thing 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during a definite change or during a short time, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric operation per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is opened at a time and once when the electric symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is open or the number of times the electric combination 640a is opened per hit does not occur during a certain change or during a short time, and the second symbol is hit Only the probability may be changed to be up relative to normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the definite change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the open probability and increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized combination 640a per hit, which increases the hit probability during definite change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right of the game board can pass Is configured. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” is easily displayed, and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Launch the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and the winning of the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery and becomes a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second winning hole 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the motor gate is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning in the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided substantially at the center. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  A second variable winning device 82a is disposed on the upper left of the first winning opening 64, and a second specified winning opening 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduction state), and the ball can not win into the second specified winning opening 82. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is opened (expanded) at a specific jackpot (for example, 15R probability variation jackpot), a special gaming state in which the ball easily wins the second specified winning opening 82 Can.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, for example The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball flowing down the game area, which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, is guided to the ball discharging passage (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 14. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. 7 to 14 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. In FIGS. 5 to 14, the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back of the back case 300 is not shown.

  Here, in FIGS. 7 to 10, the state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotational position is illustrated, and in FIGS. 11 to 14, the state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotational position is illustrated. Ru.

  In this case, in FIGS. 7 and 11, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed in the close position with the display surface 523a facing front, in FIGS. 8 and 12 the posture with the display surface 523a front The state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 9 and 13, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed in the close position with the decorative surface 523b facing front, in FIGS. 10 and 14, the decorative surface 523b is facing front The state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and the slide unit SL is rotatably accommodated in the inner space of the rear case 300.

  The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 to the front, and the respective wall portions 301 and 302 It forms in the box shape which one side (front side) was open | released. In the bottom wall portion 301, an opening 301a is formed at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a. .

  The slide unit SL includes a base member 400 rotatably supported by the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a slide mechanism 500 disposed on the front side of the base member 400. The slide mechanism 500 includes a pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 formed slidably displaceable in directions approaching or separating from each other. Note that the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 has a speed or displacement timing (displacement start or displacement stop) of their displacement (rotation with the rotation shaft 523c as the rotation center and slide displacement accompanying the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510). Are set (controlled) to be identical to each other.

  The base member 400 is formed so as to be rotatable between a first rotational position and a second rotational position different in phase by approximately 90 degrees from the first rotational position. In the first rotation position, the slide displacement direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is the vertical direction (vertical direction) (see FIGS. 7 to 10), and in the second rotation position, the slide displacement direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 Is the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

  The liquid crystal display device 523 is formed as a liquid crystal display for displaying symbols and the like, and is rotatably supported so that its display surface 523a faces the front (see FIGS. 7, 8, 11 and 12). And a posture (see FIGS. 9, 10, 13 and 14) in which the decorative surface 523b on the back side of the display surface 523a is directed to the front.

  When the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 is slide-displaced in the direction to approach each other and disposed at the close position, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 is disposed on the front of the third symbol display device 81, thereby the third symbol When the display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visible (see FIGS. 7, 9, 11, and 13), the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 is slidingly displaced in the direction away from each other and arranged at the separated position, The pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 is retracted vertically or horizontally from the front of the third symbol display device 81, whereby the third symbol display device 81 can be viewed (FIGS. 8, 10, 12, and 14).

  Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit SL will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 43. First, the configuration for rotatably supporting the base member 400 of the slide unit SL with respect to the rear case 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23.

  FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of back case 300 and slide unit SL, and FIG. 16 is an exploded back perspective view of back case 300 and slide unit SL. 17 to 19 are front views of the back case 300 and the base member 400.

  The state in which the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotational position in FIG. 17 and the base member 400 to the second rotational position in FIG. 19 is illustrated, and in FIG. The transition state as it is rotated from one rotational position to a second rotational position or vice versa is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 15-19, the rear case 300 includes a rotational drive mechanism for applying rotational drive force to the base member 400, a first wheel member 321 for rotatably supporting the base member 400, and A second wheel member 322 and covering members 331 to 334 for holding the wheel members 321 and 322 are provided.

  The rotational drive mechanism includes a drive motor 311, a pinion gear 312 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 311, and a leading gear (first transmission gear 313a) engaged with the pinion gear 312 and a trailing gear (first The third transmission gear 313 c) includes a transmission gear train engaged with the gear portion 403 of the base member 400, and is disposed at the upper right of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 in a front view. A second transmission gear 313b is interposed between the first transmission gear 313a and the third transmission gear 313c.

  The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are disk-shaped members rotatably supported by a shaft 303 provided upright from the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the outer peripheral edge of the base member 400 The plurality is disposed at predetermined intervals along the line. In the front view shown in FIG. 17, the first wheel member 321 is at two places below the base member 400, and the second wheel member 322 is at two places above the base member 400 and two places on the left and right, It is arranged respectively. Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the detailed configuration of each of the wheel members 321 and 322 will be described.

  20 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first wheel member 321 taken along line XXa-XXa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second wheel member 322 taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), a brass shaft 303 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300 in a posture in which it protrudes toward the front side, In the bottom wall portion 301, a first concave portion 301 b 1 and a second concave portion 301 b 2 which are circular in a front view and concentric with the shaft 303 are recessed around the circumference 303.

  The first recess 301 b 1 and the second recess 301 b 2 are recesses for receiving and accommodating the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 rotatably supported by the shaft 303, and the inner diameter of the second recess 301 b 2 is , And is set to a size smaller than the outer diameter of the first wheel member 321 and larger than the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322. Thereby, the assembly | attachment mistake of the 1st wheel member 321 to 2nd recessed part 301b2 can be suppressed.

  The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are formed as members having an H-shaped cross section in which circumferentially continuous U-shaped grooves 321a and 322a continuous in the circumferential direction are recessed in the outer peripheral surface, and the grooves 321a and 322a The outer edge (flange portion 402) of the member 400 is inserted. Thus, while restricting the displacement of the base member 300 in the radial direction (the downward direction in FIG. 20A) and in the front-rear direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 20A), the base member 400 is rotatably supported on the back surface base 300. it can.

  The first wheel member 321 is formed as a ball bearing in which a plurality of spheres are disposed between the inner ring portion held by the shaft 303 and the outer ring in which the groove 321a is recessed. Thus, the durability of the first wheel member 321 supporting the load of the base member 400 can be ensured, and the output required of the drive motor 311 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the second wheel member 322, the outside diameter of the wall portion positioned on the front side (left side in FIG. 20B) of the pair of wall portions facing each other across the groove 322a is larger than the inside diameter of the recess 301b2. Be done. That is, in the second wheel member 322, the outer diameter of the front wall portion is larger than that of the rear wall portion. Thereby, the rigidity of the 2nd wheel member 322 is securable, the durability improvement can be aimed at, suppressing the mistake of the attachment direction to the axis | shaft 303 of the 2nd wheel member 322.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the slide mechanism 500 with relatively heavy weight is disposed on the front side of the base member 400, and the upper side of the base member 400 that receives the weight of the slide mechanism 500 is inclined forward. Since the second wheel member 322 is disposed above and to the left and right of the base member 400 (see FIG. 17), the outer diameter of the front wall of the second wheel member 322 is large as described above. The configuration described above is particularly effective for suppressing the forward tilting posture of the base member 400 and improving the durability of the second wheel member 322.

  Referring back to FIG. 15 to FIG. The covering members 331 to 334 are formed in a shape obtained by dividing a rectangular plate-like body having a circular opening at the center into four parts in the top, bottom, left, and right, and is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. . As a result, the covering members 331 to 334 are provided on the front side of the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322, and the wheel members 321 and 322 are restricted from coming off the shaft 303.

  The base member 400 is a member formed in a disk shape having a substantially rectangular opening 401 in a front view formed at the center and formed into a flange shape along the outer edge, and the first wheel member 321 and the second The flange portion 402 is inserted into the grooves 321a and 322a of the wheel member 322, and the end gear of the transmission gear train of the rotational drive mechanism is curved on the front side and curved like a circular arc along the circumferential direction (third transmission And a gear portion 403 with which the gear 313c is engaged.

  Thus, for example, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the positive direction from the state in which the base member 400 is arranged at the first rotational position shown in FIG. 17, the rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear train via the pinion gear 312. The rotation of the last gear (third transmission gear 313c) of the transmission gear train is transmitted to the gear portion 403, and the base member 400 is rotated clockwise in a front view (right rotation direction in FIG. 17). When the drive motor 311 is further rotated in the forward direction, the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotational position shown in FIG. 19 through the state shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state where the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotational position shown in FIG. 19, the rotation of the last gear (third transmission gear 313c) of the transmission gear train is By being transmitted to the gear portion 403, the base member 400 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view (left rotation direction in FIG. 19), and is disposed at the first rotation position shown in FIG. Ru.

  In this case, the weight of the base member 400 is supported by the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 being mainly in contact with the groove bottom of the groove 321 a of the first wheel member 321. That is, since it is supported by rolling contact of the circumferential surfaces of the outer circumferential surface of the flange portion 402 and the outer circumferential surface of the groove bottom of the groove 321a, the contact surface is minimized and supported with little friction. Thus, the output of the drive motor 311 required to rotationally drive the base member 400 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the slide mechanism 500 is provided (fixed) on the front side of the base member 400, as described above, the base member 400 has the first rotational position and the second rotational position with respect to the rear case 300. When it is rotated between them, the slide mechanism 500 is rotated along with this rotation, as shown in FIG. 21 to FIG. 21 to 23 are front views of the back case 300 and the slide unit SL, FIG. 21 corresponds to FIG. 17, FIG. 22 corresponds to FIG. 18, and FIG. 23 corresponds to FIG.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the slide mechanism 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 43. FIGS. 24 and 25 are a front perspective view and a front view of the slide unit SL in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged in the proximity position, and FIGS. 26 and 27 show the liquid crystal display device 523 arranged in the separated position. It is a front perspective view and front view of slide unit SL in the state where FIG. 28 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit SL, and FIG. 29 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit SL.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, the slide unit SL includes a base member 400, a cover member 420 disposed on the front side of the base member 400, and a slide rail disposed on the front side of the cover member 420. Main components are: 510, a slide member 520 disposed on the slide rail 510, and a slide drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the slide member 520 for sliding displacement.

  The cover member 420 is a member formed in a disk shape in which an opening 421 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view is formed at the center. The opening 421 of the cover member 420 is formed in substantially the same shape as the opening 401 of the base member 400, and the cover member 420 is disposed on the front side of the base member 400 in a phase (rotational position) where the shapes of the openings 401 and 421 overlap each other. Are placed (fixed).

  The space formed by the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 is also used as a space for rotating the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520. That is, in the state where the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520 is disposed at the close position, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at a position overlapping the openings 401 and 421 in front view, and can be rotated without interfering with the cover member 420.

  Here, the detailed configuration of the slide drive mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35 in addition to FIGS. 28 and 29. 30, 32, and 34 are front views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism, and FIGS. 31, 33, and 35 are rear views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism.

  In FIGS. 30 and 31, the state in which the transmission arm 437 is disposed at the inward projecting position, which is a position for arranging the slide member 520 in the close position, separates the slide member 520 in FIGS. In FIG. 32 and FIG. 32, the transmission arm 437 is rotated from the inward projecting position to the outward reversing position or vice versa in the state in which the transferring arm 437 is disposed at the outward reversing position which is a position for positioning. Transition states at the same time are illustrated respectively. 30 to 35 illustrate the positional relationship with the transfer arm 437, and the connection frame 524 of the slide member 520 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line to facilitate understanding.

  The slide mechanism 500 of the present embodiment is provided with a pair of slide members 520 and a pair of slide drive mechanisms for slidingly driving the slide members 520, respectively. Since they are configured identically, both will be given the same reference numerals and only one will be described and the other description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the slide drive mechanism includes a drive motor 431 disposed on the front side of the cover member 420, a pinion gear 432 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 431, and the pinion gear 432. The transmission gear 433 to be engaged, the rack gear 434a on which the transmission gear 433 is engaged are engraved on the outer peripheral side, and the rack member 434 formed in a curved plate shape and the inner peripheral side of the rack member 434 The transmission gear 435 meshed with the rack gear 434b engraved on the side, the pair of arm drive gears 436 rotated in the opposite direction to each other by the transmission gear 435, and the base end side is fixed to the pair of arm drive gears 436 And a pair of transfer arms 437.

  Therefore, for example, from the state in which the transmission arm 437 is disposed at the inward projecting position (the position where the tip end side is directed to the opening 421 side of the cover member 420) shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the drive motor 431 rotates in the forward direction. When the rotation is transmitted to the rack gear 434 a of the rack member 434 via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

  When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434 b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are respectively rotated to transmit a pair of transmissions. The arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions about their proximal ends.

  When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the forward direction, the pair of transfer arms 437 pass through the states shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, and then the outward reverse position (approximately 180 degrees from the inward reverse position) shown in FIGS. And the tip end of the cover member 420 is arranged to face the opening 421 of the cover member 420).

  On the other hand, from the state in which the transmission arm 437 is disposed at the outward reverse position shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the drive motor 431 is rotated in the reverse direction, and the rotation is via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433 to the rack member 434. The rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420 when it is transmitted to the rack gear 434 a.

  When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434 b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are respectively rotated to transmit a pair of transmissions. The arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions about their proximal ends. When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the reverse direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 are disposed at the inward reverse position shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 through the states shown in FIGS. 32 and 33.

  As described later, the distal end side of the transfer arm 437 is slidably connected to the slide groove 524a in the connection frame 524 of the slide member 520, and the transfer arm 437 is rotated about the proximal end side. The inner surface of the slide groove 524a in the connection frame 524 of the slide member 520 is pushed and pulled by the distal end side of the transmission arm 437, and the slide member 520 is slid and displaced (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

  In this case, in the configuration in which the rotational driving force of the drive motor 431 is converted to the slide displacement of the slide member 520 using a linear rack member extended along the slide direction of the slide member 520, When the slide displacement amount is secured, the linear rack member does not fit within the circular outer shape of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 and interferes with the rear case 300 (the outer wall portion 302). It can not be rotated against.

  When the linear rack member is accommodated within the circular outer shape of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 in order to allow the base member 400 to rotate relative to the rear case 300, the amount of sliding displacement of the slide member 520 becomes short. In addition, the linear rack member is visibly exposed from the player through the opening 421 and the appearance is impaired.

  On the other hand, a structure is also conceivable in which the arm drive gear 436 is directly driven by the pinion gear 432 of the drive motor 431. In this case, the arrangement position of the drive motor 431 overlaps the movement trajectory of the slide displacement of the slide member 520. The slide displacement amount of the member 520 is shortened.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rack member 434 curved in an arc shape is disposed along the circumferential direction on the outer edge side of the cover member 420 (outside the opening 421) to rotate the drive motor 431 as the rack member 434. Of the base member 400 with respect to the rear case 300 while securing the amount of slide displacement of the slide member 520 because the transfer arm 437 is rotated. Thus, it is possible to improve the appearance by avoiding the exposure of the rack member 434 from the opening 421. Further, since the drive motor 431 can be disposed outside (both sides) of the track of the slide displacement of the slide member 520, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 can be secured also from this point.

  Referring back to FIG. 24 to FIG. The slide rail 510 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism interposed between the cover member 420 and the slide member 520, and the slide member 520 is extended relative to the cover member 420 by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510. Slide is displaced. In the present embodiment, the slide rail 510 is in a posture in which two pairs have different expansion and contraction directions (that is, they differ in phase by 180 °), with one pair supporting the both ends of the slide member 520 as one pair. It is arranged oppositely.

  Here, the detailed configuration of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are exploded back perspective views of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520. In FIGS. 36 to 38, the transfer arm 437 is illustrated for ease of understanding.

  In the present embodiment, two sets of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 are disposed, and in these two sets, the opposing distance between the pair of slide rails 510 in one set is the pair of slides in the other set. Since they are configured in substantially the same manner except that they are smaller than the facing distance of the rails 510, the two will be denoted by the same reference numerals and only one will be described, and the other description will be omitted. Note that, by providing a difference in the facing intervals described above, one set of slide rails 510 can be disposed between the other set of slide rails 510.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the slide rail 510 is connected to the proximal rail 511 disposed on the front surface of the cover member 420 and to the front side of the proximal rail 511 such that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible. An intermediate rail 512, and a tip rail 513 connected for relative displacement in the longitudinal direction on the front side of the intermediate rail 512. That is, the proximal rail 511 and the distal rail 513 can be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction via the intermediate rail 512.

  The slide member 520 includes the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522 on which the end rails 512 of the pair of slide rails 510 are disposed on the back side, and the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided A liquid crystal display device 523 rotatably supported between the members 522, a connecting frame 524 connecting the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522, and a liquid crystal display device 523 arranged on the connecting frame 524 And an opposing member 525 disposed opposite to each other.

  The one side guided member 521 is divided into a rail side member 521a on which the end rail 513 of the slide rail 510 is disposed, and a liquid crystal side member 521b rotatably supporting the liquid crystal display device 523. The reference numeral 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b are connected so as to be capable of relative displacement.

  In detail, while the insertion hole 521a1 of a cross-sectional circular is drilled by two places of the rail side member 521a, the column-shaped insertion pin 521b1 each penetrated by these two insertion holes 521a1 is a pair from the liquid crystal side member 521b. It is provided in a projecting manner. The interaxial distance between the insertion holes 521a1 is equal to the interaxial distance between the insertion pins 521b1, and the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 521b1.

  In this case, the axial direction of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1 is orthogonal to the slide direction of the slide rail 510 and parallel to the slide plane of the slide rail 510. Therefore, a predetermined gap is formed over the entire circumference between the insertion hole 521 a 1 and the insertion pin 521 b 1, and both may be displaced relative to each other in any direction (a direction perpendicular to the both) by the gap. it can.

  A washer W having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the insertion pin 521b1, and the insertion pin 521b1 is prevented from coming off from the insertion hole 521a1.

  In this case, the thickness dimension of the plate-like portion in which the insertion hole 521a1 of the rail side member 521a is drilled is set smaller than the protruding dimension of the insertion pin 521b1. Thus, the rail side member 521a can be displaced relative to the liquid crystal side member 521b also in the direction along the axial direction of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to form the liquid crystal side member 521b and the liquid crystal display device 523 in an inclined posture with respect to the rail side member 521a, with the other side guided member 522 side as a fulcrum. For example, with respect to the rail side member 521a, the liquid crystal side member 521b precedes in the direction of slide displacement, and the distance between them increases on the front side in the direction of slide displacement (decreases on the rear side in the direction of slide displacement) Relative displacement in form is acceptable. Thereby, as described later, it is possible to easily suppress the sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 due to the inertial force at the time of rotational driving of the liquid crystal display device 523.

  The liquid crystal display device 523 is a plate-like member having a rectangular shape in a front view, and as described above, is formed as a liquid crystal display, and one side is a display surface 523a capable of displaying a symbol etc. The other side to be is a decorative surface 523b decorated.

  In this case, in the liquid crystal display device 523, cylindrical rotary shafts 523c are provided so as to protrude from both ends in the longitudinal direction, and each rotary shaft 523c is one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member It is rotatably supported by the axial support holes 521b and 522c of 522, respectively. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotatably supported by the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522 via the rotation shaft 523c and the shaft support holes 521b and 522c, and the display surface 523a is rotated by the rotation. Can be formed with the attitude toward the front side (the player side) and the attitude with the decorative surface 523b facing the front side.

  The axial center of the rotation shaft 523 c is disposed at the center in the width direction and at the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. In this case, in the liquid crystal display device 523, since the liquid crystal display is disposed, the display surface 523 a side is heavier than the decoration surface 523 b side. Further, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically positioned at least on the display surface 523a side from the axial center of the rotation shaft 523c due to the components of the liquid crystal display and the asymmetric shape of the decorative surface 523b. Therefore, an inertial force is likely to be generated as the liquid crystal display device 523 starts or stops rotating.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven by a rotation drive mechanism provided on the liquid crystal side member 521 b of the one side guided member 521. The rotational drive mechanism is engaged with a drive motor 531, a pinion gear 532 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 531, a first gear 533 engaged with the pinion gear 532, and the first gear 533. And a second gear 534 fixed to the liquid crystal display device 523. The rotational driving force of the drive motor 531 is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 523 via the gears 532 to 534 to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523. .

  The rotational drive mechanism sets (controls) the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 such that their displacement (rotation) speed and displacement (rotation) timing (rotation start or rotation stop) are identical to each other. Be done.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation axis of the liquid crystal display device 523 is set at the width direction center and the thickness direction center of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 523 and the opposing member 525 is constant even when the liquid crystal display device 523 is in a posture in which either the display surface 523a or the decorative surface 523b is directed to the front.

  A sliding groove 524a linearly extending in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the slide rail 510 is bored in the connecting frame 524, and the distal end side of the transmission arm 437 slides in the sliding groove 524a. It is inserted as much as possible. The connection frame 524 is disposed on the one side guided member 521 (the liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member 522, so the transmission arm 437 is rotated by the slide drive mechanism described above, and the leading end side thereof is a sliding groove. When slid along 524a, the entire slide member 520 is slid.

  The connecting frame 524 connects the one side guided member 521 (the liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member 522, whereby the whole of the liquid crystal side member 521b, the liquid crystal display device 523 and the other side member 522 is completed. Can increase the rigidity. Thus, the facing distance between the liquid crystal side member 521 b and the other side member 522 can be easily maintained constant, and the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated smoothly. Further, as described later, it is possible to easily suppress the sliding displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 due to the inertial force at the time of the rotational drive of the liquid crystal display device 523.

  The opposing member 525 is a plate-like member erected from the front of the connecting frame, and has a predetermined distance (a surface connecting the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b) of the liquid crystal display device 523 (the liquid crystal display device 523). They are arranged opposite to each other at an interval allowing rotation. Further, a plurality of LEDs (rendering means) are disposed on the facing member 525, and are formed so as to be capable of emitting light toward the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the LED and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523 from between the facing member 525 and the liquid crystal display device 523 and the opposite side.

  The structure in which the slide member 520 configured in this way is slidingly displaced by the slide drive mechanism (transmission arm 437) will be described. 39 (a), 40 (a) and 41 (a) are front views of the slide member 520, and FIGS. 39 (b), 40 (b) and 41 (b) are slide members 520. It is a rear view of.

  In FIG. 39, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the close position, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separation position in FIG. The transition states as they are slidingly displaced to the separated position or vice versa are respectively illustrated. Further, FIG. 39 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, FIG. 40 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, and FIG. 41 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS.

  Here, as described above, in the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523, the speed of the displacement (slide displacement accompanying the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) and the timing of the displacement (displacement start or displacement stop) become identical to each other Is set (controlled). Therefore, only one liquid crystal display device 523 will be described, and the description of the other liquid crystal display device 523 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 39, when the pair of transfer arms 437 are arranged in the inward projecting position (see FIGS. 30 and 31), the slide rail 510 is shortened, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is in the proximity position. Will be placed. When the pair of transfer arms 437 are rotated in the opposite direction with respect to the proximal end side from this state, the distal end side of the transfer arm 437 slides along the slide groove 524 a of the connection frame 524 to achieve liquid crystal display. The device 523 is slidingly displaced in the direction in which the slide rail 510 is extended.

  When the pair of transfer arms 437 are further rotated and the pair of transfer arms 437 are disposed at the outward reverse position as shown in FIG. 41 through the state shown in FIG. 40 (see FIGS. 34 and 35) The slide rail 510 is in an extended state, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position.

  On the other hand, when the pair of transfer arms 437 are rotated in the opposite direction to that described above from the state shown in FIG. 41, the tip end of the transfer arm 437 slides along the slide groove 524 a of the connecting frame 524. The liquid crystal display device 523 is slidingly displaced in the direction of shortening the slide rail 510. When the pair of transfer arms 437 are further rotated and the pair of transfer arms 437 are disposed in the inward projecting position as shown in FIG. 39 through the state shown in FIG. 40, the slide rail 510 is shortened. The liquid crystal display device 523 is placed in the close position.

  FIG. 42 (a) is a reference view, and FIG. 42 (b) is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500.

  In the present embodiment, the one side guided member 521 is composed of two parts of the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b, and they are connected so as to be capable of relative displacement. In the structure shown as (hereinafter referred to as "reference structure"), the one side guided member X is formed as an integral part (one part). The other configuration of the reference structure is the same as that of the present embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the slide member 520 is formed so as to be slide-displaceable by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510, and the slide member 520 includes the one guided member 521 and the other guided member 522, and the rotation between them. It is formed of a liquid crystal display device 523 pivotally supported. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated as well as slide displacement, and variations in the rendering operation can be increased. That is, not only the display surface 523a of the liquid crystal display device 523 but also the decoration surface 523b can be viewed by the player.

  However, in this case, in the reference structure shown in FIG. 42A, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated with respect to the one side guided member X and the other side guided member 522, the rotation is started or stopped. The accompanying inertial force becomes parallel to the direction of slide displacement, and the slide member (one-side guided member X, the other-side guided member 522, and the liquid crystal display device 523) on which the inertial force acts acts on the slide rail 510. , It will slide. That is, it is difficult to only rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 while keeping the liquid crystal display device 523 stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 42A).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the one side guided member 521 is formed of the two components of the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b, and the both members 521a and 521b are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. The allowable amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (the right side in FIG. 42B) disposed on the side guided member 521 and the side disposed on the other side guided member 522 (FIG. The tolerance of the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 of FIG.

  Thus, when an inertial force is applied to start or stop the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521 b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 is moved to the other side The liquid crystal display device 523 can have a displacement component in a direction (left direction in FIG. 42 (b)) orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 42 (b)). . Therefore, a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be used as a force (a braking force) to press the slide rail 510 (that is, the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510 can be restricted). The sliding displacement of 520 can be suppressed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 42B).

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (right side in FIG. 42B) disposed on the one side guided member 521 is arranged on the other side guided member 522 One side guided member 521 in a form in which the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (left side in FIG. 42B) The rotary drive means (drive motor 531 and gears 532 to 534) are disposed on the liquid crystal side member 521b (see FIG. 38). That is, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side guided member 522 side.

  Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (a braking force) to press the slide rail 510, the rotational drive mechanism (the drive motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534) The rotational inertia (weight) of can be used to increase the pressing force. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement.

  In the present embodiment, the drive motor 531 of the rotational drive mechanism is disposed with the drive shaft directed to the liquid crystal display 523 side and the main body portion directed to the direction away from the liquid crystal display 523. The barycentric position of the drive motor 531 can be disposed at a position farther from the other side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a locus farther from the other side displaced member 522.

  Thereby, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (a braking force) to press the slide rail 510, the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 can be more easily utilized, The pressing force can be increased. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the direction of slide displacement.

  FIG. 43 (a) is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 in a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position, and FIG. 43 (b) is a liquid crystal display device 523 in the proximity position. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated in figure the slide mechanism 500 in the arrange | positioned state typically.

  Here, in the reference structure described above (see FIG. 42A), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are slidingly displaced in the direction in which the liquid crystal display devices approach each other and arranged at the proximity position, both abut each other at the proximity position without a gap. Then, the load of the slide drive mechanism (the drive motor 431 and the gears 432 and 433 and the like, see FIG. 31) for slidingly displacing the liquid crystal display devices 523 becomes large, which causes them to be damaged.

  On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allowance is given to the position at which the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped in anticipation of dimensional tolerance, assembly tolerance or control tolerance. Setting a sufficient gap between the two) so that the two do not touch), the gap becomes large (the display of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side from the gap is visually recognized by the player), appearance (rendering effect) Cause aggravation of

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the one side guided member 521 is formed of the two components of the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b, and the two members 521a and 521b are relatively displaced. While being able to connect, the slide members 520 formed in this way are disposed facing each other in an alternate posture. That is, one guided member 521 in one slide member 520 is the other guided member 522 in the other slide member 520, and the other guided member 522 in one slide member 520 is the one side in the other slide member 520. The guided members 521 are disposed to face each other.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are abutted against each other at the close position, the one slide member 520 is slid. By relatively displacing the side guided member 521 (the liquid crystal side member 521b retracts with respect to the rail side member 521a), the other side guided member 522 in the other (the other and the other) slide member 520 can be received. (One and the other liquid crystal display device 523 can be inclined with respect to the direction of the slide displacement, respectively).

  Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display devices 523 abut on each other at a close position, damage to the slide drive mechanism (the drive motor 431 and the gears 432 and 433 etc.) can be suppressed. It can be set to position. As a result, at the close position, the liquid crystal display devices 523 can be brought close to each other in a state where the gap between them is smaller, and the appearance (rendering effect) can be improved accordingly.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the other-side guided member 522 is provided with the detected portion, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion is provided on the cover member 420, and the detected portion Is detected by the detection sensor, and it is detected that the slide member 520 has been slid to a predetermined position. Therefore, even when the attitude of the liquid crystal display device 523 changes, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the detection target member with respect to the cover member 420 (detection sensor). As a result, the position of the slide displacement of the slide member 520 can be detected more accurately.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 47. In the first embodiment, the slide mechanism 500 includes two sets of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 supported by the slide rail 510 (ie, the two sets have substantially the same configuration as each other), Although the case where two sets were mutually opposingly arranged by the attitude | position (namely, 180 degrees of which made the phase differ) which mutually opposed was demonstrated, the slide mechanism 2500 in 2nd Embodiment is the slide member 520 and slide member of a mutually different structure. 2520 is provided, and the slide members 520 and 2520 are disposed to face each other in a facing posture. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 44 and FIG. 45 are schematic front views schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a reference view, and is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment. In FIG. 44, the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position in FIG. 45 in which the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position. In addition, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the close position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, on the front side of the cover member 420, as in the case of the first embodiment, the two sets of slide rails 510 differ in their expansion and contraction directions from one another (ie, 180 in phase) It is arranged oppositely at different postures.

  In this case, in the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, the slide member 520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 in one set (the upper side in FIGS. 44 and 45) as in the first embodiment. The slide member 2520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 of the other set (the lower side in FIGS. 44 and 45).

  With respect to the slide member 520, in the slide member 2520, the arrangement positions of the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 with respect to the liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed. Therefore, one guided member 521 in the slide member 520 of one set is one guided member 521 in the slide member 2520 of the other set, and the other guided member 522 in the slide member 520 of the one set is The other guide member 522 in the other set of slide members 2520 is disposed opposite to each other.

  That is, in the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment, the slide displacement of the slide member 520 of one set and the slide displacement of the other set are the slide displacements of both members 520 and 2520 in plan view shown in FIGS. Is disposed in line-symmetrical posture with respect to a virtual line located at the center in the direction of and perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 46, in the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment, as described above, two pairs having substantially the same configuration face each other (that is, the phases are different by 180 °). Since the one side guided member 521 in the slide member 520 of one set is oppositely arranged in the posture, the other side guided member 522 in the slide member 2520 of the other set and the other side in the slide member 520 of one set The guided member 522 is disposed opposite to the one guided member 521 of the other set of slide members 2520, respectively.

  That is, in the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment, the slide member 520 of one set and the slide member 520 of the other set are at the center in the direction of slide displacement of both members 520 in a plan view shown in FIG. And arranged in a point-symmetrical posture with respect to a virtual point located at the center in the direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement (ie, the rotation center of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the back case 300). Ru.

  Therefore, in the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment, when an inertial force is applied along with the start of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 or the stop of the rotation, the direction is orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement generated in one set of slide members 520. The displacement component in the direction of movement and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 520 are in a staggered orientation (point-symmetrical orientation, and the base member 400 and the cover member 420 The base member 400 and the cover member 420 are rotated relative to the rear case 300 in the direction of arrow R in FIG. That is, it is difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 while stopping the base member 400 and the cover member 420 at predetermined rotational positions with respect to the rear case 300.

  On the other hand, according to the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, one set of slides The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the member 520 and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 2520 have the same direction (axisymmetric orientation Can be

  Therefore, since rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 depending on the displacement component, the base member 400 and the cover member 420 can be prevented from being rotated with respect to the back case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the rear case 300.

  FIG. 47 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500, in which the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotational position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the proximate position.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, in the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position (see FIG. 45), one set of the guided member 521 in the slide member 520 of one set and the other set One side guided member 521 in the slide member 2520 is disposed on the right side in front view.

  In this case, the second rotational position of the base member 400 is a position rotated 90 ° clockwise (clockwise) in a front view from the first rotational position (see FIGS. 17 to 19 and 21 to 23). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, in a state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotational position (ie, in a state where the direction of slide displacement of the slide members 520 and 2520 is horizontal (in the horizontal direction in FIG. 47)) Arranging one guided member 521 in one set of slide members 520 and one guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 2520 on the lower side in the front view (vertically lower side) Can.

  Thereby, in a state where base member 400 is arranged at the second rotational position shown in FIG. 47, when an inertial force is applied when the slide displacement of liquid crystal display device 523 is started or the slide displacement is stopped, the slide displacement is generated. Component in the direction orthogonal to the direction (a displacement component in the direction of pressing the slide members 520 and 2520 against the slide rail 510 (which restricts the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510)) vertically upward (opposite to the gravity direction, 47 upward direction).

  As a result, when sliding the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) in the horizontal direction, the action of gravity is canceled or reduced by the displacement component in the direction described above, and the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity. As a result, the output of the drive motor 431 (see FIGS. 28 and 29) required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, wear of the slide rail 510 due to slide displacement can be suppressed.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the second embodiment, one side guided member 521 is the other side guided member 522 in a state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotational position (a state where the slide members 520 and 2520 are slid in the horizontal direction). Although the case where it arrange | positions on the perpendicular direction lower side rather than was demonstrated, the one side guided member 521 of 3rd Embodiment is arrange | positioned vertically higher than the other side guided member 522. FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  48 and 49 are schematic front views schematically showing the slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment. In FIG. 48, the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position, and the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position. In addition, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the close position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment is formed by rotating the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment by 180 °. That is, contrary to the case of the second embodiment, the slide member 2520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 of one set (the upper side of FIGS. 48 and 49), while the other set (FIGS. 48 and 49). A slide member 520 is disposed on the lower slide rail 510.

  That is, in the third embodiment, when the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position, the one side guided member 521 of the slide member 2520 of one set and the one side cover of the slide member 520 of the other set The guide members 521 are respectively disposed on the left side in a front view.

  As in the case of the second embodiment, the slide mechanism 3500 according to the third embodiment configured as described above also exerts an inertial force associated with the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the slide member 2520 of one set and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 520 have the same direction (line It can be made symmetrical).

  Therefore, since rotational inertia does not occur in the base member 400 and the cover member 420 depending on the displacement component, the base member 400 and the cover member 420 can be prevented from being rotated with respect to the back case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the rear case 300.

  FIG. 50 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 3500, in which the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the proximity position.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, in the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position (see FIG. 49), one set of the guided member 521 in the slide member 2520 of one set and the other set One side guided member 521 in the slide member 520 is disposed on the left side in a front view.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, in the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotational position (that is, in the state where the direction of slide displacement of the slide members 520 and 2520 is horizontal (in the horizontal direction in FIG. 50)) The one side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 2520 and the one side guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 520 can be disposed on the upper side (vertical direction upper side) in front view .

  Thereby, in the state where base member 400 is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 47, when an inertial force is applied when the rotation of liquid crystal display device 523 is started or stopped. The displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction (displacement component that generates a force (a braking force) that presses the slide member 520 against the slide rail 510) can be made vertically downward (gravity direction, lower in FIG. 50). Accordingly, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, the slide member 520 can be prevented from floating and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to suppress damage to the movable portion and the sliding portion due to rattling caused by the floating.

  In this case, the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521 is provided with rotational driving means (the drive motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534) (see FIG. 38). That is, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side guided member 522 side.

  Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (a braking force) to press the slide rail 510, the rotational drive mechanism (the drive motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534) The rotational inertia (weight) of can be used to increase the pressing force. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, floating of the slide member 520 can be easily suppressed, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily suppress breakage of the movable portion and the sliding portion due to rattling caused by the floating.

  Further, the drive motor 531 of the rotational drive mechanism is disposed in such a posture that the drive shaft is directed to the liquid crystal display 523 side and the main body portion is directed in the direction away from the liquid crystal display 523. The position of the center of gravity of can be arranged at a position farther from the other side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a locus farther from the other side displaced member 522.

  Thereby, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (a braking force) to press the slide rail 510, the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 can be more easily utilized, The pressing force can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, floating of the slide member 520 can be easily suppressed, and the rotation can be stabilized. In addition, it is possible to easily suppress breakage of the movable portion and the sliding portion due to rattling caused by the floating.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation shaft 523c of the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the center in the width direction has been described, but the rotation shaft 4523c of the fourth embodiment is eccentrically positioned in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523. Will be placed on In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 4520 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 52 (a) is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 4500 with the display surface 523a directed to the front side, and FIG. 52 (b) shows the decorative surface 523b directed to the front side. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated in figure typically the slide mechanism 4500 in the state of being. 52 (a) and 52 (b), the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position and the liquid crystal display 4523 is disposed at the separated position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, in the slide mechanism 4500 according to the fourth embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, cylindrical rotary shafts 4523c are provided to project from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523. The rotation shaft 4523 c is rotatably supported by the shaft support holes 4521 b 2 and 4522 c of the one side guided member 4521 (liquid crystal side member 4521 b) and the other side guided member 4522.

  That is, the liquid crystal display device 4523 is rotatably supported by the one side guided member 4521 and the other side guided member 4522 via the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c, and the display surface 523a is rotated by the rotation. Can be formed with the attitude toward the front side (the player side) and the attitude with the decorative surface 523b facing the front side.

  In this case, the rotational shaft 4523c and the bearing holes 4521b2 and 4522c are spaced apart from the opposing member 525 along the direction of slide displacement than the formation position in the case of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Set to position. That is, in the first embodiment, the rotation shaft 523 c is disposed at the center in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, whereas the rotation shaft 4523 c of the fourth embodiment is in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523 (FIG. And FIG. 52 (b) are arranged eccentrically on one side.

  In the rotation drive mechanism in the fourth embodiment, the pinion gear 532 and the first gear 533 are different from the rotation drive mechanism in the first embodiment because the formation position of the shaft support hole 4521b is separated from the pinion gear 532 of the drive motor 531. And a third gear 4535 is additionally disposed.

  Here, as described above, in the facing member 525, a plurality of LEDs are disposed on the side surface facing the liquid crystal display device 4523, and the side surfaces of the liquid crystal display device 4523 (the display surface 523a and the decoration surface 523b The light is formed so that light can be emitted toward the connecting surface), and light emitted from the LED is reflected from the side surface of the liquid crystal display 4523 to the liquid crystal display 4523 and the opposing member 525 from the opposing space (gap) It is possible to perform an effect to make a person visually recognize.

  Therefore, when the distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 is narrow, a space for passing light reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 can not be secured, and the light is effectively used by the player. It can not be made visible.

  In this case, the distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (the distance in the vertical direction in FIG. 52A) is the third symbol display via the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 from between the facings. In order to make the player visually recognize the device 81, it is preferable that the device 81 can be secured as much as possible. On the other hand, the opposing spacing of the pair of opposing members 525 (the spacing in the vertical direction in FIG. 52A) should be such that it can be stored between the opposing outer wall portions 302 of the rear case 300 Can not be expanded to receive

  Therefore, if the distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is increased and a space for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 is secured between the opposite electrodes, the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 (LED) face each other. Since the gap (gap) is reduced, it becomes difficult to secure a gap for light emission, reflection or passage of the LED, but the gap between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is narrowed in order to secure the gap. Then, it becomes difficult to secure an interval for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the formation positions of the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c are eccentrically positioned on one side in the slide displacement direction, the rotation position of the liquid crystal display device 4523 The space (gap) between the facing of the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be increased or decreased.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 52A, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 can be reduced by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the display surface 523a faces the front side. . Therefore, the opposing interval of the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the amount of extension of the liquid crystal display device 4523 to the front of the third symbol display device 81) can be reduced accordingly, and as a result, the player can display the third symbol display device A viewable area for viewing 81 can be secured.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52B, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 can be increased by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the decorative surface 523b faces the front side. . Therefore, it is possible to secure a space (gap) through which the light emitted from the LED of the facing member 525 and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 can pass, and as a result, between the facing (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 From this, it is possible to effectively perform an effect to make the player visually recognize.

  Further, in order to increase the distance between the liquid crystal display 4523 and the opposing member 525, the opposing member 525 needs to be disposed at a distance from the liquid crystal display 4523 (that is, the distance between the pair of opposing members 525 is increased). As a result, the slide mechanism 4500 can be miniaturized. That is, while making it possible to accommodate the slide mechanism 4500 between the facing of the outer wall portion 302 of the rear case 300, both the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 and the rendering effect by the light emitted from the LED can be achieved. Can.

  Next, when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotational position to the second rotational position or vice versa, a method of suppressing the driving force required for the rotation will be described.

  53 (a) and 53 (b) are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotational position to the second rotational position.

  When the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, as shown in FIG. 53A, in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are positioned close to each other. Place on In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (upper side, upper side in FIG. 53 (a)) has a posture in which the display surface 523a is directed to the front side, while the other (lower side, lower side in FIG. 53 (a)). The liquid crystal display device 4523 has a posture in which the decorative surface 523 b is directed to the front side.

  Thus, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 can be disposed at a position eccentric to the upper side than the center in the vertical direction, and accordingly, the position of the center of gravity G is positioned above the rotation center of the base member 400 It can be done.

  Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90 ° clockwise in a front view (right direction in FIG. 53 (a)), and the second rotation position shown in FIG. 53 (b) from the first rotation position shown in FIG. 53 (a) In the case of rotation, the movement locus of the center of gravity G (shown by the broken line arrow in FIG. 53B) can be a locus moving downward (in the direction of gravity).

  Therefore, when rotation of the base member 400 from the first rotational position is started, a force in the direction of gravity (downward) acting on the center of gravity G can be made to act as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400. The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, it is possible to suppress the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required for the rotation of the base member 400 from the first rotational position to the second rotational position.

  54 (a) and 54 (b) are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotational position to the first rotational position.

  When the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, as shown in FIG. 54A, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are positioned close to each other in order to avoid interference with the rear case 300. Place on In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (the side moving in the direction of gravity as it is rotated to the first rotational position, the left side in FIG. 54A) takes the display surface 523a to the front side. The liquid crystal display device 4523 on the other side (the side moving to the opposite side of the direction of gravity as it is rotated to the first rotational position, right side in FIG. 54A) has a posture in which the decorative surface 523b faces the front side.

  As a result, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (ie, the position of the center of gravity G) is a position away from the rotation center of the base member 400 and eccentrically moved to the direction of gravity along with the subsequent rotation ( It can arrange | position on FIG. 54 (a) left side.

  Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise in the front view (left direction in FIG. 54A), and the first rotation shown in FIG. 54B from the second rotation position shown in FIG. 54A. When rotating to the position, the movement locus of the center of gravity G (shown by the broken line arrow in FIG. 54B) can be a locus moving downward (in the direction of gravity).

  Therefore, when rotation of the base member 400 from the second rotational position is started, a force in the direction of gravity (downward) acting on the center of gravity G can be made to act as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400. The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, it is possible to suppress the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required to rotate the base member 400 from the second rotational position to the first rotational position.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55 (a) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13. 56 is a partial enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line LVI-LVI in FIG. 55 (b), and FIG. 57 is a partial enlarged sectional view of game board 13 taken along line LVII-LVII in FIG. 56 (b) FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the game board 13 is provided with a passage member 5600 which is formed of a resin material and which forms a passage through which the game balls flow down. In the passage member 5600, a rolling plate 5610 is provided extending in the width direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 55 (b)) of the game board 13, and the front side (55 (b) paper front side) of the rolling plate 5610. The front wall 5620 to be disposed, the back wall 5630 disposed on the back side of the rolling plate 5610 (the back side in the drawing of FIG. 55B), and a portion of the back wall 5630 to the back side And an overhanging wall portion 5640 which is formed to be overhanging.

  The rolling plate 5610 is a member whose upper surface is the rolling surface of the gaming ball, and has a first portion formed by being inclined downward from the width direction end of the gaming board 13 and its first portion The second portion is inclined upward from the end on the downward inclination side toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13 to form a W-shaped rolling surface in a front view.

  The upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610 is recessed at the connecting portion between the first portion and the second portion and descends toward the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 55 (b)) A concave portion 5611 to be inclined and a concave portion 5612 to be concave to the rear side (the rear side in the drawing of FIG. 55B) while being concavely provided at the uppermost portion of the second portion are disposed.

  The front wall portion 5620 is erected above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610, and suppresses the game balls from falling from the upper surface of the rolling plate 5610. However, in the front wall portion 5620, a portion corresponding to the concave portion 5611 of the rolling plate 5610 is cut out, and the gaming ball received in the concave portion 5611 can be dropped.

  The overhanging wall portion 5640 is a member for forming a passage for causing the gaming balls rolling on the upper surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to flow out from the lower surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to the game area, and rolling The game ball received in the recess 5612 is rolled into the overhanging wall 5640 by rolling the plate 5610.

  Here, the operation unit 200 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13. Therefore, if the overhanging wall portion 5640 is projected from the back side of the game board 13 as in the present embodiment, the operation unit 200 (slide unit SL) is used to avoid interference with the overhanging wall portion 5640. The movable range of) is limited, and the rendering effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is formed to have a U-shaped cross section (see FIG. 57), and the width dimension between the inner wall surfaces (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 57) The depth dimension (vertical dimension in FIG. 57) from the front of the back wall 5630 to the inner wall surface is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball while the size of the game ball is set to a slightly larger size.

  In this case, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is chamfered (cut) by an imaginary plane parallel to the back wall portion 5630, with the top of the arc-like section in the overhanging direction (right side of FIG. 56, upper side of FIG. In the chamfered portion, an opening 5641 whose width dimension (dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 57) is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball is formed.

  That is, the gaming ball can pass through (flowing down) the passage formed by the overhanging wall portion 5640 in a state in which the gaming ball is partially protruded to the outside from the opening portion 5641, so the entire gaming ball can As compared with the case where the overhanging wall portion 640 is formed in a size surrounding the side, the overhanging dimension L1 to the back side of the overhanging wall portion 5640 can be suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement space of operation unit 200 and the movable range of slide unit SL can be secured by that amount.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the passage member 6600 in the sixth embodiment, corresponding to FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the overhanging wall portion 6640 in the sixth embodiment includes a pair of wall portions erected from the back wall portion 5630, and a wall portion connecting the erected front ends of the pair of wall portions. Is formed in a U-shape in cross section, and an opening 6641 is formed in the wall portion of the overhanging tip side (upper side in FIG. 58) in the U-shape in cross section.

  The opening portion 6641 is formed in a form in which the width dimension (dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 58) decreases as going from the inner wall surface side of the overhanging wall portion 6640 to the outer wall surface side. That is, the inner peripheral surface of the overhanging wall portion 6640 is formed as an inclined surface. This enlarges the possible projection amount which makes a part of game ball project outside from opening 6641, and it becomes possible to control the projection size L2 of the overhanging wall 5640, while the peripheral part (the inclined surface and the opening 6641) (5) can be secured to the maximum to ensure the rigidity of the overhanging wall portion 6640.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the width dimension W of the opening 6641 in the inner wall surface of the overhanging wall portion 6640 is set to a size smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the inner wall surface and the opening of the overhanging wall portion 5640 The angle of the inclined surface (the inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) is set such that the ridge line portion S with the inner peripheral surface of the portion 5641 is in contact with the gaming ball. In this way, while securing a possible projection amount that allows part of the gaming ball to protrude from the opening 6641 to the outside, it is possible to suppress the object from being received on the tip side of the inclined surface (inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) ( That is, the game ball can be received by the ridge line portion S having relatively high rigidity), and breakage of the overhanging wall portion 6640 (periphery of the opening portion 6641) can be suppressed.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the passage member 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 59 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the passage member 7600 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the passage member 7600 in the seventh embodiment includes a front wall 7651, a rear wall 7652 opposite to the front wall 7651, and fronts thereof. A side wall portion 7653 respectively disposed on both sides of the wall portion 7651 and the back wall portion 7652 is formed, and a space having a substantially rectangular cross section surrounded by the respective wall portions 7651 to 6563 forms a passage for flowing the gaming ball down .

  Here, the passage member 7600 projects the front wall 7651 and a part of the rear wall 7652 (a front inner peripheral wall 7651a and a rear outer peripheral wall 7652a) toward the rear wall so as to project them. The curved portion is formed by the portion 7651a and the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. That is, the inner peripheral side of the passage in which the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a is bent is formed, and the outer peripheral side of the path in which the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a is bent is respectively formed.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening 764 is formed in the front inner peripheral wall 7651 a on the inner peripheral side of the bent passage. That is, the opening 7604 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force (right direction in FIG. 59A) acting on the gaming ball when passing through the bent passage. In addition, since the opening part 7654 is formed substantially the same as the opening part 6641 in 6th Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by projecting a part of the gaming ball to the outside from the opening 7654, not only can the projecting dimension L3 of the rear outer peripheral wall 7652a be suppressed, but also damage or wear of the passage member 7600 is suppressed. It is easy to do.

  That is, since the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force (right direction in FIG. 59A) acting on the gaming ball when passing through the bent passage, it is pressed by the centrifugal force The game ball can be received by the back outer peripheral wall 7652a which does not have the opening 7654 formed and the rigidity is relatively high, and it can be suppressed that the game ball is pressed against the front inner peripheral wall 7651a by the centrifugal force. . As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651 whose rigidity is relatively lowered by the formation of the opening portion 7654 and wear at the periphery of the opening portion 7654.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 60, parts that are the same as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the passage member 8600 in the eighth embodiment has a front wall 7651 (front inner peripheral wall 7651a) and a rear wall 7652 (back outer peripheral wall 7652a) as in the seventh embodiment. And a side wall portion 7653 form a curved passage having a substantially rectangular cross section. In the present embodiment, the opening 864 is formed in the back outer peripheral wall 7652a. The opening 8564 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the projecting dimension L4 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a can be suppressed by causing a part of the gaming ball to protrude outside from the opening portion 8654. In this case, in the present embodiment, the movable range of the slide unit SL is set at a position overlapping with the range Rg which is a displacement trajectory of a part of the gaming ball projected from the opening 8564. Thus, the movable range of the slide unit SL can be expanded by effectively utilizing the space (range Rg) formed by reducing the projecting dimension L3 of the back outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. As a result, the rendering effect by the slide unit SL can be enhanced.

  In this case, in the passage member 8600, a first switch 8655 and a second switch 8656 for detecting passage of gaming balls are respectively disposed upstream and downstream of the opening portion 8654. Therefore, by monitoring the detection state by the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, at least the gaming ball is not present in the passage of the passage member 8600, and therefore, a part of the gaming ball is projected from the opening 8654 It can be understood that it is not in the state of being done.

  Therefore, based on the detection results of the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, the slide unit SL is limited to the range Rg only while it is determined that at least a part of the gaming ball is not projected from the opening 8654. By controlling so as to be displaced to the overlapping position, the interference between the slide unit SL and the game ball can be avoided.

<First control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 126, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a ninth embodiment. In the first control example, the over winning effect is displayed when the gaming ball over wins the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the player has won an over-winning during the jackpot game, so that the player can easily understand the gaming machine.

  In addition, you may display the information which shows the number of the game balls which carried out the over prize as an over prize production | presentation. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine where the player can easily grasp the number of game balls for which the over-winning is achieved. In addition, the effect may be varied according to the number of game balls for which the over prize has been won. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of game balls for which the over-winning is achieved, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, as the over winning effect, the over winning effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is easily displayed in response to the progress of the round in the big hit game. That is, according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the selection ratio of the over winning effect is configured to be different. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest even if the jackpot game takes a long time.

  In the first control example, a character string indicating right strike (right strike right strike right strike) is configured to be displayed circumferentially. As a result, even when the display screen (the sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to preferably indicate (inform) that the game state in which the right-handed game is to be performed.

  It is also possible to display a message indicating right strike and output a voice indicating a right strike (for example, a voice saying "Please hit right"). As a result, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to preferably indicate (inform) that the game state is to hit the right.

  In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decoration surface 523 b which is the back side of the display surface 523 a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 so that the LED blinks in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523 a. Configured.

  Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversely operated and the display surface 523 a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can not be visually recognized, the state of the blinking display of the sub symbol is grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. Can provide an easy-to-understand game machine for the player.

  In the first control example, a symbol is displayed across the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. It was configured to change the display position of the symbol according to being displaced. Thus, effects can be provided by effectively utilizing the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the player's interest can be improved. In addition, even if the third liquid crystal display device 523 is in a state in which a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 can not be viewed, effects can be suitably displayed.

  In the first control example, when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven (slided) up and down (that is, when the display area becomes vertically long), they are driven horizontally (slide) The display angle and the display coordinates of the image data are corrected in the case where the display area is horizontally long). Thus, effects can be provided by effectively utilizing the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the player's interest can be improved.

  First, with reference to FIG. 62 (a), data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described.

  In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are configured to perform display based on one image data. Specifically, using the image data represented by the coordinates of (0, 0) to (X, Y3), the image data of the region of (0, 0) to (X, Y1) corresponds to that of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The image data of the area from (0, Y1) to (X, Y2) displayed on the upper display surface 523a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image of the area from (0, Y2) to (X, Y3) Data is displayed on the lower display surface 523 a 2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

  FIG. 62 (b) is a schematic view showing the contents of effects at the time when the push effect is started. In the push effect, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slidingly moved to the proximity position, and a button with the character "PUSH" drawn on the lower display surface 523a2 is Is displayed. With the button displayed, pressing the frame button 22 causes the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 to slide up and down, and the display position of the symbol is changed according to the slide movement. An effect is started (see FIG. 63 to FIG. 65).

  Next, the effect display in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, effect display using the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (upper display surface 523a1, lower display surface 523a2) and the third symbol display device 81 provided on the slide member 520 is executed. Specifically, with respect to the third symbol display device 81, the upper display surface 523a1 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is upward (upward in the viewpoint of FIG. 63) and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display 523 is downward. The display area used for effect display is enlarged by sliding it in a downward direction (at the viewpoint in FIG. 63), and a symbol (in FIG. 63, a symbol representing a "fish") is enlarged using the enlarged display area. An effect display is performed that causes the number of symbols to increase.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to display various aspects of symbols in the display area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a diagram showing a display area in a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 completely covers the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), in this state, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slidingly moved so that the upper display surface 523a1 lowers the lower half of the symbol. Display control is performed so that the display surface 523a2 is displayed.

  Even in such a case, the display data displayed on each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 diverts the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide display data for the sub liquid crystal display device, and the data amount can be reduced.

  In this control example, although the configuration in which the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered by the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is used, other configurations may be used. For example, the display is performed on the third symbol display device Even if the display area in which information on the game to be played (for example, the display of the number of held memories or the display of abnormality) is displayed, it can be viewed even if the sub liquid crystal display device 523 moves to any position. Good.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 starts slide movement from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 63 (b). FIG. 63B shows a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is started from the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is started, the upper display surface 523a1 slides in the upper direction (up in the viewpoint of FIG. 63 (b)), The display surface 523a2 slides in a downward direction (downward direction in FIG. 63B). On the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 which are slide-moved, the same display items (upper half and lower half of the symbol) as shown in FIG. 63 (a) are displayed. This can be realized by moving the display position of the display object in accordance with the movement amount of each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2).

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is exposed between the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2. In the third symbol display device 81, the display of a symbol corresponding to the upper half of the display object displayed on the lower display surface 523a2, the lower half of the display object displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the third symbol display A symbol displayed on the display surface of the device 81 is displayed, and from the front side (visible side), the lower display surface 523a2 (the symbol in the lower figure), the upper display surface 523a1 (the upper symbol), the third symbol display device 81 Are displayed in the order of the display surface (middle symbol).

  In the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), since most of three symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol) are displayed in an overlapping state, it is clear which symbol is displayed to the player. It is a difficult condition to make In this state, since each symbol is superimposed so that the symbol (middle symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is most difficult to see, what symbol appears last to the player The effect can be executed while expecting the game, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored early in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64A and 64B, a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further progresses from the state of FIG. 63B will be described. FIG. 64 (a) shows a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), and FIG. 64 (b) shows a state from FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 advanced further.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), as the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 progresses, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are separated, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 By gradually exposing the surface, the entire display area is gradually enlarged. Also in this state, on the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 which are slide-moved, the same display objects (upper and lower halves of the symbol) as in FIG. 63A are displayed.

  Then, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, each symbol is displayed such that the overlap of the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol gradually decreases. With such a configuration, display of display data corresponding to a specific display (displayed from the state of FIG. 63 (a)) for display of the upper display 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2 It is only necessary to execute control for moving the position in accordance with the slide movement of each display surface, so that the load of display control can be reduced.

  In addition, the effect display for gradually reducing the overlapping of the symbols is simply fixed by simply moving the display surface (the upper display 523a1, the lower display surface 523a2, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) to execute. There is an effect that the sense of discomfort given to the player can be suppressed more than the case of executing on the display surface.

  In this case, the timing at which each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) slides is made different, or the speed at which the slide moves is changed, and the display surface of each display surface is changed. It is good to execute display control. This has the effect that the rendering effect can be further enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b), a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further progresses from the state of FIG. 64 (b) will be described. FIG. 65 (a) shows a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 65 (b) shows the state from FIG. 65 (a). It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 advanced further.

  By sliding the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to the position shown in FIG. 65 (a), a part of the aspect indicating the numeral attached to the middle symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. start. Further, when the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 progresses and the state of FIG. 65 (b) is reached, the upper symbol, the middle symbol and the lower symbol are displayed completely (each display surface is separated maximally) It will slide to the position). In this state, it is possible for the player to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the display effect of this time by the player visually recognizing the aspect indicating the number attached to the middle symbol.

  In this control example, when a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol, the effects shown in FIG. 63 to FIG. 65 are executed. You may use it other than that. For example, after displaying in the third symbol that the special symbol has won the jackpot, it is used for a technology (so-called, probability change promotion effect) that uses an effect display to indicate whether the current jackpot is usually a big hit or a definite change big hit. It is good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, display contents in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated will be described. FIG. 66 (a) is a view showing an aspect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 abut in the vertical direction, and FIG. 66 (b) is a diagram showing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in the left and right direction. It is a figure which shows the aspect in the case of contact | abutting in a direction.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 66A to the state shown in FIG. 66B, the display position of the display data of the display object displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is By correcting the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display device 523 according to the rotation angle, it is possible to display the same display mode as that before the rotation. Also in this case, the display data displayed on each display surface is the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so there is no need to separately provide display data and the amount of data can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to

  Next, the inverting operation of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, as described above, the slide member 520 is configured to be reversible, and the display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) described above is provided on one surface side, and the other surface side is provided. Is provided with a decorative surface (upper decorative surface 523b1, lower decorative surface 523b2).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67 to FIG. 68, an effect mode in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed at a position covering the front side of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 67 (a) shows a state in which the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed from the front side, and FIG. 67 (b) shows that the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is the back surface. It is the figure which showed the state which started facing the side (state which the decoration surface started facing the front side). The sub liquid crystal display device 523 hides most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side, and the main effect is switched to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 instead of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. Under the lower display surface 523a2, a decorative symbol Z is displayed to indicate that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. On the decorative surface 523b2 on the back side of the lower display surface 523a2, with the decorative symbol Z on the front side The sub LED 290 is disposed at the coincident position. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a state in which the upper liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 face the front side. The upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are combined (parallelly connected (arranged in line)) by flipping to form an apple pattern so that the character "CHANCE" is formed. It is configured. In addition, the lower surface of the apple is decorated with corrugations, and four LEDs are arranged at the tip. Among them, the lowermost LED disposed on the lower decorative surface 523b2 is configured by the sub LED 290. FIG. 68 (a) shows a state in which the sub LED 290 is turned off, and FIG. 68 (b) shows a state in which the sub LED is turned on.

  With this configuration, even if the sub liquid crystal display device 520 is reversed and the display surface can not be viewed, the player can be notified that the special symbol is changing, and the player is confused. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a description will be given of the right-handed notification mode which is a suggestion mode of the launch position of the gaming ball during the jackpot game. FIG. 69A shows a right-handed notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the upper display surface 523a1 during the jackpot game. The characters "right-handed" are displayed in a curved shape of three circles (ring shape), and during the jackpot game, these characters are respectively rotated to the right and displayed. In this control example, in the variable winning device 65, the game ball flowing down the right side (right flow path) of the third symbol display device 81 flows down the left side (left flow path) of the third symbol display device 81 The game ball is disposed at a position where it is easier to win than the ball (lower right side of the game area). In this way, the player normally operates the steering wheel so as to have a left-handed launch intensity for playing the game by causing the game ball to pass through the left channel and winning at the first starting opening 64 during normal times. The ball is fired, but during the jackpot game, the game is played by operating the handle so as to have a firing strength at which the gaming ball passes through the right channel.

  Here, by displaying the right-handed notification mode, it is reported that the steering wheel is operated with the firing intensity at which the game ball passes the right-side channel, and the right-handed channel is turned by the right-handed character turning right. The position (direction) of and the turning direction of the handle are notified at the same time.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (b), when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides in the big hit game and moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 to hide the third symbol display device 81. The right-handed notification mode is displayed on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1. Further, FIG. 69C is a view showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated in the right direction. In this case, it is displayed at the lower right of the upper display surface 523a1 (no change to the actual display position in FIG. 69 (b)). Also in this case, the right-handed operation can be correctly notified without changing the direction of the right-handed character display and the rotation display direction of the characters.

  As described above, in the present control example, the right-handed character display is rotated and displayed in a ring shape, so that even if the displayed surface is rotated, notification is made about the correct position without changing the display mode. Can. Therefore, the load of display control processing can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data can be reduced as compared with the case where various types of right-handed notification modes are prepared.

  In the present control example, the right-handed display mode is displayed as characters, but it is also possible to rotate a symbol of an arrow configured in a ring shape or a symbol imitating a game ball. Furthermore, a symbol imitating a handle for varying the launch intensity of the gaming ball may be rotated and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, a modification of the right-handed notification mode in the present control example will be described. FIG. 147 is a view showing a modification of the right-handed notification mode. In this modification, it is changed in the point by which the arrow pattern curved in the right direction is added by 3 ring shape on the back side of the character display of right-handed character display.

  FIG. 147 (a) is a diagram showing a display area of the right-handed notification mode. The right-handed notification mode is displayed in a ring-shaped display area. This display area is divided into three areas at intervals of 120 degrees from the center, and is composed of a first area α, a second area β, and a third area γ. In the first area α, an arrow symbol curved to the right is an area displayed by turning right, and in the second area β and the third area γ, the characters “right-handed” follow the ring shape. And is displayed curved. The second area β and the third area γ are set in a layer above the arrow pattern that is rotationally displayed, and the arrow patterns that are rotationally displayed are displayed in the second area β and the third area γ. It is configured not to be. Also, three arrow symbols are set, and when one arrow symbol moves to the back of the second area β, the next arrow symbol moves to the first area α and is displayed. There is. The position of the layer in each area is configured to be changeable, and is set variably according to the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

  FIG. 147 (a) shows a display mode when the right-handed notification mode is displayed on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1, and the layer of right-handed character display in the layer of the first area α is below the arrow pattern. It is set. Therefore, in the first area α, an arrow symbol is displayed, and a right-handed character is not displayed. FIG. 147 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees rightward. In this case, the layer of the character display of the third area β is set below the layer of the arrow pattern, and the layer of the character display of the first area α is set to the layer above the arrow pattern.

  By configuring in this manner, an arrow symbol pointing to the right side is always displayed in the upper direction of the gaming machine 10, and it is possible to notify the player of the correct right channel position. In this modification, the position at which the arrow is displayed is changed by changing the setting of the layer, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation coordinates of the right-handed notification mode are variably set (the right-handed notification mode is It may be configured to be variable by rotating in accordance with the amount of rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523.

  Next, details for setting the effects described in FIG. 63 to FIG. 65 will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slidingly moved, an effect of correcting the display position of the symbol in accordance with the amount of slidingly moved is performed.

  Specifically, based on the amount by which the upper display surface 523a1 is slid in response to the upper display surface 523a1 being varied upward from FIG. 70 (a) to FIG. 70 (b), the symbol 2 The display coordinates of (upper symbol) are corrected upward.

  Further, in response to the lower display surface 523a2 being changed downward, the display coordinates of the symbol 3 (the lower design) are corrected downward based on the amount of sliding movement of the lower display surface 523a2.

  As described above, by changing the display coordinates of each symbol according to the amount of sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the symbols expand as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides. An effect can be displayed.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Control Example
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 28), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 44) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, to the first special symbol execution area 203a and the second winning opening 640 corresponding to the winning on the first winning opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) The second special symbol execution area 203b corresponding to the prize winning is provided respectively, and in each of these areas, according to the timing of entering the first winning opening 64a or the second winning opening 64b, the first hit Respective values of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. In addition, in the RAM 203, a common drawing execution area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reservation areas (retention first to fourth areas) is provided. In each of these areas, the sphere is either left or right. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing when it passes through the normal start port (through gate) 67 of the second.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol 1 holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table When it matches with the value of the jackpot random number set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first hit random number table is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol, and high probability (special symbol special probability of being a big hit from low probability) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. The first random number table 202a for high probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a for low probability of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is any of "0 to 9" It is determined whether there is any, and if it is any of “0 to 9”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "9", and if it is "9", it is determined that it is a big hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit classification counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol 1 hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that makes the big win of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that causes the special symbol to go out, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that makes a big win for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The displayed mode is that of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, when there is a low probability of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, there is one random number that will be a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number “0” is for low probability Is stored in the first random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1, so the probability of becoming a big symbol for a special symbol is "1/400".

  On the other hand, at the time of the high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 10, so the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/40".

  Note that the duplicate value is a random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table for low probability time, and a random number value that is a big win that is stored in the first random number table for high probability time. You may set the random number value which becomes each big hit so that it may not become. If there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random number value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally win a jackpot. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), by changing the random number value to be the jackpot, the jackpot of the special symbol Because it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of “0 to 29” is “jackpot A”. Also, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of "30 to 99" is "jackpot B". In the present control example, two types of jackpots are used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Moreover, you may be comprised so that a different big hit classification may be selected even if it is the value of the same 1st contact classification counter C2 with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol. By configuring in this manner, for example, when the jackpot with the second special symbol is performed, by setting the jackpot type in which the number of rounds is executed is larger, the player with the hit with the second special symbol is made more to the player. It can be expected. Therefore, the hit in the high probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the convenience of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can strongly feel that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengaging displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach is generated, the final stop symbol stops at other than the reach symbol. Two stop (rendering) patterns are selected, for example, a range of 90 to 99, and a "completely out of range" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the special symbol 1 holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the area 203a. It is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the second winning opening 64.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into high probability for special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and according to the table, a range of random number values set for each type of stoppage of deviation Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time to the first winning opening 64, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 for low probability Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A so-called short time deviation, a long time deviation, and a rough display mode such as normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 93) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 72A) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, various kinds of "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time use)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach" various types are defined as a deviation pattern for disengaging As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot A, various "normal reach" and various "super reach" are defined. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type). Although not shown, the variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the audio lamp control device 113, and further detailed variation corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol per random symbol table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the ordinary symbol When it agrees with the value of the random number which is set by the per random number table, it is determined that the symbol is normal. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit of normal symbol from the low probability (of normal symbol) It is divided into two types, one for the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers for making a big hit included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (c), at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240 while the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 24. Therefore, the probability that the symbol will normally hit is “1/10”.

  If the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is obtained. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) As the symbol of "o" is lighted and displayed, the electric role piece 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the motorized prize 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is "0.2 seconds × 1 time The release time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that normally hit the symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be hit is 200. Therefore, the probability that the symbol is normally hit is "1 / 1.2".

  When the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is obtained. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) As the symbol of "o" is lighted and displayed, the electric role object 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened "one second x 2 times". As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the normal symbol's low probability, and further, it accompanies the second winning opening 640 Since the release period of the motorized accessory 640 a becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit or not from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the motorized prize 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is only "one second × twice". Although it is open, the open time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  Second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown).

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control apparatus 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 72A is a view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. There is.

  Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (a). FIG. 73 (a) schematically shows the contents of the first random number table 202a. As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73 (a)) is a table in which the value of the random number serving as the jackpot of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  In this first hit random number table 202a, a big hit judgment value (big hit judgment value at the time of low probability) and a special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol for judging whether or not the big hit of the special symbol at the low probability of the special symbol. A jackpot determination value (jacket judgment value at high probability) for determining whether or not the jackpot is determined is provided, and the number of judgment values (random numbers) to be each jackpot is different. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol by changing the number of judgment values (random numbers) to be the jackpot.

  Next, contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73 (b) schematically shows the content of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 73 (b)) is set so that jackpot A and jackpot B can be selected. Specifically, the value "0 to 49" of the first collision type counter C2 is set as the judgment value of the jackpot A, and "50 to 99" is set as the judgment value of the jackpot B.

  Here, as described above, the "big hit A" is configured to allow the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 (ie, the lottery of whether or not to be in the definite change state) In the "big hit B", it is impossible (or difficult) to pass through the probability variation switch 65a5 (ie, the lottery of whether or not to be a probability variation state is not executed).

  Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (c). FIG. 73C schematically shows the contents of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 73 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 73 (c), when the low probability of the normal symbol (in the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28 In the case of, it is determined to be a hit of an ordinary symbol. In addition, as above-mentioned, when it is judged that it is a hit of a normal symbol, the symbol of "○" lights up as a stop symbol (second symbol) after the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device (not shown) is finished. While being displayed, the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74A) is a data table used to determine the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern, and the display pattern is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 74 (b)) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 74 (c)); At least a deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 74 (d)) is defined. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the fluctuation pattern table etc. in time saving game state etc. are set besides this.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 74 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

  Specifically, “0 to 50” is the variation pattern of various types of normal reach (30 seconds), and “51 to 179” is the variety of special reach (90 seconds) for the variation patterns of various types of super reach (60 seconds). For the fluctuation pattern of), "180 to 198" are respectively set as the determination values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern for which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired is set as a big hit It is selected from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 74C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the (normal) deviation pattern table 202d2 for disconnection. The off (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202 d 2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non reach) or out of reach (common in reach) from the stop type selection table not shown is a stop type It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", outreach is set.

  Here, if the variation pattern type is completely out of the range, a relatively short variation (7 seconds) of variation time and a long variation (10 seconds) of variation time are set. “0 to 98” is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  In addition, for outreach, “0 to 149” for various outreach normal reach (30 seconds), “150 to 197” for outfall super reach (60 seconds), outlier special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out in the normal gaming state, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the type of stop and acquires it from the (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2 for out-of-classification Based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the out-of-range (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2.

  FIG. 74C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the out-of-order (probable variation) change pattern selection table 202d3. The disconnection (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol to be disconnected when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d3 is different from the above-described deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2 in the value of the set fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete removal is determined If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the outreach is determined.

  As described above, when the game is in the probability variation gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation at the time of the definite change becomes long and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, the game is postponed during the probability change gaming state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player feels bored.

  Referring back to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. FIG. 72 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, residual ball flag 203n, residual ball It has at least a timer 203p, a probability variation effective flag 203q, a probability variation effective timer 203r, an ejection number counter 203s, a time counter 25t, an indication flag 203u, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, the first winning opening 64 The values of the first random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 acquired based on the winning are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data includes four holding areas (the first holding area). Among the vacant areas of the area to the reserved fourth area), the areas with the smallest area number (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas (special figure 2 holding first area to fourth area) in the same manner as the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. It is a storage area for the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol), and the first winning opening 64 (first special symbol) corresponds to the second winning opening 640 (for the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a described above). The second special symbol) is different only in that it is changed, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth Among the vacant areas of the area (area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserve areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 suspension ball storage area 203a. The shift process is performed to pack the data in the area 1 into a small reserved area of area number 1. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of the first winning opening 64 (start winning). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases to 1 at maximum value 1 each time It is added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 85).

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is a variation display (third symbol) of the second special symbol (second symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the second winning opening 640 (start winning). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 suspension ball number counter 203 e is set to zero, and every time the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and the number of suspension balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 to 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 85).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) or the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the first special symbol) The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the holding ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 85 and S405 and S411 in FIG. 87). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is changed. is there.

  The voice lamp control device 113 controls the main control device by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of pending balls of the variable display which is suspended at 110. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the number of balls stored in the actual variable display has deviated, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the holding ball number symbol (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding ball number notified by the display holding ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the number of holding balls of the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball at the normal starting opening 67 (waiting number ) Is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 every time the ball passes the normal starting opening 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 89).

  When the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of suspension display of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S705 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, when the ball passes the normal starting opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 90) : No).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether the current gaming state is a probability change gaming state (probability change gaming state). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability change gaming state, and when it is off, it indicates that the low probability gaming state (including the time saving gaming state). In this control example, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when a probability variation setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S1303 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. In the initialized state, it is set to be off, and when a normal power-off occurs, the state immediately before the power-off is backed up.

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined depending on whether or not the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1512 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, it is set to off based on the probability change flag 203g being set to on. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up at the time of power-off, and is set to a state immediately before power-off at the time of recovery (at power-on). Also, in the initialized state, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability change switch 65a5 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that it has passed, the probability change setting flag It may be configured to formally turn on 203h and return. In this case, it can be determined whether the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i described later has a value larger than 0 or not. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the gaming shop side by determining the injustice where only the probability change setting flag 203h is rewritten to ON and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation pass counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65a5 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds with jackpot A in this control example). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the gaming balls that have won the first variable winning hole 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation pass counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s described later. When passing through the probability variation switch 65a5, the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated (see S1511 in FIG. 98). In addition, after the process of determining whether the number of gaming balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the process is reset to “0”, which is an initial value (see S1611 in FIG. 99). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203 j is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65 a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, one is added and updated one by one based on detection that the gaming ball has passed the detection switch 65a1 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable winning device 65 (see S1503 in FIG. 98). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings on the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged items (total value of the number-of-discharges counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) is one. After it is determined whether or not it is determined, the initial value "0" is reset. The value of the winning number counter 203 j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting a time during which the flow path solenoid (probable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the channel solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds at the jackpot A, and the channel solenoid 65k is turned ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13 rounds for jackpot B It is set. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data of 13 rounds for the big hit A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the big hit B (see S1202 in FIG. 95) . On the other hand, in the process of S1509 of the winning process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, one is decremented and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to be off. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is initialized to 0 when it is initialized. As described above, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow channel solenoid 65k, it is possible to control winning of the probability change switch 65a5 according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203 m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present control example, a sound of “seeing liquid crystal”) for attracting the player's attention. In the present control example, a notification counter 203m corresponding to one second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (the variable winning device 65 has 10 balls or 30 seconds have elapsed). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by one in the process of S1402 of the notification process (see FIG. 97) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203 m becoming 0, a notification command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is set. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, the above-described processing for outputting the voice is executed.

  By configuring in this manner, a voice of "seeing the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the thirteenth round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Watch 81. Here, although details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl's character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to urge the player to view the third symbol display device 81. The letters of "notice" which is the notification are displayed. In the 13th round, since the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, if the player pays attention to the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Therefore, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow passage solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65 in order to keep the expectation that the probability variation gaming state is given until the end of the big hit game. Informing effects that make it difficult to see are performed. However, when the 12th round is over, there is a possibility that the player may look at the switching member 65h during interval display, so it is informed that the third symbol display device 81 should be watched by voice during the interval period. Informing effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be drawn to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In this control example, the notification is made to show the third symbol display device 81 to divert the player's attention from the switching member 65h. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By notifying the device 65 to hold the player's hand, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, not only the third symbol display device 81 but also the notification of seeing the decoration lamp 34 etc. to the player may be configured to divert the player's attention. Furthermore, the player may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during the 12 rounds and giving a notification prompting the user to read by a mobile phone. In the present control example, the effect of diverting attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h is finished. As a result, it is possible to suppress a defect in which it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is performed by the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203 n is a flag indicating that the open / close door 65 f 1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203 n is set to ON, it indicates that the open / close door 65 f 1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203 n to ON, a remaining ball timer 203 p described later is incremented by one and updated (see S 1605 in FIG. 99). The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time after the open / close door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Is a counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203p is a time required for the game balls to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the preset one round is finished and the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether has elapsed. In this control example, the time required for the game balls discharged in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p in advance. It is set as. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) of the remaining ball timer 203p, it is determined whether the number of winning on the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharge thereof ( S1607 of FIG. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that effect. Therefore, it can be early notified that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is left in the variable winning device 65 illegally, and an impact or the like is given at the start timing of 13 rounds, and the game ball is reached to the switching member 65h earlier than actually, In addition, it is possible to suppress the fraud which causes the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65a5.

  It should be noted that if the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65a5. The configuration may not be set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability change gaming state is provided illegally.

  When the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5 after the passage solenoid 65k is turned off, the probability variation effective flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is validated. When the probability variation effective flag 203 q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that has finally won a prize to the specific winning opening 65 a to pass the probability variation switch 65 a 5 based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65 k is on. Indicates that the time has not passed. That is, it indicates that it is a period during which the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65a5.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203q described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by this probability variation effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine a period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65a5. In this control example, the time required for the game ball having entered the specified winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 is one second. The upper limit value of the probability variation effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and thereafter, even if it passes the probability variation switch 65a5, it is determined to be incorrect and it is not determined to be passage.

  In this way, the switching member 65h is made to vary illegally, and the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, or the game ball is pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65a5, and the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraudulent detection that the magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The number-of-discharges counter 203 s is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65 e 4 (not shown) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1611 in FIG. 99).

  The time saving counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times of fluctuation of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. At this time, the counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the big hit game. That is, in this control example, when it is not set to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game, it shifts to 100 time saving gaming states.

  In the flag flag 203u, winning information that is a big hit when transitioning to a probability variation gaming state is acquired, and winning information that is already on hold (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b In the information), it is a flag indicating that winning information becoming a big hit A (that is, there is a possibility of transition to the probability variation gaming state) is stored. In the predictive processing (refer to FIG. 88), this sign flag 203u is a fluctuation based on the winning information when winning information is obtained which becomes a big hit when shifting to the probability variation gaming state (S507 in FIG. 88: Yes) When it is determined that there is a possibility that the game is in the probability variation gaming state (ie, there is winning information that becomes a big hit A by then) when S is started (S508 in FIG. 88: Yes), it is set to on Ru. Then, a winning information information command indicating that the indication flag 203 u is turned on is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S 511 in FIG. 88). Then, in the ending process (see FIG. 96) executed at the end of the jackpot game, when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (ie, when transitioning to the probability change gaming state) (see S1304 in FIG. 96), Set to off. Although illustration is omitted, in the ending process (FIG. 96), when it is determined that the jackpot game has ended based on the winning information where the predictive flag 203u is turned on (that is, the jackpot game of the jackpot A is executed The predictive flag 203 u is set to OFF also when the transition to the probability change gaming state is not made.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 91) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, a frame button 22, and other units 228 (sliding motor 311, rotating motor 431, reversing motor 531). , The sub LED 290, the clock generator (CLK) 900, etc. are connected.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The slide motor 311 is a motor for sliding the display surface 523a, which is the upper display surface 523a1 which is the sub liquid crystal display device 523, in parallel to the game machine to move the display surface 523a. The rotation motor 431 is a motor for rotating the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in parallel with the gaming machine 10, and is constituted by a stepping motor. The reversing motor 531 is configured of a stepping motor which is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 about an axis parallel to the gaming machine 10. The reversing motor 531 is provided with a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and a motor for rotating (reversing) the lower display surface 523a2. The upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface are provided. 523a2 can be independently rotated. The reversing motor 531 is a motor for independently rotating the upper display surface 521a1 and the lower display surface 531a2 so that the display area faces the front and the display area faces the back. It is.

  The sub LED 290 is disposed on the decorative surface 523b1 formed on the back side of the upper display surface 523a1, and the decorative symbol Z (displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the upper display surface 523a1 is reversed) It is configured to change to a symbol for informing the player that the special symbol is in change and to blink the fact that the special symbol is in change to notify the player.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

  The clock generation device 900 is a device that outputs a clock signal that changes every 100 ms period to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The clock generation device 900 is a device for supplying a synchronization signal for controlling the blinking of the sub LED 290 and the decorative pattern Z at the same timing by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and moved to a position overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the sub LED 290 is blinked to 0 in synchronization with the decorative symbol Z being displayed. It is possible to inform the player that the special symbol is in motion and to suppress confusion of the player by displaying the character display.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, an over pay table 222b, an ending table 222c, a sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222d, and various other things necessary for game control. Data and programs are stored.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, fluctuation patterns of types (out, reach out, various types of reach, etc.) of each fluctuation pattern are respectively set to counter values for fluctuation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various types of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The over prize table 222 b is a table for selecting an over prize effect to be executed when the game ball over-wins the specific prize port 65 a of the variable prize device 65.

  Here, the details of the over pay table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the over pay table 222b. The over prize table 222b is a table used to select an over prize effect in the jackpot game, and as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the over prize table 222b includes a hit over prize table 222b1 and an indication over prize table 222b2 and a loose over winning table 222b3 are provided.

  The hit over winning table 222b1 is a table used when there is winning information that will be a big hit among the held winning information. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the winning over prize table 222b1, effect contents to be selected as the over winning effect are defined corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f, and the definition different depending on the number of rounds It has become.

  Specifically, in the case where the number of rounds is 1 to 10, if the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 149”, the effect content of the over winning effect is “absent” (that is, not executed), “ If it is 150 to 198 ", it will be a" bubble ", and if it is" 199 ", it will be a" fish school ".

  "Fish school" is selected as the effect content of the over winning effect because it is only when using the over winning prize table 222b1 (that is, when there is winning information that will be a big hit among the pending winning information) By displaying the effect of “fish group” as the over-winning effect, it can be suggested (notified) that there is winning information that is a big hit among the winning information held for the player.

  On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15 R, if the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 99”, the effect content of the over winning effect is “absent” (that is, not executed), “100 to 189” If it is, it will become "a bubble", and if it is "190-199", it will become a "fish school." In this manner, the jackpot game is configured by being configured to be more likely to display the over-winning effect indicating that the expectation for holding the jackpot winning information to be held is high in response to the progress in the round in the jackpot game. Even if it becomes a long time, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the prediction over winning table 222b2, there is winning information that will be a big hit if it shifts to the probability variation gaming state among the pending winning information, the probability variation gaming state by the time the variation based on the held winning information is started It is a table used when there is a possibility of transition to (ie, when it is not determined that the jackpot will be made thereafter, but is likely to be the jackpot).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 149" when the number of rounds is 1 to 10, the effect content of the over winning effect is "No (Ie, not executed), and if it is "150 to 199", it becomes "foam".

  On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15 R, if the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 99”, the effect content of the over winning effect is “absent” (that is, not executed), “100 to 199” If it is, it will be a "bubble".

  The out-of-over winning table 222b3 is a table used when there is no winning information to be a big hit among the pending winning information.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), when the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 179" when the number of rounds is 1 to 10, the effect content of the over winning effect is "No (Ie, not executed), and if it is "180 to 199", it becomes "foam".

  On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15 R, if the value of the effect counter 223 f is “0 to 159”, the effect content of the over winning effect is “absent” (that is, not executed), “160 to 199” If it is, it will be a "bubble".

  As described above, the out-of-over winning table 222b3 is configured such that “bubble” is less likely to be selected as over-winning effect than the predictive over winning table 222b2. As a result, when "bubble" is displayed as the over-winning effect, it is possible to make the player expect to be a big hit after that, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In this control example, one of the three types of "nothing", "bubble", or "fish school" is selected as the over-winning effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to select from four types, or may be selected from two types. Further, the effect content may be configured so as not to be selected as “absent” (that is, not executed), and the over winning effect may be displayed each time the over winning is performed. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to understand that the over-winning has been achieved.

  Furthermore, information indicating the number of game balls for which an over-winning is performed may be displayed as the over-winning effect. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine where the player can easily grasp the number of game balls for which the over-winning is achieved.

  In addition, the effect may be varied according to the number of game balls for which the over prize has been won. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of game balls for which the over-winning is achieved, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, the details of the ending table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ending table 222c. The ending table 222c is a table used to select the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game, and as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the ending table 222c includes a hitting ending table 222c1 and a prediction ending table 222c2. , And a release end table 222c3.

  The hit ending table 222c1 is a table used when there is winning information to be a big hit among the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the hit ending table 222c1 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the contents of the effect selected as the ending effect.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the value of the effect counter 223 g is “0 to 19”, “absent” (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect, In the case of "20 to 59", "foam" is selected, in the case of "60 to 99", "special foam" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 199", "fish school" is selected.

  In the prediction ending table 222 c 2, among the held prize information is a prize information that will be a big hit if it shifts to the probability change gaming state, and until the fluctuation based on the held prize information is started to the probability change gaming state It is a table used when there is a possibility of migration.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (c), the indication ending table 222c2 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect contents to be selected as the ending effect, and "bubble" as the over prize effect during the big hit game Is defined differently depending on the number of times (value of the bubble number counter 223j) is selected.

  Specifically, when the value of the foam frequency counter 223 j is “0 to 4”, if the value of the effect counter 223 g is “0 to 149”, the effect content of the ending effect is “absent” (ie, not executed) Is selected, and if "150 to 179", "foam" is selected, and if "180 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

  In addition, when the value of the foam frequency counter 223 j is “5 to 15”, if the value of the effect counter 223 g is “0 to 99”, the effect content of the ending effect is “absent” (that is, not executed). If "100 to 159", "foam" is selected, and if "160 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

  If the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 49" when the value of the bubble number counter 223j is "16 or more", the effect content of the ending effect is "absent" (that is, not executed), and " If it is 50 to 99 "," foam "is selected, and if it is" 100 to 199 "," special foam "is selected.

  As described above, when a large number of "foam" effects are displayed as the over-winning effect, an ending effect of "foam" or "special bubble" is easily selected, which indicates that there is a high possibility of becoming a big hit thereafter. It is configured as follows. As a result, despite the fact that many bubbles are selected (displayed) in the over-winning effect, the effect (for example, “absent”) with a low degree of expectation is selected in the ending effect, and the game of the player It is possible to prevent (suppress) the decline in motivation.

  Further, when the ending effect is selected using the sign ending table 222c2, the possibility of becoming a big hit after that is high. Therefore, when a lot of effects of "bubble" are displayed as over winning effect, it is easy to be selected an effect that indicates that there is a high possibility of becoming a big hit after that, that is, the reliability of the displayed effect is high It will be. As a result, as the number of over-winning game balls increases, it is possible to provide a benefit that the reliability of the ending effect is improved, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The deviation ending table 222c3 is a table used when there is no winning information which will be a big hit if it shifts to the probability variation gaming state in the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 77 (d), the value of the effect counter 223f and effect contents to be selected as the ending effect are defined in the deviation ending table 222c2.

  Specifically, if the value of the effect counter 223 g is “0 to 159”, “no” (ie, not executed) is selected for the effect content of the ending effect, and if it is “160 to 189”, “foam” Is selected, and if "190 to 199", "special foam" is selected.

  In this control example, only the sign ending table 222c2 is configured to change the definition of the value of the effect counter 223f and the contents of the effect according to the value of the bubble number counter 223j, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the same may be applied to the hitting end table 222c1 and the out-ending table 222c3.

  Next, the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222 d will be described with reference to FIG. The sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222 d is for driving various motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) for changing the upper display surface 523 a 1 and lower display surface 523 a 2 of the sub liquid crystal device 523. Information is stored.

  Specifically, a slide drive scenario 222d1 for driving a slide motor 431 for sliding the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 and a rotational movement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in the circumferential direction A rotation drive scenario 222 d 2 for driving the rotation motor 311 to be driven and a reverse drive scenario 222 d 3 for driving the reversing motor 531 for reversing the upper display surface 523 a 1 and the lower display surface 523 a 2 are provided.

  First, the contents of the slide drive scenario 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). The slide drive scenario 222 d 1 has a setting value (operating speed (pps), set to the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time since the fluctuation display is started. The number of operation steps and the operation direction are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), an operation for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the separated position to the adjacent position in response to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m (forward path Information related to the operation of Specifically, 50 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. The setting contents are output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431. The 100 steps mean the number of steps from the separated position to the close position.

  Here, with the operating speed of 50 pps, 50 pulses (steps) are output to the motor driver per second, so the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 perform 100 steps of operation (move from the separation position to the proximity position) It takes 100/50 seconds (two seconds) to do.

  Information related to an operation (operation on the return path) for slidingly displacing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separated position is stored corresponding to the value "5001" of the driving scenario counter 223m. There is. Specifically, 50 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. The setting contents are output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431.

  Here, since the drive scenario counter 223m is a counter that is incremented by 1 every 1 ms, the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is "5001" when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are close to each other. Five seconds after the slide displacement is started to the separated position (that is, three seconds after the slide displacement of two seconds is completed).

  Then, in response to the value "7001" of the driving scenario counter 223m, information of "END" indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored. The value of the driving scenario counter 223 m becomes “7001” two seconds after the operation for sliding the upper display surface 523 a 1 and the lower display surface 523 a 2 from the proximity position to the separation position is started (that is, When the slide displacement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 is completed from the close position to the separated position). By reading out the “END” data, it is determined that all operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Thus, in the slide drive scenario 222d1, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 slide from the separation position to the proximity position in two seconds, and then are maintained at the separation position for three seconds, and then again 2 It slides from the close position to the separated position in seconds.

  Next, the contents of the rotational drive scenario 222d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (c). Similarly, in the rotational drive scenario 222 d 2, a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time since the fluctuation display is started. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are at the first rotation position (upper display corresponding to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m. The upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 become left and right at the second rotation position (a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the first rotation position) from the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2) Information related to an operation (operation on the forward path) for rotating in the circumferential direction to the position) is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is defined as the operation speed, 360 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Third symbol display device 81 and sub liquid crystal display device 523 corresponding to the value “8001” of drive scenario counter 223 m and an operation for circumferentially rotating from the second rotation position to the first rotation position (return operation Information related to) is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is defined as the operation speed, 360 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Then, information of “END” indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the value “12001” of the driving scenario counter 223 m.

  Thus, in the rotational drive scenario 222 d 2, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotate from the first rotation position to the second rotation position over 3 seconds, and then the second rotation position for 5 seconds And then rotate from the second rotational position to the first position in three seconds again.

  Next, the contents of the reverse drive scenario 222 d 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (d). Similarly, in the reverse drive scenario 222 d 3, a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223 m indicating the elapsed time since the start of the fluctuation display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the normal position (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are on the front side, corresponding to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m. The information related to the operation (operation on the forward path) for inverting from the position where x) to the inverted position (the position where the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are on the front side) is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is defined as the operation speed, 180 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Information related to an operation (operation on the return path) for the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to invert again from the inversion position to the normal position is stored corresponding to the value “5001” of the driving scenario counter 223 m. Specifically, 90 pps is defined as the operation speed, 180 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Then, in response to the value "8001" of the driving scenario counter 223m, information of "END" indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored.

  Thus, in the reverse drive scenario 222 d 3, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 reverses from the normal position to the reverse position over 2 seconds, and then is maintained at the reverse position for 3 seconds, and then resumes normal from the reverse position over 2 seconds again. Invert to position.

  In this control example, in each drive scenario, the operation for one motor is defined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after driving the slide motor 431, a drive scenario may be defined in which the reversing motor 531 is driven. As a result, after the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slidingly displaced to the close position, the reverse operation can be performed. As a result, since the variation for driving (displacement) the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is increased, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Referring back to FIG. 75, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, stop Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, round number counter 223g, sub prize number counter 223h, fish school flag 223i, bubble number counter 223j, clock counter 223k, drive scenario counter 223m, drive scenario storage area 223n, other memory area 223z, Is at least provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a enables the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery result of the holding ball or the like before the start of the change.

  Similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) ), Which is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable effect pending in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the ball to first winning opening 64, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and is suspended. When the number of balls has been subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1907 in FIG. 102). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is used for displaying the number-of-holding-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223 b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display several symbols in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110, so Detailed explanation is omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2302 in FIG. 106). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2309 in FIG. 106). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223 f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198 used for advance notice effects and various lottery. Although illustration is omitted, the main processing (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated by one each time it is executed.

  The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of times a round in the jackpot game has been executed. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when the round number command is received from the main control unit 110 (see S2004 in FIG. 103), and is initialized to 0 when the ending command is received (see S2013 in FIG. 103). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when selecting the over winning effect in the over winning process (see FIG. 104). By varying the selection ratio of the over prize effect according to the value of the round number counter 223g, it is possible to select (display) the over prize effect at a different ratio for each round.

  The sub winning number counter 223h is a counter for determining the number of winnings to the specific winning opening 65a in the round of the big hit game. The sub winning number counter 223h is updated according to the winning number command received from the main control unit 110 (see S2007 in FIG. 103), and it is normal winning or over winning according to the value of the sub winning number counter 223 h. Is determined (see S2008 in FIG. 103). And although illustration is omitted, it is initialized to 0 when a new round number command is received.

  The fish school flag 223i is a flag for determining whether an effect of “fish school” is selected (displayed) in the over winning prize presentation. The fish school flag 223i is set on (see S2109 in FIG. 104) when the over-winning effect of “fish group” is selected in the over prize process (see FIG. 104), and is set off in the ending setting process (see FIG. 104). See S2210 in FIG. 105). In the ending setting process (see FIG. 105), when the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201 in FIG. 105: Yes), the continuous ending effect is selected as the ending effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect which suggests that the probability variation gaming state is given is repeatedly performed (displayed) and the player feels a sense of discomfort. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent a so-called falling edge in which the effect of "bubble" is displayed in the subsequent ending effect even though the effect of "fish school" is displayed as the over winning effect.

  The number-of-bubbles counter 223 j is a counter for determining the number of times the effect of “bubble” is selected as the over-winning effect. The number-of-bubbles counter 223 j is incremented by one (see S 2111 in FIG. 104) when the over-winning effect of “bubble” is selected in the over winning process (see FIG. 104), and is initialized to 0 in the ending setting process. (See S2211 in FIG. 105). The value of the bubble frequency counter 223 j is used when selecting an ending effect in the ending setting process (see FIG. 105).

  The clock counter 223k is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535, which is counted according to a clock change input from the clock generation device 900. The clock of the clock generation device 900 is also input to the display control device 114, and the effect can be synchronized with the display control device 114 by performing the effect based on the value of the clock counter 223k.

  Specifically, when it is determined in the lamp editing process (see FIG. 107) that the clock signal input from the clock generation device 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The effect timing is determined based on the value of the clock counter 223k. For example, when the value of the clock counter 223k becomes 1000, the lighting of the sub LED 290 and the display of the sub symbol are started, and when it becomes 1002, the sub LED 290 is extinguished and the sub symbol is not displayed. It is determined.

  The clock of the clock generation device 900 changes at a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock with a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223 k is incremented by one every 100 ms. Therefore, when it is desired to start the effect such as lighting of the LED after 2 seconds, it may be decided to start the effect from a value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when 1 is added when the value is 65535.

  The clock of the clock generator 900 is not limited to one that changes at a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock whose frequency is 5 Hz). For example, it may be changed in one cycle every 50 ms (that is, a clock with a frequency of 10 Hz) or may be changed every cycle in one 500 ms (that is, a clock with a 1 Hz frequency). When the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 is high (ie, the changing interval is short), the update interval of the clock counter 223k may be short. Thus, even when the clock frequency of the clock generation device 900 is increased, the clock counter 223k can be updated without losing the change.

  The driving scenario counter 223 m is a counter for determining the timing at which control of various driving motors is performed. The driving scenario counter 223m is set to 0 when the fluctuation pattern in which the driving scenario is set is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305 in FIG. 106: Yes). Then, in the sub liquid crystal drive processing (FIG. 108) executed every 1 ms, when a drive scenario is set in a drive scenario storage area 223n described later, one is added. Information for driving the motor set in the drive scenario storage area 223n is acquired according to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m, and various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are obtained. ) Is controlled.

  The driving scenario storage area 223 n is an area for storing the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222 d stored in the ROM 222 described above. In the drive scenario storage area 223m, when the fluctuation pattern in which the drive scenario is set is set in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305 in FIG. 106: Yes), the corresponding drive scenario 222d is stored. Ru. Based on the information of the drive scenario stored in the drive scenario storage area 223m, drive control of various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) is performed.

  The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 102) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 etc., and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 ( It is to control the fluctuation effect) and the notice effect.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 etc., and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 ( It is to control the fluctuation effect) and the notice effect.

  FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 and the clock generation device 900 are connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234 and the image controller 237 are bus lines on the output side of the input port 238 Connected via 240. The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 and a sub liquid crystal display device (LCD) 523 are connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing part of a boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is a NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game is started to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. When the entry of the ball is detected, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the fluctuation effect, is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

  Referring back to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear surface images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the rear surface A corresponding to the "town stage", the rear surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", the rear surface C corresponding to the "island stage") are all the third symbol display devices The image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed at 81, and is displayed by the image controller 237 so that the back image is horizontally scrolled from left to right on the third symbol display device 81. Drawing is done. Thereby, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection.

  The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 despite the fact that the fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the effect is not immediately started.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character with a rear symbol, a flannel, a helmet, etc. as a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a display clock counter 233m, a lighting clock storage area 233n, a drive data storage area 233p, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 223z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, jackpot related Display data tables corresponding to display related to commands, round effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short term of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short term of the normal symbol. The longer the short term of this normal symbol, the more chances of the ball passing through the normal entrance 67, so the chance to draw a normal symbol increases, and the chance to hit a normal symbol also increases. . Therefore, the chance to enter the second winning opening 640 becomes easier because the chance to open the electric winning combination becomes a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy to be drawn lottery of special symbols. Therefore, the longer the short term of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit can be given to the player, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game. it can. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, since the second winning opening 640 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters the ball, the electric winning combination of the normal symbol is opened and the ball is the second winning opening It becomes easy to get to 640 and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, it is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls or a state in which the number of balls is not reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get the jackpot of the special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the special symbol being held will be a big hit of the special symbol in the ending effect, the player can select the special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol being held. Since it can be recognized that the player wins the jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the jackpot of the special symbol will surely be made. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to a display related to a game information related command, a display related to a jackpot related command, a round effect and a demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In this control example, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 82 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 82).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 82, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 123 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111B). If the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111 (b)) and the simplified display setting process are performed so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. (See S2912 in FIG. 111 (b)). On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are performed.

  Further, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 123 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) in which the contents of the drawing instruction are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later (see FIG. 83) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process of one frame (FIG. 111 (b In step S2903), pointer update processing (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. As shown in FIG. 83, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 111 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 111B) is performed, the process is performed (see S5002 of FIG. 126).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The display clock counter 233 m is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535, which is counted according to a clock change input from the clock generation device 900. The clock of the clock generation device 900 is also input to the audio lamp control device 113, and effects are performed based on the value of the display clock counter 223m, thereby easily synchronizing the effect with the audio lamp control device 113. It can be done.

  Specifically, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111), when it is determined that the clock signal input from the clock generation device 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The clock of the clock generator 900 changes at a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223 k is incremented by one every 100 ms. Therefore, when it is desired to start the effect such as lighting of the LED after 2 seconds, it may be decided to start the effect from a value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when 1 is added when the value is 65535.

  Although the details will be described later, the output of the clock of the clock generation device 900 is started after the start-up process (see S2601 to S2606 of FIG. 109) of the display control device 114 is completed. Thus, after the start-up process of the display control device 114 which requires more time for processing than the audio lamp control device 113 is completed (that is, the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 is completed) And the output of the clock is started, so that the values of the clock counter (the clock counter 223k and the display clock counter 233m) can be accurately synchronized.

  The drive data storage area 233 p is an area for storing drive data for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 523 set by the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 80, the drive data storage area 233p has areas of a slide amount storage area 233p1, a rotation amount storage area 233p2, and a reverse amount storage area 233p3.

  The drive data storage area 233p is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 when the drive of various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) is set in the voice lamp control device 113. Drive data is set based on the reception of the drive data command (see S3017 in FIG. 112).

  Then, in the drawing correction process (see FIG. 125), the display coordinates, the display angle, and the like of the respective images constituting one sprite are corrected according to the drive data stored in the drive data storage area 233p. Thus, even when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid or rotated, suitable effects can be displayed.

  The demonstration display flag 233 y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that demonstration is in progress, and if it is off, it means that demonstration is not in progress. The demonstration display flag 233 y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S 4222 in FIG. 119), When another display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). This demonstration display flag 233y makes it possible to easily determine whether a demonstration effect is currently being performed.

  The finalized display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the finalized display effect is being executed. Here, the finalized display effect refers to an effect of stopping and displaying (finalized display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the finalized display flag 233z is on, it means that a static display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the static display effect is not on. The finalized display flag 233z is set to ON when the finalized display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), When another display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). It is possible to easily determine whether or not the current display effect is being performed by the finalized display flag 233z.

<About Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 84 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum (in this control example, When each reaches 299, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, the start winning process is executed in association with the winning (start winning) on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device is executed (S106), and the through associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed in the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a jackpot of special symbols, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbols (including during the jackpot game of the special symbols) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command (special drawing 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 93) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted values The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S270) A holding ball number command (special figure 1 holding ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Thereafter, the process of S213 is performed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B elapsed? It is determined whether or not it is (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is set (S215) . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the lottery of the special symbol line is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It will be. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 It is determined whether the jackpot A, the small jackpot, or the jackpot A.

  In addition, in this control example, when becoming big hit A, blue LED is lighted in 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B. Also, in the case of a small hit, the red LED is lit, and in the case of a small hit, the red LED and the green LED are lit. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display under execution is started in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (current lottery result) It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol (S216). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S216: Yes), based on the big hit type, set the open scenario of the specific winning opening (S217), then set the start of big hit A (such as 16 rounds The jackpot setting is executed (S218).

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). If it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "big hit of a special symbol" or "out of a special symbol" is made (judgement or rejection) and This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

  When the probability change flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the big hit of the special symbol based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability time The first lottery result of whether or not is obtained from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73 (c)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random numbers set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73 (c)). As described above, ten random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In addition, in this control example, although the determination value determined to be a big hit was made the same in the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, it is good also as not only it but a different random number value. By configuring in this manner, the random number value determined to be out of place in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the jackpot bias.

  Moreover, in this control example, the number of jackpot random number values is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but not limited to that, it is determined to be a jackpot for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random numbers may be set differently. In this way, by configuring, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol of the higher jackpot probability, the player Can be expected to have a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the hour and hour middle counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol, the first acquired in the process of S301. Based on the value of the per-random number counter C1 and the first per-random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 73 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. One of "9" is set as a random number value which becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per the first and the random number value which becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes), A jackpot display mode indicating the jackpot A is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A). Further, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type, the big hit type is set as the stop type. Next, a fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74 (a)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at the time of the jackpot (S307).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined detachment. Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of out-of-pocket is determined based on the current number of holding balls (S309). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Although not shown, variation pattern commands for notifying the determined variation patterns to the audio lamp control device 113 are generated. When this process is over, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and determines whether or not the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 has a winning (start winning), and the start winning is performed. Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing of the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 87, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a ball holding ball number command (special figure 1 ball holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 93) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as that of the processing of S401 to S406 is also performed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. The process is different from the other in that the process of holding the second special symbol is executed with respect to the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), after the process of S412, the prefetch process is executed (S413). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the prefetching process (S413) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (S413).

  In this pre-reading process (FIG. 88, S413), it is first determined whether there is a new winning on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), the process proceeds to S502.

  In the process of S502, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a definite change (S502). If the gaming state is a definite change (S502: Yes), the first hit random number table 202a has a high probability The lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if the gaming state is not definite (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the low probability of the first random number table 202a (S504). Move.

  In the process of S505, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S503 or S504 is a big hit (S505). If it is determined in the process of S505 that the lottery result is a jackpot (S505: Yes), a jackpot is indicated, a winning information command including the jackpot type is set (S506), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S505 that the lottery result is out of order (S505: No), then if the gaming state at the start of the change is a probability change gaming state, whether the lottery result will be a big hit or not It discriminates (S507).

  In the process of S507, even if the gaming state at the start of the change is the probability variation gaming state, if the lottery result is out (S507: No), a winning information command indicating the out is set (S508), the book End the process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S507, if the gaming state at the start of the change is a probability change gaming state, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S507: Yes), then it shifts to the positive change state at the start of the change. It is determined whether or not there is a possibility (S508). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning prize information during the change or the pending prize information has a jackpot information which is a jackpot to shift to a definite change state.

  In the process of S508, if there is no possibility of transition to the definite change state at the start of the change (ie, there is no winning information on the jackpot to change to the definite change gaming state) (S508: No), a prize showing an omission An information command is set (S509), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S508, if there is a possibility that it has shifted to the definite change state at the start of the change (that is, there is winning information on the jackpot to shift to the definite change gaming state) (S508: Yes), high probability The lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value for the low probability and the low probability (S520). Then, the indication flag 203u is set to ON (S511), which indicates that the indication flag 203u is ON, and a winning information command including each lottery result acquired in the processing of S520 is set (S512). Finish.

  Here, in this control example, it is not possible to determine whether or not the probability variation gaming state is provided until the gaming ball passes the probability variation switch 65a5 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the present control example, by executing the processing of S507 to S512, if there is winning information that will be a big hit that can pass through the probability variation switch 65a5, the lottery results for high probability and low probability will be It can be acquired and notified to the audio lamp control device 113. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can display an appropriate effect either in the case where the probability variation gaming state is given or in the case where the probability variation gaming state is not given.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device or the motorized role associated with the second winning opening 640 It is a process for controlling the opening time of a thing etc.

  In this normal symbol variation processing (FIG. 89, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening / closing control of the motorized role piece 640a attached to the first winning opening 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device. The middle part is included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not inside the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608).

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol (S 608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S 609). As a jackpot of special symbols, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbols (including during the jackpot game of the special symbols) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the second symbol random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second symbol per random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 73 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the second random number table 202c for probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 73 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol of "o" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is judged whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time state (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time state (S614: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. , And the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 640a is set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to the process of S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the motorized jack 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is 0 The setting is made for 2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the processing shifts to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S 618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time shortening state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S 622). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S 622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S 622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S 623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the process of S 618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device Is set as When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display on the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit-displayed) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (this time lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 89, S106) is the ordinary symbol It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized role object 640 a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the process of S625, the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is performed. The control is started, and the open / close control of the motorized part is continued until the open time and the open number set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 90, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holding times of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S703).

  Whether the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 92, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (one second in this control example) is performed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. Note that, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 93, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 93), first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 84) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 84), and if there is winning detection information, it corresponds to the winning ball number to the payout control device 111. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) and the start winning process (see FIG. 87) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 94) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 (S1005). In the motorized part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set in the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the opening / closing control of the motorized part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In addition, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device 37A, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86) ends. In the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86), the variation symbol being executed in 37B is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B stop display (lighting display).

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol change processing (see FIG. 89), the variation executed in the second symbol display device The display is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 89). ).

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1009: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 91 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the specific winning opening ( Large opening port) A process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 94, S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 85) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol in the process of S1103 (S1103: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1103 that the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). When it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (S1105). FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 95, S1105), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the opening scenario set (S1201). The opening operation of the flow passage solenoid (probability solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1201. Thereafter, this process ends. In the process of S1202, the operation of the flow passage solenoid 65k for each round and the operation of the open / close door 65f1 are set.

  Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1204), a round number command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1205), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is then determined whether it is the operation timing of the positive solenoid 65k (S1106). If it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probability changing solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the probability changing solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1107), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1106 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108). The ending timing of the ending effect is the starting timing of the ending effect when 15 rounds are finished and the open / close door 65f1 is closed and the waiting time (3 seconds in this control example) which is the ball discharging time has elapsed. It is determined as If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the probability changing solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1109), and the ending process is executed (S1110). Thereafter, this process ends. Although illustration is omitted, in the present control example, when one gaming ball passes the probability changing switch 65a5, the probability changing solenoid 65k is set to be off. However, in consideration of the case where the game ball does not pass through the probability changing switch 65a5 and the big hit game is ended, the probability changing solenoid 65k is set to be off just in the process of S1009.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 96, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 96, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the audio lamp control device 113 (S1301). It is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S1302). When it is determined in the process of S1302 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1302: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to be on (S1303), and this processing is ended. Although illustration is omitted, the probability change setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probability change flag 203g being set to on.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1302 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the present control example, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on at the end of the jackpot game, and if the probability change setting flag 203h is on, the probability change flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the gaming ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 and set the probability change. Thus, the player can be expected to shift to the probability variation gaming state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the game ball can pass during the big hit game to the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change game state is awarded after the big hit game, so whether the game ball passes to the probability change switch 65a5 also during the big hit game You can play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1401). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1401: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1402). The determination of the end timing of the 12th round is made in the 12th round when it is detected that 10 balls have been won or it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the twelfth round (S1402: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1402 that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1402: No), this process ends. Here, the counter for 2 seconds is set in S1403, so that the notification counter 203m becomes 0 within 3 seconds of the interval time which is the flash time after the 12 rounds are finished, and the sound of seeing the liquid crystal is It is output. Therefore, the channel solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but since the player can draw attention to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified, It can be suppressed that the jackpot type is identified to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting the probability change gaming state to be provided until the end of the jackpot game.

  In this control example, by providing the notification counter 203m, effects are drawn to draw attention to the liquid crystal across the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the present invention is not limited thereto. From the 12th round It may be performed continuously.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1401: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is decremented by one and updated (S1404). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m after update is 0 (S1405). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405: Yes), a notification command is set (S1406). Thereafter, this process ends. In response to the notification command, the audio lamp control device 113 performs setting of an audio output of "seeing liquid crystal".

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 97, S1111) is executed, a winning process is performed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 98, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1501). The round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is out of the round effective period (S1501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether it has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a is passed (S1502: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated, and the winning number command indicating the value of the updated winning number counter 203j is It sets (S1503). Thereafter, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not passed (S1502: No), the processing of S1504 is executed.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1506). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1507). Thereafter, the processing of S1508 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203 n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being blown after the open / close door 65 f 1 is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1504 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1505). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1505: Yes), the processing of S1506 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1505: No), the processing of S1508 is executed.

  In the process of S1508, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S1508). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1508: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by one and updated (S1509). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65a5 (S1510). If it is determined that the gaming ball has passed the probability variation passing switch 65e3 (S1510: Yes), the value of the probability variation passing counter 203i is updated by adding one (S1511). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on (S1512). Thereafter, the process of S1513 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1510 that the gaming ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65a5 (S1510: No), the process of S1513 is executed. In the process of S1513, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1513). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1514). The probability variation effective flag 203 q is set to on (S 1515). Thereafter, this process ends. Here, when the game ball remaining in the special channel 65e2 passes the probability variation switch 65a5 even after the switching member 65h is switched by setting the probability variation effective flag 203q to ON, the probability variation game Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1508 that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1508: No), it is determined whether the probability variation effective flag 203q is on (S1516). If the probability variation valid flag 203 q is off (S 1516: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203 q is on (S 1516: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation valid timer 203 r to update (S 1517). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation effective timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1518). If it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203 r is the upper limit value (S 1518: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203 q is set to OFF (S 1519). The probability variation effective timer 203r is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1520), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1518 that the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1518: No), the process of S1510 is executed.

  Thereby, if the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed the probability variation switch 65a5, so the probability variation gaming state can be set in consideration of the time of the ball swelling. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state being given by causing the probability variation switch 65a5 to pass the gaming ball illegally.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1113). Thereafter, this process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), processing is performed to monitor whether the probability changing switch 65a5 has been illegally passed.

  In the abnormality processing (FIG. 99, S1113), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1601). When it is out of the round effective period (S1601: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is within the round effective period (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1602). If it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602: Yes), the value of the ball exclusion counter 203s is incremented by one and updated (S1603). Thereafter, the process of S1604 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602: No), the processing of S1604 is executed.

  In the process of S1604, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203 n is off (S1604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by 1 and updated since it is in the period of the balling time (S1605). The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether the upper limit (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1606). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper limit value is determined (S1606: Yes), the number of discharged items (total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the number of winning numbers (value of the number-of-winnings counter 203j) It is determined (S1607).

  If it is determined that they match (S1607: Yes), the processing of S1609 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match (S1607: No), an error command is set (S1608). Thereafter, the processing of S1609 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the injustice in which the game ball is made to remain illegally in the variable winning device 65 and the probability changing switch 65a5 passes the game ball even if it is the big hit B.

  In the process of S1609, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1609), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1610). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are respectively reset to initial values (S1611), and then this process is ended.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 108, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 100, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is performed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1815 is performed (see FIG. 101) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S 1702). As described later with reference to FIG. 101, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1814 in FIG. 101), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing in S1815. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1815 is in progress can be determined according to the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1702: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1815 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. And from) it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is corrupted (S1703: Yes), and the process moves to S1704. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1817 after an instantaneous power failure occurs, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1702: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure and during the execution of the power-off process of S1817, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1704, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1706). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1708, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1817 is performed (see S1816 in FIG. 101). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1817 is executed, the process of S1708 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1817 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1709), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). The permission is set (S1711), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1708 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1704 through S1706 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), S1709, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1710, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). Then (S1711), it shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1709 is that, when the process of S1708 is reached via the processes of S1704 to S1706, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1704, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current S1801 process has been executed (S1801), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1813 without performing the process of S1802 to S1811. In the process of S1801, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (rendering) in S1802 to S1811. There is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S 1813 and the command determination process of S 1812 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1812 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the process of S1813 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set in the processes of S1803 to S1813 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1802 ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1804). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1805 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing monitors the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. Moreover, monitoring of the input whether the touch operation was performed with respect to the 3rd symbol display device 81 is also performed.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, the lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33, the lighting pattern of the sub LED 290, and the like are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Details of the lamp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1809, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1809 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S1810, the sub liquid crystal driving process is performed to drive the sub liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal) 523 (slide driving, rotational driving, and the like) (S1811). The details of the sub liquid crystal driving process (S1811) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the sub liquid crystal drive processing (S1811), command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1812). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to the process of S1813. In the process of S1813, the variable display setting process is executed (S1813). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variation display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1814). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1816), and the power-off process is executed (S1817). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1818), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1815) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1815: No), the process returns to S1801, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1815: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the command determination processing (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1812). This command determination process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the ball holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 102, S1812), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control apparatus 110 It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1901). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1903), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 106) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1907). And when the ball holding number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received ball holding number command is the special drawing 1 holding ball number command or the special drawing 2 holding ball number command. , The value contained in the command, ie, the value of special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of main controller 110 (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol), special symbol 2 of main controller 110 The value of the holding ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). Further, in the processing of S1908, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1908 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 holding ball number command or the special figure 2 holding ball number command, when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), or, the lottery of the special symbol line Since it is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when it is detected, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1908 every time a start winning is detected or each time a lottery of a special symbol is performed. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 Even if it deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when detecting start winnings or drawing special symbols. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e. In addition, when the processing of S1908 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is It is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1907, when the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1907: No), it is then determined whether a notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1909). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1909: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in the present control example, "look at liquid crystal") is selected, and a display command for notification is set. (S1910).

  Next, when it is determined in the process of S1909 that the notification command has not been received (S1909: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot related command has been received (S1911). If it is determined in the process of S1911 that the jackpot-related command has been received (S1911: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S1912), and the process shifts to the process of S1913. The details of the jackpot related processing (S1912) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1911 that a jackpot-related command has not been received, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1913.

  In the process of S1913, it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and a process according to the received command is executed (S1913), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed control device 114 The command is set to be sent to the

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot related processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related process (S1912). The jackpot related process (S1912) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 1812) that a jackpot related command has been received.

  In the jackpot related process, it is determined first whether an opening command has been received (S2001). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set (S2002), and this processing is ended. The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect that suggests the start of the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S2003). When it is determined in the process of S2003 that the round number command has been received (S2003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S2004). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223g (S2005), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2003 that the round number command has not been received (S2003: No), it is determined whether a winning number command has been received (S2006). If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is updated based on the received command, and the process proceeds to S2008.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether the value of the sub winning number counter 223h updated in the process of S2007 is greater than 10 (S2008). In the process of S2008, when the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is greater than 10 (S2008: Yes), more gaming balls than the predetermined number of winnings (10) in one round entered the specified winning opening 65a ( So-called over winning)). In this case, the over winning process is executed (S2009), and the process is ended. The details of the over winning process (S2009) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2008 that the value of the sub winning number counter 223h is 10 or less (S2008: No), a normal effect command is set to execute a normal winning effect, and the main effect command is set. End the process.

  If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2011).

  If it is determined in the process of S2011 that the ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), the ending setting process is executed (S2012), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S2013), and this process is ended. Do. The details of the ending setting process (S2012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S2011 that no ending command has been received (S2011: No), it is determined whether a V-passing command has been received (S2014).

  In the process of S2014, when it is determined that the V passage command has been received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 to execute an effect that suggests that the probability change gaming state is provided, A display V effect command is set (S2015), and this processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the over winning process (S2009) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing this over winning process (S2009). The over winning process (S2009) is a process performed in the above-described jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103) to execute an effect based on the over winning on the specific winning hole 65a.

  In the over winning process, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is obtained (S2101). Then, it is determined whether or not there is winning information to be hit in the winning information storage area 223a (S2103). If it is determined that there is winning information to be hit (S2103: Yes), the over winning effect is selected from the winning over prize table 222b1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the processing of S2101 (S2103) , And moves on to the process of S2107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information to be hit in the process of S2103 (S2103: No), it is then determined whether there is winning information including information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON. (S2104). If it is determined in the process of S2104 that there is winning information including information in which the indication flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: Yes), the indication over prize table 222b2 is over based on the value of the effect counter 223f. A winning effect is selected (S2105), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2107.

  If it is determined in the process of S2104 that there is no winning information including information in which the indication flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: No), the over-off winning table 222b3 is over based on the value of the effect counter 223f. A winning effect is selected (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107.

  In the process of S2107, a display over winning command indicating the over winning effect selected in the process of S2103, S2105 or S2106 is set (S2107), and the process proceeds to S2108.

  In the process of S2108, it is determined whether or not the selected over winning effect is "a fish school" (S2108). If it is determined that the selected over winning effect is "fish school" (S2108: Yes), the fish school flag 223i is set to ON (S2109), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2108 that the selected over-winning effect is not "fish school" (S2108: No), then it is determined whether or not the selected over-winning effect is "foam". (S2110). If it is determined that the selected over winning effect is "bubble" (S2110), the number-of-bubbles counter 223j is incremented by 1 (S2111), and the process is ended. In the process of S2111, the number of times “bubble” is selected in the over winning is stored, and when selecting the ending effect, the selection ratio of the ending effect is changed according to the number of times “foam” is selected (FIG. See 104).

  If it is determined in the process of S2110 that the selected over winning effect is not a "bubble" (S2110: No), this process is ended as it is.

  As described above, the over-winning effect displayed at the time of the over-winning is different depending on whether the winning information storage area 223a has information to be a big hit (that is, whether or not it is a big win thereafter). Is configured as. As a result, since the player performs the game in anticipation of the display of the over winning effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, an ending setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this ending setting process (S2012). The ending setting process (S2012) is a process executed in the above-described jackpot related process (see FIG. 103), and is a process for executing an effect at the end of the jackpot.

  In the ending setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201). If it is determined in the process of S2201 that the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), then, in the over prize game, an effect that suggests that a probability change gaming state is to be given is already executed (displayed) Since this is the case, the continuous ending effect is selected (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect which suggests that the probability variation gaming state is given is repeatedly performed (displayed) and the player feels a sense of discomfort.

  If it is determined in the process of S2201 that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), then the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S2203). Then, it is determined whether or not winning information to be hit is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204).

  In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the winning information to be hit is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: Yes), an ending effect is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f from the hitting end table 222c1. (S2205), the process proceeds to S2209.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2204, when it is determined that the winning information to be hit is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204: No), next, winning information including information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON. It is determined whether or not there is (S2206).

  If it is determined in the process of S2206 that there is winning information including information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: Yes), an effect is selected from the sign ending table 222c2 and the process moves to the process of S2209. Do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2206 that there is no winning information including information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: No), an effect is selected from the out-ending table 222c3 and the process of S2209 Transition to

  In the process of S2209, an effect command indicating the effect selected in the process of S2202, S2205, S2207 or S2208 is set (S2209), the fish school flag 223i is set off (S2210), and the value of the bubble number counter 223j is set. It sets to 0 (S2211), and ends this processing.

  As described above, the ending effect displayed at the end of the jackpot is different depending on whether the winning information storage area 223a includes the information for the jackpot (that is, whether or not the jackpot is subsequently the jackpot). Is configured as. As a result, since the player pays attention to the ending effect to execute the game, the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the variable display setting process (S1813) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1813). This variation display setting process (S 1813) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation presentation, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S2301: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S2306. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2302), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2303).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2304). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  When the process of S2304 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is a setting of a driving scenario in the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S2303 (S2305). If it is determined in the process of S2305 that there is a setting of the driving scenario (S2305: Yes), the corresponding driving scenario is stored from the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222d to the driving scenario storage area 223n (S2306). The counter 223m is set to 0 (S2307), and the process proceeds to the process of S2308.

  In the process of S2308, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2308). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S2308: No), since the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2308: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2309), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2310). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2311), and the process shifts to the processing of S2312. In the process of S2312, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S2312). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a lamp editing process (S1808) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this lamp editing process (S1808). This lamp editing process (S1808) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the same timing as the sub-symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114 Execute settings such as lighting of the sub LED whose lighting is controlled by.

  In the lamp editing process (FIG. 107, S1808), first, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generation device 900 has changed (S2401). If it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2401: No), the processing from S2402 to S2406 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S2407.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2401 that the clock signal has changed (S2401: Yes), the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S2402), and it is determined whether it is the fluctuation start timing (S2403). .

  If it is determined in the process of S 2403 that it is not the fluctuation start timing (S 2403: No), the process of S 2404 to S 2406 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S 2407.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S 2403 that it is the fluctuation start timing (S 2403: Yes), the value of the clock counter to be lit is determined based on the selected fluctuation time (S 2404). Then, the counter command indicating the value of the clock counter determined in the process of S2404 is set (S2405), the lighting data of the sub LED is set based on the determined value of the clock counter (S2406), and the process proceeds to S2407. Do.

  In the process of S2407, a process for lighting other lamps is performed, and the process ends.

  Although details will be described later, the sound lamp control device 113 and the sub display device 114 execute lighting of the sub LED and display of the sub symbol based on the value of the counter updated based on the same clock signal. I am trying to do it. Thereby, control can be performed to light the sub LED at the same timing as the sub symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the sub liquid crystal drive processing (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the sub liquid crystal driving process (S1811). The sub liquid crystal drive processing (S 1811) is processing executed in the main processing (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and drives the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (slide drive, It is processing for causing rotation drive etc.).

  In the sub liquid crystal drive processing (FIG. 108, S1811), first, it is determined whether or not a drive scenario is stored in the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2501). If it is determined in the process of S2501 that the drive scenario is not stored, it is not the timing for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, the process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2501 that the drive scenario is stored (S2501: Yes), the drive scenario counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S2502).

  Then, in the drive scenario stored in the drive scenario storage area, it is determined whether there is motor drive data corresponding to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m after addition (S2503). If it is determined in the process of S2503 that there is motor drive data (S2503: Yes), various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are driven based on the motor drive data. In order to cause the motor drive data to be set, the motor drive data is set based on the information of the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2504), the drive data command is set (S2505), and this processing is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S2503 that there is no motor drive data (S2503), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506). Specifically, if the information of the driving scenario storage area corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is "END", it is determined that it is the end timing of the driving scenario.

  If it is determined in the process of S2506 that it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506: Yes), the information of the drive scenario storage area 223n is cleared (S2507), and this process is finished.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2506 that it is not the end timing of the drive scenario, the present process is ended as it is.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device in First Control Example
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 126. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in this control example. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2601), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2702). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2701.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2702, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2703). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after performing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S2601 in FIG. 109) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) (S2705), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2601) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 110, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2701 is a boot program that executes the boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2702. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2703 to S2705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2701. After repeating the process of S2702 and the process of S2702 multiple times, the processes of S2703 to S2705 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in this control example, a case was described in which a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2703 to S2705 without performing the processes of S2701 and S2702. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2603). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2603, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2604). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2604, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S2605). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 123A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S4602 in FIG. 123A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111 (b)), it is simplified so that the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are power-on images, are drawn. The command determination process (see S2908 in FIG. 111B) and the simple display setting process (see S2909 in FIG. 111B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first winning opening 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is from the main control unit 110 by the voice lamp control device If it is via 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power variation image (not shown) is displayed immediately during the variation presentation period to perform a simple variation presentation Can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2605, the interrupt permission is set (S2606), and the start of clock output is set to the clock generation device 900 (S2607). Thus, the clock output is started after the display control device 114 has risen. Since the audio lamp control device 113 starts up earlier than the display control device 114, the clock output is started after both of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have risen. Can be accurately synchronized.

  After that, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2606, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111 (a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 111 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2801), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 111 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interruption process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2901: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2902) is performed, and then a display setting process (S2903) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S2902), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2903), the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2902) or the like. Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 93.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2904). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2903) or the simple display setting processing (S2909) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2905). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

  Next, in order to correct the drawing content, the drawing correction process is executed (S2906). Details of the drawing correction process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2907). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2904), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2905) The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2908). As a counter updated by the process of S2908, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance) The stop type table corresponding to the eye and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generation device 900 has changed (S2909). If it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2909: Yes), the display clock counter is incremented by one (S2910), and the V interrupt processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2909: No), the V interrupt processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2911) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2912) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2902) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 112, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3001), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S3001: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2903) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S3002). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S3003).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3004), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3004: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S3005), the process returns to the process of S3001.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S3005) will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 113 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It sets to buffer 233 d (S3101).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S3101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in this control example, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3101 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S3101 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3103). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3103. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3104), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3105). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3106), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3105, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3101. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3 102. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3104, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3004 that there is no display variation pattern command (S3004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display suspension type command among the unprocessed commands (S3006), If there is a display variation type command (S3006: Yes), the stop type command processing is executed (S3007), and the process returns to S3001.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (b). FIG. 113 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S3201), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S3202).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S3203), and ends this type-of-stop command processing and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S3202 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2904), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S3202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3203, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this control example, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3201, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S3202.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present control example, in fact, if it is "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3006 that there is no display type command for suspension (S3006: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3008), the jackpot If there is a related command, display jackpot related command processing is executed (S3009), and the process returns to the processing of S3001.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117, the above-mentioned display jackpot related command process (S3009) which is one process of the command determination process (S2902, see FIG. 112) executed by MPU 231 of display control device 114. Details will be described. First, FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the display jackpot related command processing for display.

  In this display jackpot related command processing, as shown in FIG. 114, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S3301), and if there is a display opening command (S3301) S3301: Yes) Execute opening command processing (S3302), and shift to the processing of S3303.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S3302) will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 115 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 3401). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S3403). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3404). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3405), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S3301 that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3303), and display is performed. If there is a command for the number of rounds (S3303: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233 d is set (S 3501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3505), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S3303 that there is no display round number command (S3303: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3305), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S3305: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process proceeds to S3307.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S3306) will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (a). FIG. 116 (a) is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S3601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3605), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

  Here, the description returns to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3305 that there is no display ending command (S3305: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display normal winning presentation command among the unprocessed commands (S3307), If there is a normal winning presentation effect display command (S3307: Yes), the normal winning presentation effect command processing is executed (S3308), and the process proceeds to S3309.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 116 (b), the details of the normal winning effect effect command process (S3308) will be described. FIG. 116 (b) is a flowchart showing normal winning effect command processing. This normal winning a prize production command processing is something which executes the processing which corresponds to the usual winning a prize production command for display which is received from sound lamp control control equipment 113.

  In the normal winning effect command processing, first, the normal winning display data table corresponding to the display mode of the normal winning effect indicated by the display normal winning effect command is determined, and the determined normal winning display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. From the display data table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3702).

  Next, based on the normal winning display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3701, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3705), the normal winning command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3307 that there is no display normal winning presentation command (S3307: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display over prize presentation command among the unprocessed commands (S3309) If there is a display over prize effect command (S3309: Yes), a normal over effect command process is executed (S3310), and the process proceeds to S3311.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 117 (a), the details of the over winning prize effect command process (S3310) will be described. FIG. 117 (a) is a flow chart showing the over winning prize effect command processing. The over winning prize effect command process is a process corresponding to the over winning prize effect command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the over prize effect command process, first, the over prize effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the over prize effect indicated by the over prize effect command for display is determined, and the determined over prize effect display data table is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802).

  Next, based on the over winning prize effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3805), the over winning prize effect command processing ends, and the processing returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3309 that there is no over prize for display effect command (S3309: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a V effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3311) If there is a display V effect command (S3311: Yes), V effect command processing is executed (S3312), and the display jackpot related command processing is ended.

  Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S3312) will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b). FIG. 117 (b) is a flowchart showing V-effect command processing. The V effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display V effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of V effect indicated by the V effect command for display is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. , And the display data table buffer 233d (S3901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e (S 3902).

  Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3805), the V-effect command processing ends, and the processing returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to the description of FIG. In the process of S3311, when it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S3311: No), the display jackpot related command process is ended as it is.

  Referring back to FIG. 112, the description will be continued. In the process of S3008, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S3008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3010), the back image change command If there is (S3010: Yes), the back image change command processing is executed (S3011), and the process returns to S3001.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S3009) will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (a). FIG. 118 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4603) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set to on (S4001) . Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S4002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S4001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4002. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S4002 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3010 that there is no rear image change command (S3010: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S3010). For example (S3010: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3011), and the process returns to S3001.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S3011) will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). FIG. 118 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S4101). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4101, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4102, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in S4102, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3012 that there is no error command (S3012: No), then it is determined whether there is a counter command among the unprocessed commands (S3014).

  If it is determined in the process of S3014 that there is a counter command (S3014: Yes), the lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the received command (S3015), and the process returns to the process of S3001. The display control device 114 is notified of the timing of lighting the sub LED 290 in the audio lamp control device 113 by the counter command. The lighting clock storage area 223 n is updated based on the notified timing at which the sub LED 290 is lit. Based on the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 223n and the display clock counter 223m, a sub symbol is set in a sub symbol setting process (see FIG. 122) described later. Thus, based on the display clock counter 223m, which is a counter synchronized with the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed such that the sub symbol is displayed at the same timing as the sub LED 290 is lit in the audio lamp control device 113. Since it can do, lighting of sub LED 290 and display of a sub pattern can be synchronized and produced.

  In the process of S3014, when it is determined that there is no counter command (S3014: No), next, it is determined whether there is a drive data command (S3016), and if there is a drive data command (S3016: Yes) The drive data storage area 223p is updated based on the command (S3017), and the process proceeds to S3001.

  Since the display content (for example, the display angle etc.) can be changed according to the information driven by the sub liquid crystal display device 523 updated by the process of S3017, a suitable effect can be performed.

  If it is determined in the process of S3016 that there is no drive data command (S3016: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3018), and the process returns to the process of S3001.

  In the process of S3001 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes ), The processing of S3002 to S3013, S3019 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3001 to S3013, S3019 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in S3001 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this process is performed. The command determination process ends.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2911) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary to display the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 113 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 113 (b)) which are processes corresponding to each command are executed. With regard to the command of, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 113A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3101. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3102, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2903) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 112, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S4201: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S4202 to S4204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S4202), S4203 to S4204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S4203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S4204).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 120, the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S4301).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Determine various parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4204), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S4203 (S4203: No), the process proceeds to S4205.

  At S4205, pointer update processing is executed (S4205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 4401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S4401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information Is determined (S4402). As a result, if it is the End information (S4402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S4403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S4405), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4406), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S4402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S4206 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and the display coordinate position for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as zoom ratio and rotation angle.

  Next, in order to set the display of the sub symbol, the sub symbol setting process is executed (S4207). Here, the details of the sub symbol setting process (S4207) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The sub symbol setting process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 or the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to display the sub symbol in synchronization with the sub LED 290 whose lighting control is performed in the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the sub symbol setting process (S4207), first, it is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation period (S4501). In the process of S4501, when it is determined that it is not a fluctuation period (S4501: No), since it is not the timing to display the sub symbol displayed corresponding to the fluctuation, the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a fluctuation period (S4501), it is then determined whether the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502). Specifically, it is determined whether the information corresponding to the value of the display clock counter 233m among the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 233n is lighting information.

  If it is determined in the process of S4502 that the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502: Yes), the drawing contents acquired in the process of S4206 in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) Among them, the information on the sub symbol is set to light (changed), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the value of the display clock counter 233m is not the value of the lighting timing (S4502: No), the drawing content acquired in the process of S4206 in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) Among the above, the information on the sub symbol is set to be turned off (changed), and this processing is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. When the process of S4207 is completed, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4208), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S4209). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4209: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4209: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to stop the variable display and stop the display, so it is confirmed whether the finalized display flag 233z is on or not. (S4210).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is off (S4210: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed on the display data table buffer 233d. (S4311), and then write null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4212). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4213), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4214). Then, after setting the decision display flag 233z indicating that the decision display effect is being performed in the on state (S4215), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing (S4216).

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4216 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2904), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S4216, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4210, if the finalized display flag 233z is not on but off (S4210: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4217). Then, if the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S4217: Yes), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data It is set in the table buffer 233 d (S 4218), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 4219). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4220). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4221), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that demonstration is being performed in the on state is set to on (S4222), this processing is ended, and the processing is returned to the V interrupt processing. .

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S4217, if the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4217: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is performed as it is End and return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2912) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 111B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simplified display setting process, the power-on-time fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect due to the power-on time fluctuation image ends A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display (not shown) in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2905) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 123 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: YES), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S4602) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S4601, that is, if it is off (S4601: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123 (b), the resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 123 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4701: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4702). In the process of S4702, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S4702 (S4702: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to S4703. Also, as a result of the process of S4701, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to S4703.

  In the process of S4703, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4703: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing of S4703, if all resident target image data has been transferred (S4703: Yes), the simplified image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing is ended. Accordingly, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2908 in FIG. 111B) and the simple display setting process (see S2909 in FIG. 111B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 93) are performed, drawing of an image in normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) (see S4601: No in FIG. 123A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, a normal image transfer setting process (S4603) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4205) of the display setting process (S2903) executed earlier is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802), and if it is transfer data information (S4802: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S4802 (S4802: No), the processes of S4803 and S4804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of the image data is completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4806).

  In the process of S4806, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S4806 (S4806: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4806: Yes), the process proceeds to S4807. Also, as a result of the process of S4805, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4807.

  In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4807: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4807: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S4809). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S4809: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S4810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4811). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4813.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S4813, when the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S4813, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The determination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4813 (S4813: Yes), the character ROM 234 does not need to transfer the image data to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4814). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4814, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233 j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and the sub of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, when the change of the back image is performed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing the normal-use image transfer process, the back image The image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the above can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, details of the above-mentioned drawing correction process (S2906) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this drawing correction process. The drawing correction process (S2906) is a process for correcting an effect to be displayed in response to driving of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

  In the drawing correction process, first, it is determined whether the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven (S4901). If it is determined in the process of S4901 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not driven (S4901: No), there is no need to correct the drawing content, so this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven (S4901: Yes), the process proceeds to S4902 in order to perform correction according to the drive state.

  In the process of S4902, it is determined whether the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slide-driven (S4902). If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slidingly driven (S4902: Yes), the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected according to the amount of movement being slid. (S4903), the processing proceeds to S4904. In the process of S4903, the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected to execute an effect such that the display positions of the symbols 1 to 3 are integrally changed in response to the driving of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (display) The player's interest can be improved.

  If it is determined that the slide drive is not performed in the process of S4902 (S4902: No), the process of S4903 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4904.

  In the process of S4904, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904). If it is determined in the process of S4904 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904: Yes), the display coordinates (and the display angles of all the images are displayed according to the amount of rotation being rotationally driven. ) Is corrected (S4905), and this processing ends.

  Since the display coordinates (and the display angle) of the image can be corrected according to the amount of rotation of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the processing of S4905, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, a suitable effect is displayed can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2907) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2904) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2905) (S4301). That is, in the processing of S4301, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2904), for each sprite, the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2905), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4302, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S4303). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 k is performed by inverting the value, that is, by setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 111B) is performed, it is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the first control example, the over winning effect is displayed when the gaming ball over wins the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the player has won an over-winning during the jackpot game, so that the player can easily understand the gaming machine.

  In addition, you may display the information which shows the number of the game balls which carried out the over prize as an over prize production | presentation. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming machine where the player can easily grasp the number of game balls for which the over-winning is achieved. In addition, the effect may be varied according to the number of game balls for which the over prize has been won. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of game balls for which the over-winning is achieved, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, as the over winning effect, the over winning effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is easily displayed in response to the progress of the round in the big hit game. That is, according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the selection ratio of the over winning effect is configured to be different. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest even if the jackpot game takes a long time.

  In the first control example, a character string indicating right strike (right strike right strike right strike) is configured to be displayed circumferentially. As a result, even when the display screen (the sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) is rotated, it is possible to preferably indicate (inform) that the game state in which the right-handed game is to be performed.

  It is also possible to display a message indicating right strike and output a voice indicating a right strike (for example, a voice saying "Please hit right"). As a result, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to preferably indicate (inform) that the game state is to hit the right.

  In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decoration surface 523 b which is the back side of the display surface 523 a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 so that the LED blinks in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523 a. Configured.

  Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversely operated and the display surface 523 a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can not be visually recognized, the state of the blinking display of the sub symbol is grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. Can provide an easy-to-understand game machine for the player.

  In the first control example, a symbol is displayed across the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. It was configured to change the display position of the symbol according to being displaced. Thus, effects can be provided by effectively utilizing the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the player's interest can be improved. In addition, even if the third liquid crystal display device 523 is in a state in which a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 can not be viewed, effects can be suitably displayed.

  In the first control example, when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven (slided) up and down (that is, when the display area becomes vertically long), they are driven horizontally (slide) The display angle and the display coordinates of the image data are corrected in the case where the display area is horizontally long). Thus, effects can be provided by effectively utilizing the display areas of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81, and the player's interest can be improved.

<On the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 137, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a tenth embodiment. In the first control example described above, the gaming machine has been described that displays an effect when the gaming ball is over-winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the game balls that are over-winning during the big hit game are stored in the area where the player can visually recognize, and according to the number of stored game balls, the ending effect of the big hit game It was configured to make the presentation contents variable. This makes it possible to pay attention to the number of gaming balls that are over-winning during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the first control example described above, the display screen (the sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device) is displayed by arranging character strings (right strike right strike right strike) suggesting a right strike in a circumferential shape. The gaming machine has been described that can suitably suggest that the gaming state in which a right-handed game is played even when 81) is rotated.

  On the other hand, in this control example, direction notification LEDs 295a to j for suggesting the gaming state (the direction in which the game ball is fired) are arranged circumferentially on the decoration surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The game state is indicated by the lighting pattern (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j arranged in a shape. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversely displayed, it is possible to suggest (inform) the gaming state by the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Furthermore, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is possible to suggest (notify) the gaming state without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j arranged in a circumferential shape.

  In this second control example, the game ball that has overwined the variable winning device 65 is changed so as to be stored in the area where the player can visually recognize, and the inside of the variable winning device 65 is over in the first control example. A distribution state 65c for distributing whether or not to store the winning game ball and a distribution motor 65c2 for driving the distribution member, and a gaming state on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 The difference is in that the direction notification LEDs 295a to j for suggesting (the direction in which the game ball is to be fired) are arranged circumferentially. In addition, the content of RAM 223 in audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the processing executed by MPU 201 of main control device 110, and the processing executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control processing 113 are partially modified. It differs in the point which The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 127 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 127, the present control example is different in that the inside of the variable winning device 65 in the first control example described above is changed, and the other points are the same.

  Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 128, the variable winning device 65 in the present control example, similarly to the first control example, opens and closes the opening and closing door 65f1 a predetermined number of times (for example, It is repeatedly executed 15 times (round). In each round, the open / close door 65f1 is opened until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds has elapsed or a predetermined number (10) balls are won).

  In each round, up to a predetermined number of winning game balls are discharged through the normal winning flow channel 65e1 in the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, gaming balls that have won a predetermined number (so-called, over winning gaming balls) are configured to flow over the over winning flow path 65e2 in the variable winning device 65.

  On the left side of the open / close door 65f1, an effect section is formed to execute effects with the game ball after winning the variable winning device 65. The details of this effect section will be described with reference to FIG. 128, but the game balls (hereinafter referred to as over winning) that have won more than 10 in each round game are distributed members 65c (see FIG. 128). The effect of whether to be guided to the storage channel 65e4 or not is executed. In this control example, when four or more balls are stored in the storage flow path 65 e 4 in each round, it is configured to indicate that a holding ball which is a hit is stored in the holding ball. As shown in FIG. 127, since the sorting member 65c and the storage channel 65e4 are disposed at positions where they can be viewed by the player, winning balls are paid out more than usual by winning over in the jackpot game. In addition to feeling of expectation, it is possible to enjoy the effect of whether or not the over-winning gaming ball is guided to the storage channel 65e4. Thus, the player's interest can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, details of the variable winning device 65 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 128 (a) is a rear view of the variable winning device 65 immediately after the start of each round. The specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 has a vertically long opening formed at a height allowing one ball to pass through the game ball, and the game ball entering the opening is to the back side of the game board 13 And a guiding path is formed. A guiding hole for guiding the gaming ball to the guiding path for causing the gaming ball to flow downstream is formed inside the specific winning hole 65a, and the guiding hole and the over winning flow path 65e3 described below or the normal winning combination It is formed in communication with the flow path 65e1. A detection switch 65a1 is attached to the guiding hole, and the gaming ball having entered the specified winning hole 65a is detected.

  A prize channel switching member 65b is disposed between the regular prize channel 65e1 and the over prize channel 65e3 so that the game balls can be divided into the regular prize channel 65e1 and the over prize channel 65e3. It is done. The winning channel switching member 65b is rotated upward by the over winning solenoid (not shown) so that the tip is directed horizontally (refer to FIG. 128 (b)) and is pivoted downward so that the tip is directed downward. It is configured to be rotatable in the state (see FIG. 128 (a)). When the over prize solenoid is turned on, the prize channel switching member 65b pivots upward (see FIG. 128 (b)), and when the over prize solenoid is turned off, the prize channel switching member 65b is downwardly moved. It is configured to rotate (see FIG. 128 (a)).

  The normal winning flow channel 65e1 is a flow channel for causing the gaming ball to flow vertically downward in a state where the winning flow channel switching member 65b is turned downward (see FIG. 128 (a)), and for discharging the gaming ball It is configured to communicate with the discharge flow path 65e2. In the discharge flow path 65e2, a discharge switch 65a3 for detecting a game ball flowing down is disposed. This regular winning channel 65e1 is a channel through which gaming balls for 10 balls in each round flow down, and the gaming ball which has flowed down is a channel through which the probability change switch 65a5 is disposed through the discharge channel 65e2. After being induced to be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. The gaming ball after being detected by the detection switch 65a1 is treated as an out ball in the same manner as the gaming ball after entering the out port. By being treated as an out ball, it is also possible to store gaming balls and use them for effects.

  In the over winning channel 65e3, in a state in which the winning channel switching member 65b is rotated upward and is in communication with the over winning channel 65e3 (see FIG. 128 (b)), the gaming channel is allowed to flow leftward It is. The over prize winning channel 65e3 is a channel through which an over winning gaming ball winning over 10 balls in each round flows down. At the end of the over winning passage 65e3, an over winning detection switch 65a2 (photo sensor) is arranged to detect the passage of the over winning gaming ball. On the downstream side of the over prize winning channel 65e3, a sorting member 65c for sorting the over winning gaming balls into a storage channel 65e4 and a discharging channel 65e2 is disposed.

  The distributing member 65c is formed of a disk-shaped outer shape, and has a thickness (15 mm) slightly larger than one game ball. At the center of the distributing member 65c, a shaft portion formed to protrude to the back side is formed, and it is configured to be rotatable to the left and right by a stepping motor. In the distributing member 65c, a concave portion in which the game ball can enter one ball is formed as a storage area 65c1. In the storage area 65c1, an opening is formed on the side surface of the distribution member 65c, and a game ball flowing down from the over prize winning channel 65e3 is configured to be able to enter the ball. The storage area 65c1 is configured such that when the game ball enters the ball, the entire game ball is contained within the storage area 65c1 and is configured so that rotation does not occur even when the sorting member 65c rotates. It is done. The sorting member 65c is always at the storage area 65c1 in the direction of 45 degrees in the upper right, which is a position where it can receive gaming balls flowing down from the over prize flow channel 65e3 in the leader area 65c1 (see FIG. 128A). It is stopped in the state where the opening is facing, and it rotates in either left or right direction with the gaming ball stored in the storage area 65c1 two seconds after the game ball is detected by the over prize detection switch 65a2 It is configured. The direction to be rotated is determined based on the result of determination of acceptance balls stored in the storage ball. Although the details will be described later, when a big hit ball is stored, a lottery is executed with a probability of 1/2 each time an over-winning game ball is generated, and it is determined that the lottery is won. The dividing member 65c pivots in the left direction, and the gaming ball stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the storage flow path 65e4. The upper limit is 6 balls, and when 6 balls are stored in the storage area 65i, the distributing member 65c rotates in the right direction with the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1. The game ball stored in the discharge flow path 65e2 is made to flow down. If the lottery with the probability of 1/2 described above occurs, the distributing member 65c rotates in the right direction, and the gaming balls in the storage area 65c1 are guided to the discharge flow path 65e2 (sorting) Be done.

  In the case where the big hold ball is not stored in the hold ball in the hold (when the big hold ball is stored when passing the probability change switch 65a5 (including before passing the probability change switch 65a5) The sorting member 65c is pivoted to the left and right in the same manner as in the case where the big hit ball is stored, and it is divided by a probability of 1/3. When the ball that passes the switch 65a5 is stored as a big hit storage ball, the over winning ball is guided to the storage area 65i up to a maximum of 4 balls, and for the game balls further than that, the sorting member 65c is right The game ball stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the discharge flow path 65e2 by rotating in the direction.

  As described above, the storage flow path 65 e 4 is formed with a storage area 65 i capable of storing up to six over winning prize balls at the end portion. The storage area 65i is formed at a height capable of storing game balls in two tiers, and is formed with a depth (15 mm) slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls. The bottom surface of the storage area 65i is gently inclined to the right, and a storage switching member 65g for discharging game balls in the storage area 65i is attached to the downstream end. A shaft portion 65g1 formed on one end side of the storage switching member 65g is rotatably fixed to the upper wall of the storage area 65i, and is rotated upward by a solenoid (not shown) (FIG. 128 (b And the state in which the tip end portion is directed downward downward and which is pivoted downward. In this control example, at the start of the big hit game, it is turned downward, and based on the ending start timing that is the end timing of the big hit game, it is turned upward (rotated in the upper right direction) and the storage area The game balls in 65i are configured to be discharged to the storage discharge flow path 65e6. A storage discharge switch 65a4 (such as a photo sensor) capable of detecting gaming balls discharged from the storage area 65i is disposed in the upstream portion (entrance portion) of the storage discharge flow path 65e6. In addition, the gaming ball discharged from the storage area 65i is configured not to be guided by the probability changing switch 65a5.

  Although not shown, a switching member 65h and a positive change switch 65a5, which are changed by the positive variable solenoid 65k, are provided on the downstream side of the discharge flow passage 65e2. When the probability changing solenoid 65k is on, the flowing game ball can pass the probability changing switch 65a5, and when the probability changing solenoid 65k is off, the flowed game ball can not pass (or is difficult) the probability changing switch 65a5. It is configured to be

  As described above, in the variable winning device 65 in the present control example, the winning passage switching member 65b is such that the game ball passes through the normal winning passage 65e1 until reaching the ten entering balls determined in each round. Is controlled. Therefore, it is possible to divide the flow path between the over-winning gaming ball and the gaming ball before over-winning, and to accurately detect the over-winning gaming ball.

  In this control example, the game board 13 is hollowed out in front of the effect section (the distributing member 65c and the storage channel 65e4, the storage area 65i), and is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine 10 There is.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the over winning occurs in each round, the distributing member 65c is rotated, and an effect of whether the gaming ball is guided to the storage area 65i is executed. Therefore, it can be informed that the over winning has been made. The player can visually recognize that the game ball has entered the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c, confirms the over winning, and enjoys the effect of rotating the distribution member 65c in either left or right direction. it can. It is also possible to predict the success or failure judgment result of the holding balls stored in the hold by the number of gaming balls guided to the storage area 65i during the big hit game. In this control example, when the holding ball which is a big hit is stored in the holding ball, the gaming ball is guided to the storage area 65i with high probability, so the distribution area 65i is used by the distributing member 65c. The judgment result in the holding ball can be predicted also by the frequency of being distributed to Therefore, the game ball is distributed to the storage area 65i, so that the holding ball which is the big hit is stored in the holding ball, and the big hit is continuously executed in a short time even after the big hit game. You can have expectations for Furthermore, in the present control example, the maximum number of gaming balls guided to the storage area 65i is variably set according to the judgment result stored in the hold, so the success / failure judgment result can be early also from the guided number Can be predicted. Furthermore, when five or more balls are stored in the storage area 65i, it can be recognized that the holding ball that will be a big hit is stored in the holding, and the determination result is notified to the player at an early stage to make it interesting. It can be improved.

  In this control example, it is configured to notify that a holding ball that is a big hit with five or more balls is stored, but the number etc. may be set appropriately. In addition, it may be set appropriately in the lottery probability whether or not to distribute to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c. Furthermore, the lottery probability of distribution may be changed according to the history of the occurrence ratio of over winning (in the previous jackpot game). Furthermore, the maximum number may be changed based on the determination result in the holding ball guided to the storage area 65i according to the occurrence ratio of over winning (in the previous jackpot game). In this case, at the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, the third symbol display device 81 provides character or voice guidance such as "If three game balls are stored in the storage area 65i, they will be put on hold!" Thus, the player can easily play the game. Furthermore, although the distributing member 65c is configured to distribute the game balls by turning, the invention is not limited thereto, and it may be configured to distribute in a seesaw shape. In addition, all over winning balls are guided to the storage area 65i, and the number of over winning balls stored is used to report the determination result within the holding ball, or used for promoting effects during a big hit game from normal symbols to definite symbols You may In this case, an effect such as configuring so as to give a promotion chance as many as the number of over winning balls during the jackpot game can be considered.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the second control example, the distribution motor 65c2 is provided, the direction notification LED 295 is provided, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example described above. The other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The distribution motor 65 c 2 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is drive-controlled based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Specifically, when the jackpot game is started, the drive of the distribution motor 65c2 is started, and the distribution member 65c is rotationally driven. As described above, the distributing motor 65c2 is alternately driven counterclockwise and clockwise at regular intervals (2-second intervals), and the storage area 65c1 of the distributing member 65c has flowed down the over pay channel 65e3. A position rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees (a position where the gaming ball in storage area 65c1 flows down to storage channel 65e4) around a position where it can receive gaming balls, and a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise (a position ( The game balls in the storage area 65c1 are alternately moved to the out flow path 65e5) (see FIG. 128).

  The direction notification LED 295 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp output device 113, and lighting control is performed based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The direction notification LED 295 is disposed on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and a total of 10 pieces of five pieces 295f to 295j are provided on the upper decorative surface 523b1 and five pieces 295a to 295e on the lower decorative surface 523b2. (See FIG. 132). As described above, when the gaming state is the gaming state in which the right hitting is performed, it is suggested that the lighting order of the direction notification LED 295 is controlled to turn clockwise (clockwise) and the right hitting is performed. (Notified) If the gaming state is a game state in which the player strikes left, it is controlled to be turned on / off so that the lighting order of the direction LED 295 is left-handed (counterclockwise), suggesting that the player strikes left (Notified).

  Next, contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (a). FIG. 130 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. The RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 in the second control example is different from the RAM 203 of the first control example in that a stored number counter 203 v and a stored upper limit number 203 w are added. The other points are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The stored number counter 203v is a counter for counting the number of game balls distributed to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c among the game balls for which the over prize is won. The value of the stored number counter 203v is incremented by one each time the distribution motor is set as the distribution flow path 65e4 in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133) (see FIG. 133). 5111). Then, in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133), when the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow channel 65e4, it is determined whether the game ball is to be distributed to the storage area exceeding the storage upper limit number. Referenced to. Although not shown, the value of the stored number counter 203v is initialized to 0 at the end of the jackpot game.

  The storage upper limit number 203 w is a value for determining the upper limit of the number of gaming balls distributed to the storage area 65 i by the distributing member 65 c among the gaming balls over winning. The value of the storage upper limit number 203 w is set according to the pending winning information (that is, according to the degree of expectation to be a big hit thereafter) in the sorting motor setting process (see FIG. 134) (FIG. See S5103, S5105, and S5106). Then, when the value of the stored number counter 203v is smaller than the stored upper limit number 203w, it is permitted that the distribution destination is determined to be the stored flow channel 65e4. Although illustration is omitted, the value of the storage upper limit number 203 w is initialized to 0 at the end of the big hit game.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 130 (b). FIG. 130 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, a specific winning opening state 223p and a stored number counter 223r are added to the RAM 223 in the first control example. The other configuration is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state, the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, indicating that the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a, and the specific When the winning opening state 223p is closed, the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and the gaming ball can not enter the specific winning opening 65a (or is difficult) Indicates In the specific winning a prize opening state 223p, an open state is set when a round number command indicating the start of a round in a big hit game (that is, opening of the specific winning a prize opening 65a) is received from the main control device 110 (see S2031 in FIG. 136) When the closing command based on the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning hole 65a is received, the closed state is set (see S2034 in FIG. 136). The specified winning combination port state 223p is referred to when the winning number command is received from the main control unit 110 (see S2032 in FIG. 136), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, or , It is determined whether it is a command based on over winning.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect which is an integrated effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described. FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect executed in this control example.

  First, referring to FIG. 131 (a), the liquid crystal driving interlocking effect when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven up and down will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the liquid crystal drive interlocking production, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are controlled according to the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 being driven up and down. 3 The display content displayed on the symbol display device 81 is changed.

  Specifically, in a state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area obtained by combining the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 The image of the star is displayed on the part.

  Thereafter, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven upward, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven downward, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized at the central portion. According to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is copied and moved in four directions, that is, upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left. The image of the star moved and displayed in the upper right and upper left is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1 that has become visible, and is moved and displayed in the lower right and lower left The image of the star is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have become visible.

  Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is driven further upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is driven further downward, the image of the star displayed by being moved to the upper right and the upper left is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, Images of the stars moved and displayed in the lower right and lower left are displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

  As described above, in the liquid crystal drive interlocking production, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 being driven up and down. As a whole, an effect is displayed in which the star image is moved in four directions: upper right, lower right, lower left, upper left. Thereby, in addition to the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 being driven up and down, since effects corresponding to the drive can be displayed, it is possible to improve the player's interest .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131 (b), the liquid crystal drive interlocking production in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right will be described. .

  According to the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven to the left and right, and the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven vertically. The effect is performed by correcting the rotation angle and the position of the image data using the same image data. As a result, the volume of image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect can be reduced.

  Specifically, in a state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area obtained by combining the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 The image of the star is displayed on the part.

  The star image displayed at the center is displayed rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise), as opposed to the case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. Thus, even in the state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise), the same effect can be displayed using the same image data.

  Thereafter, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven in the left direction, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven in the right direction, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized at the central portion. According to this drive, the image of the star displayed in the center is copied and moved in four directions, that is, upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left. The image of the star moved and displayed in the upper left and lower left is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1 that has become visible, and is moved and displayed in the upper right and lower right The image of the star is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have become visible.

  The image of the star displayed by being moved in the four directions, upper right, lower right, lower left, upper left, is counterclockwise compared to the case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven vertically. Counterclockwise) is rotated 90 degrees and displayed. In addition, the display position is corrected and displayed. Specifically, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven to the left and right as opposed to the case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down, the display area is vertically elongated. The display area changes to a horizontally long display area. Therefore, the symbol position of each star is corrected so that the amount of movement in the vertical direction is small and the amount of movement in the lateral direction is large. Thus, even in the state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise), the same effect can be displayed using the same image data.

  Then, when the upper display surface 523a1 is driven further upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the rotation angle and the display position of each star image are corrected and moved to the upper left and lower left The image of the displayed star is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the image of the star displayed by being moved to the upper right and lower right is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

  As described above, in this control example, the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 described above are driven up and down. In the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect in the case of using the same image data, the rotation angle and the display position of the image data are corrected to execute the effect. As a result, the volume of image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect can be reduced.

  In this control example, although the display position of the image data is corrected, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven vertically (that is, when the display area is vertically long), the image data is compressed (reduced) to be vertically long and displayed. When the display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven to the left and right (that is, when the display area is horizontally long), the image data may be naturally compressed (reduced) to be horizontally long.

  If one or both of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 can not be driven due to a failure or the like and the display area can not be expanded, the display position of the image data is corrected according to the display area. Alternatively, the image data may be compressed (reduced). As a result, even if one or both of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 can not be driven and the display area can not be expanded, effects can be suitably displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, gaming method suggestion effects executed (notified) by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described. FIG. 132 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of effects of the game method suggestion effect.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (a), the decoration surface 523 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example is decorated to imitate an apple, and the upper decoration surface 523b1 is decorated on the left half thereof The lower right half of the lower decorative surface 523b2 is decorated. Therefore, by rendering the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 to be adjacent to each other, an integrated presentation can be performed.

  Direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are circumferentially arranged on the round portion of the apple in the decoration on the decoration surface 523. Specifically, the direction notification LEDs 295a are disposed at the uppermost position of the right half, and the direction notification LEDs 295 are arranged clockwise (in the order of the direction notification LEDs 295b, 295c,... 295j) from that position. The direction notification LED 295 j is disposed at the topmost position of the left half.

  The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are controlled to be lit by setting a right-handed notification command or a left-handed command according to the current gaming state in the gaming method notification process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later.

  When the right-handed notification command indicating that the current gaming state is the right-handed gaming state is set, first, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on / off, and then the direction notification LED 295b is turned on / off, Each direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off in the clockwise order as described above. As a result, since the direction notification LEDs 295 arranged in the circumferential shape are turned on / off clockwise (clockwise), it is suggested to the player that the gaming state in which the current strikes right is Can be notified.

  On the other hand, when the left hitting notification command indicating that the current gaming state is the gaming state in which the left hitting is performed is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on / off, and then the direction notification LED 295j is turned on / off , And so on, each direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off. As a result, since the direction notification LEDs 295 arranged in the circumferential shape are turned on / off in a counterclockwise direction (counterclockwise), it is suggested that the player is currently in a gaming state in which a left strike is performed. It can be (notified).

  FIG. 132 (b) is a schematic view showing a case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven 90 degrees clockwise with respect to FIG. 132 (a). Also in this case, when the right-handed notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off clockwise from the direction notification LED 295a. In addition, when the left-handed notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off counterclockwise (counterclockwise) from the direction notification LED 295a.

  As described above, in this control example, regardless of the state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, the same control process is performed to indicate that the gaming state is to perform a right strike (or a left strike). It can be suggested (informed). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the control process from becoming complicated.

<About Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the second control example will be described. The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the process of the jackpot control process (S1004) is partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004) in the present control example. The jackpot control process (S1004) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU of the main control device 110.

  In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101).

  When it is determined in the process of S1101 that the big hit start timing is reached (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), the storage solenoid 65g1 is set to ON (S1131), and this process ends. Do.

  In addition, by setting the storage solenoid 65g1 to ON by the process of S1131, it becomes possible to store the gaming ball entered in the storage area 65i. The storage area 65i is an area where over winning game balls are flowed down, and the contents of the ending effect are different according to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the big hit game. . The gaming ball stored in the storage area 65i flows down to the storage discharge flow channel 65e6 by setting the storage solenoid 65g1 to off at the end of the big hit (before the start of the ending effect).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the start timing of the jackpot is not reached (S1101: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1103). If it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress in the process of S1103 (S1103: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1103: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104).

  If it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the over prize solenoid 65b1 is set to OFF (S1132), and the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1134), This process ends.

  By setting the over winning prize solenoid 65b1 to OFF by the process of S1132, the gaming ball entering the specified winning prize opening 65a and passing through the detection switch 65a1 is allowed to flow down to the normal winning flow path 65e1. Although details will be described later, when a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of game balls pass the detection switch 65a1 in the same round, the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to ON, and enters the specific winning opening 65a. The gaming ball that has passed through the drop detection switch 65a1 can not flow down to the normal winning flow path 65e1, and flows down to the over winning flow path 65e2.

  If it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is then determined whether it is the timing of the closing operation (S1133). If it is determined in the process of S1133 that it is the timing of closing operation (S1133: Yes), the over winning prize solenoid 65b1 is set to ON (S1134), the opening solenoid is set to OFF (S1135), and the closing command is set. Then (S1136), the process ends.

  By setting the over winning prize solenoid 65b1 to ON by the process of S1134, the gaming ball entering the specified winning prize opening 65a and passing through the detection switch 65a1 becomes a state where it can not flow down to the regular winning flow path 65e1, and it is over It becomes possible to flow down to the winning channel 65e2. The gaming balls having flowed down to the over winning flow path 65e2 flow down to the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c and are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 or the out flow path 65e5.

  By setting the open solenoid to OFF by the process of S1135, the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

  By the process of S1136, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning hole 65a is closed. In the voice lamp control device 113, the notification of the closing command makes it possible to determine that the ball count command notified thereafter is the ball count command based on the over winning.

  If it is determined in the process of S1133 that it is not the timing of the closing operation (S1133: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the probability changing solenoid 65k (S1106). If it is determined in the process of S1106 that it is the operation timing of the positive variation solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the positive variation solenoid 65k is set to ON, and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1133 that it is not the operation timing of the positive solenoid 65k (S1106: No), then it is determined whether it is the storage discharge timing (S1137), it is determined that it is the storage discharge timing If it has been (S1137: Yes), the storage solenoid is set to OFF (S1138), and this process is ended.

  In the process of S1137, it is determined that it is the storage / discharge timing if it is a timing previously determined as a big hit game (5 seconds before the start timing of the ending effect in this control example). As a result, the number of gaming balls stored in the storage area 65i can be counted by the storage discharge switch 65a4 before the start of the ending effect, and the ending effect can be displayed according to the count result.

  The storage discharge timing is not limited to the above. For example, discharge may be performed every round, or counting may be performed at the timing when the ending command is received.

  If it is determined in the process of S1137 that the storage discharge timing is not reached (S1137: No), it is then determined whether the gaming ball has passed the storage discharge switch 65a4 (S1139), and the storage discharge switch 65a4 is When it is determined that the has passed (S1139: Yes), the storage and discharge command is set (S1140), and this processing ends.

  Since the storage and discharge command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S1140, the number of gaming balls stored in the big hit game can be counted in the voice lamp control device 113, and according to the count result The ending effect can be displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1139 that the game ball has not passed through the storage switch 65a4 (1139: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

  If it is determined in the process of S1108 that it is the start timing of ending effect (S1108: Yes), the processes of S1109 and S1110 are executed as in the first control example, and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1108 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S1108: No), the distribution motor setting process is executed (S1141), other processes (informing process (S1111), winning process) (S1112), the abnormality process (S1113) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, the details of the distribution motor setting process (S1141) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 134. The distribution motor setting process (S1141) determines whether to drive the distribution motor 65c2 so as to distribute the gaming ball having passed the over winning switch 65a2 to either the storage channel 65e4 or the out channel 65e5, It is a process for setting.

  In the sorting motor setting process (S1141), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101).

  If it is determined in the process of S5101 that the game ball has not passed the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101: No), there is no need to drive the sorting motor to distribute the game ball, so this process is directly performed. finish. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the distribution motor may naturally be driven at all times.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the game ball has passed the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not there is winning information that will be a big hit in the pending winning information. (S5102).

  If it is determined in the process of S5102 that there is winning information that will be a big hit in the pending winning information (S5102: Yes), then it is a case where it is determined that it will be a big hit, so the storage upper limit number 203w Is set to 4, and the process proceeds to the process of S5107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5102 that there is no winning information to be a big hit in the held winning information (S5102: No), then it is determined whether the predictive flag 203u is on (S5103) ).

  If it is determined in the process of S5103 that the predictive flag 203u is on (S5103), although it is not determined that the jackpot will be made thereafter, it is a case where the probability of becoming the jackpot is high. Is set to 3, and the process proceeds to the process of S5107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the predictive flag 203u is on (S5103: No), if all the held winning prize information is out (that is, the probability of becoming a big hit thereafter is low) Since the storage upper limit number 203 w is set to 2, the process shifts to the process of S 5107.

  In the process of S5107, it is determined which one of the storage flow path 65e4 and the out flow path 65e5 the game ball having passed the over winning switch 65a2 is to be distributed to (S5107). This distribution is determined based on a table and a counter (not shown).

  Specifically, if there is winning information that will be a big hit in the pending winning information, using a table for the big hit, if the value of the counter is "0-2", the distribution destination storage flow The path 65e4 is determined, and in the case of "3 to 5", the distribution destination is determined to the out flow path 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow channel 65e4 with a probability of 1/2, and the distribution destination is determined to the out flow channel 65e5 with a probability of 1/2. On the other hand, when there is no winning information which will be a big hit in the pending winning information, a table for removal is used, and when the value of the counter is “0 to 1”, the sorting destination is stored in storage channel 65e4. In the case of "2 to 5", the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow channel 65e4 with a probability of 1/3, and the distribution destination is determined to be an out flow channel 65e5 with a probability of 2/3.

  Thus, when there is a big hit in the pending winning information, the sorting destination is easily determined to be the storage channel 65e4, and when there is no big hit in the pending winning information, the sorting destination is determined to the out flow channel 65e5. It is configured to be easy. The distribution ratio is not limited to this, and may be changed as appropriate.

  When the process of S5107 is completed, it is determined whether or not the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 in the process of S5107 (S5108).

  If it is determined in the process of S5108 that the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 (S5108: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w. (S5109).

  When it is determined in the process of S5109 that the value of the stored number counter 203v is smaller than the stored upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes), the drive of the distribution motor 65e2 is set with the distribution destination as the storage flow channel 65e4 ( S5111), the stored number counter 203v is incremented by 1 (S5112), and the process ends.

  The distributing motor 65c2 is driven and controlled by the process of S5111, whereby the distributing member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distributing member 65c communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2 The position (direction) in which the storage channel 65e4 is in communication with the storage channel 65e4 is changed. As a result, the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1 flow down the over pay flow path 65e2, and are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4, and flowed down to the storage area 65i via the storage flow path 65e4. Become. Thereafter, the distributing member 65c is rotated clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distributing member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) in communication with the over prize winning channel 65e2.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5 (S5108: No), and if the value of the stored number counter 203v is determined to be the stored upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes) The drive of the distribution motor 65c2 is set with the distribution destination as the out flow path 65e5 (S5112), and the present process is ended.

  By the drive control of the distributing motor 65c2 by the process of S5112, the distributing member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distributing member 65c communicates with the over prize winning channel 65e2. From the above state to the position (orientation) in the state of communicating with the out flow path 65e4. As a result, the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1 flow down the over winning channel 65e2, and are distributed to the out channel 65e4. Thereafter, the distributing member 65c is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distributing member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) in communication with the over winning passage 65e2.

  As described above, in the sorting motor setting process (S1141), the upper limit number of gaming balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 is based on the held winning prize information (that is, according to the degree of expectation to be a big hit thereafter). It was configured differently. As a result, when many game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of the jackpot is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 to the player is Since attention can be made, the player's interest can be improved.

  Further, since the effect unit 65α is configured to be visible, it is possible to visually recognize the sorting operation by the sorting motor 65c. Thus, attention can be paid to the sorting operation by the sorting motor 65c, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the storage area 65i where the game ball distributed to the storage flow channel 65e4 is stored is provided visibly in the effect unit 65α, the number of game balls distributed to the storage flow channel 65e4 during the big hit game is determined It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be easily grasped and that is easy for the player to understand.

Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Second Control Example
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the main processing 2 (see FIG. 135) is changed to execute the gaming method notification process (see FIG. 138), and the jackpot related process (see FIG. 103). It is different in that the jackpot related process 2 (see FIG. 136) is executed instead and the ending process 2 (see FIG. 137) is executed instead of the ending process (see FIG. 105), and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the main process 2, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed as in the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

  When the process of S1811 is finished, the game method notification process is executed (S1831), and the process proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above. Details of the game method notification process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 136, details of the jackpot related process 2 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described. As described above, in this control example, the main control device 110 is a closing command indicating that the specific winning opening 65a has been closed during the jackpot game, and a storage discharging command indicating that the gaming ball has passed the storage discharging switch 65a4. More sent. In contrast to the jackpot related processing in the first control example (see FIG. 103), the jackpot related processing 2 (S1912) in this control example is different in that it is changed to perform processing when these commands are received, The points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the jackpot related process 2 (S1912), first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S2001). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set (S2002), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S2003).

  If it is determined in the process of S2003 that the round number command has been received (S2001: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S2004), and the round for display is based on the value of the round number counter 223g. The number command is set (S2005). Then, the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is set to the open state (S2031), and this processing ends.

  By the process of S2031, based on the fact that the round number command indicating the start of the round has been received from the main control device 110, the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is set to the open state. As a result, it is possible to determine that the number-of-winnings command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state is a normal winning (that is, not an over winning).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2003 that the round number command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether a winning number command has been received (S2006).

  If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), then it is determined whether the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2032). If it is determined in the process of S2032 that the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2032: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on the over winning, so the over winning processing is executed. (S2009), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2032, when it is determined that the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is in the open state (S2032: No), since the received number-of-winnings command is a command based on the normal winning, the normal winning command is After setting (S2010), the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether a closing command has been received (S2033). If it is determined in the process of S2033 that the closing command has been received (S2033: Yes), the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is set to the closing state (S2034), and the present process is ended.

  Thus, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closing state when the closing command is received from the main control device 110. Therefore, after receiving the closing command from main controller 110 until receiving a new round number command (that is, after the specified winning opening 65a finishes the specified number (10) of winnings, the next specified winning Until the opening of the opening 65a), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state. Thus, it is possible to determine that the winning number command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state is the winning number command based on the over winning.

  When the closed state is set based on the passage of the predetermined period (30 seconds), it may not be determined that the over prize has been won. In this case, the elapsed time after the start of the round may be measured, and it may be determined whether or not the closing command has been received at the elapse of a predetermined period.

  If it is determined in the process of S2033 that the closing command has not been received (S2033: No), it is then determined whether the storage / discharge command has been received (S2035). In the process of S2035, when it is determined that the stored discharge command has been received (S2035: Yes), the stored discharge counter 233r is incremented by 1 (S2036), and the present process is ended.

  The stored discharge command is transmitted from the main control device 110 by the number of gaming balls stored in the storage area 65i in the big hit game, so when all stored discharge commands have been received, the value of the stored discharge counter 233r is stored This is the number of gaming balls stored in the area 65i. Based on the value of the stored discharge counter 223r, the display content of the ending effect is determined. That is, the ending effect according to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i can be displayed. Thereby, in the jackpot game, since it is possible to make the storage area 65i pay attention to the number of game balls stored, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  If it is determined in the process of S2035 that the storage / discharge command has not been received (S2035: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S2011). If it is determined in the process of S2011 that the ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), ending setting process 2 is executed (S2012), the round number counter is set to 0 (S2013), and this process is performed. finish.

  In the process of S2012, the display content of the ending effect is determined according to the value of the stored discharge counter 223r. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the processing of S2011 (S2011: No), the processing of S2014 to S2015 is performed in the same manner as the jackpot related processing of the first control example described above (see FIG. 103). Execute to end this processing.

  Next, the details of the ending setting process 2 (S2012) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The ending setting process 2 (S2012) is different from the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example in that the ending effect is selected according to the value of the stored / discharge counter 223r, and the other is different. The points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In ending effect processing 2 (S2012), first, it is judged whether or not the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201), and if it is judged that the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), the ending effect is The continuous effect is selected as (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209.

  If it is determined in the process of S2201 that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), it is determined whether the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is larger than 4 (S2231). In the process of S2231, when it is determined that the value of the storage discharge counter 223r is 4 or less (that is, when the number of gaming balls stored in the storage area 65i is 4 or less during the big hit game) (S2231: No The normal ending effect is selected as the ending effect), and the process shifts to the processing of S2209.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2231 that the value of the stored discharge counter is greater than 4 (ie, if there are more than 4 balls stored in the storage area 65i during the big hit game) (S2231: Yes And the same as the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, the processes of S2203 to S2208 are executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2209.

  In the process of S2209, an ending effect command for display indicating an ending effect selected by the process of S2203, S2205, S2207, S2208 or S2232 is set (S2209). Then, as in the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, the processes of S2210 and S2211 are executed, and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the value of the stored discharge counter 223r is 2 or more, the ending effect is suggested to indicate the expectation degree that there is winning information that becomes a big hit in the hold, but stored discharge When the value of the counter 223r is 1 or less, the normal ending effect is selected. As a result, the player plays a game in the expectation that the value of the storage discharge counter will be 2 or more (that is, two or more game balls enter the storage area 65i) in the big hit game, so the player's interest Can be improved.

  Although the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is 2 or more, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be 3 or more. Naturally, such a restriction may not be provided.

  Furthermore, only when the value of the stored discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that correctly suggests whether or not there is winning information to be a big hit in the hold) is displayed You may do it.

  Further, it is also possible to change the table for selecting the ending effect according to the value of the stored discharge counter 223r.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 138, the details of the gaming method notification process (S1831) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 135) will be described. In the gaming method notification process (S1831), the current gaming state is a gaming state (so-called, left-handed gaming state) in which the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down the left side of the third symbol display device 81; This is a process for indicating (displaying) which of the gaming state (so-called right-handed gaming state) in which the game ball shoots so that the game ball flows downward on the right side of the device 81.

  In the gaming method notification process (S1831), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time saving gaming state or a probability variation gaming state (S5201). If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the gaming state is the short time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state (S5201: Yes), it is a gaming state in which the right hitting is performed, so a display right hitting suggestion command is set (S5202) ).

  The right display suggestion command for display set by the processing of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the right detection suggestion command for display, whereby the third symbol display device 81 or sub is displayed. An image indicating a right strike is displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 523. As a result, it can be suggested to the player that the gaming state is the gaming state in which the player strikes the right, so it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

  When the process of S5202 ends, a right-turn suggestion LED lighting command is set (S5203), and the process ends. The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decoration surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 repeat lighting and extinguishing one by one in order of 295a to 295j by the right hitting suggestion LED command set in the process of S5203. Be Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the lighting of the LEDs is performed clockwise (rightward), and the right to the player is obtained. It can be suggested (notified) that it is a game state in which a hit is made. Thereby, even during the effect that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the reverse state, it can be suggested (notified) that it is a game state in which a right-handed game is performed by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b. .

  In addition, the indication (notification) that the game state in which the player strikes the right is changed that the lighting of the LED is performed clockwise (clockwise) even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates. Since it does not exist, suggestion (notification) can be performed by the same control.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5201 that the gaming state is not a short time or a definite variation gaming state (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through gate 67.

  If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the ball has passed through gate 67 (S5201: Yes), the ball is distributed to the right of third symbol display device 81 even though the gaming state is the left-handed gaming state. Since the game ball passes through the through gate 67 provided (that is, when the right-handed game is being performed), the process of S5205 is performed to indicate that it is the left-handed game state. Transition to

  In the process of S5205, a display left strike suggestion command is set (S5205). The left display suggestion command for display set by the process of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the left strike indication command for display, whereby the third symbol display device 81 or sub is displayed. The characters "Please return to the left!" Are displayed on one of the liquid crystal display devices 523. As a result, it can be suggested to the player that the gaming state is the gaming state in which the player strikes the right, so it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

  When the process of S5205 is finished, a left hitting suggestion LED command is set (S5206), and the process ends. The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decoration surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are repeatedly lit and extinguished one by one sequentially from 295j to a by the left hitting suggestion LED command set in the process of S5205. Be Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, lighting of the LEDs is performed counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the player is notified to the player. It can be suggested (notified) that it is a gaming state in which a left strike is performed. Thereby, even during the effect that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the reverse state, it can be suggested (notified) that it is a game state in which the left hitting is performed by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decoration surface 523b. .

  In addition, the indication (informing) that it is a gaming state in which the player strikes the left is that the lighting of the LED is performed counterclockwise (counterclockwise) even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates. Since it does not change, suggestion (notification) can be performed by the same control.

  As described above, in the second control example, the distribution ratio for distributing the game ball that has won an over-winning during the big hit to the storage channel 65 e 4 is based on the held winning information (that is, the big win is subsequently made) Depending on the degree of expectation), configured differently. As a result, when many game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it can be suggested that the expectation of the jackpot is high, and the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 to the player is Since attention can be made, the player's interest can be improved.

  In the second control example, the effect portion 65α in which the distributing member 65c for distributing the gaming ball that has won the over-winning during the big hit is arranged to be visible. Thus, the player can visually recognize the sorting operation by the sorting motor 65c, and can pay attention to the sorting operation by the sorting motor 65c, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the second control example, in the effect unit 65α, a storage area 65i in which the game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 are stored is provided so as to be visible. This makes it possible to easily grasp the number of gaming balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 during the jackpot game, and to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the second control example, gaming balls that are over-winning during a big hit game are stored in an area where the player can visually recognize, and according to the number of stored gaming balls (the value of the storage discharge counter 223r) It was configured to change the contents of the ending effect of the game. This makes it possible to pay attention to the number of gaming balls that are over-winning during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, only when the value of the storage discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that correctly suggests whether or not there is winning information to be a big hit in the hold) is displayed You may do it.

  In the second control example, direction notification LEDs 295a to j for suggesting the game state (the direction in which the game ball is fired) are circumferentially arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and circumferentially arranged. A game state is indicated by the lighting pattern (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversely displayed, it is possible to suggest (inform) the gaming state by the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Furthermore, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, it is possible to suggest (notify) the gaming state without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to j arranged in a circumferential shape.

<On the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 145, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as an eleventh embodiment.

  In the first control example described above, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed to use the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 that are the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The game machine that performs the effect was described.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are inverted, the upper display surface 523a1 facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the lower display It is configured to be able to execute a mirror effect in which the display content with the surface 523a2 can be viewed from the front side of the gaming machine via the mirror 298. As a result, the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) which is the surface on the back side can be used simultaneously for rendering, so that variations of the rendering can be increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, in the third control example, the mirror 298 disposed to execute mirror effects is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror), and when viewed from the bright side, light is reflected to become a mirror (mirror) However, when viewed from the dark side, light is transmitted like a window. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 is brightened, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror. On the other hand, by turning on the mirror back side LED 297, the back side of the mirror 298 becomes bright and the mirror 298 becomes a mere window (glass).

  In this control example, the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on after preparation of the display of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) on the back side in the mirror effect is completed in the mirror effect (after the display content is inverted), The mirror 298 was configured to function as a mirror. As a result, since the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before preparation for display is not seen by the player, a suitable effect can be provided.

  Here, an effect aspect of the mirror effect in the present control example will be described. FIG. 139 is a schematic view schematically showing a mirror effect in this control example. FIG. 139 (a) schematically shows a state in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slidingly moved to the close position as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the mirror effect in this control example, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid in the left-right direction to be changed to the proximity position At the position, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are reversely operated, and the upper decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  A left mirror 298a is disposed on the left rear side of the sub liquid crystal display 523 and a right mirror 298b is disposed on the right rear side. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are arranged to be inclined rearward (back side) toward the center of the pachinko machine 10, and when the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are viewed from the top side It is arranged in the shape of (see FIG. 139 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 disposed on the center side with respect to each mirror 298 through the right mirror 298 a and the left mirror 298 from the front side.

  A right mirror front LED 296a is disposed on the front side of the right mirror 298a, and a left mirror front LED 296b is disposed on the front side of the left mirror 298b. In addition, a left mirror rear LED 297a is disposed on the rear side of the left mirror 298a, and a right mirror rear LED 297b is disposed on the rear side of the right mirror 298b. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are respectively configured by magic mirrors, and when the left mirror front side LED 296a is lit, the left mirror 298a becomes a mirror and the display mode of the upper display surface 523a or the upper decorative surface 523b1 A decoration aspect can be displayed. When the left mirror rear surface LED 297a is lit, the magic mirror is seen through and the rear side is visible (not a mirror but a transparent member) and does not form a mirror surface, so the rear side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not reflected by the left mirror 298a Is configured. The right mirror 298 b is similarly configured.

  With such a configuration, the state on the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be switched between the state in which the player can visually recognize the state and the state in which the player can not visually recognize the state. Can.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  In the third control example, the mirror front surface LED 296 and the mirror back surface LED 297 are connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device, compared with the first control example described above; The difference is that the contents and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a mirror effect driving scenario 222 d 4 is added to the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222 d. It is. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The contents of the mirror effect driving scenario 222d4 will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (b). The mirror effect driving scenario 222 d 4 is a scenario for inverting the upper display surface 523 a 1 and the lower display surface 523 a 2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 after sliding movement.

  The mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 has a set value (operating speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time since the variable display is started. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), the slide motor 431 is defined as the operation target corresponding to the value "1" of the drive scenario counter 223m, 50 pps is defined as the operation speed, and the number of operation steps Is defined as 100, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction.

  The reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, 100 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 as the operation step number, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction corresponding to the value "2001" of the driving scenario counter 223m. ing.

  The reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, 100 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 as the operation step number, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction corresponding to the value “8001” of the driving scenario counter 223 m. ing.

  The reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, 50 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 as the operation step number, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction corresponding to the value "10001" of the driving scenario counter 223m. ing.

  Then, information of “END” indicating the end of the driving scenario is stored corresponding to the value “12001” of the driving scenario counter 223 m.

  As described above, in the mirror effect driving scenario 222 d 4, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slidingly displaced from the separated position to the close position in 2 seconds, and at the close position, the reflection position from the normal position (display surface (523 a 1 facing back side) , 523a2) to a position where it becomes visible from the front side through the mirror 298) for 2 seconds, and then maintained at the reflection position for 4 seconds, and then again from the reflection position to the normal position for 2 seconds. It flips over and is slide-displaced over 2 seconds from the proximity position to the separation position.

  Next, contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a mirror effect flag 223s is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Mirror effect in progress flag 223s is a flag for determining whether or not mirror effect is being executed, and indicates that mirror effect is being executed if it is on, and mirror effect is being executed if it is off Indicates no The mirror effect flag 223s is turned on when the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is set as a drive scenario (that is, when a mirror effect is set as an effect pattern) in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 145). It is set. When the mirror effect flag 223s is on, control of turning on / off the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror back LED 297 is performed in the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 144), and the display contents are reversed for the display control device 114. The notification of the command to make it In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, when the fluctuation display which performed mirror production is complete | finished, it sets to OFF.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the present control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the main processing 3 (see FIG. 143) is changed to execute the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 143), and the variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) Is different in that the variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) is executed instead of the above, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, main processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the main process 3, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed as in the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

  After the process of S1811, the mirror effect setting process is executed (S1851), and the process proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above.

  Here, the details of the mirror effect setting process (S1851) executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. The mirror effect setting process (S1851) is a command for controlling turning on / off of the mirror front surface LED 296 and the mirror back surface LED 297 when mirror effect is being executed, and for inverting the display content of the display control device 114. It is a process for giving notice.

  In the mirror effect setting process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not the mirror effect flag 223s is on. If it is determined in the process of S1851 that the mirror effect-in-progress flag 223s is off (S5301: No), the mirror effect is not being executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the mirror effect flag 223s is on (S5301: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302). If it is determined in the process of S5302 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302: Yes), the mirror front surface LED 296 is set to OFF so that the mirror 298 does not function as a mirror (S5303) ), The mirror back surface LED 297 is set to ON (S5304), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S5302 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is not 1 (S5302: No), it is then determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305).

  If it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305: Yes), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slide to the proximity position And the timing at which the reversing operation is completed at the proximity position. In this case, in order to make the display surface (523a1, 523a2) facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 visible from the front side through the mirror 298 by being reversely operated, the processing of S5306 is performed. Transition.

  In the process of S5306, a display reverse correction start command is set (S5306), the mirror front surface LED 296 is set to ON (S5307), the mirror back surface LED 297 is set to OFF (S5308), and this processing ends. As a result, the display content of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) is reversed symmetrically (that is, the display content becomes normal when viewed through a mirror), and the front side of the mirror 298 becomes bright. Will function as a mirror.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is not 4000 (S5305: No), it is then determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309).

  If it is determined in the process of S5309 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309: Yes), it is a timing at which the display surface facing the back side is reversed to the front side in the mirror effect .

  In this case, the mirror front surface LED 296 is set to OFF (S5310), the mirror back surface LED 297 is set to ON (S5311), a display reverse correction end command is set (S5312), and this processing ends.

  By the processing from S5310 to S5312, the display content of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 which is controlled by the display control device 114 is set to the normal state, and the mirror 298 is set not to function as a mirror. Be done.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5309 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is not 8000 (S5309: No), it is then determined whether the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313).

  If it is determined in the process of S5313 that the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313: Yes), it is the end timing of the mirror effect, so the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF (S5314). The rear LED 297 is set to off (S5315), and the process ends.

  By the processes of S5313 and S5314, when the mirror effect is not performed, the mirror front surface LED 296 and the mirror rear surface LED 297 can be turned off, so power consumption can be reduced.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 3 (S1813) will be described with reference to FIG. Similar to the first control example, the variable display setting process 3 (S1813) executes the processes of S2301 to S2307. When the process of S2307 is finished, it is determined whether the drive scenario stored in the process of S2306 is a drive scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351).

  If it is determined in the process of S2351 that the drive scenario is a drive scenario corresponding to a mirror effect (S2351: Yes), a variation pattern including a mirror effect is set, so the flag 223s during mirror effect Is set to ON, and the process shifts to the processing of S2308.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2351 that the drive scenario is a drive scenario not corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2308.

  From S2308 onwards, the processing of S2308 to S2312 is executed as in the first control example described above, and this processing ends.

  Thus, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 It is configured to be able to execute a mirror effect in which the display content with the surface 523a2 can be viewed from the front side of the gaming machine via the mirror 298. As a result, the decorative surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) which is the surface on the back side can be used simultaneously for rendering, so that variations of the rendering can be increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the third control example, the mirror 298 disposed to perform mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror). This is because light is reflected to become a mirror (a mirror) when viewed from the bright side, but light is transmitted as a window when viewed from the dark side. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 is brightened, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror. On the other hand, by turning on the mirror back side LED 297, the back side of the mirror 298 becomes bright and the mirror 298 becomes a mere window (glass). Thus, by controlling the lighting of the LED, it is possible to change whether the mirror 298 functions as a mirror or as a window.

  In addition, when making it function as a window, it can be set as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and an effect by providing a pattern, a design, etc. on the back side of the mirror 298 so that visual recognition is possible. In addition, by arranging the LED for effect on the back side and changing the lighting pattern of the LED, it is possible to change a pattern or a design that can be visually recognized when the mirror 298 functions as a window. As a result, the variation of the effect can be increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the third control example, the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on after the display of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) on the back side is reversed in the mirror effect (after the display content is reversed). , Mirror 298 was configured to function as a mirror. As a result, since the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before preparation for display is not seen by the player, a suitable effect can be provided.

  Note that the expectation of becoming a big hit may be indicated (notified) depending on whether or not the mirror 298 functions as a mirror in the mirror effect. Thereby, in the mirror effect, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid from the separated position to the close position, and after the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are inverted at the close position, the upper display is performed. It can be made to pay attention to whether or not the display content of the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 is displayed via the mirror 298, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Modification of Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, a modified example of the mirror effect described in FIG. 139 will be described. In this control example, when performing mirror effect to make the player visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the left rear surface mirror member 299 a is placed between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The right rear mirror member 299b is moved to project (reflect) on the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 even if the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is completely inverted to a position facing in parallel with the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 of the sub liquid crystal display mode in a state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is completely flat.

<On Modification of First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 148 to 150, a modification of the effect display in the above-described first control example will be described. FIGS. 148 to 150 are different from the effect display shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 in the first control example, in the order in which the respective symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol) overlap. After being displayed with the third symbol that the symbol has won the big hit, it is used for the technology (so-called, positive variation promotion effect) that reports whether this big hit is usually a big hit or a definite change big hit using the effect display is there.

  In this case, when the probability change promotion effect starts, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid so as to completely cover the third symbol display device 81 (upper display surface 523a1 and The lower display surface 523a2 is made to slide so as to abut, and the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 displays that “probability change promotion effect” is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), a symbol for promoting effect is enlarged and displayed. Unlike the third symbol displayed corresponding to the normal game (special symbol variation game), the symbol for promotion effect displayed in this case is a character symbol in which a portion indicating a number is deleted. If the character symbol displayed in this state is in the same mode (character) as the "probable symbol" (a specific number, for example, a symbol with "3" or "7") used in the normal game , It becomes the production indication which shows that it wins to the definite change jackpot by "the definite change promotion effect".

  On the other hand, if the character symbol displayed in this state is in the same mode (character) as a symbol other than the “probable symbol” used in the normal game, the “probable variable promotion without notification of winning in a certain variable jackpot” The production will continue.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 148 (b) to 150 (b), the display area is gradually enlarged by sliding the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display area up to the state shown in FIG. 150 (b). When enlarged, a mode is shown in which a number is shown on a part of the character symbols (for example, the character symbol displayed at the center) among the character symbols displayed three in the vertical direction.

  If the number given in this case is the number (for example, "3", "7") attached to the "probable symbol" used in the normal game, it is won by the "probable variation promotion effect" It becomes the effect display which shows that. That is, the same character pattern as the third symbol used in the normal game is used as the character symbol used for this "probable variation promotion effect", and a plurality of numbers (at least the "probable symbol") is attached to the character symbol Are configured so as to indicate a number and a number given in addition to the "possibly odd symbol".

  According to the above-mentioned "probable variation promotion effect", the timing at which the character symbol is displayed to the player (see FIG. 148 (a)) and the timing at which the character symbol indicates a number are attached (FIG. 150 (b It becomes possible to notify that it has won the probability variation jackpot at the two timings of)). Therefore, during the period from the start to the end of the "probability change promotion effect", the player is watching the effect while expecting to be promoted to a probability change jackpot, so that the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned "probable variation promotion effect", an aspect indicating a number is attached to each of the three character symbols displayed in the vertical direction, and the number attached to each character symbol is a predetermined rule (a number If it is an odd number, or if a number is displayed according to a predetermined rule (e.g., "341"), it may be notified that the jackpot has been won. Thereby, it is possible to more effectively use the enlargement of the display area for the effect.

  In addition, the timing at which the aspect indicating the number is attached to the three displayed character symbols in the vertical direction is shifted, or the aspect of the character symbols displayed three in the vertical direction is switched in the middle of the "probability change promotion effect" You may do so.

<On the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as a twelfth embodiment. In the fourth control example, after transmitting the opening command indicating the start of the big hit game as the command indicating the timing in the big hit game with respect to the first control example described above, only the close command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a. Are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time since the closing command is received. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 can be reduced, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  First, with reference to FIG. 151, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. The RAM 223 in this control example is different from the first control example in that a specific winning opening state 223p, a large hit middle flag 223t, and a clock counter 223u are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state, the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, indicating that the gaming ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a, and the specific When the winning opening state 223p is closed, the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and the gaming ball can not enter the specific winning opening 65a (or is difficult) Indicates When it is determined that it is the round start timing in the special winning opening state 223p (see FIG. 156), the open state is set (see S5306 in FIG. 156), and the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a. When the closing command based on the closing of is received, the closed state is set (see S2074 in FIG. 136). The specified winning combination port state 223p is referred to when the winning number command is received from the main control unit 110 (see S2072 in FIG. 156), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, or , It is determined whether it is a command based on over winning.

  The jackpot flag 223t is a flag for determining whether a jackpot game is being executed, and indicates that a jackpot game is being executed if it is on, and a jackpot game is being executed if it is off Indicates no The jackpot flag 223t is set to ON when the opening command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S2071). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the big hit game is being executed in the big hit timekeeping process (see FIG. 156) (see S5301 in FIG. 156), and it is determined that it is the ending start timing of the big hit game. , And off (see S5310 in FIG. 156).

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. FIG. In this control example, a big hit operation setting process 4 (S1105) in which a part of the process is changed is executed instead of the big hit operation setting process (see FIG. 95) with respect to the first control example described above, and ending The process is different in that ending process 4 (S1110) is performed in which a part of the process is changed instead of the process (see FIG. 96), and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) is different from the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 95) in the first control example in that the round number command is not set, and the other points are the same. Description is omitted.

  Although the details will be described later, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the start of the round by measuring the elapsed time after receiving the closing command indicating the end of the round. As a result, the number-of-rounds command indicating the start of the round in the jackpot game from the main control device 110 can be made unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Next, the details of the ending process 4 (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. The ending process 4 (S1110) is different from the ending process (FIG. 96) in the first control example in that the ending command is not set, and the other points are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Although the details will be described later, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the start of the ending by counting the elapsed time from the reception of the closing command indicating the end of the round and the number of rounds executed. There is. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need for an ending command from the main control device 110 to indicate the start of ending in the jackpot game, and to reduce the processing load.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 154 to FIG. In this control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, jackpot related processing 4 (S1912) in which a part of the processing is changed instead of jackpot related processing (see FIG. 103) is executed, and jackpot processing It differs in that (see FIG. 156) is newly executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, main processing 4 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the main process 4, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed as in the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

  After the process of S1811, the jackpot timekeeping process is executed (S1831), and the process proceeds to the process of S1812. After S1812, the processes of S1812 to S1818 are executed as in the first control example described above. Details of the jackpot timekeeping process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, details of the jackpot related process 4 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described. In the jackpot related processing 4 (S1912), when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received with respect to the first control example, the jackpot flag 223t is set to ON, and the specific prize during the jackpot game Based on the reception of a closing command indicating that the mouth 65a has been closed, the time elapsed since the reception of the closing command is measured, and the number of rounds commands and the ending command are received The difference is that the process is deleted, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the jackpot related process 4 (S1912), it is first determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2001), and if it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), the display opening command is set. Then, the jackpot flag is set to ON (S2071), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a winning number command has been received (S2006). If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the winning number command has been received (S2006: Yes), it is then determined whether the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2072).

  If it is determined in the process of S2072 that the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2072: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on the over winning, so the over winning processing is executed. (S2009), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2072 that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state (S2072: No), the received number-of-winnings command is a command based on the normal winning, so the normal winning command is After setting (S2010), the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the winning number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether a closing command has been received (S2073).

  If it is determined in the process of S2073 that the closing command has been received (S2073: Yes), the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is set to the closing state (S2074), and the clock counter 223u is set to 0 (S2075). ), End this processing.

  By the process of S2075, the clock counter 223u is initialized to 0 each time the specific winning hole 65a is closed. In this way, it is possible to measure the elapsed time since the specific winning hole 65a is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2073 that the closing command has not been received (S2073: No), the processes of S2014 to S2015 are executed as in the first control example, and the present process is ended.

  Next, the details of the jackpot timekeeping process (S1831) executed in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154) of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The jackpot time counting process (S1831) is a process that is executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154), and is a process that performs clocking to determine the round start timing and the ending timing in the jackpot game.

  In the jackpot time counting process (S1831), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 223t is on (S5301). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 223t is off (S5301: No), it is not in the jackpot game, and there is no need to count time, so this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5301 that the big hit medium flag 223t is on (S5301: Yes), the value of the clock counter 223u is added 1 (S5302), and the value of the clock counter 223u is added. Based on it, it is determined whether it is the round start timing (S5303).

  Specifically, if the value of the clock counter 223u is 4000, this is a case where four seconds have elapsed since the end of the round, so it is determined that it is the round start timing.

  If it is determined in the process of S5303 that it is the round start timing (S5303: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S5304), and a round number command for display is set (S5305). The mouth state 223p is set to the open state (S5306), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5303 that it is not the round start timing (S5303: No), it is then determined whether it is the ending start timing (S5307).

  Specifically, when the value of the round number counter 223g is 16 and the value of the clock counter 223u is smaller than 400, the value of the clock counter 223u is set to 0 by receiving the closing command in the final round. It is determined that it is the case, and it is determined that it is the ending start timing.

  If the ending effect is to be started a predetermined period after the specific winning opening 65a is closed in the final round, it may be waited until the time counter 223u reaches the predetermined period.

  If it is determined in the process of S5307 that it is the ending start timing (S5307), the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) similar to the first control example is executed (S5308), and the round number counter is set to 0. (S5309), the jackpot flag 223t is set to off (S5310), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, after transmitting the opening command indicating the start of the big hit game as a command indicating the timing in the big hit game, only the closing command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is mainly The control unit 110 is configured to transmit to the audio lamp control unit 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time since the closing command is received. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 can be reduced, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Modification 2 in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 to 158, modifications of the open / close display effect in the first control example will be described.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid up and down. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Thus, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third liquid crystal display device 81 on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed Be done. In the lower right portion of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative symbol Z is displayed in a blinking manner. It shows that the middle symbol which becomes a reach display mode is changing.

  FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case where the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start to slide up and down. The reach symbol is moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbol is moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A fish school effect (effect for displaying a fluctuating group of fish) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the slide amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes large, a school of fish moves to the side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and is displayed. Thus, the display of the school of fish is configured such that the area in which the middle symbol is displayed is a small school of fish, and the group of many fish moves and is displayed in the region in which the middle symbol is not displayed. There is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display fluctuating groups of fish swarms aligned with the slide direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and by effectively utilizing the display area expanded by sliding movement, the school of fish moves Area can be broadened.

  FIG. 158 is a view showing a display mode in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid to the left and right (sliding to the outside in the left and right direction). FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Thus, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third liquid crystal display device 81 on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed Be done. In the lower right portion of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative symbol Z is displayed in a blinking manner. It shows that the middle symbol which becomes a reach display mode is changing.

  FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start sliding outward. The reach symbol is moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbol is moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A fish school effect (effect for displaying a fluctuating group of fish) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the slide amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes large, a school of fish moves to the side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and is displayed. Thus, the display of the school of fish is configured such that the area in which the middle symbol is displayed is a small school of fish, and the group of many fish moves and is displayed in the region in which the middle symbol is not displayed. There is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display fluctuating groups of fish swarms aligned with the slide direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and by effectively utilizing the display area expanded by sliding movement, the school of fish moves Area can be broadened.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated in the state shown in FIG. 157 to FIG. 158, the rotational coordinates and display coordinates of the display data of the same fish school effect are corrected and set, thereby displaying It is configured to be. Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately store the fish school data when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, and the data amount can be suppressed.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 168. In the first embodiment, the detailed description of the liquid crystal display device 523 is omitted, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the internal configuration of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described in detail. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the entire configuration of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 161. Fig. 159 (a) is a front view of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the thirteenth embodiment, and Fig. 159 (b) is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523. 160 is an exploded perspective front view of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523.

  As shown in FIGS. 159 to 161, the liquid crystal display device 523 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and a front case 541 disposed on the front side (player side), and a back side of the front case 541. Liquid crystal device 543 disposed between the front case 541 and the back case 542 facing each other, a substrate member 545 disposed on the back side of the liquid crystal device 543, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member It is mainly provided with the interposition member 544 interposed between the facings 545.

  The front case 541 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the rear surface side, and a front opening 541a is formed on the bottom surface of the front case 541 in a rectangular shape so as to penetrate in the thickness direction. The front case 541 is formed so that the liquid crystal device 543 can be disposed on the inner side from the side of the back opening 541 b that opens on one side. Thereby, the liquid crystal device 543 can be made visible to the player through the front opening 541a.

  The front case 541 is formed with two recessed portions 541 c, which are provided on the inner side of the left and right side surfaces. Further, a through hole 541 d penetrating in the longitudinal direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 159A) of the front case 541 is formed in the concave end portion of the concave portion 541 c.

  Furthermore, in the recess 541c formed on the one end side in the longitudinal direction of the front case 541 (left side in FIG. 159 (a)), the recess provided on the front opening 541a side from the back opening 541b side 541c1 is formed. The recessed portion 541c1 is a recess for engaging an engaging portion 544b of the interposed member 544 described later.

  The liquid crystal device 543 has a liquid crystal display 543a for displaying symbols and the like on the front (a surface that can be viewed by the player through the front opening 541a). Further, the liquid crystal device 543 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and the width direction dimension thereof is set substantially the same as the width direction dimension inside the back opening 541 b, and the longitudinal direction dimensions thereof are left and right of the front case 541. It is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension between the facing portions of the concave portions 541c.

  Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is disposed inside the front case 541, the upper, lower, left, and right side surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 are in contact with the inner wall of the front case 541. As a result, the liquid crystal device 543 can be hardly displaced relative to the front case 541.

  In the liquid crystal device 543, the back surface (the opposite surface of the liquid crystal display 543a) is covered with a back surface portion 543c formed of a plate member of a metal material. The back surface portion 543 c is a shield member for blocking electrical noise (reducing the influence of the electrical noise on the liquid crystal device 543), and is formed by a substrate member 54 described later and a conductive member 546 (connection means). It is electrically connected. Accordingly, static electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 (the back surface portion 543c) can be released to the substrate member 545 through the conductive member 546.

  The liquid crystal device 543 has its thickness dimension (dimension in the depth direction in FIG. 159A) set smaller than the distance dimension from the rear opening 541 b side of the inner portion of the front case 541 to the front opening 541 a side. . Thus, the liquid crystal device 543 can be accommodated inside the front case 541. Further, the front case 541 is provided with a standing portion 541e standing on the inner side surface on one side in the short direction (the lower side in FIG. 159 (a)).

  The standing portion 541 e is formed so as to partially protrude from a substantially central position of the front case 541 in the longitudinal direction. The distance between the inner surface of the front case 541 on the side of the rear opening 541 b and the side of the standing portion 541 e is set to be substantially the same as the thickness of the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is disposed inside the front case 541, the side surface of the standing portion 541e is in contact with the liquid crystal device 543.

  That is, the standing portion 541e is engaged with the lower end portion of the liquid crystal device 543. Thus, in the state where the liquid crystal device 543 is disposed inside the front case 541, the liquid crystal device 543 is prevented from being displaced in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 gets out of the rear case 542) with respect to the front case 541. It can be easy.

  The shape of the liquid crystal display 543a in a front view is formed to be substantially the same as the shape of the opening 541a of the front case 541, and the size thereof is set to be substantially the same as the opening 541a. Thus, the player can visually recognize the entire area of the liquid crystal display 543a through the opening 541a of the front case 541.

  The liquid crystal device 543 has fastening holes 543 b circularly bored at both end portions in the longitudinal direction. The fastening hole 543b is a hole to which the tip of a screw inserted into the through hole 541d of the front case 541 is fastened, and the axis of the fastening hole 543b is in line with the axis of the through hole 541d when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled. It is formed in the shape of a circle. Accordingly, the liquid crystal device 543 can be fixed to the front case 541 by fastening a screw to the fastening hole 543 b through the through hole 541 d in a state where the liquid crystal device 543 is disposed inside the front case 541.

  Further, as described above, since the through hole 541 d is formed at the concave end of the recess 541 c, the head of the screw can be accommodated inside the recess 541 c in a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled. In addition, on the front opening side 541a side of the front case 541, a wall that covers the space of the recess 541c is formed. On the other hand, on the back opening side 541a side of the recess 541c, the back case 542 is attached at a position facing the recess 541c. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the fastening portion between the front case 541 and the liquid crystal device 543.

  The interposing member 544 is formed in a plate shape having a rectangular shape in a front view, and is projected in the longitudinal direction from a plurality of openings 544a opened in the plate thickness direction (the liquid crystal device 543 side to the substrate member 545 side) And a through hole 544c which is formed through the other end in the longitudinal direction in the plate thickness direction.

  The opening 544a is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the inner wall thereof is formed along the thickness direction. In the present embodiment, four positions are formed in the interposed member 544. Further, a plurality of openings 544a are formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 159A) than the middle position in the longitudinal direction, and the openings 544a are formed at different positions in the longitudinal direction.

  Since the pair of third portions 546b5 are disposed at different positions in the opening direction of the endless belt (cloth member 546b), the deformability of the cloth member 546b in the opening direction of the endless belt can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the four openings 544a are formed on one side (the lower side in FIG. 159A) of the center position of the interposing member 544 in the lateral direction. The interposing member 544 is formed in an outer shape slightly smaller than the front view shape of the front case 541, and is disposed on the back of the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, the four openings 544a are located on one side (the lower side in FIG. 159A) of the liquid crystal display 523 (front case 541) in the lateral direction than the central position in the lateral direction.

  As described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed so as to face the rear case 300 in a pair (see FIG. 7). Therefore, the opening 544a is biased to the opposite side in a state where the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 is directed to the player side (the state shown in FIGS. 7 and 11).

  The engaging portion 544 b is formed to project in the longitudinal direction from the end face of one end side (left side in FIG. 159A) of the interposing member 544 in the longitudinal direction, and the projecting tip end face is the short side of the interposing member 544 It is bent in both directions (FIG. 159 (a) vertical direction). That is, the engaging portion 544b is formed in a T-shape in a front view.

  The tip of the engaging portion 544 b is disposed inside the recess 541 c via the recess 541 c 1. Therefore, it is possible to position one end side (engaging portion 544b side) of the interposing member 544 in the longitudinal direction with respect to the front case 541 in the lateral direction.

  The through hole 544c is formed to penetrate in a circular shape in the thickness direction. The inner diameter of the through hole 544c is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the protrusion 541f formed by projecting in a cylindrical shape on the back surface of the other end of the front case 541 (right side in FIG. 159A) or from the outer diameter of the protrusion 541f Is also set a little larger. The through holes 544c and the protrusions 541f are formed coaxially in a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled.

  Therefore, when the interposing member 544 is mounted on the back surface of the liquid crystal device 543, the protrusion 541f can be inserted into the through hole 544c. As a result, the other end side (through hole 554 c side) of the interposing member 544 in the longitudinal direction can be positioned with respect to the front case 541.

  The interposed member 544 is positioned on both sides in the longitudinal direction with respect to the front case 541 by the through hole 544c and the engagement portion 544b as described above. As a result, movement (displacement) of the interposed member 544 with respect to the front case 541 can be suppressed.

  The substrate member 545 is formed in a plate shape having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and is formed smaller than the front view shape of the rear case 542. The substrate member 545 is formed by providing a plurality of LEDs for emitting light toward the back case 542 on the back side on the back case 542 side. Thereby, the back case 542 described later can be made to emit light.

  Further, the substrate member 545 includes a first region 545a in which a plurality of protrusions 545a1 (see FIG. 164) protruding toward the front case 541 are formed. The detailed description of the first area 545a will be described later.

  The substrate member 545 is formed with a plurality of through holes that are circularly opened in the thickness direction, and the through holes fit into a plurality of projections that project from the interposed member 544 in a columnar shape. It can be positioned relative to 544.

  The rear case 542 is formed to have a front view shape substantially the same as the front view shape of the front case 541 and a size substantially the same as the outer shape of the front case 541. Further, the rear case 542 is formed in a box shape opened on the front case 541 side. Therefore, by combining the front case 541 and the rear case 542, the liquid crystal device 543, the interposing member 544, and the substrate member 545 can be disposed between (inside) the facing of the front case 541 and the rear case 542.

  Next, the conductive member 546 will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162 is an exploded view of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG. FIG. 163 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 546, and FIG. 163 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 546 taken along line CLXIIIb-CLXIIIb of FIG. 163 (a). In FIG. 162, the state of being disassembled in the portion between the liquid crystal device 543 and the interposed member 544 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, in the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled, the conductive member 546 inserts the front portion (upper portion in FIG. 163 (a)) on the front case 541 side into the opening 544a. . In addition, the conductive member 546 has a front portion in contact with the back surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and a back surface portion (the lower portion in FIG. 163B) in contact with the first region 545a of the substrate member 545. .

  The conductive member 546 is formed in a rectangular solid long in one direction (left and right direction in FIG. 163A) before being assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523 (between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545). Note that the conductive member 546 is parallel to the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 165) of the opening 544a of the interposed member 544 in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 163A). It is arranged inside.

  In addition, the conductive member 546 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular outer shape in a front view before being assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, and the dimension in the longitudinal direction is the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the opening 544a of the interposed member 554. It is formed larger than that, and the dimension in the latitudinal direction is smaller than the distance dimension in the transversal direction of the opening 544a.

  In the state where the conductive member 546 is assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 546 is narrowed inward in the longitudinal direction at an intermediate portion between the contact surface with the back surface portion 543c and the contact surface with the first region 545a. A neck portion 546c is provided.

  The conductive member 546 mainly includes an elastic member 546a formed of an elastic material, and cloth members 546b disposed on four surfaces other than the two opposing surfaces of the elastic member 546a.

  The elastic member 546a is formed of a nonconductive sponge-like material. Further, in a state in which the cloth member 546b is not provided, the elastic member 546a is a rectangular solid that is long in one direction (that is, a state in which the narrow portion 546c of the conductive member 546 is not formed). In the present embodiment, the elastic member 546a is formed of a synthetic sponge which is foam-formed from a synthetic resin of polyurethane.

  The cloth member 546b is formed of an endless band-like cloth-like body (conductive cloth in the present embodiment) in which a fibrous body formed of a conductive metal material is woven. In addition, since the cloth member 546b is made of a fiber body of a metal material, it is easily deformed, and the back surface of the state in which the conductive member 546 is assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523 in a state of being wound around four sides of the elastic member 546a. By forming creases at both longitudinal end portions (left and right in FIG. 163A) of an intermediate portion between the contact surface with 543c and the contact surface with the first region 545a, the narrow portion 546c of the conductive member 546 is formed. It can be formed.

  Further, since the cloth member 546b is formed in an endless belt shape and the elastic member 546a is internally fitted to the cloth member 546b, the assembly of the conductive member 546 is simplified and the cost of parts is reduced. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the cloth member 546b can be formed of a conductive cloth, its flexibility can be secured, so that the durability when the cloth member 546b is repeatedly deformed due to the relative displacement of the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 It can improve.

  Although the case where the cloth member 546b is formed of a conductive cloth has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the cloth member 546b may be formed of a conductive non-woven fabric. As the conductive cloth or the conductive non-woven fabric, for example, a yarn in which a yarn in which one or both of copper and nickel are coated on the outer surface of polyester fiber is woven or unwoven to form a cloth (sheet) is exemplified. . Examples of the weave include plain weave, twill weave and the like.

  The cloth member 546b includes a first portion 546b3 that is in contact with one surface side (back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543, and a second portion 546b4 that is in contact with the ground portion 545d (protrusion 545a1) of the substrate member 545. The first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 have a pair of third portions 546b5 connecting the width dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 (the contact surface with the rear portion 543c of the first portion 546b3 Width dimension of the third portion 546b5 (with respect to the longitudinal dimension (dimension L11 (see FIG. 163 (a))) of the contact surface of the second portion 546b4 and the first region 545a) The opposing dimension (the dimension L12 (see FIG. 163 (b))) of the three portions 546b is set to a small dimension at least in part.

  Therefore, the cloth member 546b can be easily deformed in the endless belt-like opening direction by using the third portion 546b5. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 is displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposing direction and toward the endless belt-like opening of the fabric member 546b, the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b of the fabric member 546b The portion 546b4 can be prevented from sliding relative to the one surface side of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

  Further, as described above, by forming a crease in the cloth member 546b, the elastic member 546a can be elastically deformed to form the constricted portion 546c in the conductive member 546. Therefore, the elastic member 546a is held in an elastically deformed state it can. Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the elastic member 546a can be increased in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other (vertical direction in FIG. 163A). As a result, the elastic member 546a can be easily held between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545.

  Further, the cloth member 546b is bonded to the contact surface with the elastic member 546a, and both ends thereof are bonded. As described above, since the elastic member 546a is formed of a sponge body, the bonding area of the cloth member 546b is reduced by the amount of air bubbles when the sponge body is formed. Therefore, the cloth member 546b is easily peeled off from the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a. When the cloth member 546b is peeled from the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a, it becomes difficult to maintain the contact state between the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 546, and static electricity accumulated in the liquid crystal device 523 described later There was a risk that it would be difficult to escape to 545a1).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the cloth member 546b is bonded at both ends, the area of the bonding surface of the cloth member 546b can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cloth member 546b from peeling off the four surfaces of the elastic member 546a.

  Also, with the cloth member 546b, the bonding surfaces at both ends thereof are disposed in one narrow portion 546c of the conductive member 546 (that is, the bonding surfaces of the ends of the cloth member 546b to one of the pair of third portions 546b5) Is formed). Thus, the contact area between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be secured.

  That is, when the end portions of the cloth member 546b are adhered to each other, a step is formed by overlapping the end portions, so that the adhesion surfaces of both ends contact surfaces of the conductive member 546 with the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545. When the contact portion is formed, the contact area between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 is reduced by the difference in level.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cloth member 546b is formed in an endless band shape by connecting one end and the other end of the band shape, and the connection portion connecting the one end and the other end of the band is one surface side of the liquid crystal device 543. (Rear surface portion 543c) or the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 so as not to be in contact, the connection portion becomes a step, and one surface side of the liquid crystal device 543 or the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 It can suppress that the contact | abutting state with becomes unstable. That is, the contact area can be secured, and the sliding of the cloth member 546b with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 can be suppressed, and the electric charge can be easily removed.

  Further, in a state where the conductive member 546 is not assembled to the liquid crystal display device 52, the distance dimension between opposing outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of left and right narrow portions 546c (a dimension L13 between opposing outer peripheral portions of the third portions 546b5) (See FIG. 163 (a)) is larger than the longitudinal dimension of the opening 544a of the insertion member 544.

  Accordingly, when the conductive member 546 is inserted into the opening 544a of the interposing member 544, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546 can be elastically deformed, so that the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily assembled.

  That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 includes a plate-like interposed member 544 interposed between the one surface side (back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and having an opening 544a formed therein. Since the longitudinal size of the opening 544a of the insertion member 544 is smaller than the longitudinal size of the conductive member 546 in the unloaded state, the opening 544a of the insertion member 544 has both longitudinal sides thereof. Two sides can be held.

  Therefore, the assembly work can be performed while holding the conductive member 546 in the interposed member 544, and the positioning with respect to the conductive member 546 can be performed along with the disposition of the interposed member 544. The improvement of the work efficiency of

  In the state where the conductive member 546 is assembled to the liquid crystal display device 523, the constricted portion 546c is smaller than the dimension in the longitudinal direction of the opening 544a, and two sides of the conductive member 546 in the longitudinal direction are not held by the aperture 544a. In addition, the conductive member 546 is interposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and is only inserted into the inner circumferential surface of the opening 544a, and is not fixed by a screw or the like. When assembling, it is difficult to hold the conductive member 546. Therefore, it was necessary to carefully assemble the liquid crystal display device 523.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the conductive member 546 can be held by holding the two surfaces at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the conductive member 546 in the openings 544a, the assembly of the liquid crystal display device 523 is simplified. Can be done. In addition, although the details will be described later, when the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 523 and the substrate member 545, the conductive member 546 is compressed so that the elastic member 546a is deformed inward by the amount of bubbles formed. Thus, the state of being held by the opening 544a can be eliminated.

  Further, as described above, the four openings 544a face the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 in a state where the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 is directed to the player side (state shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 11). It is arranged biased to the Accordingly, the conductive member 546 disposed inside the opening 544a is also biased toward the opposing side of the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 in a state where the liquid crystal display 543a is directed to the player side.

  Here, with the liquid crystal display 543a directed to the player side, when making the opposing liquid crystal display device 523 collide (merge) at the center of the back case 300 (see FIG. 7), the two liquid crystal displays 543a In order to make it easy for the player to visually recognize as one display surface, it is necessary to bring the liquid crystal display devices 523 close to each other.

  In addition, since the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523 has an edge where the liquid crystal can not be displayed at the outer edge, the player can view the two liquid crystal displays 543a as one display surface. It is necessary to arrange the two liquid crystal devices 523 without a gap.

  Therefore, in order to move the two liquid crystal display devices 523 closer to each other, the two liquid crystal display devices 523 easily collide. Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543 disposed inside the liquid crystal display device 523 and the substrate member 545 are easily shaken. Therefore, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 inside the liquid crystal display device 523 may collide with other members.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in a state where the opening 544a faces the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 546 is disposed to be biased to the opposite side. It is possible to easily suppress the shaking inside the liquid crystal device 523 which occurs when the liquid crystal display device 523 collides.

  That is, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, the kinetic energy on the collision side is high. Therefore, the collision side of the liquid crystal device 543, the interposed member 544 and the substrate member 545 disposed inside the liquid crystal display device 523 It is easy to shake. Therefore, when the substrate member 543, the interposing member 544 and the substrate member 545 swing, the substrate member 545 collides with another member (for example, the interposing member 544) to short the wiring, or the liquid crystal display 543a of the liquid crystal device 543a. Etc. may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, the liquid crystal device 543 disposed in the liquid crystal display device 523, the interposed member 544 and the substrate member 545 are electrically conductive on the swinging side. Since the member 546 is disposed, when the liquid crystal display devices 523 collide with each other, the elastic force of the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546 can easily suppress the movement of the liquid crystal device 543, the interposed member 544, and the substrate member 545. . As a result, damage to the liquid crystal device 543, the interposed member 544 and the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164, the first region 545a of the substrate member 545 will be described in detail. Fig. 164 (a) is a front view of the substrate member 545, and Fig. 164 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along line CLXIVb-CLXIVb of Fig. 164 (a). In FIG. 164, the first region 545a is illustrated by a broken line. Also, in FIG. 164 (a), the wire 545g is illustrated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the substrate member 545 is formed of a plate member 545c formed of a non-conductive resin material in a plate-like body and a conductive metal material disposed on one side of the plate member 545c. And a covering member 545e which is disposed so as to cover one surface side of the ground portion 545d and the plate member 545c, and is mainly formed of a nonconductive resin material. .

  The plate member 545c is a plate member that forms a skeleton of the substrate member 545, and is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view of the substrate member 545.

  The ground portion 545 d is a conductor that conducts electricity to the control component placed on the substrate member 545. The ground portion 545 d in the present embodiment is formed over the entire area of the first region 545 a. Further, the substrate member 545 is formed between the covering member 545 e and the plate member 545 c and is provided with a wire 545 g connected to each ground portion 545.

  The wire 545g is formed of a metal material and connected to a connector 545f disposed on the substrate member 545. The wire 545g is connected (conductive) to the ground (not shown) of the pachinko machine 10 via the connector 545f. Thus, the electricity input to the ground portion 545 d can escape to the ground of the pachinko machine 10 through the wiring 545 g.

  The covering member 545 e is disposed to cover the entire surface of the ground portion 545 d and the plate member 545 c. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the discharge of electricity that conducts the ground portion 545d and the wiring 545g to another member (such as a chip disposed on the base member 545).

  In addition, the covering member 545e is not formed around the protrusion 545a1 disposed on the substrate member 545, and is in a state of being separated from the protrusion 545a1 by a predetermined distance. In this case, a projection 545a1, which will be described later, protrudes from the covering member 545e. Thereby, the contact (connection) between the conductive member 546 and the ground portion 545d can be secured (see FIG. 164 (b)).

  The plate member 545c, the ground portion 545d, and the covering member 545e described above are illustrated only in FIG. 164 (b), and illustration in other drawings is omitted.

  The first region 545a mainly includes a plurality of protrusions 545a1 protruding toward the liquid crystal device 543 and a plurality of through holes 545a2 penetrating in a circular shape in the thickness direction of the substrate member 545 (the left and right direction in FIG. 164B). It is formed and provided.

  The plurality of through holes 545 a 2 are formed in the first region 545 a in a plurality in the longitudinal direction and the short direction of the substrate member 545. In the present embodiment, five pieces are formed in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 and four pieces are arranged in the lateral direction of the substrate member 545.

  In the through holes 545a2, protrusions 545a2 described later in the longitudinal direction and the short direction of the substrate member 545 are internally fitted at every other place. Therefore, in the present embodiment, three through holes 545 a 2 in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 and two through holes 545 a 2 in the latitudinal direction are formed in a state of penetrating in the plate thickness direction (a state where the projections 545 a 1 are not fitted). .

  The protrusion 545a1 is formed of solder soldered to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545. That is, the arrangement of the projections 545a1 in the through holes 545a2 is performed by soldering to the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545.

  Therefore, the projections 545 a 1 can be formed in the process of soldering the electronic component to the substrate member 545. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a process for forming the protrusion 545a1, and the process can be used in common. Therefore, the number of processes can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Further, by forming the projections 545a1 by solder soldered to the ground portion 545d, the contact area between the cloth member 546b and the ground portion 545d can be secured by that amount, and the substrate is charged when the liquid crystal device 543 is charged. The charge can be easily removed via the ground portion 545 d of the member 545.

  The protrusion 545a1 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 545a2. Further, the projection 545a1 is disposed in a state of being internally fitted inside the through hole 545a2, and the outer diameter of the tip on the liquid crystal device 543 side is formed by expanding in the radial direction, and the state of projecting from the through hole 545a2 It is assumed.

  Thus, the protrusion 545a1 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 can be connected (abutted), so that the electricity conducted to the protrusion 545a1 is through the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 and the wiring 545g. It can be released to the earth of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the projection 545a1, the radially expanded distal end abuts on the liquid crystal device 543 side of the ground portion 545d, and the outer peripheral surface of the base end portion contacts the inner edge portion of the through hole 545a penetrating to the ground portion 545d. Since they are in contact with each other, the contact area between the protrusion 545a1 and the ground portion 545d can be secured. As a result, static electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be easily released to the substrate member 545.

  In addition, the cloth member 546b can be made to conform to the shape of the protrusion 545a1, and the cloth member 546b slides with respect to one surface side (back surface portion 543c) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 Can be suppressed.

  That is, since the protrusion 545a1 is in a state in which the tip end protrudes from the substrate member 545, the protrusion 545a1 can be disposed in a state of being bited into the side surface of the conductive member 546. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the conductive member 546 to be misaligned in the direction (shearing direction) parallel to the front surface (left side surface in FIG. 164 (b)) of the substrate member 545. As a result, static electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be easily released to the substrate member 545.

  The protrusions 545a1 are spaced apart from one another at a plurality of through holes 545a2 formed in a row. That is, the protrusions 545a1 are disposed in a staggered manner with respect to the through holes 545a2.

  Therefore, the plurality of protrusions 545a1 can be used to prevent the cloth member 546b from sliding relative to the substrate member 545, and the liquid crystal device 543 can easily remove the charge, and the through holes 545a2 are used. Thus, the heat generated between the projection and the cloth member 546b can be efficiently dissipated.

  That is, since the conductive member 546 has static electricity flowing to the cloth member 546b, heat is easily stored by the electricity, and there is a possibility that the substrate member 545 may be broken by the heat, it is easy to discharge the heat through the through hole 545a2 Since the conductive member 546 is cooled, the substrate member 545 can be suppressed from being broken.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166, the arrangement of the conductive members 546 will be described. FIG. 165 is a rear view of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG. 166 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 taken along line CLXVIa-CLXVIa of FIG. 165, and FIG. 166 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 taken along line CLXVIb-CLXVIb of FIG. FIG. 166 (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the range LXVIIIc of FIG. 166 (b).

  Note that FIG. 165 shows a state in which the back case 542 and the substrate member 545 of the liquid crystal display device 523 are removed, and in FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 (c), the back case 542 and the substrate member 545 are attached. The situation is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the conductive member 546 is in a state in which the front side (the first portion 546b3 side described later (FIG. 166 (b) upper side) is in contact with the back portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543) The back side (the second portion 546b4 side described later (FIG. 166 (b) lower side) is in contact with the first region 545a (see FIG. 164 (a)) of the substrate member 545, and the elastic member 546a is a liquid crystal The device 543 and the substrate member 545 are disposed in a compressed state in the opposing direction.

  That is, when the conductive member 546 is not provided in the liquid crystal display device 523, the distance L4 in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 (see FIG. 163A) is the liquid crystal device 543. The distance dimension L5 between the substrate member 545 and the substrate member 545 is set larger. Therefore, in the state where the substrate member 545 is assembled to the liquid crystal device 543, the conductive member 546 can be compressed in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545.

  Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the conductive member 546 in the opposing direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 166) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be enhanced. The conductive member 546 can be brought into contact with the conductive member 546, and the contact can be easily maintained.

  In addition, since the constricted portion 546c is formed in the conductive member 546 and the elastic member 546a is formed of a compressible material, the conductive member 546 is compressed in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 (small ), The compression force can be applied to the fold portion of the cloth member 546b of the constricted portion 546c, and the constricted portion 546c can be folded inside the conductive member 546.

  As a result, as described above, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is assembled (when the conductive member 546 is interposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545), two ends of the conductive member 546 in the longitudinal direction The state of being held between the surface and the opening 544a of the interposing member 544 can be eliminated.

  More specifically, in the configuration in which the conductive member 546 is held between the opening 544a of the interposed member 544 smaller than the size of the conductive member 546 in the unloaded state, the shear deformation of the elastic member 546a is inhibited. When the substrate member 545 or the substrate member 545 is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposite direction, the cloth member 546b may slide relative to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state where the elastic member 546a is formed of the compressible elastic member 546a and the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the opening of the interposed member 544 Since a gap is formed between the inner edge of 544a and the outer surface of the conductive member 546 other than the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cloth member 546b, the conductive member 546 (elastic member 546a) is at the inner edge of the opening 544a. Restraint can be suppressed. That is, at the time of the assembly operation, the conductive member 546 is held by the interposed member 544 (the opening 544a) to improve the workability of the assembly operation, while the assembly state (conductive member between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545). In the state where 546 is held), the elastic deformation of the elastic member 546a can be facilitated, and the cloth member 546b can be prevented from sliding relative to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545.

  The first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cloth member 546b are in contact with the back surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d (protrusions 545a1) of the substrate member 545, so the contact area can be secured. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is charged, the charge can be easily removed via the ground portion 545 d of the substrate member 545.

  In addition, the outer surface of both ends in the longitudinal direction (the third portion 546b5 side of the cloth member 546b) of the elastic member 546a on the side held by the opening 544a of the interposing member 544 is inwardly tapered (concave) Since the portion 546c is provided, when the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the outer surface of the elastic member 546a of the interposed member 544 starts from the inwardly narrowed portion 546c. It can be easily deformed in a direction away from the inner edge of the opening 544a (inward of the elastic member 546a). As a result, a gap can be reliably formed between the inner edge of the opening 544a of the interposing member 544 and the outer surface of the conductive member 546.

  Further, the conductive member 546 is formed into an endless belt shape by connecting a cloth member 546b with one end and the other end of the belt shape, and an elastic member 546a is internally fitted to the cloth member 546b. Is formed on the outer surface (the third portion 546b5 side of the cloth member 546b) of the elastic member 546a that is recessed toward the inner side of the elastic member 546a. In the space which is formed, it is possible to accommodate a connection portion in which one end and the other end of the strip are connected. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the connecting portion connecting the strip-like one end and the other end to abut on the inner edge of the opening 544a of the interposing member 544. As a result, the deformability of the conductive member 546 can be secured.

  That is, on the bonding surface of the end portions of the cloth member 546b, the bonding portion of the cloth member 546 is less likely to be plastically deformed due to the bonding of the bonding material. In this embodiment, since the bonding position is a position different from the position of the fold of the cloth member 546b, when the conductive member 546b is compressed in the direction in which the liquid phase device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other, the cloth member The position of the fold of 546b can be folded in.

  Further, since the bonded portion is less likely to be plastically deformed, plastic deformation of the cloth member 546b can be suppressed by increasing the elastic recovery force of the elastic member 546a in the process of compressing the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546. As a result, the constricted portion 546c can be easily folded inside the conductive member 546.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 166 (c), the projection 545a1 is disposed in a state of protruding from the substrate member 545 (covering member 545e), so that the conductive member 546 abuts on the opening edge of the through hole 545a2. It can be suppressed. That is, since the conductive member 546 can be lifted by the projection 545a1 to form a space between the substrate member 545 (the through hole 545a2) and the conductive member 546, blocking of the through hole 545a2 by the conductive member 546 can be suppressed.

  Thus, the outside air is made to flow from the through hole 545a into the space between the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 546, or the air in the space between the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 546 is made to flow out through the through hole ka 545a. be able to. That is, it is possible to easily cool the conductive member 546 and the substrate member 545 by securing (increasing) the circulation path of air. As a result, damage to the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 167, the case where the facing distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 changes will be described. FIGS. 167 (a) to 167 (c) are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG.

  167 (a) to 167 (c) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166 (b). Also, in FIG. 167 (a) and FIG. 167 (c), the state in which the facing distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is changed is illustrated, with FIG. 167 (b) as the normal state (reference position).

  Here, as described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed so as to be capable of displacement (rotation about the rotation shaft 523c as a rotation center and slide displacement accompanying expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) (FIGS. 7 to 14). reference). Therefore, there is a possibility that the positional relationship of each component inside the liquid crystal display 523 may change due to the inertial force of the displacement. In this case, when the distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 changes, the contact state of the conductive member 546 interposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be released. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 167, since the conductive member 546 is formed of the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a, the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal are deformed by elastic deformation of the elastic member 546a. The contact state between the device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be easily maintained.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 167 (a), when the distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is close and the distance dimension L6 is smaller than the distance dimension L5, the distance dimension L6 is adjusted. The elastic member 546a is compressed in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 167 (a) of FIG. 167) of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 to maintain the contact between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. it can.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167 (c), the distance between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is separated and is larger than the distance dimension L5 and smaller than the dimension L4 of the conductive member 546 (see FIG. 163). In the case of L7, since the elastic member 546a is disposed in a compressed state between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is a liquid crystal device in accordance with the distance dimension L7. By elastically deforming in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 167C) of the substrate member 545 and the substrate member 545, the contact state between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be maintained.

  That is, between the facing of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the conductive member 546 which can be elastically deformed in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 167 (b)) is disposed. When the distance between the facings changes, the contact state between the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be easily maintained.

  Next, the case where the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 change in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (a) to 168 (c) are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG.

  168 (a) to 168 (c) correspond to the cross sectional view of FIG. 166 (a). Also, in FIG. 168 (a), the liquid crystal device 543 is on one side (the right side in FIG. 168 (a)) of the liquid crystal display 523 with respect to the substrate member 545 in FIG. 168 (a). The changed state is illustrated in FIG. 168 (c) in which the liquid crystal device 543 is changed to the other side (left side in FIG. 168 (c)) of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545.

  In FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (c), the imaginary line KJ1 is at the center position of the first region 545a in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545, and the first portion 546b3 of the cloth member 546b (see FIG. 163 (a)). An imaginary line KJ2 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the image.

  Here, conventionally, an electric device (liquid crystal device 543), a substrate (substrate member 545) having a ground portion (ground portion 545d) disposed opposite to one surface of the electric device and connected to ground, and the substrate There is known a gaming machine provided with connection means (electrically conductive member 546 in the present embodiment) for electrically connecting an electric device to the ground portion of the above. Specifically, the electric device is formed as a liquid crystal display device in which a shield member (back surface portion 543c) made of a metal plate is provided on the back surface of the liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal display 543a). Also, in the conventional product, the connection means is formed as a bow-shaped leaf spring, and the base end is in contact (electrically connected) with the ground portion of the substrate and the bow-shaped convex surface is in contact with the shield member (electrically Connected). The connection means is fixed to the substrate at the base end, and the convex convex surface is pressed against the shield member, and the contact is kept by the elastic deformation of the leaf spring. Thus, static electricity generated in the shield member can be released to the ground through the ground portion of the substrate. Therefore, for example, even if the shield member is charged by static electricity generated by rolling of the game ball or displacement of the liquid crystal display device, the charge is removed through the ground portion of the substrate, color unevenness of the liquid crystal display, dot missing, etc. Occurrence of problems of

  However, in the above-described conventional technology, the shield is caused by the displacement of the electric device or the vibration of the electric device due to the displacement of another effect member or the input of an external force accompanying the rolling or collision of the game ball. When the member and the substrate are displaced relative to each other in the direction orthogonal to the opposite direction, the arcuate convex surface of the connection means is slid relative to the shield member, causing wear of the connection means or the contact object of the connection means. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the one surface (rear surface portion 543c) side of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 or When the substrate member 545 is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposing direction, shear deformation occurs along with the relative displacement (a direction orthogonal to the opposing direction in the first portion 546b3 side and the second portion 546b4 side of the fabric member 546b) Since the conductive member 546 is formed so as to be able to be deformed (longitudinal direction of the conductive member 546), the back surface 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d of the substrate member 545 are formed 545a1) can be maintained in contact with each other. That is, by shear deformation of the conductive member 546, the first portion 546b3 or the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 546 can be prevented from sliding (displacement) with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545. As a result, wear of the conductive member 546 or the contact target (the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545) of the conductive member 546 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the conductive member 546 is sandwiched between the back surface portion 543c of the liquid crystal device 543 and the ground portion 545d (protrusion 545a1) of the substrate member 545, the conductive member 546 is held between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 during assembly. It is sufficient to hold the conductive member 546 in place, eliminating the need for work such as fastening. As a result, the workability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 168, when the liquid crystal device 543 changes in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 168 (b)) of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 546 By elastically deforming, it is possible to suppress displacement of the contact surface.

  Explaining in detail, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), the liquid crystal device 543 changes to the one side (the right side in FIG. 168 (a)) of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545. When the imaginary line KJ2 changes to one side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523), the bending angle of the fold formed in the third portion 546b5 is made shallow (obtuse) while the first portion 546b3 side is The elastic member 546a is displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction.

  In this case, as described above, the conductive member 546 elastically recovers the elastic member 546a in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 by the first portion 546b3 of the cloth member 546b being folded inside the conductive member 546. Since it is easily formed, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the contact surfaces of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cloth member 546b and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. As a result, wear of the conductive member 546 or the contact target (the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545) of the conductive member 546 can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of rotating the liquid crystal display device 523 90 degrees around the axis of the base member 400. In this case, when the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is changed from being parallel to the horizontal direction to be parallel to the direction of gravity, the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 disposed inside the liquid crystal display device 523 The holding direction of the liquid crystal device 543 changes, and the holding portion of the interposed member 544 and the substrate member 545 with respect to the liquid crystal device 543 is a protrusion 541 f and a through hole 544 c of one longitudinal direction (upper side in the gravity direction) portion of the front case 541. Since it is only (see FIG. 161), the interposed member 544 and the substrate member 545 tend to be displaced in the direction of gravity with respect to the liquid crystal device 543.

  Therefore, the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 with the conductive member 546 are easily displaced. Therefore, when the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 are displaced, the contact object may be worn.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 546 is disposed in a direction in which the endless belt-like opening direction is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Thus, the deformability of the conductive member 546 in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be enhanced.

  Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees around the axis of the base member 400, and the longitudinal direction is positioned parallel to the gravity direction from the state where the longitudinal direction is positioned parallel to the horizontal direction (see FIG. 7) It is possible to suppress positional deviation of the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 when being displaced in the state (see FIG. 11). As a result, when the contact surfaces of the substrate member 545 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 are displaced, the contact object can be prevented from being worn out.

  Here, both ends in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 according to the present embodiment are supported, and the slide unit SL is configured to be slidably displaceable in the lateral direction (see FIGS. 7 to 14). In this case, driving means (driving motor 431) for enabling slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is connected to the liquid crystal display device 523 at one end side in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is slidingly displaced, static electricity generated by the drive of the drive motor 431 is easily transmitted from one side of the liquid crystal display device 523 in the longitudinal direction.

  On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device 523 in the present embodiment, the opening 544a of the interposing member 544 is formed (disposed) so as to be biased toward one end side in the longitudinal direction of the interposing member 544. Accordingly, the conductive member 546 disposed in the opening 544 a is disposed in a state of being biased toward one end side of the liquid crystal display device 523.

  Therefore, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is slidingly displaced in the short direction, the static electricity transmitted from the drive means (drive motor 431) to the liquid crystal device 543 is transmitted to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 543. The conductive member 546 transmits the ground portion 545 d of the substrate member 545 to the ground portion 545 d. Therefore, static electricity due to slide displacement can be prevented from being accumulated in the liquid crystal device 543. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of defects such as color unevenness and missing dots in the liquid crystal display of the liquid crystal device 523.

  When the liquid crystal device 543 changes in the left direction (left direction in FIG. 168C) with respect to the substrate member 545 shown in FIG. 168C, the liquid crystal device 543 shown in FIG. This is only the opposite of the case where the member 545 is changed in the right direction (right direction in FIG. 168 (c)), and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, a conductive member 14546 according to a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170. In the thirteenth embodiment, the cloth member 546b is formed to have a constant width around the elastic member 546a. However, in the fourteenth embodiment, the cloth member 14546b is formed to have different widths. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  169 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 14546 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 169 (b) is a side view of the conductive member 14546 in the direction of the arrow CLXIXb in FIG. 169 (a); FIG. 169 (c) is a side view of the conductive member 14546 in the direction of the arrow CLXIXc of FIG. 170 (a) to 170 (c) are cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG.

  170 (a) to 170 (c) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 166 (a). Also, in FIG. 170 (a) to FIG. 170 (c), with the position shown in FIG. 170 (b) as the normal (reference) position, in FIG. In the state of FIG. 170 (c), the liquid crystal device 543 is the other side of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545 in FIG. 170 (c). The state changed to the upper side 170 (c) is illustrated respectively. Furthermore, in FIG. 170, the notches 14546b1 and 14546b2 are illustrated by dashed lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the cloth member 14546b of the conductive member 14546 in the fourteenth embodiment has the short side of the liquid crystal display 523 in the third portion 14546b5 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 169 (a)). A notch 14546b1 is cut out from the end face of the other side (right side in FIG. 169) toward one side (left side in FIG. 169) of the liquid crystal display 523 and one end side in the longitudinal direction From the end face of one side (the right side in FIG. 169) of the liquid crystal display device 523 to the third portion 14546b5 of the right side 169 (a), the other side in the lateral direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 (FIG. The notch 14546b2 is cut out toward the left side).

  The notch 14546b1 is formed substantially at the middle position between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 169A), and the opening direction width of the cloth member 14546b is equal to that of the conductive member 14546 The width dimension of the cloth member 14546b in the opening direction is set to about one third. In addition, the cutout dimension in the opposing direction (left and right direction in FIG. 169 (b)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cutout portion 14546b1 is the opposing direction dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 It is set larger than half of.

  The notch portion 14546b2 is formed substantially at the middle position between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 169A), and the opening direction width of the cloth member 14546b is the conductive member It is set to about one third of the width dimension in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b of 14546. Further, the cutout dimension in the opposing direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 169 (c)) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the cutout portion 14546b2 is the opposing direction dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546. It is set larger than half of.

  That is, the notch portion 14546b1 and the notch portion 14546b2 are formed at substantially the same position in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, and at least a part of each overlaps the longitudinal direction of the conductive member 14546 It will be in the state. This makes it easy to shear the side surfaces of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 14546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b.

  Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 14546 elastically deforms, whereby the conductive member 14546, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 It is possible to suppress positional deviation of the contact surface with the

  Specifically, when the cloth member 14546b is formed in an endless shape by arranging the cloth member 14546b for the four faces other than the two opposing faces of the elastic member 546a, the elastic deformation of the elastic member 546a in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b occurs. Because the cloth member 14546b is obstructed, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 displace each other in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b, the contact surface between the conductive member 14546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is misaligned. I was afraid to do it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170 (a) or FIG. 170 (b), the notch 14546b1 and the notch 14546b2 are formed in the third portion 14546b5, whereby the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b The rigidity of the Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the opening direction of the cloth member 14546b with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a (conductive member 14546) is located at the middle portion between the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4. It can be deformed.

  Therefore, positional deviation of the contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 14546 can be suppressed. As a result, abrasion of the contact surface between the substrate member 545 or the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 14546 can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, the engaging portion 544 b is formed at one end in the longitudinal direction of the interposed member 545, and is inserted into the recessed portion 541 c 1 formed in the front case 541. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 523 is configured to be rotatable by 90 degrees around the axis of the base member 400. When the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 is parallel to the direction of gravity, the other end of the longitudinal direction is located on the upper side in the direction of gravity, and one end in the longitudinal direction is located on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Therefore, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the interposing member 544 is only engaged with the engaging portion 544 b, and accordingly, the interposing member 544 and the interposing member 544 are engaged with the rotational displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523. The substrate member 545 is easily displaced in the lateral direction with respect to the liquid crystal device 543. Therefore, the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 may be displaced, and the contact object may be worn away.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by forming the notches 14546b1 and the notches 14546b2 in the conductive member 546, the conductive member 546 can be easily sheared in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. That is, shear deformation can be facilitated in the short direction of the interposing member 544. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the lateral direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 546 can be sheared and deformed. As a result, the contact surfaces of the conductive member 546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 may be displaced, and wear of the contact target can be suppressed.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the conductive member 546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped has been described. However, in the fifteenth embodiment, the through hole 15546d is formed to penetrate in the longitudinal direction in the conductive member 15546. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  171 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 15546 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 171 (b) is a side view of the conductive member 15546 in the direction of the arrow CCLXIXb in FIG. 171 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 171, the conductive member 15546 according to the fifteenth embodiment is formed into a rectangular parallelepiped one end of which is formed with a through hole 15546d penetrating in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 171A). The through hole 15546d is formed to penetrate the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a.

  The through hole 15546d is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a side view parallel or orthogonal to the first portion 546b3 (upper surface in FIG. 171A) of the conductive member 15546. Further, the through hole 15546d is formed at the center of the elastic member 546a in top view.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the distance dimension in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the through hole 15546d is half the distance dimension in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the conductive member 15546. The distance dimension in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 of the through hole 15546d is set to half the distance dimension in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 of the conductive member 15546.

  When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the substrate member 545 by the through holes 15546 d, the elastic member 546 a of the conductive member 15 546 is elastically deformed and the conductive member 15546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 Positional displacement of the contact surface can be suppressed.

  Specifically, by forming the through holes 15546d in the conductive member 15546, the rigidity of the conductive member 15546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b can be reduced. Therefore, the conductive member 15546 can be easily sheared in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4.

  Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in one of the opposing directions of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is sheared to deform the conductive member 15546 and the liquid crystal device. It is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the contact surfaces between the substrate 545 and the substrate member 545. As a result, contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 with the conductive member 15546 can be rubbed to prevent damage to the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, or the conductive member 15546.

  In addition, the first recess 15546d1 recessed in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b is provided at both ends of the opening direction of the cloth member 546b on both upper and lower inner surfaces of the through hole 15546d in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5. Are formed over the Also, the conductive member 15546 includes a second recess 15546d2 that is recessed at a position facing the first recess 15546d1. That is, the first concave portion 15546d1 and the second concave portion 15546d2 are formed at positions facing each other, and are recessed in the opposing direction.

  When the conductive member 15546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the first concave portion 15546d1 and the second concave portion 15546d2 crush the inner side of the concaved portion by the elastic member 546a being compressed and held. It is assumed that the

  Here, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in one of the opposing directions of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 with respect to the substrate member 545, the upper and lower side surfaces of the conductive member 15546 (elastic member 546a) stretch. To transform. Therefore, with the deformation, the conductive member 15546 is drawn to the side of the liquid crystal device 543 facing the substrate member 545. Therefore, the area in which the conductive member 15546 abuts on the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the first recess 15546d1 and the second recess 15546d2 are formed, when the end face of the conductive member 15546 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b extends and is deformed, the first recess 15546d1 and the first recess 15546d1 are formed. The recessed surface of the second recess 15546 d 2 can be expanded. Thus, the conductive member 15546 can be prevented from being drawn to the opposing gap side of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. As a result, reduction in the contact area between the conductive member 15546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the conductive member 15546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped has been described. However, in the sixteenth embodiment, the concave portion 16546e is provided in the conductive member 16546. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  172 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 16546 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 172 (b) is a side view of the conductive member 16546 in the direction of the arrow CLXXIIb of FIG. 172 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 172, the conductive member 16546 of the sixteenth embodiment is provided with a recessed portion 16546e which is recessed on the end face in the opening direction (left and right in FIG. 172 (b)) of the cloth member 546b. That is, the recessed portion 16546e is formed by partially cutting the cloth member 546b and the elastic member 546a.

  The recessed portion 16546e is recessed on the upper surface side (left surface side in FIG. 172 (b)) and the lower surface side (right surface side in FIG. 172 (c)) of the conductive member 16546, and in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5. It is formed over the entire area. Further, the recessed portion 16546e is formed at the center of the opposing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 172A) of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the distance dimension of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the recessed portion 16546e in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 172A) corresponds to the first portion 546b3 and the second portion of the conductive member 16546. The recess depth dimension (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 172) of one recessed portion 16546e is set to half the distance dimension in the opposing direction of the 546b4 in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 16546 (FIG. b) It is set to one third of the distance dimension in the left and right direction).

  When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b with respect to the substrate member 545 by the recessed portion 16546e, the elastic member 546a of the conductive member 16546 elastically deforms, thereby the conductive member 16546 and the liquid crystal device 543. And it can suppress that a contact surface with the substrate member 545 shifts in position.

  Describing in detail, by forming the recessed portion 16546e in the conductive member 16546, the rigidity in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b of the conductive member 16546 can be reduced. Therefore, the conductive member 15546 can be easily sheared from the middle position in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4.

  Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced relative to the substrate member 545 to one of the openings of the cloth member 546b, the elastic member 546a is deformed to abut the conductive member 16546 with the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. It is possible to suppress displacement of the surface. As a result, it is possible to suppress breakage of the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, or the conductive member 546 due to rubbing of the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 with the conductive member 16546.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the third concave portion 16546e1 concaved in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 is provided at the end of the opening direction of the cloth member 546b on the side surface facing the two concave portions 16546e. The third portion 546b5 is formed over the entire area in the opposite direction of the third portion 546b5.

  In the third recess 16546e1, when the conductive member 16546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is compressed and held so that the concaved inner side is crushed. Ru.

  Here, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 in one of the opening directions of the cloth member 546b, the opening direction of the cloth member 546b of the elastic member 546a located between the facing portions of the recessed portions 16546e. The end face stretches and deforms. Therefore, the conductive member 16546 is drawn between the facing of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 with the deformation. Therefore. The area where the conductive member 16546 abuts on the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the third concave portion 16546e1 is formed, the end face in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b of the elastic member 546a located between the opposing portions of the concave portion 16546e extends and deforms. The recessed surface of the three recessed portion 16546e1 is expanded. Thus, the conductive member 16546 can be prevented from being drawn to the side between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. As a result, reduction in the contact area between the conductive member 16546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

  A seventeenth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175. Although the case where the conductive member 546 is formed in a cube has been described in the thirteenth embodiment, in the seventeenth embodiment, the conductive member 17546 is formed in a different shape. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the conductive member 17546 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 (a) is a top view of a conductive member 17546 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 173 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 17546 taken along line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb of FIG. 173 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 173, the conductive member 17546 is formed such that the first portion 17546b3 is curved in an arc shape in top view, and the second portion 546b4 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion A narrow portion 546c is formed at an intermediate position in the opposing direction of the portion 546b4 and inclined toward the central side in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5.

  The conductive member 17546 is formed of an elastic member 17546a formed of an elastic material inside and a cloth member 546b disposed around the elastic member 17546a.

  The elastic member 17546a is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped portion 17546a1 formed in a rectangular shape having a rectangular shape in the top view and a circular arc portion 17546a2 projecting in a semicircular arc shape from one side of the rectangular portion 17546a1.

  The arc portion 17546a2 has a length in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 173 (a) of FIG. 173) of the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of 3 in the opposing direction of the first portion 17546b3 and the second portion 546b4 of the elastic member 17546a. The size is set to about one-half, and a constricted portion 546c is formed in the arc portion 17546a2. As a result, the elastic member 17546a can be easily elastically deformed in the opposing direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 173A) from the necked portion 546c. The conductive member 17546 is formed in a fixed shape in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175, a state in which the elastic member 17546a is disposed in the liquid crystal display device 523 will be described.

  FIG. 174A and FIG. 174B are schematic cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG. 175 (a) to 175 (c) are schematic cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device 523. FIG.

  Note that FIG. 174 (a) corresponds to FIG. 166 (a) and FIG. 174 (b) corresponds to FIG. 166 (b), and FIGS. 175 (a) to 175 (c) correspond to FIG. 174 (b). It corresponds to the cross section of (Fig. 166 (b)). Also, in FIG. 175 (a) to FIG. 175 (c), with FIG. 175 (b) as the normal (reference) position, in FIG. 175 (a), the liquid crystal device 543 is longer than the substrate member 545. In FIG. 175 (b), the liquid crystal device 543 is one end side of the liquid crystal display 523 with respect to the substrate member 545 in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 175 (c)). The state of displacement to the right) is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 174, when the conductive member 17546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the side surface on the side of the rectangular parallelepiped portion 17546a1 is in contact with the substrate member 545 and In a state in which a part of the side surface on the 17546a2 side is elastically deformed, the liquid crystal device 543 is in contact (see FIG. 174B).

  In FIGS. 174 and 175, the contact region of the liquid crystal device 532 which contacts the conductive member 17546 in the normal state (the state shown in FIG. 174 (b)) is illustrated as a first contact region 17543d1 and The contact area of the cloth member 546b in contact with the first contact area 17543d1 is illustrated as a first deformation area NR1.

  In the state where the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to the other end side (left side in FIG. 175A) of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the conductive member 17546 is different from the first contact region 17543d1. The contact region of the liquid crystal device 532 in contact with the liquid crystal device 532 is illustrated as a second contact region 17543d2, and the contact region of the cloth member 546b in contact with the second contact region 17543d2 is illustrated as a second deformation region NR2.

  Furthermore, in a state where the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced with respect to the substrate member 545 to one end side (right side in FIG. 175) of the liquid crystal display device 523, the conductive member 17546 and the first contact region 17543d1 are different from each other. The contact area of the liquid crystal device 532 in contact is illustrated as a third contact area 17543d3, and the contact area of the cloth member 546b in contact with the third contact area 17543d3 is illustrated as a third deformation area NR3.

  Also, in FIG. 175 (a) to FIG. 175 (c), an imaginary line KJ1 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line at the central position in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 545 in the first region 545a of the substrate member 545.

  As shown in FIG. 174, in the seventeenth embodiment, in a state where the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are disposed at the reference position, the first deformation area NR1 of the conductive member 17546 is deformed to 1 contact region 17543d1 is abutted. On the other hand, the conductive member 17546 on the rectangular portion 17546a1 side is disposed in a state of being in contact with the first region 545a of the substrate member 545 as in the thirteenth embodiment.

  Accordingly, since the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be connected by the conductive member 17546, the electricity charged in the liquid crystal device 543 can be released to the ground portion 545 d of the substrate member 545.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 175A to 175C, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, elasticity is produced centering on the constricted portion 546c. By elastically deforming the member 17546a, each contact area can be brought into contact with each deformation area. Accordingly, rubbing between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 17546 can be prevented. As a result, the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 17546 can be prevented from being rubbed and damaged.

  Explaining in detail, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the left direction with respect to the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a is elastically deformed so that the elastic member 546a is on the left side. It is biased. As a result, the left elastic member 546 a is pushed to the liquid crystal device 543 side and abuts on the liquid crystal device 543.

  Thus, in the seventeenth embodiment, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced to the other end side (left side in FIG. 175A) of the liquid crystal device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the second displacement region NR2 By bringing the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 into contact with each other, the liquid crystal device 543 can be maintained in contact with the substrate member 545 by bringing the liquid crystal device 543 into contact with the substrate.

  In other words, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced relative to the substrate member 545 to the other end side (left side in FIG. 175) of the liquid crystal device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the liquid crystal device By allowing the second displacement region NR2 corresponding to the second contact region 17543d2 of 543 to abut, rubbing of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 with the conductive member 17546 can be prevented. As a result, the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 17546 can be prevented from being rubbed and damaged.

  Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other, and the liquid crystal device 543 is opposite to the substrate member 545 in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal device 523 (left and right direction in FIG. 175). When displaced in the direction, the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 and the contact surface of the conductive member 17546 can be separated.

  Thus, static electricity can be prevented from being conducted from the liquid crystal device 543 to the conductive member 17546 at the same position. Here, since the static electricity is conducted at the location where the resistance is small, the static electricity is repeatedly conducted at the location where the resistance is small if the contact surfaces are at the same position. Therefore, there is a possibility that the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 may be partially degraded at a portion where static electricity is likely to be conducted.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 are separated by separating the contact surface of the liquid crystal device 543 from the contact surface of the conductive member 17546. The contact position of the 17546 can be changed. Therefore, reduction in the electrical resistance can be suppressed at the same position. Therefore, since the portion where static electricity is likely to be conducted can be changed, it is possible to suppress partial degradation of liquid crystal device 543 and conductive member 17546 at the portion where static electricity is likely to be conducted. As a result, the conductivity of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 can be maintained.

  The state in which the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the right direction with respect to the substrate member 545 shown in FIG. 175 (c) is opposite to the state in which the liquid crystal device 543 described above is displaced in the left direction with respect to the substrate member 545. Since the contact surface between the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 17546 is only changed to the third contact region 17543d3 and the third deformation region, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  An eighteenth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where a part of the conductive member 17546 is formed in an arc shape has been described, but in the eighteenth embodiment, the conductive member 18546 is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  FIG. 176 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 18546 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 176 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 18546 taken along line CLXXVIb-CLXXVIb in FIG. 176 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 176, the conductive member 18546 in the eighteenth embodiment is formed in a circular column shape in top view. That is, the elastic member 18546a is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the cloth member 546b is wound (wound) around the outer peripheral surface thereof. In this case, the diameter of the conductive member 18546 is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 163A) of the conductive member 546 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  Thus, in a state where the conductive member 18546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, the elastic member 546a disposed on the inner side of the conductive member 18546 is slightly opposed to the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. It is arranged in a compressed state. In other words, the conductive member 18546 is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 in a state of being elastically deformed into an elliptical shape in top view.

  The cloth member 546b is bonded to the outer peripheral surface of the elastic member 18546a. Further, the conductive member 18546 is disposed in the opening 544a of the interposing member 544 in a posture in which the opening direction of the cloth member 546b is directed to the short direction of the liquid crystal device 543, similarly to the conductive member 546 in the thirteenth embodiment. .

  When the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the conductive member 18546 is rotationally displaced about its center. Thus, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the substrate member 545, the contact state between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be maintained.

  That is, in the eighteenth embodiment, by rotating the conductive member 18546, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal device 543 or the substrate member 545 from being conducted at the same position as in the seventeenth embodiment. That is, by the rotation of the conductive member 18546b, the contact position with the liquid crystal device 543 and the contact position with the substrate member 545 can be changed to suppress partial deterioration of the contact surface. As a result, the conductivity of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the conductive member 18546 can be maintained.

  In addition, since the conductive member 18546 is rotationally displaced when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced (displaced) with respect to the substrate member 545, the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can be prevented from rubbing against the conductive member 18546. As a result, the liquid crystal device 543, the substrate member 545, and the conductive member 18546 can be prevented from being rubbed and damaged.

  A nineteenth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. In the thirteenth embodiment, although the case where the protrusions 545a1 of the first region 545a are arranged in a zigzag manner has been described, in the first region 19545a of the nineteenth embodiment, the protrusions 19545a1 are arranged at the outer edge of the first region 19545a. Ru.

  FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the substrate member 545 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 178 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 19546, and FIG. 178 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 19546 taken along line CLXXVIIIb-CLXXVIIIb of FIG. 178 (a). FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the conductive member 19546. FIG.

  Note that FIG. 179 (a) corresponds to FIG. 166 (a) and FIG. 179 (b) corresponds to FIG. 166 (b). Further, in FIG. 177 (a), the first area 19545a and the second area 19545b are illustrated by broken lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 177 to 179, in the first region 19545a of the substrate member 545 in the nineteenth embodiment, the projections 545a1 are disposed only in the through holes 545a2 located along the outer edge of the first region 19545a. In other words, the protrusion 545a1 is disposed along the outer edge of the first region 19545a.

  In addition, the conductive member 19546 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and an elastic member 19546a formed of an elastic material, and a cloth member 546b disposed on four surfaces excluding two opposing surfaces of the elastic member 19546a in one direction It is formed and provided.

  The elastic member 19546a is formed of a sponge-like member, and in a state in which the cloth member 546b is not provided, is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped. Further, the elastic member 19546a is formed to have a recessed portion 19546a3 which is formed by cutting out on four sides around the side surface on the side of the substrate member 545 (the lower side in FIG. 178A). In other words, the elastic member 19546a is provided with a non-recessed portion 19546a4 which is not formed in the center of the side surface on the substrate member 545 side.

  That is, the other side of the elastic member 19546a is a recessed portion 19546a3 (first region) facing the region where the protrusion 545a1 of the substrate member 545 is provided, and a region where the protrusion of the substrate member 545 is not formed. The non-recessed portion 19546a4 (second region) faces the non-recessed portion 19546a4 (second region), and the non-recessed portion 19546a4 (second region) is projected to one side (the substrate member 545 side) than the recessed portion 19546a3 (first region) Because the conductive member 546 is held between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, and the elastic member 546a is compressed, the surface pressure in the non-recessed portion 19546a4 (second region) can be increased. it can. As a result, since the non-recessed portion 19546a4 (second region) can hardly get over the protrusion 545a1, the cloth member 546b can be suppressed from sliding relative to the substrate member 545 by that amount. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the concave portion 19546a3 (first region) can be lowered, it is possible to suppress that the elastic member 546a is less likely to be sheared.

  The non-recessed portion 19546a4 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape is inscribed in each protrusion 545a1 arranged around the first region 19545a (a region formed by a tangent line in contact with the inner peripheral side of each protrusion 545a1) It is formed to be small, and in this embodiment, it is set to a size equal to that of the second region 19545b (that is, a size in which the outer edge is positioned between the protrusion 545a1 and the through hole 545a2). In addition, a recessed dimension L8 (see FIG. 178A) of the recessed portion 19546a3 along the opposing direction of the first portion 19546b3 and the second portion 19546b4 is a projecting dimension L9 of the protrusion 545a1 from the substrate member 545 (FIG. 177). It is set larger than (b) (see L8> L9).

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 179, when the conductive member 19546 is disposed in the liquid crystal display device 523, the cloth member 546b (second portion 19546b3) disposed in the non-recessed portion 19546a4 is in contact with the second region 19545b. It can be arranged in the The cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 are disposed in the concave portion 19546a3 by being compressed when the elastic member 546a is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545. The entire area of the cloth member 546b (the second portion 19546b3) can be in contact with the protrusions 545a1.

  In this case, as described above, since the recessed dimension L8 is set larger than the protruding dimension L9, the compression rate of the non-recessed portion 19546a4 can be made larger than that of the recessed portion 19546a3.

  Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the protrusions 545a1 are arranged in a staggered manner with respect to the first region 545a, the entire surface of the cloth member 546b (the second portion 546b3) is substantially uniformly supported by the plurality of protrusions 545a1. As a result, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 545a may be reduced. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing plane, there is a possibility that the contact surface of the cloth member 546b and the first region 545a may be misaligned.

  On the other hand, in the nineteenth embodiment, the compression ratio of the non-recessed portion 19546a4 is made larger than that of the recessed portion 19546a3, and the projections 545a1 surround the periphery of the non-recessed portion 19546a4. It is possible to prevent positional deviation unless the missing portion 19546a4 portion gets over the protrusion 545a1. That is, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 19545a can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing plane, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the contact surface of the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545.

  A twentieth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protrusions 545a1 of the first region 545a are arranged in a zigzag manner has been described. However, in the first region 20545a of the twentieth embodiment, the protrusions 545a1 are linear to the first region 20545a. Arranged side by side.

  FIG. 180 (a) is a front view of a substrate member 545 in the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 180 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate member 545 taken along line CLXXXb-CLXXXb of FIG. 180 (a). 181 (a) is a top view of the conductive member 20546, and FIG. 181 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the conductive member 20546 taken along line CLXXXIb-CLXXXIb of FIG. 181 (a). 182 (a) and 182 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the conductive member 20546, and FIG. 182 (c) is an enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the conductive member 20546 in the range CLXXXIIc of FIG. 182 (b).

  FIG. 182 (a) corresponds to FIG. 166 (a), and FIG. 182 (b) corresponds to FIG. 166 (b). Also, in FIG. 180 (a), the first region 20545a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 180 to 182, in the first region 20545a of the substrate member 545 in the twentieth embodiment, the protrusion 545a1 is substantially in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 180A) of the substrate member 545 in the first region 20545a. In the position, they are arranged in a straight line in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 180A) of the substrate member 545.

  In addition, the conductive member 20546 is formed in a cubic shape, and an elastic member 20546a formed of an elastic material, and a cloth member 546b disposed on four surfaces excluding two opposing surfaces in one direction of the elastic member 20546a. It is formed and provided.

  The elastic member 20546a is formed of a sponge-like member, and in a state in which the cloth member 546b is not disposed, is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped. In addition, the elastic member 20546a is substantially at the center of the side surface on the substrate member 545 side (the lower side in FIG. 181A) (the approximate center position in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 (the lateral direction in FIG. 181A)). And the concave portion 20546a3 which is cut out along the opening direction of the cloth member 546b (the left and right direction in FIG. 181 (b)). As a result, in the elastic member 20546a, non-recessed portions 20546a4 are formed in two places on the end surface (side surface) on the substrate member 545 side with the recessed portion 20546a3 interposed therebetween.

  In other words, the end surface of the elastic member 20546a on the second portion 546b4 side has a recessed portion 20546a3 (first region) facing the region where the protrusion 545a1 of the substrate member 545 is protruded, and the protrusion of the substrate member 545 A non-recessed portion 20546a4 (second region) facing the non-formed region is provided, and the non-recessed portion 20546a4 (second region) protrudes from the recessed portion 20546a3 (first region).

  Therefore, in the state where the conductive member 20546 is held between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 and the elastic member 546a is compressed, the surface pressure in the non-recessed portion 20546a4 (second region) can be increased. As a result, the cloth member 546b (second portion 20546b4) disposed in the non-recessed portion 20546a4 can be made difficult to get over the protrusion 545a1 by using the protrusion 545a1 received in the recessed portion 20546a3 (first region). Accordingly, the cloth member 546b can be prevented from sliding relative to the substrate member 545. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the recessed portion 20546a3 (first region) can be reduced, it is possible to suppress that the elastic member 546a is less likely to be sheared.

  The non-recessed portion 20546a4 has an outer shape substantially equal to that of the second region 20545b in which the projection 545a1 of the first region 20545a is not formed. The concave dimension L10 of the concave portion 20546a3 (the depth dimension in the direction along the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4, see FIG. 181 (a)) is a protrusion of the projection 545a1 from the substrate member 545 It is set larger than the dimension L9 (see FIG. 180 (b)) (L10> L9). In addition, the width dimension (the dimension in the direction along the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5, the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 181A) of the concave portion 20546a3 is the maximum diameter of the protrusion 545a1 (the dimension in the lateral direction In the present embodiment, the width dimension of the recessed portion 20546a3 is set to approximately twice the maximum diameter of the protrusion 545a1.

  As shown in FIG. 182, when the conductive member 20546 is disposed in the liquid crystal display device 523, the cloth member 546b disposed on the side surface of the non-recessed portion 20546a4 is disposed in contact with the inside of the second region 20545b. Be done. The cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545 are compressed when the elastic member 20546a is disposed between the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, so that the entire region of the cloth member 546b is the first region. It is in a state of being in contact with 20545a.

  In this case, as described above, since the recessed dimension L10 is set larger than the protruding dimension L9, the compression rate of the non-recessed portion 20546a4 can be made larger than that of the recessed portion 20546a3.

  In the twentieth embodiment, the compression rate of the non-recessed portion 20546a4 is made larger than that of the recessed portion 20546a3, and the projection 545a1 is disposed between the pair of non-recessed portions 20546a4, so the non-recessed portion 20546a4 The position can not be shifted unless the portion gets over the protrusion 545a1. That is, the resistance between the cloth member 546b and the first region 19545a can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the direction orthogonal to the facing plane, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the contact surface of the cloth member 546b and the substrate member 545.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced or combined with part or all of one or more other embodiments to constitute a gaming machine.

  In the above embodiments, the slide member 520, 2520, 4520 is slide-displaced by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A pair of rod-like members (one side member and the other side) Members are disposed, and the one side guided member 521 (rail side member 521a) and the other side guided member 522 are slid along the pair of rod-like members, whereby the slide members 520, 2520, 4520 are arranged. It may be slide-displaced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration in which the relative displacement between the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b in the one side guided member 521 is possible is described as being formed from the insertion pin 521b1 and the insertion hole 521a1. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring or the like) is interposed between the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b. With the elastic deformation of the elastic body, relative displacement may be possible.

  In each of the above embodiments, the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 has been described as being eccentrically located at least on the display surface 523a side from the axial center of the rotating shaft 523c. For example, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 may be coincident with the axial center of the rotation shaft 523c.

  In addition, the position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axial center of the rotation axis 523 c (longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display 523) may be located at the longitudinal center of the liquid crystal display 523. It may be located eccentrically on one side or the other side of the direction. In this case, it is preferable that the position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotation shaft 523c be eccentric to the side closer to the drive motor 531 of the rotation drive mechanism. This is because the deviation of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be used as in the case of the weight of the drive motor 531.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, 4520 are disposed so as to be slidably displaceable with respect to the cover member 420 via the slide rail 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A member (displacement member) of another displacement form may be disposed.

  For example, a pair of rotary bodies rotatably supported by the cover member 420 at the rotation axis in the same direction as the rotation direction of the base member 400 with respect to the rear case 300 may be provided. In this case, the pair of rotating bodies are disposed point-symmetrically with the rotation axis of the base member 400 with respect to the rear case 300 as a point of symmetry, and the rotational directions of the two are opposite. Thereby, it is possible to cancel the inertial force accompanying the start of the rotation of the pair of rotating bodies or the stop of the rotation, and it is possible to suppress the base member 400 and the cover member 420 from rotating with respect to the back case 300. That is, while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the rear case 300, only the rotation of the pair of rotating bodies can be facilitated.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the rotation drive mechanism (the drive motor 531, the pinion gear 532, the first gear 533, and the second gear 534) is disposed on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and such a rotational drive mechanism may be disposed on the other side guided member 521.

  In this case, in a state where base member 400 is arranged at the second rotational position, in the case where an inertial force accompanying the start of the slide displacement of liquid crystal display device 523 or the stop of the slide displacement acts, the liquid crystal display device 523 It is possible to suppress that the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement becomes too large due to the rotational inertia of. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) is slid in the horizontal direction while the liquid crystal display device 523 can be prevented from being slid and displaced by the inertia force. In this case, the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the output of the drive motor 431 required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, wear of the slide rail 510 due to slide displacement can be suppressed.

  In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the passage members 5600 to 8600 are formed as the passage of the game ball flowing down the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. As well. For example, it may be a spherical member used for rendering outside the game area.

  In the eighth embodiment, the slide unit SL as the displacement member is displaced while overlapping the back surface of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a with the range Rg, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A portion may be displaced to a position where it is inserted into the passage member 8600 from the opening 8564 of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a. In this case, the displacement region of the slide unit SL can be expanded to the maximum, and the rendering effect by the displacement can be further enhanced. That is, it is possible to displace the displacement member further to the front side, and by bringing the displacement member closer to the player, it is possible to give a powerful force.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the slide unit SL is displaced while overlapping the back surface of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a in the range Rg, the portion overlapping the back surface of the back outer peripheral wall 7652a of the slide unit SL in the range Rg can be independently displaced. As the variable structure, when interference with the game ball is predicted, the interference with the game ball may be suppressed by displacing only the portion of the variable structure. As a result, when interference with the gaming ball is predicted, it is not necessary to displace the entire slide unit SL, and it is possible to promptly take measures to suppress the interference with the gaming ball.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the elastic members 546a and 17546a are formed of polyurethane. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the elastic member 546a may be formed of a rubber molded product or a coil spring.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the elastic members 546a and 17546a are formed in a sponge shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a foamed rubber (cellular rubber) obtained by kneading a foaming agent into a rubber raw material and vulcanizing and forming it. In this case, the form of the bubble may be a closed cell or an open cell.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the elastic members 546a and 17546a are formed of a non-conductive material, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the elastic members 546a and 17546a may be formed of a conductive material. Good.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the cloth member 546b is wound around the elastic members 546a and 17546a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the cloth member 546b may be disposed on three quarters of the entire circumference of the elastic members 546a and 17546a from the side surface of the elastic members 546a and 17546a on the substrate member 545 side to the side surface on the liquid crystal device 543 side.

  In this case, the elastic members 546a and 17546a can be easily elastically deformed by opening one side surface. Therefore, when the liquid crystal device 543 is displaced relative to the substrate member 545, the contact positions of the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 are maintained. It can be easy. As a result, the conductive member 546 can be prevented from rubbing against the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545, and the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 and the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 can not be It is possible to suppress the contact surface from being displaced and the contact object from being worn out.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the cloth member 546b is adhered to the outer surfaces of the elastic members 546a and 17546a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the cloth member 546b may be unbonded to the outer surface of the elastic members 546a and 17546a.

  In this case, since the cloth member 546b can be made less susceptible to the tensile force from the elastic member 546a, the elastic member 546a can be easily deformed. As a result, positional deviation of the contact surfaces of the conductive member 16546, the liquid crystal device 543, and the substrate member 545 can be suppressed.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, although the case where the protrusion 545a1 is formed only on the substrate member 545 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the protrusion 545a1 may be used as the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546 of the liquid crystal device 543. , 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, and 20546 may be formed on the contact surface (back surface portion 543c). Thus, the contact surface between the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 can be hardly displaced.

  In this case, it is preferable that the projection 545a1 of the liquid crystal device 543 and the projection 545a1 of the substrate member 545 do not overlap in the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other. That is, it is preferable that the projection 545a1 on the liquid crystal device 543 side be positioned so as to overlap the through hole 545a2 of the substrate member 545 with the direction in which the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 face each other. Thereby, when the liquid crystal display device 543 and the substrate member 545 are displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, the elastic deformation force of the conductive member 546 in the opposing direction of the liquid crystal device 543 and the substrate member 545 is increased. it can. As a result, the contact surfaces of the liquid crystal device 543 and the conductive member 546 and the liquid crystal device 543 can be hardly displaced.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the case where the first regions 545a, 19545a, and 20545a of the substrate member 545 are formed on one end side with respect to the central position in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523 has been described. A control chip may be provided on one end side of the substrate member 545 for controlling the display of the liquid crystal device 543 or for controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the substrate member 545.

  According to this, since the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, and 20546 are disposed around the control chip, the static electricity accumulated in the liquid crystal device is prevented from conducting to the control chip. It is easy to do. As a result, the control chip attached to the substrate member 545 can be easily protected.

  In this case, the control chip is preferably disposed in the opening direction of the cloth member 546b. As described above, the conductive member 546 is configured to be easily deformed in the direction orthogonal to the opening direction of the cloth member 546b by elastically deforming the elastic member 546a. Therefore, for example, when the control chip is disposed in the opposing direction of the pair of third portions 546b5 of the conductive member 546, the cloth member 546b on the third portion 546b5 side when the conductive member 546 is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display 532. However, with the deformation of the elastic member 546a, there is a risk of deformation and approaching the control chip. Accordingly, the third portion 546b5 (the cloth member 546b) abuts on the control chip, and there is a possibility that the wiring for conducting the control chip may be shorted.

  On the other hand, by arranging the control chip in the opening direction of the cloth member 545, it is possible to suppress the cloth member 546b from approaching the control chip when the conductive member 546 is elastically deformed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress shorting of the wiring that conducts the control chip.

  In the thirteenth to twentieth embodiments, the covering member 545e is disposed on one surface of the ground portion 545d of the first region 545a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the covering member 545e may not be formed on one surface of the ground portion 545d, and the protrusion 545a1 may not be formed.

  In this case, since the contact area between the second portion 546b4 of the conductive members 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 18546, 19546, and 20546 and the ground portion 545d can be secured, the liquid crystal device 543 is charged. The electric charge can be easily removed via the ground portion 545 d of the substrate member 545.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the case where the rigidity is lowered by forming the notch portion in the cloth member 14546b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rigidity may be reduced by forming a part of the cloth member 14546b thin. In this case, conductivity can be secured.

  Although the case where one through hole 15546d is formed in the conductive member 15546 has been described in the fifteenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of through holes 15546d may be formed in the conductive member 15546. Thereby, the deformability of the conductive member 15546 can be enhanced. In this case, the plurality of through holes 15546d may be formed in different sizes.

  Although the case where one recessed portion 16546e is formed on one side surface of the conductive member 16546 is described in the sixteenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of recessed portions 16546e may be juxtaposed in the opposing direction of the first portion 546b3 and the second portion 546b4. Thereby, the deformability of the conductive member 16546 can be enhanced. In this case, the recess width and the recess distance of the plurality of recesses 16546e may be set to different dimensions.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice and three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<About the concept of the invention taking the slide member 520 in which the rail side member 521a of the one side guided member 521 and the liquid crystal side member 521b are connected so as to be capable of relative displacement as an example>
A game machine comprising: one side member; another side member disposed opposite to the one side member; and a slide member guided and slidably displaced by the one side member and the other side member. The slide member is provided between a guided member guided by the one side member, a guided member guided by the other side, and a guided portion and a guided portion. And a rotatable member rotatably supported on the one side member, wherein a state of allowance of relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is permitted of relative movement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being different from the state.

  Here, one side member, the other side member disposed opposite to the one side member, and the slide member guided and slid on the one side member and the other side member respectively are provided. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  The applicant of the present application has a sliding member guided by one side member, one side guided member guided by the other side member, and one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. An arrangement has been devised which is formed from a rotatable member rotatably supported therebetween (unknown at the time of filing of the present application). According to this configuration, variations in the rendering operation can be increased by the rotation member being able to rotate as well as slide displacement. Further, by the rotation of the rotation member, for example, not only the front side of the rotation member but also the back side can be visually recognized by the player.

  However, in such a configuration, when the rotation member is rotated, there is a problem in that the slide member is slidingly displaced with respect to the one side member and the other side member by the inertia force accompanying the start of the rotation or the stop of the rotation. . That is, it is difficult to rotate only the rotation member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the allowable state of the relative displacement of the one side guided member to the one side member is different from the allowable state of the relative displacement of the other side guided member to the other side member. When an inertia force accompanying the start of rotation or the stop of rotation is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be a force (a braking force) that presses the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, and the slide member is the one side member and the other side member It is possible to suppress the slide displacement with respect to That is, only the rotation member can be easily rotated while the slide member is stopped at the predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In addition, as a structure which forms relative displacement of the one side guidance member or the other side guidance member to one side member or the other side member, for example, a gap is formed between both, and relative displacement A mode in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the two, and a mode in which relative displacement is possible along with elastic deformation of the elastic body. Or the form etc. where these were combined are illustrated.

  Also, as a form in which the allowable state differs, for example, when the relative displacement allowance differs, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form unit relative displacement) differs, or these are combined. And the like.

  The gaming machine A1 includes rotational driving means for rotationally driving the rotational member, and the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. A game machine A2 characterized in that the rotation drive means is disposed on the one side guided member, which is more easily accepted.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily permitted than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side member. Since the rotational drive means is disposed on the one side guided member in such a form that relative displacement is easily permitted, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be In the case of a pressing force (braking force), the pressing force can be increased by using the rotational inertia of the rotary drive means. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotation member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In addition, as a form in which relative displacement is easily permitted, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form unit relative displacement is decreased, or when these are combined, etc. It is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A2, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the rotational driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, so On the other hand, when the one side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotational drive means can be displaced at a locus farther from the other side displaced member. Thereby, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (a braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means can be more easily utilized Can increase the pressing force. As a result, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotation member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, when the slide members are disposed in a pair facing each other along the direction of the slide displacement and are slide-displaced in the direction in which the two slide in proximity to each other, one of the slide members The side guided member is disposed opposite to the other guided member of the other slide member, and the other guided member of the one slide member is disposed opposite to the one guided member of the other slide member. A game machine A4 to feature.

  Here, a pair of slide members are disposed to face each other along the direction of slide displacement, and when slide displacement is performed in the direction in which they approach each other, the two are closely spaced at the center position without clearance. When it abuts, the load of the drive means (motor) for slidingly displacing these slide members becomes large, and damage to the drive means and the transmission mechanism (gear etc.) of the driving force is caused.

  On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allowance is given to the position at which both are stopped in anticipation of dimensional tolerance, assembly tolerance or control tolerance (set a sufficient gap between both at the center position) Then, the back side is visually recognized by the player from the gap, which causes the deterioration of the appearance (rendering effect).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of slide members are disposed facing each other in the alternate direction, so they are slide-displaced in the direction in which they approach each other When the slide members are in contact with each other in the position, the one side guided member of one and the other slide members is retracted to receive the other side guided member of the other (the other and one side) slide members. (A pair of slide members can be in a posture inclined with respect to the direction of slide displacement based on the difference in relative displacement allowance described above). That is, even if the pair of slide members abut on each other at the central position, damage to the drive means and the transmission mechanism of the drive force can be suppressed, so that the positions for stopping the both can be set closer to each other. As a result, at the center position, the pair of slide members can be made to approach each other in a state in which the gap between them is smaller, and the appearance (rendering effect) can be improved.

  In any one of game machines A2 to A4, a base member on which the one side member and the other side member are disposed, a sensor device disposed on the base member, and a detected member detected by the sensor device A game machine A5, comprising: the detected member is disposed on the other-side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member is more difficult than the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member. Since the to-be-detected member is provided, even when the posture of the slide member changes, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the to-be-detected member with respect to the base member (sensor device). As a result, the position of the slide member relative to the base member (one side member and the other side member) can be detected more accurately, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A4.

<About the concept of the invention in which the slide mechanism 2500 in which the one side guided members 521 are arranged opposite to each other is an example>
A game machine comprising a base, a base member rotatably supported by the base, and a displacement member disposed displaceably by the base member, the inertial force associated with the displacement of the displacement member A game machine B1 comprising: a restraining means for restraining rotation of the base member relative to the base.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a member formed displaceably (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  In this case, such a configuration (displacement member) is disposed on the base member, for example, and the structure in which the base member is rotatably supported by the base (not known at the time of filing of the present application) There is a problem that the base member is rotated relative to the base by the inertia force accompanying the stop of the wheel. That is, it is difficult to displace the displacement member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the suppression member is provided to suppress the rotation of the base member relative to the base by the inertia force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member, the rotation of the displacement member is started or stopped. It is possible to suppress the base member from being rotated relative to the base when the inertia force accompanying the force acts on the base member. That is, while the base member is stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide the sliding member.

  In addition, the aspect of a displacement is not specifically limited, A rotational displacement, a rocking displacement, a slide displacement, the displacement of the aspect which combined these, etc. are illustrated. The trajectory of the slide displacement may be any of a straight line, a curve, and a trajectory combining these. Also, the direction of displacement may be indeterminate. For example, the displacement member may be elastically supported by the base member via the elastic body, and the displacement member may be displaced by elastic deformation of the elastic body.

  In the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is slid and displaced while the one side member, the other side member disposed opposite to the one side member, and the one side and the other side are respectively guided by the one side member and the other side member. And a slide member, the slide member being guided by the one side member, the other guided member guided by the other side member, the one side guided portion, And a rotating member rotatably supported between the other side guided portions, wherein the allowable state of relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is the other side covering member with respect to the other side member. Unlike the allowable state of relative displacement of the guide members, the pair of slide members includes one guided member and the other guided member of one of the slide members, and one guided member and the other of the other slide member. Side guided member Gaming machine B2, characterized in that disposed in a posture respectively opposed.

  Here, one side member, the other side member disposed opposite to the one side member, and the slide member guided and slid on the one side member and the other side member respectively are provided. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  The applicant of the present application has a sliding member guided by one side member, one side guided member guided by the other side member, and one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. A rotational member rotatably supported between the two, and the allowable state of relative displacement of the one side guided member to the one side member is different from the allowable state of the relative displacement of the other side guided member to the other side member Configuration (not known at the time of filing the present application). According to this configuration, when the inertia force accompanying the start of the rotation of the rotation member or the stop of the rotation is applied to the slide member, the slide member has a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be a force (a braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, and as a result, the slide member is the one side member It is possible to suppress sliding displacement with respect to the other side member. That is, only the rotation member can be easily rotated while the slide member is stopped at the predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In this case, the applicant has devised a configuration in which the above-described one side member and the other side member are disposed on the base member and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (not known at the time of the present application application). According to this configuration, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation member can be changed according to the rotation position of the base member, so variations in the rendering operation can be increased accordingly .

  However, in such a configuration, when the slide members having the same configuration are disposed face to face, when the inertia force accompanying the start of the rotation of the rotation member or the stop of the rotation is applied to the slide member, one slide The displacement component orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement in the member and the displacement component orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement in the other slide member are in alternate directions (point-symmetrical orientation that gives rotational inertia to the base member) Therefore, there is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base. That is, it was difficult to rotate the rotating member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the pair of slide members includes one guided member and the other guided member of one slide member, and the other slide member. Since the one side guided member and the other side guided member are disposed in the postures facing each other, when the inertia force accompanying the start of the rotation of the rotation member or the stop of the rotation is applied to the slide member, The displacement component orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement in the slide member and the displacement component orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement on the other slide member can be made the same direction (axisymmetric orientation), and the base member is a base It can be suppressed to be rotated. That is, while the base member is stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating member or slide the sliding member.

  In addition, as a structure which forms relative displacement of the one side guidance member or the other side guidance member to one side member or the other side member, for example, a gap is formed between both, and relative displacement A mode in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the two, and a mode in which relative displacement is possible along with elastic deformation of the elastic body. Or the form etc. where these were combined are illustrated.

  Also, as a form in which the allowable state differs, for example, when the relative displacement allowance differs, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form unit relative displacement) differs, or these are combined. And the like.

  In the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily permitted than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side member. When the slide member displaces in the direction, the base member rotates with respect to the base such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned above the other side guided member in the substantially vertical direction. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that the position is set.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side. When sliding the slide member in the substantially horizontal direction, the base member relative to the base is configured such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned above the other side guided member in the substantially vertical direction. Since the rotational position is set, a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement (in the case of one side of the slide member) when an inertia force accompanying the start of the rotation of the rotation member or the stop of the rotation is applied to the slide member The displacement component causing the force (the braking force) to be pressed against the member or the other member can be set to the lower side in the vertical direction (gravity direction). Thereby, when rotating a rotation member, it can suppress that a slide member floats up and can stabilize the rotation.

  In addition, as a form in which relative displacement is easily permitted, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form unit relative displacement is decreased, or when these are combined, etc. It is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily permitted than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side member. When the slide member displaces in the direction, the base member relative to the base is configured such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned below the other side guided member in the substantially vertical direction. A game machine B4 characterized in that a rotational position is set.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily permitted than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other side. When sliding the slide member in the substantially horizontal direction, the base member relative to the base such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned below the other side guided member in the substantially vertical direction. The rotational position of the slide member is set, so that when an inertia force accompanying the start of the slide displacement of the slide member or the stop of the slide displacement is applied to the slide member, a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement (slide member The displacement component that applies a force (a braking force) to press one side member or the other side member can be made vertically upward (opposite to the direction of gravity). As a result, when sliding the slide member, the resistance due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. In addition, wear of the sliding portion due to slide displacement can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a form in which relative displacement is easily permitted, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is increased, when the force required to form unit relative displacement is decreased, or when these are combined, etc. It is illustrated.

  A game machine B5, comprising: a rotational drive means for rotationally driving the rotational member, the rotational drive means being disposed on the one side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3, the rotational drive means is disposed on the one side guided member in a manner in which relative displacement is easily permitted compared to the other side guided member. When the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of displacement is a force (a braking force) that presses the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, the pressing force is made large using the rotational inertia of the rotation drive means can do. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is easy to suppress the slide member from rising, and the rotation can be stabilized.

  A game machine B6 comprising: a rotational drive means for rotationally driving the rotational member, wherein the rotational drive means is disposed on the other side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be made vertically upward (opposite to the direction of gravity). Since the rotational drive means is disposed on the other side guided member in a form in which relative displacement is not allowed compared to the guide member, in the direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement due to the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means It is possible to suppress that the displacement component of V becomes too large. As a result, when rotating the rotating member, it is possible to suppress the sliding displacement of the sliding member, and when sliding the sliding member, it is possible to suppress the driving force required for the sliding displacement, and It is possible to suppress the wear of the sliding part due to the displacement.

  In the gaming machine B5, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the rotational driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member opposite to the other side guided member, so On the other hand, when the one side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotational drive means can be displaced at a locus farther from the other side displaced member. Thereby, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (a braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means can be more easily utilized Can increase the pressing force. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, it is easy to suppress the slide member from rising, and the rotation can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the other side guided member opposite to the other side member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the other side guided member opposite to the other side member, so one side member and the other side When the one side guided member and the other side guided member are relatively displaced with respect to the member, the rotational drive means can be positioned at a portion where the relative displacement amount is smaller. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement becomes too large due to the rotation inertia of the rotation driving means. As a result, when rotating the rotating member, it is possible to suppress the sliding displacement of the sliding member, and when sliding the sliding member, it is possible to suppress the driving force required for the sliding displacement, and It is possible to suppress the wear of the sliding part due to the displacement.

<Regarding the concept of the invention taking the slide member 4520 in which the position of the rotation shaft 4523c is eccentric as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a slide member slidably formed between a first position and a second position, the game machine is disposed opposite to the slide member disposed at the first position from the side opposite to the second position And an effect means for effecting between the opposing member and the slide member, wherein the slide member is rotatably formed by a rotation shaft located eccentrically along the direction of the slide displacement. A game machine C1 characterized by

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a slide member formed to be slideable between a first position and a second position (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  The applicant has an opposing member disposed opposite to the slide member disposed at the first position from the opposite side to the second position, and an effect means for effecting between the opposing member and the opposed slide member. A game machine has been devised (not known at the time of filing of the present application). However, in the configuration described above, if the distance between the facing of the slide member and the opposing member arranged at the first position is narrow, the effect by the effect means can not be sufficiently provided (for example, the movable member for effect) Space can not be secured, or an area for visualizing a member for presentation can not be secured). On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member projects to the second position side, whereby the slide member is positioned on the trajectory of slide displacement. This leads to a reduction in the visible region of the member (e.g., liquid crystal display device). When the opposing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member is increased, resulting in an increase in the size of the entire apparatus.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the slide member is rotatably formed by the rotary shaft positioned eccentrically along the direction of the slide displacement, and accordingly, depending on the rotational position, the slide member is opposed to the opposing member Interval can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to the rotational position where the opposing distance to the opposing member increases, the effect by the rendering means can be sufficiently provided, while the sliding member to the rotational position where the opposing distance to the opposing member decreases. By rotating, the amount of extension of the slide member to the second position side can be reduced, and a visible region of another member can be secured accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to shift the opposing member to the opposite side to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member can be reduced, and the overall size of the apparatus can be reduced.

  As the effect means, for example, a member formed displaceably is displaced using the space between the opposing member and the sliding member, the opposing member is the space between the opposing member and the sliding member. What is used to be displaced, that which makes the display or decoration on the back side visible from between the opposing members and slide members, that which irradiates light between the opposing members and the slide members, a combination of these is exemplified. Ru.

  In the game machine C1, a game machine C2 characterized in that the effect means includes an irradiation means for emitting light toward the space between the opposing member and the slide member.

  Here, for example, in a configuration in which the opposing member irradiates light toward the space between the sliding member and the sliding member, the effect of causing the player to visually recognize the light reflected by the sliding member from between the sliding member and the opposing member It can be carried out.

  In this case, in the configuration described above, when the gap between the slide member and the opposing member disposed at the first position is narrow, the light reflected by the slide member can not be sufficiently viewed by the player. On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member projects to the second position side, whereby the slide member is positioned on the trajectory of slide displacement. This leads to a reduction in the visible region of the member (e.g., liquid crystal display device). When the opposing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member is increased, resulting in an increase in the size of the entire apparatus.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the slide member is rotatably formed by the rotation shaft positioned eccentrically along the direction of slide displacement, so Accordingly, the distance between the facing member and the facing member can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to a rotational position where the distance between the slide member and the opposing member is increased, the light emitted from the irradiating means can be sufficiently viewed by the player while the slide member is opposed to the opposing member By rotating the slide member to a rotational position at which the distance is reduced, the amount of extension of the slide member to the second position side can be reduced, and a visible region of another member can be secured accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to shift the opposing member to the opposite side to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member can be reduced, and the overall size of the apparatus can be reduced.

  In addition, as an arrangement position of an irradiation means, the aspect arrange | positioned by the opposing member so that irradiation to a slide member is possible, the aspect arrange | positioned by a slide member so that irradiation to an opposing member is possible, between the opposing of a slide member and opposing member The aspect by which it is arrange | positioned by the back side between the opposings so that irradiation is possible, the aspect which combined these are illustrated.

  A gaming machine C3 comprising a base and a base member rotatably supported by the base, and the slide member disposed on the base member in the game machine C1 or C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the position of the center of gravity can be changed by rotating the slide member. That is, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted to a position suitable for the rotation of the base member relative to the base while maintaining the slide member in the first position or the second position. As a result, for example, the rotation of the base member can be stabilized. Alternatively, the driving force required for the rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C3, a pair of the slide members are disposed to face each other along the direction of the slide displacement.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine C3, the slide members are disposed such that the pair is facing each other along the direction of the slide displacement, that is, the pair of slide members may be symmetrically disposed. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be brought close to the center of rotation of the base member relative to the base. Thereby, even if the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the rotation of the slide member is small, the change in the position of the center of gravity can be made effective.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is rotation in a direction to lower the position of the center of gravity, the position of the center of gravity is set to the base by rotation of the slide member. A game machine C5 characterized in that it is kept away from the rotation center of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member relative to the base is rotation in a direction to lower the position of the center of gravity, the slide member rotates. Since the position of the center of gravity is moved away from the center of rotation of the base member relative to the base, the base member can be easily rotated relative to the base by the change in the position of the center of gravity. Thereby, the driving force required for the rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is rotation in a direction to raise the position of the center of gravity, the position of the center of gravity is rotated by the rotation of the slide member. A game machine C6 characterized by being brought close to the rotation center of the base member relative to the base.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member relative to the base is rotation in a direction to raise the position of the center of gravity, Since the position of the center of gravity approaches the center of rotation of the base member relative to the base by rotation, the base member can be easily rotated relative to the base by the change in the position of the center of gravity. Thereby, the driving force required for the rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the overhanging wall portion 5640 in which the opening portion 5641 is formed as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a passage member formed as a passage for surrounding a spherical object and passing the object, the passage member has an opening formed in the side surface thereof, and the object is a part of the object. The game machine D1 is formed so as to be able to pass in a state where it protrudes from the opening to the outside.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a passage member formed as a passage for surrounding a spherical object and passing the object (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192836). According to the passage member, for example, after the game ball passing through the game area is made to flow from one end side and is allowed to pass on the back side of the game area, the other end side can discharge the ball to the game area. However, when configured in this manner, there is a problem that the movable range of the effect member disposed displaceably on the back side of the game area is limited by the amount by which the passage member projects.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the passage member is provided with an opening formed in the side surface thereof, and the object is formed to be able to pass in a state where a part thereof protrudes from the opening to the outside Therefore, the protrusion of the passage member can be suppressed as compared with the case of the configuration in which the whole of the object is surrounded on the inner peripheral side. Therefore, the arrangement | positioning space of another member and the movable range of another member can be ensured that much.

  In addition, the cross-sectional shape of a channel | path member is arbitrary, for example, cross-sectional circular, cross-sectional elliptical, cross-sectional polygon, or the shape etc. which combined these, etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine D1, a game machine D2 characterized in that a pair of the openings are disposed opposite to each other in the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine D1, a pair of openings are disposed opposite to each other in the passage member, so narrowing an opposing distance between side surfaces where the pair of openings are formed. Therefore, the arrangement space of other members and the movable range of other members can be efficiently secured.

  In the game machine D1 or D2, an inclined surface is formed on the inner surface side of the periphery of the opening in the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the passage member is formed with an inclined surface on the inner surface side of the peripheral edge of the opening. Of the passage member by expanding the possible projection amount of the passage member from the opening to the outside, and suppressing the extension of the passage member while securing the thickness dimension of the passage member at the peripheral portion of the opening to improve the rigidity of the passage member be able to.

  In the gaming machine D3, the passage member is characterized in that the distance between the base ends of the inclined surfaces in the direction orthogonal to the passing direction of the object is set to a size smaller than at least the diameter of the object. A gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the passage member has a dimension in which the distance between the base ends of the inclined surfaces in the direction orthogonal to the passing direction of the object is at least smaller than the diameter of the object Since it is set to be, when making an object project the part outside from an opening, it can control that an object is received only with the tip (inner circumference side end) of a slope. That is, since the ball can receive the ball at the portion where the inclined surface is not formed, breakage of the passage member (periphery of the opening) can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a rectangular shape in cross section from wall portions of four surfaces, and the opening is formed in at least one of the wall portions of four surfaces. A game machine D5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a rectangular shape in cross section from the four walls, and at least one of the four walls Since the opening is formed, the section coefficient of the passage member can be secured, and the rigidity can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a circular cross-section having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and the circular segment is a segment connecting two points on the curve. The gaming machine D6 characterized in that the opening is formed by cutting.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a circular cross-section having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object Since the opening is formed by cutting the two points in a straight line, the extension of the passage member can be minimized. As a result, the arrangement space of the other member and the movable range of the other member can be efficiently secured.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D6, the passage member is curved or bent through the passage of the object, and the opening is a direction of centrifugal force acting on the object by bending or bending the passage. It is formed in the side of the said passage member which becomes opposite to, and the game machine D7 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a passage in which the formation position of the opening is opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the object by bending or bending of the passage path. Since the opening is formed on the side opposite to the side on which the object is pressed by the centrifugal force, wear or breakage of the periphery of the opening can be suppressed.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is provided with a displacement member formed displaceably, the displacement member being in a range including at least a displacement trajectory of a part of the object projected from the opening of the passage member. A game machine D8 characterized in that it is displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is provided with a displacement member formed displaceably, the displacement member is a displacement trajectory of a part of the object projected from the opening of the passage member The displacement region of the displacement member can be expanded by effectively utilizing the region in which the protrusion of the passage member is reduced because the displacement member is formed to be displaceable to at least a range. Thereby, the rendering effect by the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

  The displacement member may be formed so as to be displaceable from the opening of the passage member to a position where it is inserted into the passage member. In this case, the displacement region of the displacement member can be expanded to the maximum, and the rendering effect by the displacement of the displacement member can be further enhanced. For example, it is possible to displace the displacement member further forward, and by bringing the displacement member closer to the player, it is possible to exert a powerful force.

  The gaming machine D8 includes detection means for detecting the presence or absence of an object in a region where at least the opening of the passage member is formed, and the displacement member is provided when the object is detected by the detection means. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that displacement to at least a range including the displacement trajectory is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8, when the object is detected by the detecting means in the area where at least the opening of the passage member is formed, the displacement member has at least a displacement locus (a passage member It is restricted that the displacement member is displaced to a range including at least a displacement trajectory of a part of the object projected from the opening of the opening, so that interference of the displacement member with the object can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine D9, the detection means includes a first switch and a second switch which are respectively disposed upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member and detect passage of the object at their respective arrangement positions. A game machine D10 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D9, the detecting means is disposed upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member and detects passage of the object at each of the disposition positions. Since the first switch and the second switch are provided, it is possible to reliably detect the presence or absence of an object in a region where at least the opening of the passage member is formed. Therefore, interference of the displacement member with the object can be more reliably avoided.

<Feature E group> (effects with game balls that won an over prize)
Based on the ball entry means that can enter the game ball and the variable member that can be changed into one state that regulates the ball entry of the game ball to the ball entry means and the second state where the restriction is released and the specific condition When the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game that changes the variable member from the first state to the second state and the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game, the ball entering the ball entering means A variable for changing the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the counting means for counting the number of game balls played and the count value by the counting means becoming a predetermined upper limit value Determine the effect to be executed by the effect executing means and the effect executing means to execute the effect based on the game ball entering the ball entering means before being changed to the second state by the means and the variable means Performed The effect determination unit includes a determining unit, a is the gaming machine and wherein the when special conditions are satisfied, in which is configured to be able to determine the particular representation embodiment E1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that shifts to a hit state when a specific lottery result is obtained by a lottery performed based on starting ball entry. In such a gaming machine, the large opening provided on the board is set in the open state when the game machine is in the hit state. Since winning balls are awarded to the player by winning the gaming ball to the large opening, it becomes advantageous for the player by being in a hit state. The large opening is set to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter when the predetermined number of game balls are winning after being set in the open state. In addition, in such a conventional game machine, a special effect (over winning effect) is executed when the game balls of the specified number or more are detected in the open state of 1 with respect to the large opening. In some cases, the interest of the player is improved.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, even if the over-winning effect is executed, it merely causes the player to recognize that the player has obtained a slightly larger number of prize balls than usual, and the player's interest is sufficiently There was a case that could not be improved.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, it is possible to change the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the 1 state in which the ball entering means regulates the ball entering the game ball, and the second state in which the regulation is released. Bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state based on the establishment of the variable member and the specific condition, and the bonus game is performed by the bonus game executing means And the variable member is selected based on the count means for counting the number of gaming balls entering the ball entering means and the count value by the counting means becoming a predetermined upper limit value. A variable means for changing from the second state to the first state, and an effect for executing an effect based on the game ball entering the ball entering means until the variable state is changed to the second state Execution means and its effects Anda effect determination means for determining an effect to be performed by the row unit, the effect determination unit, when special conditions are satisfied, and is configured to be able to determine the special effect mode.

  As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, based on establishment of acquisition conditions, acquisition means for acquiring information and storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means are stored in the storage means based on establishment of the determination conditions The special condition includes the determination means for determining information and the specific condition satisfaction means for establishing the specific condition when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the special condition is stored in the storage means by the determination means. It is set as at least one condition that the information determined to be a specific determination result is stored as at least one condition.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on establishment of acquisition conditions, acquisition means for acquiring information, storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, and information stored in the storage means based on establishment of determination conditions The apparatus comprises: determining means for determining information; and specific condition fulfilling means for establishing the specific condition when the determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result, wherein the special condition is determined in the storage means. It is set as at least one condition that the information that is determined to be a specific determination result by means is stored.

  As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the information as the specific determination result is stored in the storage means by executing the special effect mode. Therefore, since it is possible to play the game in anticipation of the effect of the special effect mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game while the bonus game is being performed.

  In the gaming machine E2, the special condition is established at a predetermined probability when the information determined to be a specific determination result by the determination means is stored in the storage means. Machine E3.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2, the special condition has a predetermined probability when the storage means stores the information determined to be the specific determination result by the determination means. Since the special effect mode is not executed in the bonus game, there is a possibility that information which is a specific determination result is stored in the storage means. Therefore, even when the special effect mode is not executed, the player can be made to play the game in anticipation of storing the information as the specific determination result, so that the player can not play the game. It has the effect of being able to maintain motivation.

  A game machine E4 according to any one of the game machines E1 to E3, wherein the effect execution means executes an effect using the game ball after being counted by the counting means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means executes effects using the gaming balls after being counted by the counting means. The number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case of providing a configuration for executing effects separately from the gaming balls.

  In the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode includes an aspect of guiding the gaming ball after being counted by the counting means to a specific area configured to be visible to the player.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode is a mode in which the gaming ball after being counted by the counting means is guided to a specific area configured to be visible to the player. Can be played by paying attention to a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  A game machine E6 having voice output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means in any of the game machines E1 to E5.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the gaming machine E6 has voice output means for outputting a predetermined voice as one of the effects to be executed by the effect executing means. Can be realized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  A game machine E7 having display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means in any of the game machines E1 to E6.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the gaming machine E7 has display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means. Because there is, it is possible to realize visual rendition. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  An end effect executing means for executing an end effect indicating the end of the benefit game performed by the bonus game executing means in any one of the game machines E1 to E7 and an aspect of the end effect executed by the end effect executing means A game machine E8 characterized by having an end effect mode determining means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, an end effect execution means for executing an end effect indicating the end of the benefit game performed by the bonus game execution means, and an end effect mode for determining the end effect mode to be executed by the end effect execution means By having means, it is possible to easily make the player understand the end of the bonus game.

<Feature F group> (Form a special feature by reversing the sub liquid crystal)
A first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the effect executing means for executing the effect based on the discrimination information and the effect performed by the effect executing means, and the effect on the back side of the first display area The display mode is displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, and the first display means having the first specific notification portion for notifying the player of the specific notification mode as one of the Second display means having a second display area, and a second specific notification unit for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area, the first display area, and the second display area At least in the first state in which the player can visually recognize the player and in the second state in which the player can visually recognize the first specific notification unit and the second identification notification unit. 1 display means and the second display means Gaming machine F1 characterized by having a displacement means capable of displacing the.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine including a display device such as an LGH display, a movable movable member and the like in its configuration, and capable of executing various rendering operations by display effects and movable effects. Among the conventional game machines, there is one which adopts a technology for securing the visibility of display effect even when, for example, the movable member moves to the front side of the display device during execution of the display effect. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-134091).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, it has not been assumed that the direction of the display device itself is variable. For this reason, when the display device itself is operated variably, there has been a case where an appropriate rendering operation using the display rendering can not be realized. That is, there is a risk that it will be difficult to increase the degree of freedom of presentation.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, a first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the effect executing means for executing the effect based on the discrimination information and the effect to be executed by the effect executing means And a first display means having a first specific notification unit for notifying the player of a specific notification mode as one of the effects on the back side of the first display area, and the effect execution means A second display area having a second display area in which a display mode is displayed and a second specification notification unit for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area as one of the effects Means, a first state in which the player can make the player visually recognize the first display area and the second display area, and the player specifying the first specification notification unit and the second specification notification unit, respectively. In the second state that can be made visible Also has a displacement means capable of displacing said second display means and said first display means.

  Thereby, a plurality of effects in different modes can be realized using the first display means and the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the freedom of presentation can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the specific notification mode is formed by combining the notification modes respectively notified by the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit. Feature game machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the identification mode notified by the first identification notification portion and the second identification notification portion is combined. Since the notification mode of is formed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F2, the specific notification mode is configured by a specific symbol, and a part of the specific symbol is displayed on the first specific notification unit, and the second specific notification unit is displayed. Among the specific symbols, the remaining symbols not displayed in the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. A game machine F3 characterized in that the specific symbol is formed by combining them.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the specific notification mode is configured by a specific symbol, and a part of the specific symbol is displayed on the first specific notification unit, and the second specific notification unit is displayed on the first specific notification unit. Among the specific symbols, the remaining symbols not displayed in the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. The particular pattern is formed by combining them.

  As a result, the specific symbol can be dynamically displayed using the first specification notification unit and the second specification notification unit, so that the specific symbol can be displayed more clearly.

  One of the gaming machines F1 to F3 has a third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, and the effect execution means is in the third display area of the third display means In the first state, the first display area and the second display area are adjacently juxtaposed to the third display area or at least a part of them overlap in the first state. A game machine F4 characterized in that the game machine is disposed at a position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first display means and the second display means have third display means different from each other, and the effect executing means is predetermined as one of the effects in a third display area of the third display means. A display mode is displayed, and in the first state, the first display area and the second display area are arranged in a position adjacent to or in parallel with the third display area or at least partially overlapping with the third display area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a more flexible presentation.

  The bonus game executing means is provided with a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means in any of the game machines F1 to F4. A game machine F5 characterized in that the specific notification mode is easy to execute when the effect of (1) is executed.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exerted. That is, there is provided a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, and the effect executing means executes the specific effect. In addition, it is easy to execute the specific notification mode.

  Thereby, it is possible to play the game in anticipation of the specific notification mode being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  An effect determining means for determining an effect mode to be executed by the effect executing means on the basis of the determination means for performing the determination and the determination result of the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition in any of the game machines F1 to F5 And a game machine F6 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are exerted. That is, it has determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and effect determination means for determining an effect mode to be executed by the effect execution means based on the determination result of the determination means.

  As a result, various effects can be realized according to the determination result of the determination means.

<Feature G group> (Displayed by moving the main liquid crystal symbol while moving the sub liquid crystal)
First display means capable of displaying a symbol, second display means different from the first display means, and at least the second display means at a position where the display area of the second display means overlaps the display area of the first display means A predetermined symbol is displayed at the overlapping position on the display control means for performing display control of the first movable means capable of moving the first display means and the second display means, and the second display means In the state, when being moved on the display area of the first display means by the first movable means, the first after being moved with respect to the display area of the first display means exposed by being moved. And a display mode setting means for setting the display control means to a movable display mode capable of forming one pattern in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the display means. Gaming machine 1.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine including a plurality of display devices such as an LGH display. In such a conventional game machine, the degree of freedom of display effect is enhanced by using the main display device for displaying the main effects related to the game and the sub display device for displaying the auxiliary effects, thereby improving the player's interest (E.g., JP-A-2014-117576).

  However, such conventional game machines still have room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom of display effects.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, the first display means capable of displaying symbols, the second display means different from the first display means, and the display area of the second display means are the display areas of the first display means A first movable means capable of moving at least the second display means at a position overlapping with the second display means, a display control means for displaying and controlling the first display means and the second display means, and the second display means The display of the first display means exposed by being moved when the first movable means is moved over the display area of the first display means while the predetermined symbol is displayed at the overlapping position. A display mode setting in which the movable display mode capable of forming one pattern in combination with the predetermined pattern displayed on the first display means after being moved is set in the display control means with respect to the area Have a means .

  As a result, it is possible to realize the display effect with a higher degree of freedom by using the first display means and the second display means.

  In the gaming machine G1, a third display means different from the first display means and the second display means and a display area of the third display means overlap the first display area, and one end of each of the second display means and the second display means The second movable means capable of moving at least the third display means to the same position; and the display control means includes the second display means and the third display means. In the case of being moved to the same position, it is characterized by displaying a specific display mode in which one symbol is displayed across the display area with each other at the boundary based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition. Gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, and the display area of the third display means overlap the first display area, and one end of each of the second display means is the same. And second movable means capable of moving at least the third display means at a position to be a position, wherein the display control means is configured to have each of the second display means and the third display means In the case of being moved to the same position, a specific display mode is displayed in which one symbol is displayed across the display area with the one end bordering on the basis of the satisfaction of the predetermined condition.

  As a result, since one symbol can be displayed using the second display means and the third display means, it is possible to realize display with a higher degree of freedom.

  In the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting unit is configured to display the second display unit and the third display unit in a state in which the specific display mode is displayed by the second display unit and the third display unit by the display control unit. When at least one of the display means and the display means are moved in the direction away from each other, the specific display mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting means is displaying the specific display mode by the display control means by the second display means and the third display means In the state, in the case where at least one of the second display means and the third display means is moved in the direction of separating, since the specific movable display mode is set, the second display means and the second display means According to the arrangement of the three display means, there is an effect that it is possible to display appropriate display contents for each.

  In one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, in the specific movable display mode, the symbol of the 1 displayed as the specific display mode is the first display means, the second display means, the first display means, and the first display means A gaming machine G4 characterized in that it is set to be displayed by the third display means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, in the specific movable display mode, the symbol of the 1 displayed as the specific display mode is the first display means and the first display means Since the second display means, the first display means and the third display means are set to be displayed respectively, it is possible to use the first display means, the second display means and the third display means more freely. There is an effect that high display content can be realized.

<Feature H group> (Right-handed notification on a rotating display device)
An acquiring means for acquiring information based on the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball and the ball entering means, and an acquiring means for acquiring information, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquiring means Discrimination executing means for executing discrimination of the information stored in the storage means based on establishment of discrimination conditions, and display means for displaying identification information based on discrimination results by the discrimination means and display means thereof In the gaming machine having a variable ball entry means capable of entering the game ball when the identification information based on the discrimination result is displayed, the firing intensity of the game ball based on the operation of the player And a first flow path through which the game ball launched at a first launch intensity can be flowed down by the launch means capable of launching at a variable amount and different from the first launch intensity. Game launched at the second launch intensity Suggest that the game ball is to be launched into the second flow path after the flow down, and the second flow path in which the variable ball entry means is disposed and the identification information based on the specific determination result are displayed. A gaming machine H1 comprising: suggestion means for causing the indication means to indicate a suggestion mode.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine including a display device such as an LGH display, a movable movable member and the like in its configuration, and capable of executing various rendering operations by display effects and movable effects. Among such conventional game machines, there are machines that can display a suggestion display image that suggests a direction in which a game ball is hit on a display device. In this conventional game machine, for example, a technique for securing the visibility of the suggestion display image is adopted even when the movable member is moved to the front side of the display device, for example, while the suggestion display image is being displayed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-134091).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, it has not been assumed that the orientation of the display device is variable. For this reason, when the direction of the display device is changed, there is a possibility that the direction in which the game ball is hit can not be notified appropriately.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, an entering means capable of entering a game ball, an obtaining means for obtaining information based on the entering of the game ball in the entering means, and an obtaining means thereof And storage means for storing the information acquired in the storage means, and discrimination execution means for performing discrimination of the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of discrimination conditions, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means A display means for displaying identification information, and a variable ball entering means capable of entering a game ball when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means And firing means capable of varying the firing strength of the gaming ball based on the operation of the player, and the gaming ball fired at the first firing strength by the firing means flowing down Possible first flow path and said first firing strength A game ball launched with a second launch intensity different from that of the second, and after the second flow path in which the variable ball entry means is disposed and the identification information based on the specific determination result, And suggesting means for displaying on the display means a suggestion mode suggesting that the game ball should be fired to the second flow path.

  Thus, the game ball can be fired at the second firing intensity to the player who has confirmed the suggestion mode, so even a game beginner can easily insert the game ball into the variable ball entry means You can make it a ball. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine in which the gaming method is easier to understand can be realized.

  In the gaming machine H1, in the state where the display area of the display means is directed to the front side, the indication mode has pivot means capable of pivoting the display means based on the establishment of the pivot condition. A game machine H2 having at least a part of an annular shape and including a direction indication mode indicating the direction of the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, there is provided a pivoting means capable of pivoting the display means based on satisfaction of the pivoting condition in a state where the display area of the display means is facing the front side, and the indication mode is a ring The direction suggestion mode which has at least one part of a shape and shows the direction of the said 2nd channel is included.

  As a result, even if the display means is rotated, the direction indication mode having at least a part of the ring shape has the effect of being able to accurately indicate the direction of the second flow path.

  In the gaming machine H2, the direction indication mode is characterized in that the gaming ball is turned in the direction of flying to the second flow path and is dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the direction indication aspect is displayed dynamically as the gaming ball flies in the direction of flying to the second flow path. On the other hand, the direction in which the game ball is fired can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  A game machine H4 characterized in that character information indicating that the game ball is to be shot to the second flow path in the game machine H2 or H3 is displayed as a part of the direction suggestion mode.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H2 or H3, the character information indicating that the gaming ball is to be fired to the second flow path is displayed as a part of the direction suggestion mode, This has the effect of enabling the player who has visually recognized the mode to more clearly understand the direction in which the game ball is fired.

  The gaming machine H5 according to any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, wherein the direction indication mode is displayed by a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggestion mode is displayed with a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path, so the symbol for the player This has the effect of making it possible to intuitively understand the direction in which the game ball is fired from the impression of.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, there is provided a reversing means for reversing so that the back side of the display means is located on the player side, and a decoration part indicating the direction of the second flow path on the back side of the display means A game machine H6 characterized in that is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display means has reversing means for reversing so that the back side of the display means is located on the player side, and on the back side of the display means, a decorative portion indicating the direction of the second flow path is arranged. Even when the display means is reversed by the reversing means, it is possible to make the player correctly understand the direction in which the game ball is fired.

  In the gaming machine H6, the decorative portion has light emitting means disposed in order toward the second flow path, and the light emitting means is controlled to light in order toward the second flow path. A gaming machine H7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H6, the decorative portion has light emitting means arranged in order toward the direction of the second flow path, and the light emitting means includes the second flow Since lighting control is sequentially performed in the direction of the path, it is possible for the player to more easily understand the direction in which the game ball is fired.

<Feature I group> (Sub liquid crystal is used as main liquid crystal)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, display means for displaying discrimination information based on discrimination results by the discrimination means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the discrimination information on the display means When the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the effect executing means for causing the display means to display the effect mode accompanying the identification information is specified based on the determination result and the display means In the gaming machine provided with a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to a player when identification information is displayed based on the judgment result, in the gaming machine provided, the display means is a main display means, and its first display means The sub-table includes at least a first position parallel to the display area, and a sub-display capable of moving at least to a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display. Moving means capable of moving the means to the first position and the second position, and when the sub display means is moved to the first position, the identification information is displayed on the main display means Switching to the first state in which at least a part of the effect mode is displayed on the sub display means, the sub display means is moved to the second position, and the specific condition is satisfied. And a switching unit capable of switching and setting the second state in which the identification information is displayed on the sub display unit, and a game machine I1.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine including a plurality of display devices such as an LGH display. In such a conventional game machine, the degree of freedom of display effect is enhanced by using the main display device for displaying the main effects related to the game and the sub display device for displaying the auxiliary effects, thereby improving the player's interest I am trying to In addition, among such conventional game machines, there is one which can move the sub display device to the front side of the main display device and execute complex display effects between the main display device and the sub display device (for example, JP-A-2015-029606).

  However, such conventional game machines still have room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom of display effects.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine I1, on the basis of the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means for performing the determination, the display means on which the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is displayed, and the display means In the case where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information and the dynamic display means, the display means is displayed based on the determination result in a presentation mode associated with the identification information. It has an effect execution means to be executed, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when identification information is displayed based on the specific determination result on the display means, and the display The sub-display is movable at least to the main display means, a first position parallel to the display area of the main display means, and a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display means A movable means constituted by at least steps, capable of moving the sub display means to the first position and the second position, and the sub display means being moved to the first position Is switched to a first state in which the identification information is displayed on the main display means and at least a part of the effect mode is displayed on the sub display means, and the sub display means is movable to the second position And switching means capable of switching and setting the second state in which the identification information is displayed on the sub display means when the specific condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, since the first state and the second state can be appropriately switched according to the position of the sub display means, there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

  In the gaming machine I1, the sub display means comprises at least a first display means disposed at one end of the main display means and a second display means disposed at the other end of the main display means. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the first display means and the second display means are located at positions facing the main display means in one position.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the sub display means is at least constituted by a first display means disposed at one end side of the main display means and a second display means disposed at the other end side of the main display means. At the position, the first display means and the second display means are at positions facing the main display means therebetween.

  This has the effect of being able to further increase the degree of freedom of the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means at the first position.

  In the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means make one end side contact with each other to cover the display area of the main display means so as to make it difficult to visually recognize. A gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, in the second position, the first display means and the second display means bring one end into contact with each other, thereby displaying the main display means Since the area is covered so as to be difficult to visually recognize, a compact display using only the sub display means can be realized at the second position. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate display area can be set according to the display content.

  A game machine I4 characterized by having a rotation means for rotating the first display means and the second display means around the main display means in the game machine I2 or I3.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I2 or I3, since the pivoting means for pivoting the first display means and the second display means around the main display means is provided, There is an effect that it is possible to realize a more flexible display effect using the display means.

  In the gaming machine I4, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means, whereby the first display means and the second display means move in the vertical direction of the main display means. A game machine I5, characterized in that it is variably positioned between the upper and lower positions where it is located and the left and right positions where the first display means and the second display means are located in the left-right direction of the main display means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, the pivoting means pivots the first display means and the second display means in the vertical direction of the main display means. The first display means and the second display means are variably arranged at upper and lower positions, and the left and right positions at which the first display means and the second display means are located in the left and right direction of the main display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a more flexible display effect using the sub display means.

  In the gaming machine I5, when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the upper and lower positions to the second position and then moved to the upper and lower positions, the sub display means and the main display means The first fusion display mode displayed in a fused manner, and the sub when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left and right position to the second position and then moved to the left and right position A game machine I6 characterized by comprising fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting a second fusion display mode displayed by fusing the display means and the main display means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5, when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position and then moved to the vertical position And the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left and right positions to the second position. Since it has fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting the second fusion display mode to be displayed by fusing the sub display means and the main display means later when moving to the left and right positions, There is an effect that an appropriate display effect can be realized depending on whether there is any or the left and right position.

<Feature J group> (display mode of the sub liquid crystal to be inverted is displayed by a mirror)
A discriminator performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions and a display means on which a presentation mode is displayed based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means and a presentation mode based on the specific discrimination result displayed on the display means In the gaming machine, there is provided a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the display means comprises at least a first display means and a second display means, and the first display means and the first display means The rotating means capable of rotating the display means to the front position where the display area faces the front side and the second position where the display area faces the back side are rotated to the back position. And the second display means is displayed when the first display means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side and the second display means are rotated to the back position. Said performance Gaming machine J1, wherein those having a second projection means for projecting a manner on the front side.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine including a projection device such as a mirror in its configuration. In such a conventional game machine, when a predetermined entertainment effect is selected, the projection device can be made visible, and by causing the projection device to project the player's face or the like, an impact entertainment effect can be realized. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2005-329159).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since the projection device is merely set in a state in which it can be viewed by the player, objects to be projected onto the projection device are limited. Therefore, there have been cases in which the player's interest can not be sufficiently improved using the projection device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the determination means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the effect mode based on the determination result by the determination means, and the display means And an awarding means for awarding an advantage to the player when the effect mode based on the judgment result is displayed. The display means includes a first display means and a second display means. And rotating means capable of rotating the first display means and the second display means respectively to a front position where the display area faces the front side and a second position where the display area faces the back side First projection means for projecting the effect aspect displayed on the first display means to the front side when the first display means is rotated to the back position; and the second display means for the back position The place that was turned to To have a second projection means for projecting on the front side of the representation embodiment to be displayed on the second display means.

  As a result, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, the player can be made to visually recognize the effect modes respectively displayed. That is, since it is possible to realize a novel rendering operation in which the first display unit and the second display unit can be rotated while the effect mode is visible, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game effective.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first projection means and the second projection means have mirror surface portions capable of projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. A game machine J2 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the first projection means and the second projection means project the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. Because it has a mirror surface that can be played back, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, the player can clearly see through the mirror surface the effect mode displayed on each of them. Has the effect of

  The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means to a V-shaped position on the front side of the gaming machine as the back surface position. Gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J2, the first display means and the second display means are V-shaped on the front side of the gaming machine as the back surface position. Since it is rotated to the position, the appearance on the front surface position can be largely different from the front surface position by being the back surface position. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of the game machines J1 to J3, the first projection means and the second projection means are each configured to rotate the first display means and the second display means when the first display means and the second display means are respectively rotated to the back position. A game machine J4 characterized by having a projection surface capable of facing the display area of the display means or the display area of the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first display means and the second projection means are the first display means and the second display means, respectively. Since the display area of the first display means or the projection plane which can face the display area of the second display means when rotated to the rear position, the display area of the first display means, and the second display Since the effect mode displayed in the display area of the means can be directly projected, there is an effect that the first projection means and the second projection means can be made compact.

  It is disposed at a position facing the first display area of the first display means rotated to the back position in the gaming machine J1, and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the first projection means It is disposed at a position facing the second display area of the first display unit rotated to the first diffraction unit and the back surface position, and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the second display unit to the second projection unit. And second diffracting means for causing the game machine J5 to function.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first diffraction means disposed at a position facing the display area of the first display means rotated to the back surface position and diffracting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the first projection means And second diffraction means disposed at a position facing the second display area of the display means rotated to the back surface position, and diffracting the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the second projection means And.

  Thereby, the arrangement of the first projection means and the second projection means can be freely determined within the range that can be diffracted by the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means, respectively. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the first projection means and the second projection means can be enhanced.

  A game machine J6 characterized in that the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means in the game machine J5 are half mirrors.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J5, since the first diffraction means and the second diffraction means are configured by half mirrors, the display area of the first display means, and the second Whether or not to diffract the effect mode displayed on the display area of the display means can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the freedom of presentation can be enhanced.

  When at least one of the first display means and the second display means is rotated to the back position in the gaming machine J5 or J6, respectively, the first A game machine J7 comprising: movable means for moving to a position facing the display means or the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5 or J6, at least one of the first display means and the second display means is the first display means and the second display means, respectively. Since it has the movable means moved to the position facing the first display means or the second display means when it is rotated to the back surface position, the effect aspect displayed on the first display means and the second display means Can be diffracted more accurately.

<Feature K group> (over prize using closing command)
The main control means for executing the control of the game and the slave control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, the open state where the game ball can enter and the entry of the game ball are restricted The main control means has a variable ball entry means that can be changed to the restricted state, and the main control means performs the discrimination based on the discrimination condition and the effect based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Based on the effect information determining means for determining the effect information and the determination result by the determining means being a specific determination result, the variable ball entering means is varied from the restricted state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The ball entering signal is output based on the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game, the formation signal output means for outputting the formation signal based on the formation of the predetermined condition, and the game ball entering the variable ball entering means Do The slave control means is provided with the benefit information determining means for providing the player with an advantageous benefit based on the game ball entering the ball signal output means and the variable ball entering means. Based on the determined effect information, an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode, and an effect executing means for executing the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means, and a predetermined condition after receiving the establishment signal. A game machine K1 comprising: specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect when the ball entry signal is received in a period until it is established.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that shifts to a hit state when a specific lottery result is obtained by a lottery performed based on starting ball entry. In such a gaming machine, the large opening provided on the board is set in the open state when the game machine is in the hit state. Since winning balls are awarded to the player by winning the gaming ball to the large opening, it becomes advantageous for the player by being in a hit state. The large opening is set to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter when the predetermined number of game balls are winning after being set in the open state. In addition, in such a conventional game machine, a special effect (over winning effect) is executed when the game balls of the specified number or more are detected in the open state of 1 with respect to the large opening. In some cases, the interest of the player is improved (for example, JP-A-2015-112239).

  In such conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to count the number of gaming balls that have won in the large opening in order to determine whether or not to execute the over winning effect, but depending on the type of gaming machine, the large opening It was common for the number of ball entry before closing the mouth to be different. Therefore, since it is necessary to re-set the condition of whether or not to execute the over winning effect depending on the model, there is a case that the program adopted for one model can not be diverted to another game machine as it is. The That is, there is a problem that the workload of the developer is increased.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine K1, the main control means for executing control of the game, the slave control means for executing control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the opening where the game ball can enter A variable ball entry means that is variable between a state and a restricted state in which the ball entry of the game ball is restricted, and the main control means performs a discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination means Based on the effect information determination means for determining the effect information for executing the effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the variable entering means based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that varies from a restricted state to the open state until the predetermined condition is satisfied, a formation signal output means for outputting a formation signal based on the formation of the predetermined condition, and the variable entering means Game ball Based on entering a ball, entering ball signal output means for outputting an entering signal, and benefit granting means for giving an advantage advantageous to a player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means And the slave control means is a production mode determination means for determining a production mode based on the production information determined by the production information determination means, and the production determined by the production mode determination means It has an effect execution means for executing an aspect, and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect when the ball entry signal is received in a period until a predetermined condition is satisfied after receiving the establishment signal.

  Thus, the slave control means can determine whether to execute the specific effect depending on whether or not the establishment signal is simply received from the main control means. Therefore, the slave control means directly determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. There is no need to determine. Therefore, since it is possible to easily divert the control program set in the secondary control means, it is possible to reduce the workload of the developer.

  The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the predetermined condition in the gaming machine K1 is satisfied when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means or a predetermined predetermined period elapses. .

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means or a predetermined predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, after the predetermined number of gaming balls have entered the variable ball entry means for the player by performing the specific effect, or after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable ball entry is further performed. It can be recognized that the game ball has entered the means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to please the player who has confirmed the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, when the slave control unit receives the formation signal output by the formation signal output unit based on the passage of a predetermined period, which is predetermined as the predetermined condition, the specific effect A game machine K3 characterized in that it comprises an avoidance means for avoiding being executed.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the slave control means is output by the establishment signal output means based on the passage of a predetermined period which is predetermined as the predetermined condition. Since the avoidance means is provided for avoiding the execution of the specific effect when the formation signal is received, the number of game balls exceeding the predetermined number is determined for the player by the execution of the specific effect. Can inform that it has entered the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further delight the player who has confirmed the specific effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the main control unit acquires the information determined by the determination unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the determination condition holds the information acquired by the acquisition unit. Prior determination means for determining the information stored in the storage means before storage conditions for storing at least the storage means and the determination condition are satisfied, and an a priori signal indicating prior information based on a result of prior determination by the preliminary determination means Prior signal output means for outputting the secondary control means to the secondary control means, and the secondary control means has prior information storage means for storing the prior information indicated by the prior signal; A gaming machine K4 indicating the contents of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the main control means stores at least an acquisition means for acquiring the information determined by the determination means based on establishment of the acquisition condition, and stores the information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination condition is established. A storage means, a prior discrimination means for discriminating the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination condition is established, and a preliminary signal indicating preliminary information based on a preliminary discrimination result by the preliminary discrimination means; A preliminary signal output unit for outputting to the control unit, the secondary control unit includes a preliminary information storage unit for storing the preliminary information indicated by the preliminary signal, and the specific effect mode is It shows the content of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.

  Thereby, in order to confirm the contents of the prior information, the game ball is positively entered to the player while executing the bonus game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means after the establishment of the predetermined condition. It can be launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Liquid Crystal Display Device 523 as an Example>
A game machine comprising: an electric device; a substrate having a ground portion disposed opposite to the one surface of the electric device and grounded; and connecting means for electrically connecting the electric device to the ground portion of the substrate. In the above, the connection means is sandwiched between the one surface of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, and the electric device or the substrate is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposite direction. A gaming machine L1 characterized in that it is formed so as to be shear-deformable with displacement.

  Here, an electric device, a substrate having a ground portion disposed opposite to the one surface of the electric device and connected to ground, and a connection means for electrically connecting the electric device to the ground portion of the substrate A gaming machine is known (for example, JP-A-2007-236463). Specifically, the electric device is formed as a liquid crystal display device in which a shield member made of a metal plate is provided on the back surface of the liquid crystal panel. Also, the connection means is formed as an arched leaf spring, and the base end is in contact (electrically connected) with the ground portion of the substrate and the arched convex surface is in contact (electrically connected) with the shield member. Ru. The connection means is fixed to the substrate at the base end, and the convex convex surface is pressed against the shield member, and the contact is kept by the elastic deformation of the leaf spring. Thus, static electricity generated in the shield member can be released to the ground through the ground portion of the substrate. Therefore, for example, even if the shield member is charged by static electricity generated by rolling of the game ball or displacement of the liquid crystal display device, the charge is removed through the ground portion of the substrate, color unevenness of the liquid crystal display, dot missing, etc. Occurrence of problems of

  However, in the above-described conventional technology, the shield is caused by the displacement of the electric device or the vibration of the electric device due to the displacement of another effect member or the input of an external force accompanying the rolling or collision of the game ball. When the member and the substrate are displaced relative to each other in the direction orthogonal to the opposite direction, the arcuate convex surface of the connection means is slid relative to the shield member, causing wear of the connection means or the contact object of the connection means. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the connection means is sandwiched between the one surface of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, and the relative displacement of the electric device or the substrate is perpendicular to the opposite direction. In this case, since it is formed so as to be capable of shear deformation in accordance with the relative displacement, it is possible to maintain the state in which one side and the other side of the connection means are in contact with one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate. . That is, by shear deformation of the connection means, one side or the other side of the connection means can be prevented from sliding relative to the electric device or the substrate. As a result, it is possible to suppress wear of the connection means or the contact object (electrical device or substrate) of the connection means.

  In addition, since the connection means is sandwiched between the one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, it is sufficient to hold the connection means between the electric device and the substrate at the time of assembly. Can be unnecessary. As a result, the workability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine L1, the connection means is an elastic member having one side facing the one side of the electric device and the other side facing the ground portion of the substrate and made of an elastic material, one side of the elastic member and A game machine L2 comprising: a conductive member which is provided on the other side and which is at least covered and is in contact with the one surface of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate and is made of a conductive material.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, an elastic member having one side facing the one side of the electric device and the other side facing the ground portion of the substrate and made of an elastic material Since at least one cover is provided on one side and the other side and a conductive member is in contact with the one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate and is formed of a conductive material, the electric device or the substrate is orthogonal to the opposite direction In the case of relative displacement in the direction of movement, the elastic member is sheared in accordance with the relative displacement, so that the conductive member is in contact with one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate. It can be maintained. That is, by the shear deformation of the elastic member, the sliding of the conductive member held between the one side and the other side of the elastic member and the electric device or the substrate can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wear of the connection means (conductive member) or the contact target (electrical device or substrate) of the connection means.

  In the gaming machine L2, in the connection means, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape, the elastic member is internally fitted to the conductive member, and the outer peripheral surface of the conductive member is one surface side of the electric device and the substrate A gaming machine L3 characterized in that the gaming machine L3 is in contact with the ground portion of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, since the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape and the elastic member is internally fitted to the conductive member, the assembly of the connection means is simplified. Component cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the outer peripheral surface of the conductive member is in contact with one surface of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate, the contact area can be secured. Therefore, when the electrical device is charged, the charge can be easily removed via the ground portion of the substrate.

  In the gaming machine L3, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting one end and the other end of a strip, and a connection portion connecting the one end and the other end of the strip is one surface side of the electric device or the substrate A gaming machine L4 characterized in that the gaming machine L4 is disposed at a position not to be in contact with the ground portion of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3, the conductive member is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting one end and the other end of the belt shape, and a connection portion connecting the one end and the other end of the belt is Since it is disposed at one side of the electric device or at a position not to be in contact with the ground portion of the substrate, the connection portion becomes a step, and the contact state with one surface of the electric device or the ground portion of the substrate is not It can suppress becoming stable. That is, the contact area can be secured, and accordingly, the conductive member can be prevented from sliding relative to the electric device or the substrate, and the electric charge can be easily removed.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the conductive member includes a first portion that is in contact with one side of the electric device, a second portion that is in contact with the ground portion of the substrate, and the first and second portions. A pair of third portions connecting the portions, wherein the width dimension of the third portion is at least partially set to be smaller than the width dimension of the first portion and the second portion With gaming machine L5.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3 or L4, the conductive member includes a first portion that is in contact with one side of the electric device and a second portion that is in contact with the ground portion of the substrate. A pair of third portions connecting the first portion and the second portion, wherein the width dimension of the third portion is at least partially smaller than the width dimension of the first portion and the second portion Since it is set, the conductive member can be easily deformed in the endless belt-like opening direction by using the third portion. Therefore, when the electric device or the substrate is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposite direction and in the direction of the endless belt-like opening of the conductive member, the first portion and the second portion of the conductive member It is possible to suppress sliding on the one surface side and the ground portion of the substrate.

  In the gaming machine L5, the pair of third portions are disposed at different positions in the endless belt-like opening direction.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine L5, the pair of third portions are disposed at different positions in the endless belt-like opening direction, so deformation of the conductive member in the endless belt-like opening direction Can be enhanced.

  A game machine L7 according to any one of game machines L2 to L6, wherein the conductive member is formed of a conductive cloth or a conductive non-woven fabric.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines L2 to L6, since the conductive member is formed of the conductive cloth or the conductive non-woven fabric, its flexibility can be secured. Therefore, when the elastic member is sheared in accordance with relative displacement of the electric device or the substrate in the direction orthogonal to the opposing direction, the conductive member can easily follow the shear deformation of the elastic member. As a result, the conductive member can be prevented from sliding relative to the one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate.

  In addition, since the conductive member is formed of the conductive cloth or the conductive non-woven fabric, its flexibility can be secured, so that the durability can be improved when the conductive member is repeatedly deformed according to the relative displacement of the electric device or the substrate. Can be

  In addition, as the conductive cloth or the conductive non-woven fabric, for example, a yarn in which a yarn in which one or both of copper and nickel are coated on the outer surface of polyester fiber is woven or unwoven to form a cloth (sheet) is illustrated. Be done. Examples of the weave include plain weave, twill weave and the like.

  In the gaming machine L7, one or a plurality of protrusions are provided in a protruding manner on one surface side of the electric device or on a ground portion of the substrate.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L7, one or more protrusions are provided on the one surface side of the electric device or the ground portion of the substrate so that the conductive member conforms to the shape of the protrusions Therefore, the conductive member can be prevented from sliding relative to the one side of the electric device and the ground portion of the substrate.

  In the gaming machine L8, the projection is formed of solder soldered to a ground portion of the substrate.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L8, since the projections are formed by the solder soldered to the ground portion of the substrate, the projections are formed in the step of soldering the electronic component to the substrate Can. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a process for forming the protrusion, and the process can be used in common, so the number of processes can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, the projections are formed by the solder soldered to the ground portion, so that the contact area between the conductive member and the ground portion can be secured, and when the electric device is charged, the ground portion of the substrate is interposed. Charge can be removed easily.

  In the gaming machine L9, the substrate includes a plurality of through holes, and a plurality of the projections are provided, and the through holes and the projections are disposed in a zigzag shape.

  According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L9, the substrate has a plurality of through holes, and a plurality of projections are provided, and the through holes and the projections are disposed in a staggered manner. The plurality of projections can be used to prevent the conductive member from sliding relative to the substrate, and the electric device can easily remove the charged charge, and the through holes can be used to form the projections and the conductive member. The heat generated between can be dissipated efficiently.

  In the gaming machine L9, the other side of the elastic member is a first area facing the area where the projection of the substrate protrudes and a second area facing the area where the projection of the substrate is not formed A game machine L11 characterized in that the second area is projected more than the first area.

  According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L9, the other side of the elastic member does not form the first area facing the area where the projection of the substrate is provided and the projection of the substrate In the state where the connection means is held between the electric device and the substrate and the elastic member is compressed, since the second area is provided with the second area facing the area, and the second area is protruded more than the first area. The surface pressure in the second region can be increased. As a result, since the conductive member held between the second region and the substrate can hardly get over the projection, it is possible to suppress the conductive member from sliding relative to the substrate. On the other hand, since the surface pressure in the first region can be lowered, it is possible to suppress that the elastic member is less likely to be sheared and deformed.

  In any one of the gaming machines L2 to L11, the gaming machine includes a plate-like interposed member interposed between one surface of the electric device and the substrate and having an opening formed therein, A game machine L12 characterized in that the size of the opening is smaller than the size of the connection means in a no-load state.

  According to the gaming machine L12, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines L2 to L11, a plate-like interposed member interposed between one surface of the electric device and the substrate and having an opening formed. And the size of the opening of the interposed member is smaller than the size of the connecting means in the unloaded state, so that the opening of the interposed member can hold the connecting means. Therefore, the assembly work can be performed while holding the connection means in the interposed member, and the connection means can be positioned along with the disposition of the interposed member. It can improve.

  In the gaming machine L12, in a state in which the elastic member is formed of a compressible elastic member and the connection means is held between the electric device and the substrate, the connection is made with the inner edge of the opening of the interposed member. A gaming machine L13 characterized in that a gap is formed between the outer surface of the means.

  Here, in the configuration in which the size of the opening of the interposed member is smaller than the size of the connecting means in the non-loaded state, and the connecting means is held by the opening of the interposed member, the shear deformation of the elastic member is hindered. Therefore, when the electric device or the substrate is relatively displaced in the direction orthogonal to the opposite direction, the conductive member may slide relative to the electric device or the substrate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L12, the elastic member is formed of a compressible elastic member, and in the state where the connection means is held between the electric device and the substrate, Since a gap is formed between the inner edge of the opening of the forming member and the outer surface of the connecting means, it is possible to suppress the connection means (elastic member) from being restrained by the inner edge of the opening. That is, at the time of assembly work, the connecting member is held by the interposed member (opening) to improve the workability of the assembly work, and the assembled state (the state in which the connection device is held between the electric device and the substrate) In the above, the elastic deformation of the elastic member can be facilitated, and the conductive member can be prevented from sliding relative to the electric device or the substrate.

  As the compressible elastic material, a porous elastic body is preferable. For example, a synthetic sponge formed by foaming a synthetic resin such as polyurethane, a foamed rubber obtained by kneading and foaming a foaming agent into a rubber material (cellular rubber Etc. are illustrated. In this case, the form of the bubble may be a closed cell or an open cell.

  In the gaming machine L13, a gaming machine L14 characterized in that the outer surface of the elastic member held by the opening of the interposed member is recessed inward.

  According to the gaming machine L14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L13, the outer surface of the elastic member on the side held by the opening of the interposed member is recessed inward, so that the electric device and the substrate When the connection means is held between, it is easy to deform the outer surface of the elastic member away from the inner edge of the opening of the interposed member (inward of the elastic member) starting from the inward recessed portion it can. As a result, a gap can be reliably formed between the inner edge of the opening of the interposed member and the outer surface of the connecting means.

  In the gaming machine L14, the connecting member is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting one end and the other end of the belt-shaped conductive member, and the elastic member is internally fitted to the conductive member. A game machine L15 characterized in that a connecting portion connected to the other end is disposed on the outer surface side which is recessed toward the inside of the elastic member.

  According to the gaming machine L15, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L14, the connecting member is formed in an endless belt shape by connecting one end and the other end of the belt shape, and the elastic member is inserted in the conductive member. Since the connection part which is fitted and which connects one end and the other end of the strip is disposed on the outer surface side which is recessed toward the inside of the elastic member, it is formed by the recess facing toward the inside In the space, it is possible to accommodate a connection portion in which one end and the other end of the strip are connected. Therefore, the connection part which connected the strip | belt-shaped one end and the other end can be made hard to be contact | abutted by the inner edge of the opening part of an interposed member. As a result, the deformability of the connection means can be secured.

  Game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J6, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15 In any one of the above, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J6, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15 In any one of the above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

Game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E8, F1 to F6, G1 to G4, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J6, K1 to K4 and L1 to L15 In any one of the above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a displacement member formed displaceably are known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602). When the displacement member is disposed on the base member and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (not known at the time of filing of the present application), the base member rotates relative to the base when the displacement member is displaced. There was a problem of being The present technical concept is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and provides a gaming machine capable of suppressing the base member from being rotated relative to the base when the displacement member is displaced. The purpose is to
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 comprises a base, a base member rotatably supported on the base, and a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member. It has, and it has a control means which controls that the above-mentioned base member rotates to the above-mentioned pedestal by the inertia force accompanying displacement of the above-mentioned displacement member.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the displacement member includes one side member, the other side member disposed opposite to the one side member, the one side member and the other The slide member includes a slide member which is guided and slid on the one side and the other side of the side member, and the slide member is guided to the one side guided member guided to the one side member and the other side member And a rotating member rotatably supported between the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion, and the relative position of the one side guided member to the one side member The allowable state of displacement is different from the allowable state of relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, and the pair of slide members are one-side guided member and the other-side guided member of one of the slide members. And the other slide And one side guided member and the other side the guide member is disposed in a posture to be opposed to each other.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the game machine according to technical idea 2, wherein a relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is a relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. When the slide member is displaced in a substantially horizontal direction, the posture in which the one side guided member is positioned above the other side guided member in the substantially vertical direction is the slide member. The rotational position of the base member relative to the base is set such that
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to suppress that the base member is rotated relative to the base when the displacement member is displaced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to suppress the base member from being rotated relative to the base when the rotating member is rotated. .
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the rotation can be stabilized in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 64 first prize mouth (entering means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
100-104 substrate box 300 back case (base)
400 base member 510 slide rail (one side guiding means , other side guiding means )
520, 2520, 3520, 4520 Slide members (one-side slide means, other-side slide means)
521, 4521 One side guided member (first guided means, fourth guided means)
522, 4522 other side guided member (second guided means, third guided means)
523, 4523 Liquid Crystal Display Device ( One-Side Rotation Means, Other-Side Rotation Means )
523c rotating shaft 525 opposing member 531 driving motor (rotational driving means)
543 Liquid Crystal Device (Electric Equipment)
544 Intervention member 544a Opening (opening)
545 Substrate member (substrate)
545a1 Protrusions 545a2 Through holes
545 d Ground portions 546, 14556, 15546, 16546, 17546, 18546, 19546, 20546 Conductive members (connection means)
546a elastic member 19546a1, 20546a1 concave portion (second region)
19546a2, 20546a2 non-recessed portion (first region)
546b, 17546a Cloth member (conductive member)
546b3 first part 546b4 second part 546b5 third parts 5600, 6600, 7600, 8600 passage members 564 1, 641, 7544, 8554 openings 5640, 6640 overhang wall portion (passage member)
SL slide unit (displacement member)
8655 1st switch (detection means)
8656 Second switch (detection means)

Claims (3)

A gaming machine comprising a base, a base member rotatably supported by the base, and a displacement member disposed displaceably by the base member,
A gaming machine comprising: a restraining means for restraining rotation of the base member relative to the base by an inertial force accompanying displacement of the displacement member. The displacement member includes one side member, the other side member disposed opposite to the one side member, and a slide member in which the one side member and the other side member are respectively guided by one side and the other side to be slide displaced. While preparing
Between the one side guided member guided by the one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, and the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. And a rotating member rotatably supported.
The permissible state of relative displacement of the one side guided member to the one side member differs from the permissible state of the relative displacement of the other side guided member to the other side member,
In the pair of slide members, one guided member and the other guided member of one of the slide members and one guided member and the other guided member of the other slide member are opposed to each other. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is disposed in a posture. The relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is more easily permitted than the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member,
When the slide member is slid in a substantially horizontal direction, the base is formed such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned above the other side guided member in the substantially vertical direction. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the rotational position of the base member with respect to is set.

Images